Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

Knowledge. A most fickle thing indeed. One moment, you think you have everything figured out – feel that you know all there is to know. And the next, you make a discovery that shatters any and all preconceived notions you may have held, rendering all that you thought you knew worthless and leaving you more baffled than ever before. Ironic, is it not?

Yet, in spite of it all, humanity finds itself on a never-ending quest for knowledge. There is no stone they will not turn, no veil they won’t tear away in pursuit of this goal. And no institution better represents this restless drive than Byrgenwerth, the largest – and only – institution for higher learning in the independent microstate of Yharnam. Scholars from all over the continent were drawn to it, in no small part due to rumors of it being the source of countless…peculiar discoveries, discoveries that supposedly turned all earthly knowledge on its head. 

“Is everything alright, Laurence?” One of these ever-inquisitive scholars was suddenly roused from a state of absent-mindedness, managing to make out this question over the rattling of the stagecoach he found himself in.

“Of course, Master Willem. Only…it’s rather cold out here.” He replied, drawing a smile from the figure sitting opposite him – Byrgenwerth’s current, longstanding headmaster.

“As to be expected. We were warned well in advance to prepare for such a thing.” He rightfully pointed out. This was exactly why Laurence had been advised to wear several layers over his formal uniform. The insulation within their stagecoach helped to relieve them somewhat, but it could not entirely stop the cold winter air from seeping in.

“Is that all that’s troubling you?” His master then inquired.

“Yes, sir.” Laurence promptly replied.

“Really? You’re not at all concerned with what’s to come?” He was very clearly unconvinced, but even so, Laurence wasn’t quite sure what he should say in response. Though from the looks of things, his silence was enough of an answer for him.

“As I thought. I would tell you not to be anxious, but it is only natural that you are.” Master Willem pointed out, no doubt in a bid to offer his idea of reassurance.

“If only it weren’t so.” Laurence replied with a small smile.

“Indeed, but remember, you are representing Byrgenwerth tonight for a reason.” He reminded him.

“Well, of course. It’s because you chose me to.” Said Laurence.

“Precisely, Laurence.” For what it was worth, this did make him feel somewhat more assured in his position. Master Willem could’ve chosen from any number of other candidates, but the fact he was here at all showed that he had faith in him and believed him to be the best possible representative for Byrgenwerth’s scholarly body. 

“But still, do keep in mind that in order for this expedition to occur, we need to remain in our benefactor’s good graces. You are to be on your best behaviour and speak only when spoken to; in all other cases, leave the talking to me. Understood?” Laurence nodded his understanding.

“Yes, Master Willem.” He said.

“Good. But with all that said, please, do not look at this merely as a responsibility. Mingle, feast, enjoy yourself. After all, this is a once in a lifetime opportunity.” All too true, Laurence thought. It’s not everyday that you get to be part of a royal visit.

It wasn’t long until their stagecoach gradually came to a stop, with Laurence being able to faintly hear a conversation just outside, no doubt between their driver and a guard of some sort. As this was happening, Master Willem gave him a look that simply told him to get ready. Soon enough, the conversation ended and Laurence could hear footsteps just outside their stagecoach, followed by a knock.

“Our apologies, Provost Willem, but the incline is far too icy for the horses. You will have to make the rest of the way on foot.” He heard a male voice say. 

“Oh, that’s quite alright. Please, let us not keep Her Majesty waiting.” He replied.

“Very well.” The door to their stagecoach was opened, revealing a man wearing a decorative and regal uniform; a mostly black overcoat over a red vest, with various strands of goldwork adorning it. “Please, come with me.” The man invited, holding out his gloved hand for the headmaster.

Laurence watched as Master Willem was led out of the stagecoach and once it seemed he had safely exited, he started making his own way out, making sure to keep a good hold on the handle provided to ensure he didn’t slip. Snow blew into his face as he stepped outside into the cold night, leading him to take a moment to shield his face before he brought himself onto the road, freshly fallen snow crunching beneath his feet. 

And it was then Laurence managed to get his first good look at their destination: a large and frankly intimidating castle, one that he had before only been able to glance at from a large distance. Castle Cainhurst, home to the family of nobles that have ruled over this land for centuries.

“Well, we made it.” Laurence was almost scared out of his skin when he heard a voice coming from behind him, turning to find an all too familiar face. “Why so skittish, my friend.” He said, clearly amused by his predicament.

“I don’t know, Micolash. Have you ever gone on a nearly hour-long carriage ride before?” He asked his fellow scholar.

“Not until today, but I cannot say it has dampened my spirits.” As Micolash spoke, another female figure approached behind him.

“Neither can I, but I do believe there’s a reason for our differing moods.” She pointed out, which almost instantly made Micolash’s smile disappear.

“I’m well aware, Caryll.” He replied to her. “Then why make the distinction?” Laurence asked him.

“Am I not allowed to express concern?” Micolash replied, which only amused him even more. 

“Oh, is that what this is?” He made sure to convey his doubt in his tone. “Of course. You have much that is expected of you tonight.” Said Micolash.

“Don’t I indeed?” He knew that Micolash had been vying for the role Laurence would be playing tonight and that he was understandably upset when it turned out he hadn't received it. At the same time, he also knew that he wasn’t going to call Master Willem’s decision into question. He never did.

Yet despite their often-noted tendency to compete among themselves, Laurence recognized Micolash as a brilliant mind in his own right and saw their competitive streak as a means of pushing themselves to be the best they can be. Caryll on the other hand had little interest in competition and achieving whatever accolade was on offer that day, simply choosing to focus on her own studies. Despite that, she stuck around with them because they somehow always seemed to find themselves in the same spaces and because she supposedly found their “antics” amusing; no doubt her way of saying she enjoyed their company. Odd though they may be, they were among the closest bonds that Laurence had forged in his time at Byrgenwerth.

“Laurence, to me!! The rest of you, stay with your assigned partner and follow us in an orderly fashion! We will be out of this cold soon enough!” They heard Master Willem call out behind them, signifying that the time had come to enter the castle. 

“I have to go. See you inside.” He told the two of them.

“We’re right behind you. Good luck, Laurence.” Caryll said to him. After giving them a quick nod, Laurence turned to make his way to his master’s side, who was waiting for him alongside the guard from earlier, looking out at the bridge behind him. From there, one could see countless other Byrgenwerth scholars making their way to form the line, a procession of stagecoaches just to their side.

“Is that all of your scholars accounted for?” The guard asked Master Willem, who looked over the chaotic scene. “It would appear so.” He replied.

“Very good. Follow me and watch your step.” The guard instructed as he turned towards the staircase that led up to the main gate, leaving Laurence and the others to follow.

As expected, the stairs were rather slippery due to the accumulation of ice, which led to Laurence having to be extra careful during his ascent. The last thing he needed was to fall and have to spend the rest of the night tending to a sprained ankle, or worse. As the party got closer to the top, the gate started to rise, which allowed them to pass through into what looked like a courtyard, with the rest of the castle looming overhead.

“You’ll have to forgive the limited reception. Her Majesty would’ve preferred to meet you here, but as you understand, we had to adjust our plans.” By complications, he no doubt meant the winter storm that they were trekking through as he spoke.

“No need for apologies, good knight. I understand.” Laurence couldn’t help but raise a brow at his Master’s reply. Was their escort meant to be a knight? If so, he hadn’t expected them to dress so lightly.

Regardless, the knight would have them walk for a few more minutes until they reached yet another gate, which much like the previous one opened for them as they approached. Inside, they found a vast room which contained sizeable gathering of well-dressed nobles as well as more knights, who started applauding almost the moment Master Willem stepped inside, leaving their headmaster to put up his hand and wave to their onlookers as Laurence walked silently just beside him. 

Suddenly, the applause died down and Master Willem came to a stop in the center of the hall, leading Laurence and his fellows to do the same. Every head turned towards the other end of the hall, just before all those gathered bowed down. Unsure of what to do, Laurence looked ahead to his master to find he was still standing completely straight and in the process, spotted someone descending down the staircase.

“Welcome to Castle Cainhurst, Provost Willem. We are pleased to see thou have arrived safely.” The woman spoke in an antiqued tongue, yet every word conveyed authority.

“And it is an honor to be here, Your Majesty.” This time, the headmaster bowed, prompting Laurence to do the same. He held this bow until he noticed Willem straighten himself out, no doubt because of a prompt from their host.

“We must commend you all for braving this ghastly weather. Had we known it would get like this, we would’ve postponed this occasion to a later date.” The Queen said.

“Oh, I could not ask you to do such a thing. After all, a matter such as this cannot simply be delayed.” Master Willem replied. 

“Dedicated as ever, we see. Wonderful.” She then turned her gaze directly behind Master Willem. “And how wonderful to see so many of your scholars here with you.” 

“Not just any scholars, Your Majesty. These are the finest minds that Yharnam has to offer.” Master Willem added on.

“Oh, we have no doubt.” It was then that the Queen turned her attention to him. “Ah, and this must be the dignitary thou spoke off.”

“You are correct, Your Majesty.” And there was the signal. Laurence stepped forward and bowed his head to the Queen, his hands behind his back. “It is an honor, Queen Annalise.” He said before he stood up straight once more, just as they had practiced.

“Correspondingly.” She offered him her hand; the back of it was facing to the side instead of straight up, which told him she meant to initiate a handshake. “What is thy name, noble scholar?” She prompted as he accepted her offered hand, being sure not to grasp it too firmly.

“Laurence, your Grace.” He responded as calmly as he could, letting go of the Queen’s hand when he felt her loosen her grip and returned it back behind his back. All throughout this, he maintained eye contact, which helped him notice the somewhat critical look she was giving him.

“Ah, yes. Professor Laurence, if we’re not mistaken. The headmaster has spoken most highly of thee.” At first, Laurence found himself too stunned to reply. He knew that Master Willem must've informed her of who he was before tonight, but had he really been singing his praises? A question for another time.

“Well, it is a privilege to have this opportunity.” He replied.

“It most certainly is. No one has ventured into the old tombs for a very long time, much less been the one to lead such an exhibition. We look forward to seeing the result of thy leadership.” In response to her words, Laurence simply nodded. “Thank you, Your Majesty.” 

With that, Queen Annalise turned her attention back to Master Willem, allowing Laurence to relax somewhat. That initial introduction was always going to be the most difficult and perhaps most important part of tonight; he had been extensively briefed on the proper procedure one must follow when meeting Yharnam’s royalty, something that he in particular had to get exactly right, seeing as he was essentially the chief representative for Byrgenwerth’s scholars and as Her Majesty had said, the leader of a historic exhibition. And clearly, that preparation had paid off, at least so far. Now that it was over, he wouldn’t need to interact with the Queen unless she requested it, unlikely as that might be.

Laurence remained only partly aware of the conversation unfolding beside him as he decided to take the chance to get a better look at his surroundings. Glancing around the room, he silently observed the various people gathered there, in particular two figures standing guard on either side of the staircase. They wore what looked like traditional silver knightly armor, only significantly less bulky; he could only assume they were of a higher rank to the knight that had escorted him and Master Willem here. 

As he continued his observations, Laurence noticed movement out of the corner of his eye, causing him to turn his gaze to the upper levels of the hall. 

And what he saw caused his eyes to widen.

Looking over the railing was a lone woman, wearing a red and gold colored dress. From his distance, he couldn’t quite make out the details of her face, but what was most obvious was the pale complexion of her skin, somewhat similar to that of the Queen. Yet almost as soon as he had taken notice of her did she seemingly take notice of him. 

Rather unexpectedly, Laurence felt a chill run up his spine, yet could not bring himself to look away. She had started moving, running a hand along the railing as walked in the direction of the staircase, all the while appearing to be looking right at him. A myriad of questions ran through Laurence’s head. Who was she? Could she tell he was looking at her? Was she even there?

“Is something the matter, Professor?” The Queen’s voice snapped him back to attention, finding that both her and Master Willem were looking at him.

“No, Your Majesty.” He promptly replied, trying his best to sound composed.

“Art thou certain?” “Of course. It is simply the chill; I am not quite accustomed to it.” Laurence said as an excuse and although she didn’t appear entirely convinced, she didn’t seem prepared to pursue the matter further.

“Do forgive him, Your Majesty. He has not yet attended an event of this magnitude.” Master Willem said, which thankfully drew her attention away from him.

“Understandable. Everyone has to start somewhere.” She looked back at him as she said this. “Now, where were we?” She asked Master Willem, all while Laurence tried his best to prevent his eyes from wandering again.

“I do believe there was someone you intended for us to meet.” The headmaster reminded her.

“Ah, yes. But alas, they have not yet arrived.” Just as the Queen said this, Laurence noticed that woman from before descending the steps, still looking in his direction.

“I believe they have now.” Him saying this managed to get the attention of both Master Willem and the Queen, both of whom were no doubt wondering why he had spoken out of turn. Yet instead of saying anything, they simply followed his gaze to the stairwell and to the mysterious women. As she reached the bottom, the two knights standing guard on either side turned in her direction, before placing their blades to their chest and bowing as she walked past. The woman proceeded to approach Queen Annalise herself, stopping a few steps in front of her and dutifully bowing to her.

“Apologies for my late arrival, Your Majesty.” Laurence heard her say.

“None needed. In fact, thou have arrived just in time.” The Queen said to the new arrival before turning back to them. 

“Provost Willem, we proudly present to you Lady Maria of the Cainhurst Knights, your scholars’ watchful aegis.” The woman – who he now understood to be Maria – stepped forward and extended her hand to Master Willem.

“A pleasure to meet you at last. I’ve been told much about you.” She said to him.

“Likewise, my lady. Her Majesty had much to say on your behalf.” His master responded.

“And we can assure you that none of it was an exaggeration. Lady Maria is one of the finest knights Cainhurst has to offer. You have my word that no harm will come to thy scholars so long as they are under her protection.” Laurence was only partly aware of what the Queen was saying, as part-way through her statement, Maria’s eyes once again fell on him. The look she was given him appeared rather curious, but also calculating, akin to a hunter evaluating their prey. 

“And who might this be?” She soon enquired, still looking directly at him. Whatever words Laurence could’ve said were caught in his throat, but thankfully, Master Willem decided to speak instead.

“That would be Laurence, my lady. He is to be to our scholars what you will be to your company.” Once Willem had finished his explanation, Laurence silently nodded to confirm that everything he had said was true. Soon after, he noticed the corners of Maria’s lips curve into a small smile.

“I see. Then I presume we will be working closely together.” She said, leaving him to think of some sort of response.

“It would appear so.” Was what he eventually said. With that, she stepped towards him and offered him her hand.

“In that case, it is a pleasure to make your acquaintance, Laurence.” For a few moments, he could only stand there, but eventually, he managed to regain his bearings and proceeded to shake her hand.

“Likewise, Lady Maria.” He politely replied. 

As their handshake concluded, Laurence continued to look at her, or more rather up at her. As it turns out, she was a lot taller up close - nearly half a head taller than him in fact and he wasn’t someone who could be considered short. Adding this to the manner in which she had been inspecting him a moment before, as well as her almost ghostly complexion, Laurence would’ve been dishonest if he said he wasn’t somewhat intimidated. Of course, her commanding presence wasn’t the only thing that stirred this feeling within him.

She was gorgeous. There was no other way to put it. A fair and slender figure, seemingly flawless skin and as he had come to see, penetrating, beautiful green eyes. And from the looks of things, she was completely aware of the effect she was having on him - and no doubt many others – for her posture and demeanor conveyed a great deal of assurance in herself.

“Well, now that the necessary introductions are out of the way, is the banquet hall prepared?” Queen Annalise asked Lady Maria.

“Yes, my Queen.” She confirmed.

“Excellent.” The Queen then took a step back, turning her gaze to the hall at large.

“Attention! In short order, we will be making our way up to the banquet hall. Nobles, please allow our honored guests to pass first; they have travelled far and braved the elements to be here tonight, and we do not intend to keep them waiting any longer than we have to. Once they have all made their way onto the stairwell, then you may follow, in an orderly fashion, of course. Once you are there, our guardians, the knights, will show you to your seats. Now then, scholars of Byrgenwerth, follow me.” 

It wasn’t a long walk for them to make it to the banquet hall, needing only to make their way up the nearby staircase and through a nearby doorway to make it inside. Numerous portraits hung from the walls, no doubt representing outstanding nobles and knights from years past. Countless marble statues were displayed at numerous points of the banquet hall, each one portraying a different figure or pose. And to top it all off, music also filled the hall, with a group of musicians sporting violins, flutes and even a harp being located at the end of the hall. And in the center of it all were a set of long, pre furnished tables and as promised, Laurence and everyone else were guided to their seats as a wide array of chefs and servants bustled around the room, filling cups and providing them with various hors d'oeuvres. 

Once he was seated, he found all that could be expected from an event like this: dishware, cutlery, napkins and cups for drinking, which had already been filled before their arrival. Yet it was clear that what he saw before him couldn’t simply be found at your average dining table. The plates were adorned with rich patterns and were almost no doubt crafted from porcelain; the forks, spoons and knives were finely crafted works of silver; even the napkins appeared to have been made from high-quality linen. And of course, all of them were spotlessly clean. Hardly a surprise, he supposed. They were nobility after all and judging from the extravagant dress and flagrant displays of high art he had seen thus far, they were keen to impress those who visited them, a keenness that frankly bordered on being conceited.

Soon enough, the seats had been fully filled, with the arrangement being one table on the left of the room for Laurence’s fellow scholars and another for the nobility opposite them. But of course, Laurence wouldn’t be sitting with his fellows. No, he was sitting beside Master Willem at the central table, which they would be sharing with the Queen and the newly met Lady Maria, who sat by her side at the other end. 

At first, the hall was alive with chatter, which promptly died down once Queen Annalise tapped her glass with a piece of cutlery, with all present turning their attention to her as she stood up from her chair (naturally bigger than everyone else’s) while holding her glass.

“Ladies. Gentleman. While we wait for the main courses to arrive, I would like to once again extend a warm welcome to our visitors, the noble scholars of Byrgenwerth. As you all know, Byrgenwerth, and the minds it has produced, have been an essential part of making Yharnam into the city it is today. As a center of learning, it boasts a student body numbering in the thousands and as a center of research, its contributions to the fields of history, astronomy and theology are known and respected across the continent. And this prestigious reputation is due in no small part to its esteemed headmaster, and our long-time friend, Provost Willem.” Laurence’s master nodded his acknowledgement of her praise and the ensuing applause, which gave him the opening to stand up and proceed with his part of the address.

“On behalf of all of Byrgenwerth’s scholars, I thank you all for your warm welcome. As I’m sure all of you are eagerly awaiting the feast that Her Majesty has graciously arranged for us, I will keep this address brief.” Laurence smiled to himself. Limiting himself to such a short speech must’ve been hard for Master Willem; he knew from experience that he could speak for hours if he really set his mind to it.

“At its core, Byrgenwerth is a place of discovery – of unraveling the numerous mysteries of the world around us. And the ancient civilization of Pthumeru is perhaps Yharnam’s most enduring mystery. Even after countless ventures into the vast underground labyrinths that they left behind – the funds for which were graciously provided by the noble Cainhurst family - we still know precious little about their culture, their society and the people that once called them home. I myself have had the privilege of partaking in several of these aforementioned ventures in the past, some of which I found myself at the forefront of, leading my scholars into the depths below in search of anything that might get us closer to the truth. But alas, I find myself no longer able to serve such a role, much less be an active participant in it. Which is why I am proud to announce that the scholars of Byrgenwerth will be led by one of her most distinguished scholars and educators, Laurence.” 

Just like that, noble and scholar alike started to clap for him, though he noticed that the applause was far more enthusiastic on his side of the table. Every one of the scholars seated by his side was a familiar face in one way or another: classmates, friends and even the odd one that he taught himself. Once the applause had died down, Master Willem continued.

“Ever since he first arrived at Byrgenwerth fifteen years ago, Laurence quickly proved himself to be an outstanding student and an equally capable leader, never shying away from a difficult task or putting himself above his fellow scholars and colleagues. It has been my utmost pleasure to witness his progression from being just one of many students attending our numerous lectures into someone who leads them, imparting his knowledge and wisdom to the next generation of Byrgenwerth scholars. And being witness to this growth leaves me with no doubt that he is someone that perfectly encapsulates Byrgenwerth’s values and ideals – that he is worthy of being its chief representative. Good luck to you, Laurence and to all embarking on this ambitious expedition.”

With this, Master Willem concluded his address and sat back down, allowing another short wave of applause to fill the silence in the room. Despite Master Willem being the one who had just finished speaking, Laurence was well aware that most of the eyes in the room were on him. These were very strong statements that his headmaster was making on his behalf, which no doubt caused many to wonder whether he was truly deserving of them, thoughts that occasionally passed through Laurence’s own mind from time to time. But one thing was for certain. Hearing Master Willem praise him like he had, in front of such an ‘impressive’ audience no less, was truly honoring. And well, he couldn’t deny that it felt rather good to have his efforts be recognized.

“A most shining address thou hast provided, Provost Willem. To continue on a similar note, we would like to draw attention to another party due to participate in this upcoming expedition. As Provost Willem has said, the labyrinths beneath Yharnam are very much shrouded in mystery; even we do not fully know what lies in wait there. And so, to ensure the safety of the scholars who shall venture into its depths, we have arranged for them to be accompanied by a company of our most noble and distinguished knights, led by Our very own Lady, or perhaps more appropriately in this instance, Captain Maria.”

As Laurence steadily clapped along with the rest of the room, he looked over to where Lady Maria had been seated, managing to spot her beside the still standing Queen. Much like him, she didn’t seem to react lavishly to the attention, simply choosing to offer a smile to the crowd as she scanned the room. Nonetheless, it was clear she was quite proud of her current position, which he supposed was to be expected. Having a royal singing your praises would flatter just about anyone, much less someone whose life had no doubt been given in service to one.

She continued, “The Knights of Cainhurst are a group with a long and proud history, a history which Lady Maria has both honored and bolstered throughout her service. She is a warrior in every sense of the word, one that we have every confidence is prepared to face any and all dangers that may lurk beneath the surface of our glorious city. And so, to the scholars of Byrgenwerth, I offer my assurance that no harm will come upon you so long as you are under her watchful protection. And to Captain Maria, and all the knights under her command, I bid thee to go forth. Show no fear, for the might and honor of Cainhurst is with you.”

Yet another round of applause followed and just as it started to die down, a servant ran up to the Queen and whispered something in her ear. After she gave her inaudible reply, the servant ran off and allowed her to turn back to the hall. “I am pleased to announce that you will all be served shortly. Please allow our attendants to perform their work.”

Almost on cue, servants carrying various platters steadily poured into the hall, setting about delivering the main courses for all those present. As Laurence himself waited to be served, he was practically overwhelmed by the sheer diversity of scents in the room, which was reflected in the food he could see being offered on the plates; dishes composed of fish, meat, vegetables and sauces that Laurence did not even know the names of.

Once it appeared that everyone had been served, Queen Annalise arose from her seat and raised her glass. 

“Now then, without further ado, may the feast begin.” 

At first, Laurence looked around to see the rest of those gathered start to dig into their food. The nobility picked up their cutlery and started to eat in an orderly, sophisticated manner, while most of the scholars seemed just as awestruck with what had been served to them as he was. In Laurence’s case, it was a serving of cooked asparagus, some sort of soup that he had yet to touch and a serving of some sort of meat, with some sort of sauce. Perhaps it was lamb, or something completely different? Odds are, he wouldn’t know even after he tasted it.

Taking his cutlery, he cut off a piece of the meat, put it in his mouth and…he was right. He still had no idea what this was supposed to be. Tasted pretty good, though.

“Feels as if you’ve stepped into a completely different world, doesn’t it, Laurence?” Master Willem said just beside him.

“Indeed, it does.” He replied, staring down at the meal in front of him, whose ingredients he guessed was worth more than every piece of food he had eaten in the past week put together.

He heard Master Willem chuckle. “Well, enjoy your time in it while you can. Who knows if you’ll ever get the chance to experience it again?” He said before turning back to his own meal.

Deciding to do as he was advised, Laurence set about trying to get a taste for the strange food on offer, which was expectantly delicious, even if lacking in abundance. The dessert that was brought out after the main course was similarly sparse; a small serving of a sweet treat similar to ice cream, which he was told was called “sorbet”.

“I think you might have yourself an admirer, Laurence.” Micolash suddenly stated, catching his attention.

“What are you talking about?” He asked.

“That Maria woman. She’s been watching you all night.” Caryll pointed out, her tone clearly expressing suspicion. Looking over to where she was sitting, he saw Maria conversing with the Queen and another, noticeably older male figure, no doubt an important one, judging from the fact he was conversing so freely with them. Part-way through this conversation, she snuck in another glance at him.

“I noticed.” Laurence said, turning back to his two colleagues.

“And are you going to do anything about it?” Micolash asked him, to which he could only shrug.

“What do you suggest I do?” He asked back.

“I don’t know. Maybe she’s waiting for you to go up to her.” He suggested. 

“Pft, why didn’t I think of that?” He sarcastically replied. They had been expressly told that they should avoid leaving their assigned seat until after the Queen gave her blessing for them to do so.

“Is this gossip I’m hearing?” Master Willem suddenly chimed in. “Oh no, Master Willem. We were just…” Micolash almost immediately tried to apologize, but the headmaster merely laughed it away.

“Worry not, Micolash. But if I may, I would like to remind you all that this is also a social event, so I hope that you’re prepared to ‘rub shoulders’, as they say.” Laurence knew enough to recognize that this wasn’t merely a suggestion – it was an order. The entire purpose of this gathering was to allow them the chance to interact with their Cainhurst counterparts before their venture, and vice versa. As for him, well, he had an obvious ‘target’ to focus on tonight.

“Yes, I simply cannot wait.” Laurence said. “Oh, I’m sure.” He took a sip from his cup, clearly amused by the situation. 

“And do tell, Laurence, what do you plan to do?” Despite the open-ended nature of the question, it was clear that he was referring to something very specific.

“You’ll see.” Was all Laurence said in reply.

It wasn’t long before the Queen announced that the time had come for the second phase of the festivities to begin. They were to leave the banquet hall and return to the hall just outside, where the guests would be able to mingle, drink and if they so wished, dance. 

What joy, he thought to himself.

“Excuse me.” He said to Master Willem and his fellows before he rose from his seat and crossed the length of the table, where Lady Maria was still sitting, propping her chin up with her hand. Trying to maintain a cool demeanor, he stopped just by her right, which almost instantly got her attention.

“My lady.” He politely greeted, watching as her lips curved into a small smile.

“Well, well, Laurence. How unexpected.” She was no doubt being coy with him, but he chose not to draw attention to it. “On your way downstairs, I presume?” He lightly nodded.

“I am. Would you care to join me?” He knew he was being bold asking this of someone of her stature, but really, that was the point. And judging from her expression, she recognized that.

“Gladly.” Maria replied, prompting him to offer her his hand to help her from her seat. The two of them proceeded into the ballroom together, where several of their respective peers had already started gathering. However, just as he was about to turn in the direction of the staircase, Maria unexpectedly stepped just in front of him, stopping him in his tracks.

“Is something the matter?” He calmly inquired.

“I would prefer to stay up here for the time being. We’ve been sitting for an awfully long time, see.” It took him a moment, but he eventually pieced together what would compel her to do this.

“Ah. Stiffness, yes?” She lightly nodded to confirm. “You don’t mind, do you?” She asked him.

“Not at all.” He replied, though something told him that she was experiencing no such thing. Regardless, he walked with her over to the railing overlooking the hall, where he had first spotted her earlier that night.

“So tell me, how are you finding this most splendid banquet?” She soon asked him.

“Well, it’s certainly been an…unique experience.” He replied.

“It’s dreadful, I know.” She unexpectedly said.

“I… wasn’t suggesting that.” He said, thinking that she must’ve somehow misconstrued his statement.

“Oh, I’m sure, but I’ve been to enough of these events to know that their novelty runs its course very quickly. They sit you down and then leave you to gradually realize that this is all there is to it.” Despite the fact she was smiling, Laurence could tell that she was speaking from the heart, at least in a way. Despite the extravagance that his hosts treated the event with, the banquet was nevertheless quite dull; if he felt that way after just one event like this, he could only imagine how she must feel after what must’ve been a lifetime of them.

“Does Her Majesty know you feel this way?” He asked semi-seriously.

“Oh, it doesn’t matter what I think, does it? Besides, it is my knightly duty to fulfill any and all obligations placed upon me. This just happens to be the most common one.” She replied.

“How tragic.” This managed to get a small chuckle out of her, an admittedly pleasant sounding one.

“Indeed. But I imagine you’re no stranger to obligations yourself.” Maria looked over at him as she said this, clearly confident in her statement. And she had every reason to.

“If Master Willem asks me to accompany him somewhere, then I must accompany him. That’s simply how things are.” He acknowledged.

“So they are. But do tell me, Laurence, what sort of tie do you have with him?” Laurence doubted she knew just how loaded of a question this really was for him. His history with Master Willem was rather long and just as personal, though he assumed that she merely wanted to know what his position within Byrgenwerth was.

“I’m a professor. He is my headmaster. Need I say more?” Was his simple response.

“A professor, you say? And just what is it you ‘profess’?” Was her next question.

“Medicine.” He quickly replied, which seemed to surprise her somewhat.

“Really?” “Indeed. Though I believe the proper term for my position is ‘professor ordinarius’.” Laurence felt that he didn’t have to explain to her what it meant.

“Impressive. But how exactly does a man of medicine find himself heading a mission such as this?” Laurence couldn’t fault her for making this inquiry. The subject of their future exhibition admittedly fell more in line with Micolash’s faculty, yet he was nevertheless chosen to lead it instead of him.

“Surely you know, my lady, that a scholar mustn’t confine himself to a single discipline. And I happen to have a…wide range of interests.” Was what he decided to go with.

“And a wide range of support?” Maria’s assumption wasn’t that far off, but Laurence wasn’t prepared to be boastful about it.

“Perhaps.” His acknowledgement managed to get a small chuckle out of her, an admittedly pleasant sounding one.

“How very humble.” Said Maria.

“It is essential to be aware of why I am where I am.” He replied with a small shrug.

“Oh, I’m sure there’s more to it than just the support of your peers. From what I’ve heard of your headmaster, he is a difficult man to impress.” She pointed out.

“I would wager a guess that him and Her Majesty are similar in that regard.” He said in reply.

“Oh, almost certainly.” She acknowledged, wearing an almost enigmatic expression.

Though veiled as a sort of compliment, it also showed a bit of curiosity on her part on just what was it about him that drew Master Willem’s attention. Or at least, he liked to think it was mere curiosity. The more likely option was that she was evaluating him – scrutinizing everything he did and said in order to determine his supposed worth.

Laurence knew all this because he was in the process of doing that exact same thing to her.

“I recall Her Majesty saying that you were among her most seasoned knights. Tell me, just how did you gain such prestige?” He asked not just because it would give her the chance to talk about herself – which just about everyone liked to do – but also out of genuine curiosity. From what he understood, Yharnam had not been at war since the defeat of Napoleon several decades prior and Maria did not appear much older than he was, which would make her participation in that conflict unlikely.

“The same way any knight makes a name for themselves without a war to fight – tournaments.” She replied.

“Go on.” He prompted, somewhat intrigued.

“As should be obvious, we knights have to undergo many years of training, honing our strength and resolve. Now, there are of course those of us who’re stronger or more resolute, so we like to organize certain…contests to determine which of us fit that mold.” Laurence listened to her explanation with a keen ear.

“And do you?” She made her best attempt at a humble smile.

“I will leave it up to you to decide.” Maria eventually replied, even though it wasn’t all that difficult to reach a conclusion given what she’d told him. Whatever it was that happened in these ‘contests’, she must’ve won her fair share of them to be where she was today.

By now, the second phase of the gathering was in full swing. Soft music flowed through the hall and a few people had taken to the dance floor, although most chose to remain on the sidelines and converse amongst themselves. Despite his better judgement, Laurence turned back to Maria.

“Tell me, how are you feeling?” He asked her.

“Better, I’d say.” She replied, no doubt already catching on to what he was planning.

“If that’s the case, may I have this dance?” He put forward his hand once more and waited for her reply. Looking at her then, it was clear that she was somewhat surprised, but at the same time, also amused by his proposition. 

“You may.” Maria said as she accepted his hand. With a warm and welcoming smile, Laurence proceeded to walk her down the staircase, her arm interlaced with his. Yet far from being relieved at her acceptance, Laurence instead found himself feeling mortified. A million thoughts rushed through his mind, though most of them were slight variations of the same one.

This was a horrible idea.   

He had never danced a day in his life, much less with someone else. Any number of things could happen now and none of them would reflect very well on him.

“I assume you don’t have much experience in the ballroom?” Maria suddenly asked as they were partway down the stairs, almost as if she could sense his uncertainty.

“No, but I am nevertheless willing to learn.” He admitted while keeping up his confident façade. Yet in spite of his doubts, Maria simply smiled.

“Hmm, honest, too. I like that.” She said in a noticeably quieter tone of voice, making whatever Laurence was thinking to say retreat back into the depths of his mind. No doubt taking notice of his uncertainty, she went on to say, “Oh, don’t you worry. I’ll lead.” 

They would soon reach the bottom of the staircase and step out onto the dance floor, after which much of the attention in the room suddenly shifted onto them, including both Master Willem and the Queen, who appeared particularly bewildered by what they were witnessing. This extra attention only put additional pressure on him.

“Don’t mind them.” Maria said to get his attention. “Just focus on me. When I make a move, you try to do the opposite; if I move a leg forward, you move yours back. Simple enough?” She explained in a surprisingly calm manner. Laurence had fully expected her to be at least somewhat irritated by his inexperience, but it would appear not. 

“I suppose.” He replied.

“Good.” She turned to face him then, placing one gloved hand on his shoulder blade while holding one of his own with the other. Seeing no other option, Laurence placed his free hand on Maria’s shoulder, looking up at her as he mentally prepared himself for what was to come.

“Get ready.” No sooner did Maria make this warning did she put her left foot forward, which made him almost subconsciously move his right one back; taking a brief pause, she slightly tilted her head to his left before sliding into that direction. She then repeated a similar process for the next part of the dance: she stepped back with her right foot, he stepped forward with his left; she moved to the right, so did he. 

Laurence quickly realized that she was showing him the pattern and that her slower movement was merely to make it easier for him to grasp. Once this became clear, he noticed that the pace of their dance gradually sped up as he got a better grasp of what he was meant to be doing.

“Ah, see? Not so difficult, right?” She asked him some way into their dance.

“No.” He agreed.

“Hmm, then maybe we can change things up a little now. Perhaps I should twirl you?” Laurence was immediately horrified by her suggestion.

“I’d prefer that you didn’t.” He told her, which only made her laugh.

“Relax. I am merely toying with you.” She assured him, continuing on with their dance and allowing relief to wash over him. He was no doubt going to receive a fair share of snide remarks after tonight, which would have only gotten more severe if she had gone through with her suggestion. 

Yet despite the presence of these thoughts, Laurence tried following Maria’s earlier advice and kept his focus solely on her, drowning out the thoughts of what their onlookers must be thinking of his performance. And once he was able to get into this mindset, he found that the whole thing became rather…fun. The dance itself was admittedly quite simplistic, but at least Maria hadn’t gone out of her way to embarrass him by selecting something that would be far too complex for him to grasp.

Then there was of course how close the two of them were, so close that Laurence could clearly smell the perfume that Maria was wearing – he had no idea what it was, but he was sure it was one only someone like her could acquire. And really, that was the strangest thing about this whole situation. At first, he had expected that she wouldn’t be caught dead interacting with someone like him and yet here she was, effectively teaching him how to dance in front of dozens of onlookers without a care in the world. Perhaps it was all an act, or perhaps she wasn’t as cold as he initially thought.

“You are quite light on your feet, I see.” He eventually complimented her.

“Naturally. Battle is in many ways like dance; to be effective in it, you must be aware of your opposite at all times, be able to predict what they’re going to do and react accordingly, often on a split second’s notice.” Laurence couldn’t help but raise an inquisitive brow at her little lecture. 

“Are you trying to tell me something?” He asked her.

“I am, but perhaps not in the way you think. For you see, I am not merely trained on how to battle simple men.” Despite the somewhat cryptic nature of her reply, Laurence was quick to pick up on its subtext, something which Maria must’ve noticed.

“Yes, you know of what I speak, don’t you?” She stated.

“Of course.” Laurence promptly replied.

“I doubt that is all Master Willem told you, is it? Surely, you thought him mad when he first shared that knowledge with you, yet you were fascinated by it all the same, yearning to know more. And it is that same curiosity that led you to me.” He couldn’t help but notice that her tone had grown more ominous than before, which was only further enforced by what she said next.

“But the question remains. Are you prepared to delve deeper?” Her voice was scantly above a whisper as she posed him this question, her eyes boring deep into his. Despite this, Laurence stood firm.

“I am not afraid.” He stated, after which she leaned in even closer to him. “Is that so?” She once again whispered to him.

By now, their dance had essentially concluded, leaving them standing almost at the center of the ballroom. The only difference was that Maria was now so close that one forward movement would lead to their noses touching, a proximity that no doubt gave their observers a vastly different impression of the situation between them. 

Yet it was clear to him what she was doing. She was testing to see if she was really in control, using both her status and her intimidating presence to test him in a way. And as much as it pained Laurence to admit it, it was somewhat working, but he wasn’t going to let her see that. He held firm, staring back at her with similar intensity, continuing to grasp her hand to show he didn’t intend to back down.

Each second that ticked by felt like an eternity on its own, but eventually, what could only be described as a smirk found its way onto Maria’s face.

“I see. We’ll get along just fine.” She said to him.

“Won’t we indeed.” He replied in a similar, calm tone.

With little else left to do, both Laurence and Maria released each-other, after which they walked hand in hand off of the dance floor as the gathered guests looked on. Seeing as she had not been seated anywhere prior to their dance, Laurence simply took her as far as the central staircase before turning back to her, releasing her hand and bowing to her in that proper order.

“Thank you for the dance, Lady Maria.” Laurence said to her as he concluded his bow.

“The pleasure was all mine. Until we meet again.” She replied. “I look forward to it.” Said Laurence.

After holding her gaze for a little while longer, Laurence turned away and retired from her company. Once he was sure he was out of earshot, he let out a quiet, relieved sigh before making his way back to where Master Willem and his colleagues were.

“I must say, that was a most splendid performance you put on there, Laurence.” Micolash said as he approached, a noticeable snideness to his words.

“You are free to try and outdo it, my friend.” He jeered right back as he took a seat, allowing himself to rest his aching feet. As he did, he noticed that someone was missing.

“Say, where’s Caryll?” He asked as he tried to find her.

“Just over there.” Laurence looked in the direction his colleague pointed in to find Caryll in the midst of a dance with one of the knights, which upon further inspection he recognized as the one who escorted them into the castle.

“Poor chap. Probably thought she’d be an easy charm.” Laurence couldn’t help but chuckle at Micolash’s comment.

“Well, he’s in for a rude awakening, isn’t he?” He said in reply. 

Soon after, Master Willem approached them. “Enjoying ourselves, are we?” He said as he looked down at them.

“Why yes, Master Willem. I have to say, tonight has come with many unexpected delights.” Laurence could think of what at least one of those “delights” were and judging from the chuckle Master Willem made, so could he.

“Indeed.” He turned his gaze to him. “I presume you and Lady Maria got on well?” Laurence wasn’t quite sure how to respond to this question.

“I believe we’ve reached an understanding of sorts.” Was what he chose to go with.

“Why, good. Why, that’s very good. That understanding may prove useful when you reconvene.” Said Master Willem, prompting Laurence to look over in the direction Maria had retreated to earlier, finding her in the late stages of conversation with Queen Annalise. 

“We shall see.” Said Laurence.

A few seconds later, Maria’s gaze once again focused in his direction; whether she knew he had been doing the same, he did not know, but she looked across the room just long enough to let him know she remained aware of him even then – almost as if she knew exactly what was going through his mind. Yet despite that, Laurence noticed something different about her, that she didn’t appear quite as confident as she had earlier in the evening. No doubt she had felt she had him all figured out before they had even properly interacted. That as a simple scholar without much experience with figures of her standing, he would be timid and thus, more susceptible to her influence.

But all these self-aggrandizing thoughts did not mean that Laurence understood her any better than she did him. It had been all too easy to think she’d be akin to a brute, using her physical prowess to intimidate others into compliance. In truth, she was much shrewder than he had given her credit for; not only did she seem to be well-educated in her own right, but her approach was much more welcoming - gentle, even. A perfect way to loosen one’s tongue, assuming she could lull them into a false sense of security first.

Laurence had to admit it. She intrigued him. With any luck, he’d get the chance to discover whatever secrets she might be hiding, if not on this expedition, then perhaps some other time in the future, unlikely a prospect as that was.

But of course, any scholar worth their salt would relish the opportunity to delve into the unknown.

Chapter Text

“Her Majesty has summoned you, Lady Maria.”

 Somehow, every time she heard those words spoken to her, she always found herself surprised. Not for the summoning itself, of course; her and Queen Annalise were of the same bloodline, so Maria was sure she would be summoned to her throne room regardless, regardless of how distant their relations may be. No, what surprised her was the reason she was being summoned. Not to ensure she was acting as a proper ‘lady’ or anything of that sort: instead, Maria was expected to report to the Queen the state of the company she was to lead and to provide the necessary plan of action for her upcoming mission.

Her, reporting to the queen, being in charge of her own assignment. She never could’ve predicted she’d get a chance like this and yet, here she was, making her way to the throne room, wearing a uniform that marked her authority among the knights of Cainhurst.

It had all started innocently enough. Pouring over old tales of valor and glory, daydreaming of embarking on some grand adventure in service of her home and family. But even in her youth, Maria knew that it was likely these dreams of hers would remain just that, for the course of her life seemed to already be decided. As a daughter of nobility, she would of course live a life of luxury, receiving the highest education available and be surrounded by servants who would provide whatever service she could desire.

Yet the older she grew, the more Maria realized that she found little comfort in the ‘comfort’ provided to her. She wanted something more – needed something more. And above all else, she wished to make a name for herself and to prove just what she was capable of, not just to those around her, but to herself as well.

Not far from the entrance, Maria was approached by another knight, wearing the traditional black and red garb.

“What kept you?” He asked as she came to a stop just in front of him.

“Being on the other side of the castle, for one. The better question is `what're you doing here’?” Maria asked the knight.

“Well, it’s simple really. Their Majesties asked to see me.” He replied.

“Did they now?” He proudly nodded to confirm. “Indeed. Though, from the looks of things, they wanted to see us together. Their guards wouldn’t let me pass.” The knight replied.

“Then let’s not keep them waiting any longer, shall we?” Maria said, after which the two of them started walking up the staircase that led to the throne room.  

“How’re you feeling, Maria?” He soon asked.

“Fine. Why?” “You know why.” He stated matter of factly, no doubt referring to her upcoming venture.

“I appreciate the sentiment, but you needn’t worry about me.” Maria said to her companion.

“Of course, but…no one has ever ventured that deep into the labyrinths before. There’s no telling what you’ll find down there.” The worry in his words was evident and as much as Maria didn’t want to admit it, it was somewhat warranted.

“Well, that’s exactly why I’m going down there, aren’t I?” She reminded him.

“Hmph, that and herding those scholars along.” Maria couldn’t keep herself from cracking a smile. “Yes, that as well.” She conceded.

“Shouldn’t be too hard. From the looks of things, you and that Laurence fellow are already quite friendly with each-other.” And there it was. Maria knew it was coming, yet it still made her roll her eyes.

“Really? As I recall, you did a little bit of socializing yourself that night.” She pointed out, recalling one particular encounter from the banquet.

“I believe that was the idea, was it not? Everyone had someone they needed to talk to.” He replied just before his expression suddenly became serious. “And listen, when you’re down there, be sure to keep an eye on the one they call Caryll. There’s something…different about her. I can feel it.” At first, Maria wanted to question him as to how he thought she was different, but it was clear that he couldn’t possibly hold the answer.

“I’ll be sure to keep it in mind.” She assured him.

From there, the two of them proceeded to the throne room in relative silence. Two guards stood statue-like at the entrance, wearing armor that distinguished members of Queen Annalise’s personal guard, who silently allowed them passage inside. The interior of the throne room was illuminated by countless candles, either hanging from miniature chandeliers or distributed around the room, burning in between the equally plentiful marble statues that the castle had accumulated over the years. And at the very end of the room stood two thrones, both occupied and surrounded by various servants, whose chatter settled down once their presence became known.

“A most warm welcome to you both. Please, come forth.” Queen Annalise invited. As she had done countless times before, Maria approached her masters and kneeled down once she was but a few steps away, with her accompanying knight doing the same.

“Now then, let us not waste another moment. Maria, I presume thy men are ready for tomorrow?” Asked the Queen.

“Yes, Your Majesty. We are to travel as light as possible, as per instruction.” She promptly answered.

“Very good. Thy fellow travellers have agreed to bear the brunt of transporting supplies, which should allow thee and thine company to perform thy duty mostly unimpeded.” Ah. Baggage carrying baggage, Maria thought to herself.

“Make no mistake, Lady Maria. Thine primary duty remains ensuring the safety of Byrgenwerth’s scholars, and part of that duty includes ensuring that they are treated well by your company.” Queen Annalise suddenly reminded her, almost as if she knew exactly what she was thinking.

“Indeed. Our support for Byrgenwerth’s studies has proven to be a worthwhile investment, one we do not wish to see squandered because of a petty conflict.” The King then said to support his wife’s statement.

Maria nodded and said, “Of course.” It was true that Byrgenwerth had been a net positive for Yharnam’s growth, not only producing a more educated population for the city, but also serving as its primary source of jobs and drawing in potential scholars from all over Europe, and beyond. Aside from that, the royal family’s patronage of an educational center like it helped strengthen their image in the eyes of the people.

“Good. Now, seeing as we seem to be clear on that, let’s move on to the main reason we’ve summoned the two of you here.” Both Maria and her fellow knight perked their heads up upon hearing this. Admittedly, she was quite curious as to why he was here along with her.

“As you surely know, Lady Maria, the journey that you will be taking is a long and, one must not forget, perilous one. Because of this, we have decided that in your absence, your brother Adrian will assume command of your usual position.” This revelation clearly surprised them both, but her brother especially so.

“Your Majesty, I am truly honored.” He said while solemnly bowing his head, but something in his voice betrayed how he truly felt about the situation. Like Maria, her brother must’ve known why they had come to this decision. If she died, then someone would be needed to replace her.

“Are there any objections?” The Queen then asked.

“No, Your Majesty.” Maria replied after a short pause. She was aware of the risks involved better than anyone and she knew it would be foolish not to prepare for the worst-case scenario.

“Very well. Then it is settled. Adrian, you will be briefed on the extent of your duties in short order; we have the utmost faith that you will be able to fulfil them. As for…” As the King was speaking, the sound of footsteps became audible in the hall. Someone else had arrived.

“Apologies for the sudden intrusion, Your Majesty, but I have news.” The attention within the hall shifted to the new arrival; a man dressed in royal robes. Queen Annalise motioned for Maria and Adrian to rise, after which they promptly moved to stand on either side of the carpet leading up to their thrones, making way for the new arrival.

“Is it urgent?” The Queen asked him.

“It is. The envoy that we’ve been expecting has just arrived; they have been let inside and are awaiting their audience, as requested.” The King and Queen both seemed to be rather caught of guard by this news, yet nevertheless appeared quite pleased.

“A most impeccable sense of timing.” Queen Annalise said, a clear sense of sarcasm in her voice.

“Yes, I can see that you’re occupied with…other matters.” The man looked over to Maria, who could do little but look awkwardly to the side and offer a soft smile. It was bad form to intrude on someone’s interaction with Their Majesties.

“What should I tell them?” He asked, looking back to the King and Queen. After sharing a brief glance, the two royals seemed to come to a decision.

“Nothing. Take me to them – I will ensure that they receive a proper welcome.” The King said.

“Of course. And what about you, Your Majesty?” He asked the Queen.

“We will remain here. There is something that We need to discuss with Captain Maria in the meantime”. She wasn’t the least bit surprised to hear this. There was much more to discuss in regards to her mission, after all.

“I see. In that case, allow me to wish our Captain the best of luck on her journey. May you return to us safe.” Maria nodded her thanks at his words.

“Thank you, father.” She said to him.

Maria knew that he was as worried about her as anyone else was, if not more. He’d never been exactly keen on her choice to become a knight. He had served the Queen as a distinguished diplomat for decades and had no doubt been hoping that she would follow in his footsteps, or at the very least, live a safe and prosperous life, as any father should. But at the same time, he accepted there was nothing he could do to change her mind and respected her decision.

“Now then, Your Highness. Follow me.” Her father said to the king.

“Very well.” The king then stood up from his throne. “Heed me! As all of you have been made aware, there is a delegation awaiting our arrival at the main gate. Unless otherwise directed, all those gathered here are to come with me and assist in welcoming them.”

With the order given, the king started making his way towards the exit, with most everyone else in the throne room quickly falling in line behind them. Adrian was among those following and as he walked away, he turned his head to look back at Maria, offering her a small smile before turning to look straight ahead. Soon enough, the only people remaining in the throne room were Maria and Queen Annalise, who sat silently on her throne until she was certain that everyone was gone.

“Come then, noble Maria. I bid thee rise.” She found herself taken aback by this request, but nevertheless complied with her order.

“Very good. Now, speak thy mind, if thou will.” She prompted.

“On what matter, my Queen?” Maria inquired.

“Let us start with perhaps the most pressing matter. Are thou confident in regards to this upcoming venture?” She predictably asked her.

“Of course.” Maria promptly replied. For the next short while, Queen Annalise did not speak, instead appearing to be analyzing her somewhat.

“Hmm, uncertainty. How very unlike thee. Tell Us, does it have anything to do with thy…counterpart?” She inquired.

“You refer to Professor Laurence?” Maria said more as a statement than as a question.

“Indeed. If We recall correctly, the recent banquet provided ample opportunity for thee to assess him, so to speak. What is thy conclusion?” Truth be told, there was much that she had to say about him, but she decided not to mince words.

“I cannot say for certain.” Perhaps that was not what she wanted to hear and she was admittedly basing her conclusion off of her first impression of the man, but it was the conclusion she had reached all the same.

From the moment she first saw him, Maria knew that something was different about this Laurence. For one, she hadn’t expected him to be so young; barely older than her, no less. If he was indeed a professor, one that supposedly represented the entire faculty of medicine, then he must not have much experience to his name and yet, he was nevertheless put in charge of an expedition of this magnitude. Surely, he must’ve done something to have impressed Provost Willem so. The headmaster had spoken in glowing words about him, but at the end of the day, they were just words. And she knew that words were cheap.

And then he approached her. A strange thing for her to be surprised by, to be sure, but Maria had been fully prepared to be the one who had to take the initiative so they could start “talking business”. That had been the case ever since she became a knight; most were seemingly too intimidated to approach her, if not by her strength, then by her status. Odds are, he didn’t know that was the case, but him coming up to her rather than the other way around showed a fair deal of confidence on his part.

Confidence. Yes, he seemed to possess that in spades. And, if she might add, a certain type of charm as well.

As expected of someone of his profession, he was well-mannered and well-spoken, knowing when he should speak and when he should listen. He did not quiver in her presence or try to shower her with insincere praise; he simply spoke to her as he would with anyone else, not like he was talking to her because he had to. She could certainly see why his fellow scholars would appreciate him as they seemed to.  

Then again, charm would be worth little where they were going. Survival in the old labyrinths required preparation, a strong will and a great deal of courage. And Laurence wasn’t afraid of what lay ahead, if his words from that night were to be believed. Hardly surprising, she supposed. After all, one would not select a coward to lead an expedition as perilous as this one. But then again, anyone could pretend to be fearless and asking a maiden to dance was hardly a way to prove it.

And yet, she could not sense any fear in his words, nor in his eyes. Only time would tell whether he was truly as intrepid as he purported himself to be, but for now, one thing was certain. He had certainly ignited a spark of curiosity within her.

“So, We see. Provost Willem seems to have chosen his agent well. Oh, but no matter. Thy objective shall remain unchanged.” The Queen told her after a noticeable period of silence.

“And what of the other artifacts we find?” Maria then asked.

“Do not be so conscientious. Allow the scholars to claim their share of the spoils. Simple ceramics or jewelry are of little value to Us, but will no doubt be prized by them. After all, not all that you will find is equal in value.” Maria didn’t need to be told what it was that Queen Annalise was referring to.

“With all due respect, Your Majesty, do you truly believe it is wise to allow these scholars to accompany us? It is clear they have their own ambitions, which may very well run parallel to our own.” Maria pointed out.

“Oh, We are most aware of what Provost Willem desires. Above all else, he desires knowledge – more specifically, knowledge of a higher plane. He will have little interest in what We seek.” The Queen seemed quite confident in her statement.

“And you are certain of this?” Maria asked.

“Very much so. His success in his undertaking will have no bearing on Ours.” Suddenly, she started smiling. “Of course, it is unlikely that he will succeed, but We see no reason to prevent him from trying.” Just like that, everything became much clearer to her. As history has proven, the path that Willem put himself on tended to end in a very specific and unfortunate manner.

But something told her it wasn’t Willem’s ambition that she should be concerned about.

“May I pose a question, Your Majesty?” Maria asked.

“Of course.” Annalise replied.

“Say that we retrieve what you desire. What then?” It was an admittedly simple question, but one she felt the need to ask nevertheless.

“Simply put, We will be one step closer to succeeding where our shared ancestors failed. The power and wisdom of the Great Ones is indeed great, yet for all their mystery, their desires are primitive in nature. Bartering with them is foolish, for they never see codependents, only pawns and not recognizing this was Queen Yharnam’s, and indeed Pthumeru’s, fatal error.” Maria knew well enough of what the Queen spoke of, yet that did not make her intentions any less risky.

“That is why our people fled, is it not? All that we left behind, we did so for a reason.” She reminded her.

“Indeed, but over the centuries, we have attained the power of hindsight. The fools who remained allowed themselves to become mindless slaves to the Great Ones; they were never worthy of the privileges afforded to them. We know better than to repeat this error.” She arose from her throne and descended down to her level.

“To answer thy question, dearest Maria, thine success will mark the beginning of a new age for our people. We intend for the Pthumerian line – our line – to be renewed. Regardless of her fate, Queen Yharnam showed Us that such a thing is possible and the secret to doing so lies within her blood, the very same blood that courses through Our veins. But unlike her, We have no intention of entering any sort of ‘contract’. The fate of Cainhurst and its people will remain solely in our hands.” As she spoke, Annalise approached Maria and placed a hand on her shoulder.

“As for thee, thine accomplishment will of course be recognized and deservedly honoured. We, and all of Cainhurst, will remain indebted to thee and thy valiant service forever.” The Queen gave time for her words to settle before moving back her hand.

“Now, do you find this satisfactory?” Despite framing this as a question, it was rather clear she expected Maria to only respond one way.

“Yes, Your Majesty.” Maria said, bowing her head as she did.

“Splendid. If that is all, thou mayst retire for the night.” The Queen then said.

“What of our visitors?” She inquired, remembering the earlier discussion regarding their arrival.

“Oh, you needn’t concern yourself with them. Though thy presence would’ve been ideal, it is late and thou will need every ounce of strength for the journey ahead.” Maria was in no position to argue with her. As it was, she was rather tired.

“Of course, My Queen.” She said in agreement.

“Very good. Then, let’s not waste any more time; thou art dismissed.” With one more respectful bow, Maria turned away from Queen Annalise and started making her way towards the exit of her throne room.

“We await thy return. For the honor of Cainhurst.” She heard the Queen say as she walked away.

Now more than ever, it was clear to Maria what she had to do. She was to find that which brought ruin to the old land of Loran, and to Pthumeru as a whole – the blood of the Great Ones. And if…no, when she returned, her accomplishment would cement her place as one of the finest knights in Cainhurst’s long history. It was to be her legacy, one that would never be forgotten.

As it should be.

…..

Elsewhere.

On the outskirts of Yharnam, a stagecoach is carefully led through a dark and dreary forest. The surrounding trees tower overhead, their leaves and branches swaying in the hot summer wind, creating a hunting, if not oppressive atmosphere. It was hardly a place one would wish to find themselves alone in, which made Laurence grateful for the relative security of his transport, which allowed him to indulge in some light reading in order to drown out the gloom of his surroundings.

This was by no means the first time he had been taken down this path, yet that feeling of uneasiness never fully went away. These woods were like a maze; one wrong turn and it was unlikely you would find your path again. Additionally, no-one really knew what lurked beyond the trees: predators, venomous snakes, madmen lost to time. He had even heard rumors of a sort of cult situated in a settlement deep within the forest, who would periodically venture out and ruthlessly slaughter all those who they deem to be ‘impure’. The exact criteria for this impurity were unknown, but Laurence had no desire to put these rumors to rest. He was simply a traveler, on his way to reconvene with his master at Byrgenwerth.

There were two locations that bore that name. The first, and the one most were familiar with, was the institution of higher learning within Yharnam, which was located within the center of the city. Yet this institution’s roots were found within another location; a vast estate located on the edge of the gorgeous Moonside Lake. This estate was itself a place of research, home to an extensive archive of books and documents, as well as a custom lunarium, which allowed its residents to observe the various stages of the moon. It was there where the research that would lead to the establishment of Byrgenwerth College truly began.

As his stagecoach continued steadily moving along, Laurence heard a soft noise over the sound of the turning wheels and the clattering of the horse’s hooves. He didn’t even have to look up from his book to know what was making this noise, smiling to himself as he heard it again. And again.

“I know, Nora, I know. But we’re almost there, I promise.” He said to his fellow traveler, a ginger-coated tabby cat, who currently found herself within her travelling cage, a predicament she seemed none too pleased about, judging from her irritated mewling.

“Look, we’ve been over this. Once we get to the estate, then you can roam to your heart’s content.” He said to Nora, who looked upon him with her usual green-eyed glare.

“Yes, yes, you’d rather be back home, I understand that. But I have to go away for a little while, as will most of the people who usually watch you. Master Willem has been kind enough to let you stay with him until I return.” He knew it was a bit silly trying to explain something like this to a cat, but doing so somehow always helped him feel more at ease. Laurence had long been fond of the creatures for that very reason; they gave him the very rare chance to talk openly – to confess, maybe – without any real worry.

And recently, Laurence found that he had a lot to tell Nora, so much that she would probably be content to go without his blabbering for a while. His duties as a professor were more than enough to keep him talking for what sometimes felt like hours, but the latest responsibility placed upon him was unlike anything he had to contend with before. Being entrusted to lead his fellow scholars into an uncharted and no doubt treacherous place, away from the rest of civilization; could one really be blamed if they found themselves a little anxious in anticipating such a task?

Laurence thought back to the banquet he had attended close to a week ago. He had said that he wasn’t afraid of what awaited him that night, and in a way, this was true. Really, he was excited to have an opportunity such as this – to play such a key role on this exodus of discovery, as he was sure all those going with him were as well. He wouldn’t have agreed to take this role if he really was afraid, right? Yet even now, he wasn’t sure if he had convinced Lady Maria.

Lady Maria. Yet another subject he was sure Nora was tired of hearing about. Their meeting had ended up creating more questions than it had answered, chief among them being whether she could truly be counted upon to protect them when the time came. He had no way of knowing her true prowess in combat aside from simple word of mouth, but even if she was as capable as Queen Annalise had claimed, did that make it any better? Of course, it was unlikely that she and her company would turn their blades on them – the fallout from such an occurrence would be far too severe – but they could still hinder their research in other, more subtle ways.

Perhaps it was unwise to dwell on the hypothetical, but Laurence found himself dwelling all the same. Though it was officially Lady Maria’s duty to ensure their physical safety, it nevertheless fell to him to ensure they remained safe as well. To do that, he had to keep their morale high and ensure that they do not splinter apart, which was exceedingly difficult to do when one party could not fully trust the other.

He did not wish for her to be his enemy, but deep down, something told him that she had the potential to be even more dangerous than the monsters she would be guarding them from.

As these thoughts continued to run through his mind, Laurence felt his carriage start to slow down, which could only mean that he would soon arrive at his destination. Placing is book back within his satchel, he sat and waited for it to come to a complete stop, watching as Nora perked up her ears and curiously looked around, no doubt wondering what was going on. Soon enough, the door to his carriage was opened by a fairly burly man, clothed in orange robes.

“Ah, Master Laurence. How wonderful to have you back.” The man said.

“Hello, Dores.” Laurence politely greeted. “How have things been?”

“Busy, believe it or not. You are actually the second guest that Master Willem has received this evening.” This admittedly came as a surprise to Laurence.

“Really? Who’s the first?” He inquired.

“I doubt that the two of you have met. And in any case, you’ll see for yourself soon enough.” Dores stood aside. “Please, come with me.” He invited.

“Of course. Come along, Nora.” Laurence said as he picked up his cat’s cage by a handle at the top; while making his way out of the carriage, he handed it over to Dores, retrieving it and uttering “Thank you” once he was safely out.

From there, he followed the ever-loyal sentinel towards the estate he presided over. As he walked behind Dores, Laurence couldn’t help but notice a lone, black horse hitched by a nearby tree, which no doubt belonged to this mysterious second guest that he had just learned about. Had he come here alone? If so, then it was a most daring decision indeed.

They found the door on the right side of Master Willem’s estate wide open, no doubt in anticipation for his arrival. The most immediate thing one noticed upon entering was the abundance of canisters, some gathered together on various desks and tables, others seemingly strewn about without a care. But the most striking thing about these canisters wasn’t so much the sheer number of them, but what they contained; human eyes, which seemed to stare back as they floated in the clear liquid that they were kept in. Yet what was no doubt a putrid sight to most had no real effect on Laurence, used as he was to this aspect of his Master’s work.

As they got closer to the winding staircase that would take them up to the upper floor, Laurence could make out two voices coming from above: one belonging to Master Willem and another that he did not recognize. Though he couldn’t discern exactly what they were saying, the tone of the conversation seemed to be calm, indicating some level of familiarity between them. This conversation continued up until Dores brought them up to the second floor, where they found Master Willem reclining in his rocking chair, with a stranger seated on a sofa nearby.

“Ah, there you are, Laurence.” Said Master Willem before he turned his gaze to his servant. “Thank you, Dores. Now, may I ask that you go and aid our driver?” He promptly bowed his head.

“Of course, Master Willem.” Dores said before he turned back to the staircase and started making his way back down, leaving Laurence as the sole center of attention.

“You wished to see me, Master Willem?” Laurence asked after a brief silence.

“I did. As you can see, there’s someone I’d like you to meet.” Master Willem replied, motioning to the stranger in the room, who Laurence now saw was wearing a brown jacket, as well as a red scarf around his neck.

“Well, come on then, don’t be shy. Join us. Oh, and feel free to let Nora out as well, if you so please.” The headmaster invited.

“Oh, yes, of course. Just a moment.” Setting Nora’s cage down, Laurence opened the door to her enclosure and allowed the cat to cautiously venture out. She was already quite familiar with the location and started making her way over to one of Master Willem’s cushioned sofas, but along the way, she took notice of the stranger. He soon noticed her arching her back and puffing out her fur, before hissing at the stranger and running off.

“Nora!” Laurence called to his cat as she ran past him and to the other end of the floor, but stopped himself from chasing after her. She’d no doubt be back; it was better to just give her space for now.

“My apologies, sir. She usually doesn’t react to new people that way.” He said to the mysterious figure, who lightly chuckled in reply.

“Not to worry. She does what she feels she needs to in order to survive, just like any other creature.” The stranger sounded understanding, but also rather nonchalant. In fact, Laurence noticed he hadn’t so much as budged when Nora hissed at him.

“Oh, how rude of me. Please, allow me to properly introduce myself.” The stranger said, promptly stood up to his full height and approached him.

“My name is Gehrman. I’m an old acquaintance of your headmaster. And you must be the young Master Laurence he’s told me about.” The man extended his hand for him to shake.

“Master?” Laurence thought to himself. When had he gotten that title? In any case, he pondered this for only a moment before he accepted Gehrman’s offered handshake.

“I am. And to what do I owe the pleasure, Mr…Gehrman?” Laurence inquired, seeing as Master Willem had chosen an interesting time to introduce him to old friends.

“I’m glad you asked, Laurence. Gehrman here will be accompanying you on your upcoming expedition.” Master Willem explained.

“Oh, are you a scholar as well?” Laurence asked Gehrman, who simply smiled.

“In a manner of speaking, yes.” He replied somewhat cryptically.

“I see. Well, in that case, I suppose you are aware of where we’re meant to be going?” He decided to ask.

“But of course. In fact, that is why I am here. Your headmaster has requested that I go with you into the old labyrinths, in order to keep an eye on you and, where necessary, protect you from what we will encounter below.” This came as somewhat of a shock to him.

“Protect us?” He repeated, unsure of whether he had heard him correctly.

“Indeed, young master.” Gehrman confirmed with a small nod.

Naturally, Laurence found himself quite confused at this sudden turn of events. Aside from his fairly impressive height, the man in front of him did not appear to be all that threatening; for one, he appeared to be several decades older than Laurence himself, as well as being rather thin and judging simply from their brief interaction, meek as a lamb.

“I’m not sure I understand, Master Willem. Has our arrangement with the Knights of Cainhurst changed?” Laurence turned to him and asked.

“Not at all. They are still to serve as your main line of defense.” He replied almost immediately.

“What? Then why…” Laurence looked back at Gehrman, still trying to make sense of just what was going on here.

“Oh, Laurence. Please, have a seat. I promise all will be clear shortly.” Master Willem invited, motioning for one of his numerous sofas. After a moment, Laurence complied, sitting down on the sofa opposite his master, while Gehrman returned to the one in between them.

“Now, why don’t you tell us what you know about the Pthumerians?” Laurence raised a brow, taken off guard by his master’s request. He assumed that in order to make things clear, they would have to do some explaining.

“That they are by no means a ‘dead’ civilization. They still exist to this very day and continue to expand the labyrinths in which they dwell. They’re also ardent worshippers of the Great Ones and even fashioned themselves as their guardians; it is the fabric that holds their society together.” He recounted as best as he could, though he couldn’t quite understand one thing. “Why do you ask?”

“Because simply put, what you know does not apply to Loran.” Gehrman suddenly interjected, turning his attention to him.

“What do you mean?” Said Laurence.

“Perhaps I should elaborate. As you said, the Pthumerian people are bound by their perceived duty to the Great Ones. Every one of them that remains alive today has a role in fulfilling this goal; weak or strong; royalty or commoner. Though they are dangerous and guard their domain with fervor, they still have some semblance of organization. Some of them can even be reasoned with, assuming they are not provoked.” Gehrman paused for a moment before continuing.

“Loran, on the other hand, enjoys no such structure. It was abandoned and lost to the sands of time long, long ago. Yet that does not mean that the land is devoid of life. It is simply life of a more…primitive nature.” Gehrman’s lips formed into a smirk, which hardly seemed appropriate considering what he was talking about.

“Monsters?” Laurence guessed.

“You can call them that. Personally, I prefer to call them beasts; less of a mouthful.” Gehrman replied, again, a bit too casually.

“Hold on. Surely, Loran is not the only place in which such ‘beasts’ can be found.” Laurence then pointed out.

“You are correct, but Loran by all accounts is their stronghold. In other parts of Pthumeru, they are often exterminated before they can gain a foothold, but there, nothing exists to contain them. As such, the only danger to the beasts are other beasts, each of which share one, simple goal - survival.” He could immediately recognize where Gehrman was going with this.

“And only the most adept can achieve that goal.” Said Laurence.

“Precisely. It is probable that the only creatures that you will find down there are the most well-suited to life in Loran, which naturally means that they are also the most dangerous.” Gehrman finally concluded, though far from making everything clearer as Master Willem had promised, it only left Laurence with more questions.

“How do you know all this?” He asked Gehrman.

“As I said, Master Laurence. I am a scholar as well. And in the same way your headmaster is fascinated by the more ethereal parts of Pthumerian society, I am fascinated by the beasts that lurk among them.” Was his explanation.

“I take that to mean this isn’t the first time you’ve gone on one of these expeditions?” Laurence concluded.

“No, it isn’t.” It was Master Willem who answered this time. “Gehrman has been a part of Byrgenwerth’s mission for a very long time. You and your fellows will be safe under his watch.” He added on, which reminded Laurence of the reason they were having this conversation to begin with.

“How much safer can we possibly be? We have an entire company of knights watching over us and with all due respect, Gehrman is but one man.” Laurence reminded him.

“Indeed, he is, and sometimes, that is all it takes to change the tide.” Master Willem pointed out.  “And besides, I did not expect for you to have so much faith in Cainhurst’s servants.” He then pointed out, seeming quite amused as well.

“And you do not? You were the one who hired them.” Laurence replied.

“Not exactly. We require Her Majesty’s patronage for our research and her consent in order to access the labyrinths; the presence of her knights is simply a part of our agreement that she insists upon, to ensure we do not venture where they don’t want us to. So, it has always been.” Master Willem sounded rather frustrated, which Laurence supposed wasn’t a surprise. He wasn’t fond of his research being impeded in any capacity.

“But they have not failed you yet, have they?” Laurence asked.

“Perhaps not, but it would be foolish to rely upon them forever. Think about it, Laurence. If they were to fail, or heavens forbid, decide you are no longer worth protecting, what do you think will happen?” The truth was, he could only see one thing happening, and it didn’t entail a pleasant fate.

Before he can really say anything, Nora meowed to signal her return, making her way over to where Laurence was sitting and taking her usual place on his lap. With a soft smile, he started lightly scratching behind her ear.

“You’ll look after her, won’t you, Master Willem?” He looked over to him and asked.

“I will, for as long as is necessary. You have my word.” He replied, prompting Laurence to give a small, acknowledging nod before he looked back down at his relaxing cat. He hated leaving her behind, but he knew it was necessary. Besides, this wasn’t the first time they’d been apart for a while; she’ll be fine.

Yes. She’ll be fine.

“Worry not, Master Laurence. You’ll see her again soon – that I can promise.” Gehrman spoke up, drawing his attention.

Admittedly, Laurence wasn’t quite sure how to reply to this. He knew that there was a chance that he could meet his end down in the labyrinths; they wouldn’t have had to find security for their travels if that wasn’t the case. But at the same time, how is it that this man in front of him could ensure their safety when several knights could not, especially against forces that even he acknowledges are dangerous?

Just who in the world was he?

Chapter Text

The day had arrived.

When Maria woke up that morning, she looked out the window to find a cloudy sky, with a fair amount of snow still covering the ground and rooftops. Thankfully, the weather otherwise looked clear: no rain, snow or wind, which would’ve impeded or outright delayed their travel. But that also meant that she had no time to waste. She might not have to depart until sundown, but there was still much to do.

Firstly, Maria set about ensuring that all she had packed was still in place. She couldn’t say it was much; ammunition, a personal canteen of water and provisions of preserved meat, dried fruit and flour. Keeping her knights well-fed on this mission was always going to be a challenge, as they could usually hunt or scavenge for food if their provisions ran low, but such a thing was not going to be possible in the labyrinths. The underground environment did not allow for traditional agriculture and whatever creatures were to be found down there were unlikely to be suitable for eating. As such, they could only stay there for as long as their food supply allowed.

Of course, that was not all that she would be bringing with her.

Behind a decorative room divider on the far side of her quarters was an area committed to her equipment. Here, one could find a chest in which she kept her decorative garb and a chest-high wooden drawer, upon which stood a small display stand, holding a double-edged weapon; on one end, a traditional saber and on the other, a dagger.

After quickly putting on her uniform, Maria carefully took her weapon of the display and carefully held it in her gloved hands. This was the Rakuyo, a weapon that was reserved for only the highest-ranking knights. But this one, in particular, was a family heirloom, once belonging to her late grandfather and his own ancestors before him. She remembered being fascinated by it as a young girl, watching as her grandfather carefully maintained it’s glistening shine, even though by that point it had not seen combat for decades.

Maria couldn’t help but smile as she looked down at the still stainless steel. Her grandfather had been the first to indulge her silly little fantasies in her youth, teaching her how to ride her first pony when she was little more than seven years old. That soon graduated into teaching her to fence, in secret of course, away from the ever-protective gaze of her mother. At the time, Maria simply thought saw these gestures as fun activities to pass the time, but she eventually discovered that this was far from the case. Her grandfather had taken notice of her enthusiasm for all things chivalrous and saw a goldmine of potential. She finally discovered the scope of his plans when he used his high standing in the royal court to grant her the chance to display her acquired skill in a contest for aspiring knights, one that she ended up handily winning.

That all seemed so long ago now. Before she knew it, her grandfather had passed away, leaving to her his highly cherished weapon; by then, she had more than earned the right to use it. To this very day, Maria continued to ensure it remained in pristine condition, taking time every day to clean and maintain it at her workstation. After all that he had done for her, it was the least she could do.

Her thoughts were suddenly interrupted by a knock on her door, which quickly reminded her of the task at hand.

“Who is it?” She called out, even if she had a good idea of who it could be.

“Your substitute, I suppose.” Was the reply, making Maria roll her eyes and smile.

“The door is open, Adrian.” She told her brother, who promptly entered her quarters. “Come to check on me, have you?” Maria asked as she set about putting on the holster for her firearm, known simply as Evelyn.

“And to tell you to hurry along, on behalf of your men, of course.” Adrian replied.

“Really - my men? I think we both know most of them haven’t even woken up yet.” She pointed out. Just one task of many she had to complete before they could depart.

“And why do you think I came so early?” Adrian asked.

“I don’t know. Perhaps you’re eager to be rid of me.” Maria replied, which elicited a small chuckle from him.

“Come now, you presume too much.” Adrian replied, leading to a brief period of silence where Maria finally managed to holster her pistol.

“Am I right to presume that you’ve begun your duties?” She turned around and asked him, more seriously this time.

“Indeed. My first and utmost responsibility is ensuring that you and your knights are well prepared for your impending journey. Oh, but you already knew that.” Of course, she knew. It was her responsibility.

“Yes. And I also know that you more than anyone is capable of fulfilling it.” She told her brother, who didn’t seem to take much solace from her words.

“But for how long, I wonder.” Maria knit her brow, finding it difficult to think of an appropriate response.

“Do not concern yourself with such things. Simply focus on the task at hand.” She advised him, though this didn’t seem to better matters.

“Easier said than done.” Maria then went up to him and placed her hands on his shoulders.

“I know. But if you can be certain of anything, let it be that I will return, one way or another.” She smiled at Adrian, hoping that her doing so would help him accept her words. Seconds of silence passed and, in the end, her brother’s only acknowledgement of what she had said was a simple, half-hearted nod.

The two siblings then went on to share a quiet, comforting embrace. As she held her twin brother in her arms, the smile that Maria had been wearing promptly vanished. The truth was, she couldn’t be certain of anything; whether she would find anything on this expedition or even whether she would return from it alive. For all she knew, this could be the very last time she would see Adrian, and the castle they called home.

But even so, she was a knight – both of them were. They accepted that their lives could be forfeit at any moment, yet did not let such fears impede their duty.

…

Elsewhere.

Laurence had never been someone who always had dinner, at least not a proper one. There was almost always something that he had to focus his energy on, tasks that would oftentimes last him long into the night, until the wax of his candles had all but melted away. But occasionally, he was able to indulge himself in a freshly cooked meal for himself that he could enjoy as he both unwinded from the day’s work and prepared for the work to come tomorrow. Today’s dinner was especially hearty; bread rolls, orange marmalade, a pair of hard-boiled eggs, a plate of salami and cheese, topped off with a cup of freshly brewed coffee. Yet in spite of the small feast he had prepared and the breathtaking sunset he witnessed as he ate, the professor was hardly in a rosy mood.

Part of it was due to the absence of his usual dining companion. Regardless of how busy he was, he made sure to prepare something for Nora to eat, assuming some unfortunate rodent didn’t come along and end up satiating her for him. At this time, she’d usually be resting by the window sill and enjoying the evening light. But of course, she wasn’t there this evening; she was at Master Willem’s estate, where she was no doubt doing something similar.

But it wasn’t just Nora’s absence that weighed down on Laurence, for today was the last time he would be able to enjoy this routine of his for the foreseeable future. Any meal he would have over the next several days would have to be shared with dozens of his fellow scholars, meals that were unlikely to contain foods he had prepared for himself. What was for certain, however, was that Laurence would be unable to see the sunrise, or indeed, the sky from which it shined. They were going deep underground, where no natural light could reach. When or if he would be able to look up and see the sun shining overhead, he did not know, which made having this last, fleeting moment of normalcy seem almost essential.

Once his dinner had concluded, Laurence had to wait at least a few hours before his duties would be required, which would be primarily focused on last-minute preparations for their journey. The first thing he did was make sure his own packing was complete. He didn’t take much with him; his spectacles, the odd change of clothes, a canteen of water and his personal journal, within which he would document whatever important information he could find. Most of the necessary supplies – things like food and shelter – had been provided by the university, but only as much as his company could reasonably carry themselves. And with their limited capacity, they couldn’t afford to leave anything behind, which was what Laurence would have to ensure.

But first, he had to kill some time, which he decided to do by treating himself to a warm bath – another luxury that he was unlikely to experience for a while -followed by a walk, which took him past most of Byrgenwerth College. They didn’t have a campus, per se; instead, the various buildings in which its faculty and students studied, lectured and socialized were scattered throughout Yharnam. Aside from its numerous lecture halls, Byrgenwerth boasted several libraries, a theater hall, a museum and even a botanical garden, all of which were usually open for public use as well. The contribution that the institution had made to the city over the years could not be understated.

Usually, the streets of Yharnam would be bustling with students, but as Laurence walked along the street, nary a soul could be seen bearing the college’s uniform. The reason for that was simple; it was the summer and most of the faculty was now more focused on research rather than teaching. There was still the odd class, of course, but they were typically led by more junior professors, especially now that a good number of the senior faculty was embarking on the very mission Laurence was leading.

Heaving a heavy sigh, the professor soaked in the familiar sights of Yharnam’s densely packed buildings, the gothic architecture rising high overhead. It was fairly easy to get lost here, but Laurence had grown very familiar with it over the years. To most, Byrgenwerth was a place of learning – a place to work and further your understanding of the world. But to Laurence, it wasn’t just that.

It was his home.

In time, Laurence would make his way to the college’s main building, located within Central Yharnam. As he approached, he could see a few horse drawn carriages already stationed in front of it, as well as a gathering of people standing close to the entrance. But these weren’t his scholars, but rather simple workers from the university’s equestrian center. And as he got closer, the professor could make out one, noticeably commanding voice.

“Alright, listen up. As you’re all aware, our scholars are going to be departing soon and its our responsibility to ensure that all of their provisions are met. Each of you has a task. These wagons you see before you are intended to transport not only them, but their supplies and it is our responsibility to ensure that these supplies meet the provided requirements. All that we need is meant to be found inside this building, but do not see that as an excuse to rush your tasks – doing so can potentially endanger the travelling scholars. Now get to work, all of you!”  

This address was given by the stablemaster, which was concluded by the time Laurence reached the entrance to the center. The master’s attention appeared to be squarely on his workers at the moment, which prompted the professor to try and get his attention.

“Good evening, Ludwig.” Upon hearing this, the stablemaster turned to look at him and warmly smiled at him.

“Ah, good evening, Professor. Here to conduct your inspection?” Ludwig asked as he turned fully around.

“I haven’t arrived too early, have I?”

“Oh, not at all. It’s much better to know whether we missed something sooner rather than later. My men will need a little time until they’re ready for inspection, but in the mean time, I can show you what we’re working with, if you so wish.” Ludwig motioned to the various carriages that he had assembled.

“By all means.” Said Laurence.

“Very well. And let me just say, you’ve put me through a lot of trouble for such a short journey.” Ludwig joked as they started walking, making the professor crack a smile.

“My apologies, but I did not set the requirements.” He reminded him.

“I know, I know. But in any case, we’ve done our utmost to meet them.” Ludwig gestured towards three stagecoaches that made up the front and middle of the procession, leading him towards them. “These are reserved for you and your party - each one can carry about six people, including two at the front. Who goes where doesn’t matter much, but I presume you’ll want the front seat in the front carriage.” The stablemaster climbed up into the vehicle as he said all this.

“Not exactly, but I’m sure everyone will expect me to be there.” Laurence replied.

“Yes, I’m sure.” He gestured down at the cushioned seat. “Here it is. Don’t worry, I made sure it was made especially clean just for you.” It was pretty clear that the stablemaster was teasing him.

“How kind of you, Ludwig.” He replied, which made him chuckle to himself.

“Don’t you mention it.” He said as he exited the stagecoach, after which Laurence’s attention turned to a wagon at the very end of the caravan.

“That one is meant for our supplies, I presume?” Laurence said as he motioned towards it.

“Indeed, it is. Normally, we’d keep everything in trunks and the like until their contents are need, but as you probably guessed that simply isn’t a possibility for where you’re going. So in lieu of that, everything’s going to have to go in knapsacks of varying size; when your fellows arrive, I’ll leave it to you to decide how the weight is distributed.”

“I’m sure they’ll be thrilled about that.” Laurence jested.

“Yes, it is an unfortunate, but necessary component of your mission. This sort of labor is more suited for a pack horse, but the underground is simply no place for them.” Ludwig was right, of course. Leading them underground was one thing, but ensuring even one of them survived down there would end up costing them more supplies than they would use on five men.

“Though, from what I hear, your destination is no place for men either.” Ludwig then added on.

“So, I’ve been told.” The professor said.

“And yet, here you are regardless. That says something.” The stablemaster pointed out, though Laurence could only scoff.

“Come now, it’s not like I’m going alone.” He said in reply.

“Indeed. Each of your followers show no small degree of courage by agreeing to partake in this mission, but agreeing to lead it? Well, that’s a whole other matter.” It was clear what Ludwig was insinuating and Laurence couldn’t say that he agreed with it.

“Someone has to.” Was all he said in response.

“But not everyone can. You would do well to remember that.”

Laurence found that he had no retort, because once again, Ludwig was right, at least in a way. Anyone could at least attempt to lead, but only a few could do so exceptionally. Pericles, Charlemagne, even someone like Martin Luther; their names had been inscribed into the fabric of history not only because they had a vision, but because they had the will to see that vision through.

As the silence lingered, Laurence suddenly made out the sound of galloping hooves. At first, he thought that their Cainhurst guards had arrived ahead of schedule, but it soon became clear that only a single rider was approaching. Both he and Ludwig turned towards the approaching horse, which slowed down to a trot before coming to a full stop a few steps away from them, with its rider looking down at them.

“Good evening, gentlemen.” He greeted them, still seated in his saddle.

“Gehrman.” Laurence greeted him. “You’re early.”

“I haven’t caught you at a bad time, have I? It’s just that I promised our stablemaster that I would return Baldric here before we left.” The professor could only look on in stunned silence as Ludwig nodded in understanding and made his way over to Gehrman.

“Much obliged. I take this to mean you’re finished running your ‘errands’?” Ludwig asked him.

“Indeed.” Gehrman disembarked. “And I must thank you for letting me borrow him. He’s a fine horse, but then again, there was never any doubt of that.”

“Whatever you say, Gehrman. Hitch him to one of the carriages for now and I’ll take him back to the stables after we’re finished here.” Ludwig then said.

“Of course.” Taking Baldric by his reigns, Gehrman led him over to the supply court in order to fasten him to it.

“And speaking of which, I should probably go and check on my men. Do excuse me for a moment.” Ludwig said after turning to Laurence, who was still trying to discern the all too casual interaction he had just witnessed.

“Oh, yes. Go right ahead.” Ludwig nodded his head and made his way over to the entrance of the main building before opening the door and disappearing inside, leaving the professor alone with the new arrival.

“Is everything alright, Master Laurence? You seem…perturbed.” Gehrman said to get his attention.

“I’m fine.” He assured him, briefly pausing before he spoke again. “I see you and Ludwig have already gotten acquainted.” Gehrman chuckled.

“Oh, me and your stablemaster go back a long way. Though, I was not aware that you and I shared a mutual friend. Perhaps we could’ve been properly introduced sooner.” He said as he finished hitching Baldric to the carriage and fully turned his attention to him.

“Perhaps so. Unfortunately, he made no mention of you.” This had been true for as long as Ludwig had been working in Byrgenwerth’s stables, which was as long as Laurence could remember.

But this simply brought up more questions. Primarily, how was it that Ludwig knew Gehrman, and for how long? He remembered Master Willem saying that his ‘acquaintance’ had been a part of Byrgenwerth’s mission for a long time; had he been here all along and Laurence had somehow never known?

Questions for later, Laurence decided.

“But in any case, I trust that you are well-rested?” The professor asked him.

“Oh, I’m as well as could be, young master. Truth be told, I’ve been rather looking forward to get an opportunity like this again.” This reminded him of a question that went unanswered during their last meaning.

“I recall Master Willem saying you’ve been aiding Byrgenwerth for a very long time. Just how many of these exhibitions have you gone on?” He questioned.

“Oh, too many to count. Believe it or not, I was partaking in them when your headmaster himself was still able to do so.” Laurence couldn’t say that he was too surprised to hear this. It was almost certain that Gehrman and Master Willem’s relationship stemmed from their shared research – research that the latter had been conducting for decades even before Laurence had first come to study under him. Still, that would mean that Gehrman had gone at least several dozen ventures before this one.

“Hm, I see. Then you must know them well. What can we expect?”

“That is rather difficult to say. Each time I have ventured there, hardly anything appeared the same as before, even when we seemingly started from the same point. Though, I suppose that’s why they call them ‘labyrinths’.” He paused to smile to himself before continuing.

“That being said, each journey was consistent in certain regards. For one, it would seem that the labyrinths themselves are just as oppressive as those that inhabit them, at least to some.” This caught Laurence’s attention.

“What do you mean?” “Well, let me put it this way. Does being virtually trapped underground for days on end sound pleasant to you?” He imagined this wouldn’t be a difficult question for anyone to answer.

“I cannot say that it does.” Laurence said, prompting Gehrman to continue.

“And that is perhaps the biggest danger that our destination presents. Even the strongest wills could crumble under that sort of pressure, which is exactly why one should never travel there alone. When you’re down there, your scholars will need each-other – and you – just as much as they need someone to protect them from harm.”

Clearly, Gehrman did not mean to mince words, not that he needed to. Laurence wasn’t naïve; he’d known from the beginning that this quest he was embarking on was not going to be an easy one, as did everyone who’d agreed to embark with him. And much like a captain navigating uncharted waters, it was his duty not only to guide his team through whatever danger awaited them, but also to ensure they were prepared to face these dangers head on. Only time would tell how well suited he was for such a task.

“On that note, I have something for you.” Upon saying this, Gehrman approached him and reached into his pack to take out a fairly small object, which upon closer inspection, Laurence identified as a sheathed dagger.

“Go on. Take it.” Laurence couldn’t bring himself to comply with Gehrman’s request, finding himself staring down at the weapon with a deep uncertainty.

“I’m sorry, Gehrman, but I can’t. I’ve never even held a blade such as this before.” He told him.

“Yes, I know. You are a man of healing and this is a tool primarily used to bring harm onto others. But there comes a time when someone or something intends to bring harm onto you and in a time like that, you are your own best hope for your survival. And make no mistake, young master. Where we’re going, you will need to fight to survive. And survive, you shall.”

Gehrman continued to present the dagger to him, waiting for Laurence to accept it. And eventually, he did, taking the weapon in his hand before carefully removing it from his sheath. He didn’t need to be a blacksmith to see that the blade was expertly crafted, with a wooden handle and a string of what appeared to be runes running along its center, engraved into its dark and unfamiliar metal.

“Where did you get this?” He asked Gehrman.

“I can only tell you where I got the materials for it, but I’m afraid that’s something of a trade secret.” Laurence looked up at him in surprise.

“You made this?” Gehrman gave him a rather proud nod.

“Indeed. I did not have as much time as I would’ve liked, but I’d say it came out well enough nevertheless.”  The professor looked back down at the weapon, which he now knew had been handcrafted just for him.

“I don’t know what to say.” “Nor do you need to. Master Willem has asked me to ensure your safety and this is but one step towards that goal.” He motioned to the dagger as he said this, which prompted Laurence to look down at it once again.

What could he even do with this, he wondered. He wasn’t even sure if he was gripping it properly, much less whether he could use it to repel an attacker. Though at the same time, he supposed that he was better off having it than not; at the very least, he would not be completely defenseless.

But even so, Gehrman had said himself that the foes that awaited them were most likely not going to be repelled with a simple dagger, which was why Master Willem had brought him onboard to begin with. He must have a fair bit of faith in the man in order to assign him to such a task, the professor thought to himself. But Laurence still wasn’t sure just what Gehrman was supposed to be. Was he a mercenary? A soldier? He and Laurence’s master seemed quite familiar with each other from what he remembered, but how had that come to be?

And above all, how would he be compared to their official protectors?

….

Chapter Text

“Attention!” Near the main gate of Cainhurst Castle, a company of a half-dozen knights dutifully stood by their horses, heeding Lady Maria’s call.

….

“Can I have your attention, please?!” The chatter and bustle just outside Byrgenwerth’s main hall quickly died down, with the gathered scholars turning their attention to Professor Laurence, who stood just by the main carriage.

….

“In short order, this gate will open and we will depart. It is my hope that each of you are well-rested and well-prepared, for the road ahead of us is long and indeed, perilous; our destination, our ancestral homeland. Each of you is familiar with its history – what led to it being reduced to a shell of its former glory. We, as knights of Cainhurst, are a continuation of that glory and piece by piece, we have been reclaiming that which our ancestors have proven to be unworthy of.” Pacing by her troops, she continued.

“And you, valiant knights, get to be part of our people’s most defining moment since they first escaped their underground home all those centuries ago. Despite our best efforts, despite countless painstaking excursions, the blood of Queen Yharnam remains lost to us, just like the child that it spawned. If we are to find it anywhere, it will have to be in the forbidden land of Loran, where no Pthumerian would dare to venture. But you are not like them. You are knights of Cainhurst – you are the most disciplined and refined warriors in our people’s long, proud history.”

….

“The day that each of you have been awaiting has finally come. Today, we descend into the old labyrinths in search of the secrets that Yharnam’s precursor civilization – the Pthumerians – left behind, following in the footsteps of countless scholars who came before us. Those of you gathered here know the truth that Master Willem uncovered oh so long ago - a truth that became the cornerstone of Pthumeru’s society and culture. But alas, many of their secrets were lost along with them, secrets that the scholars of Byrgenwerth have been working tirelessly to rediscover.” He continued.

“Which brings us to this mission we find ourselves embarking on today. We have long known of a settlement within the labyrinths known as Loran, but records of its existence remain scarce. What little we know points to a breakdown of social order and a widespread abandonment of the land, though the catalyst for these events remains unknown. As it is, none of our scholars have yet been able to travel there, in no small part due to such an excursion seeming far too perilous to undertake. If the Pthumerians themselves were afraid to venture there, then surely, we would have little hope of survival. But today, that all changes. This mission that you are joining me on is a historic one, which will take us where no scholar has gone before.”

….

“But of course, I would be remiss if I did not mention those who will be accompanying us – the scholars of Byrgenwerth. I am aware that many here have doubts about their presence, but do not forget, they are embarking with us by the grace of Her Majesty, the Queen and she has deemed it our duty to protect them from harm. Some of you may believe such a task to be beneath you, but their coming with us does not in any way detract from the significance of this mission. We have our goal and Provost Willem’s scholars have theirs; with any luck, this arrangement will benefit both of our parties.”

….

“Yet as you all know; we will not be alone in this undertaking. As per our agreement with the Queen, our travels will be overseen by a company of what she assures to be her most capable knights. Now, I know this arrangement may seem far from ideal, but I prithee remember that this expedition is only possible due to the support of the Crown. They control any and all access to the labyrinths and without them, our research would come to a grinding halt. As such, Master Willem has asked me to pass on a message that you cooperate with our benefactors however possible. Most of what we find, we’ll be able to keep, but there are certain items that Master Willem has agreed to grant our partners if we do come across them; if and when you do, you will be asked to surrender them. To some of you, such a prospect may seem unjust, but remember, the knowledge that we seek is worth more than any Earthly possession.”

….

“Then, there is the matter of who, or rather what awaits us below. You’ve all heard the stories. Mad wanderers, mindless sentinels and creatures unlike anything known to man: these are just a few of the foes we will encounter in our travels. Remember your training. Never engage what you encounter alone; always fight together. If one of you is wounded, the rest of your company will step in to protect you and ensure you are taken to safety. But above all else, do not initiate conflict unless it is absolutely necessary. The creatures you will encounter are unpredictable and will be relentless in their undertaking to slay you. Unless you can be assured of victory, do not provoke them. I cannot stress that enough.”

….

“Now, although we have put our physical safety in the hands of another party, that does not mean that our concerns end there. We have been provided enough food and supplies to reasonably last us two weeks of travel, but that is of course assuming that these supplies are managed responsibly. Rest assured that you and all of your fellow travelers will be fed and provided for – the only expectation is that you do not take more than is afforded to you. Failure to comply will result in your provisions being withheld in the instance of incident and every instance to follow until we can believe that you can be trusted. In order for this mission to be a success, we must remain undivided.”

“But let’s not dwell on the negative. If humanity ceased to take risks, there would be no discovery, no advancement. Instead, we would be trapped in a state of perpetual stagnation, letting their uncertainty and fear prevent them from taking the next necessary step even as it remains in plain view. And I invite you, dignified scholars of Byrgenwerth, to take that next step with me. Though I may be the one leading you down this uncertain path, understand that I do not know where it leads any more than you do, yet it is one that we must take all the same.”

Laurence paused and allowed his listeners a brief reprieve before concluding.

“After all, one cannot open another’s eyes without having their own be opened first.”

….

“Yet do not let what I have said dissuade you. Do not allow fear to cloud your mind. You find yourselves here today for a reason, for Queen Annalise herself has deemed you worthy of embarking on this mission…and I agree with her. But you do not find yourselves standing here before me because I believe you to be worthy; no, you are here on your own volition. That alone exhibits courage and conviction, but also, faith – faith in me as your commander.” She stopped her pacing then, fully turning towards the assembled knights.

“And I assure you that I do not intend to take this faith for granted. In accepting this responsibility, I have accepted the possibility of laying down my life and my honor in service to our Queen and our home. That acceptance is not one that is made lightly, but it is one we as knights must make, for there can be no glory in passivity.”

With her address concluded, Maria finally climbed onto her snow-white colored horse and looked back down at her company.

“Now, ride with me, oh noble knights. For the honor of Cainhurst!”  

Once her company had properly saddled up, they finally set out on the first stage of their journey, galloping across the extensive bridge that connected Cainhurst Castle to the rest of Yharnam. This took them through the sparsely populated Hemwick Charnel Lane, and after that, the city of Yharnam proper. By now, the sun was going down and the streets were mostly devoid of civilians, sans a few beggars or wanderers, which made their travels significantly easier.

Eventually, after making their way through the city’s almost maze-like array of streets, the college’s main building came into view, as well as a procession of carriages and a fairly sizable group of scholars, who quickly took notice of their approach and formed a procession for them. As this happened, one of them made his way to the front, whose identity Maria was able to ascertain far before she and her men came to a stop not far from him.

Motioning for her soldiers to stay on their horses, Maria quickly dropped down from hers and made her way over to the awaiting Professor Laurence, who bowed his head as she approached, his hands behind his back.

“Welcome to Byrgenwerth, Lady Maria. We’ve been awaiting you.” He politely greeted her.

“Hello, professor. How lovely to see you again.” She greeted him, coming to a stop just in front of him.

“Likewise, my lady.” He wore that same inviting smile that Maria remembered from the banquet, which made it rather difficult to tell whether he was saying this for the sake of cordiality or because a part of him had genuinely been looking forward to seeing her again.

In Maria’s case, it was a bit of both. She knew even before they had met that she would inevitably end up seeing him again, but after their initial meeting, she found that she was by no means opposed to the idea. Judging from their admittedly brief interaction, he seemed to be…pleasant company. Though, she supposed it helped that Laurence was rather handsome: an inviting smile, bright blue eyes and a height that was noticeable even in Cainhurst. But now wasn’t the time for pleasantries. 

“Are your scholars ready?” She decided not to waste any more time.

“Yes, they are.” Was his reply.

“Good. Then we depart immediately.” The professor nodded his understanding.

“Give me a moment.” He said before turning to face his scholars. “Listen up! In case you didn’t hear, we’re leaving. Lady Maria and her company will lead us to where we need to go – all you need to do is get onto your assigned wagon and do so swiftly. There’s no time to waste!”

Maria watched as the eight or so scholars that were there with Laurence listened to their leader’s order, with three of them being particularly close to him. One she remembered was named Micolash, a rather frail looking man who she understood to be Laurence’s second-in-command; additionally, there was a brown-haired woman – Caryll, supposedly – whom Adrian had for whatever reason deemed it necessary to warn her about. And the third…

“Wait.” Maria placed a hand on Laurence’s shoulder, forcing him to turn back to her in surprise and stopping his scholars in their tracks.

“What’s the matter?” The professor asked her.

“Nothing…yet.” Taking her hand off his shoulder, she walked past him and towards the unfamiliar figure, who calmly watched her approach.

“Who are you?” Maria demanded.

“Why, a scholar, of course. Gehrman is my name.” He replied, lightly tipping his hat to her.

“Do you intend to follow us into the labyrinths?” “But of course, my lady. Why else would I be here?” Was the stranger’s response to her questioning, which she found he gave rather calmly.

“I do not know. I did not expect to see someone like you here.” This wasn’t just because he hadn’t been present at the banquet, nor was it because she hadn’t been told he would be coming, but also because this ‘Gehrman’ was noticeably older than the rest of the scholars. Maria estimated that he could be no younger than sixty; what was someone of his age doing going on a mission like this?

“He is here on Master Willem’s insistence, Lady Maria.” It was Laurence who delivered this information, causing her to turn back to him. “Gehrman is a seasoned scholar; his accompanying us would greatly aid our research.”

Maria looked back to the stranger, whose lips had curled up in a small smirk. “I see.” She then observed the man for a few more moments as she tried to decide what to do with him.

“Very well. You may carry on.” She turned to Laurence and said.

“Thank you.” Maria noted a hint of relief in the professor’s words just before he and his companion headed off to their assigned carriage, leaving her to watch them go. Though naturally, most of her attention was focused on this mysterious ‘Gehrman’.

Even now, she wasn’t sure what to make of the man. Him appearing seemingly out of the blue was suspect enough, but even without that, Maria sensed that he was hiding something – something that not even Laurence seemed to be aware of. But whoever, or whatever he was, she did not have the time to dwell on it. She had a job to do.

Returning back to her horse, Maria climbed back onto it’s saddle and turned her steed around to observe both her men and the small procession of wagons they would be escorting.

“Now then, follow me! Our destination is not far.”

…

As their procession steadily moved through the streets of Yharnam, Laurence found himself sitting in the leading carriage that Ludwig had shown him earlier. Opposite him were Micolash and Caryll, both of whom were silently eyeing Gehrman, who was seated just beside him.

“So, Laurence…I don’t think you’ve introduced us to this new friend of yours either.” Micolash eventually said.

“Come now, Master Micolash. I am a friend to you all.” Laurence’s colleague was very clearly shocked hearing this.

“You know who I am?” Gehrman smiled. “Master Willem was very thorough.” He said.

“Master Willem? Is he why you’re here with us?” Caryll asked.

“Yes. My apologies for all the secrecy, but to make a long story short, your headmaster has asked me to accompany you - to keep an eye on things, so to speak.” Was Gehrman’s explanation.

“And is there a reason we’re only learning this now?” It was Micolash who questioned him this time.

“He thought it best that I don’t draw too much attention to myself. In his own words, ‘make it so they hardly even notice you’re there’.” This particular statement caught Laurence’s attention.

“And who is ‘they’ in this instance? Us or our partners?” He finally spoke up, shifting Gehrman’s attention to him.

“Both, but more so the latter.” Laurence had suspected as such. His guess had been that he would act as a passive observer except in the case of an emergency, possibly so he didn’t expose himself to the knights, whatever that would entail.

“Speaking of which, what can you tell me about this ‘Lady Maria’ character?” Gehrman suddenly asked him.

“Well, as you probably guessed, her and I are meant to share authority on this venture.” Laurence explained as briefly as he could.

“That’s not the only thing those two shared.” Caryll suddenly interjected, her tone and the smirk she had on her face clearly conveying her teasing intent.

“What does that mean?” Gehrman asked, clearly confused.

“Nothing. It means nothing.” Laurence quickly said before it went any further.

“Whatever you say, Laurence.” Caryll was very clearly amused by the situation, as was Micolash. It had become exceedingly clear that they would never let him live his actions at the banquet down.

“Anyway, the knights of Cainhurst answer to her and she answers to Queen Annalise. In essence, she is Her Majesty’s emissary.” He proceeded to explain to Gehrman, who appeared rather intrigued.

“I see. Most interesting…” He seemed to say more to himself than anything else. Of course, there was no doubt far more to Maria than Laurence knew right now, things that could only come to light in time.

Eventually, their carriage came to a stop and soon after, he could hear Lady Maria call out to them.

“This is as far as the horses can take us! We will have to make the rest of the way on foot!” Not long after she said this, the door to their carriage was opened by one of the knights; a bright-haired man who bore the same ornate black and red garb he had seen before.

“Come along.” He said, after which Laurence and the others exited the carriage.

Laurence recognized right away that they were on Yharnam’s Great Bridge, which itself connected Central Yharnam to a district known as the Cathedral Ward, aptly labeled as such because this part of the city was home to perhaps its most recognizable landmark – the Grand Cathedral, which stood at the highest point of the city. From what he understood, it was originally constructed with the intention of serving as a center for the Christian faith, which remained prominent in the states that surrounded Yharnam.

Yet despite that, the Cathedral saw very little activity, nor did the monarchy seem all that committed to the faith. The few crosses and chapels one could find were there almost strictly for the sake of appearances, as in truth, no church or faith held dominion over Yharnam. If Laurence were to guess, the monarchy simply masqueraded as followers of the faith as a means of diplomatic survival, for if their true belief system came to light, they would almost certainly be branded as heretics and be wiped off the face of the Earth. Of course, such actions were only indicative of the inherent ignorance of the world beyond – an ignorance that has permeated from the first pagan deities of Sumer all the way to the organized churches of today. For all their faith, humanity had yet to unlock the secrets of the world.

Looking off to the side, he could see the rest of his scholars were all but finished exiting their carriages, which would allow for the next stage of the process to begin.

“Ludwig!” He called out. Just off to his right, the stablemaster dropped down from the coachman’s seat and went up to him, leaving one of his workers behind to handle the reins.

“Need help distributing the supplies, professor?” He asked him.

“Yes. Come with me – the rest of you as well.” Laurence then started making his way to the center of the procession, with Ludwig and the others in tow.

“Scholars of Byrgenwerth! Your attention, please!” All those gathered on the bridge turned their attention to him right away. “Though you are surely eager to conclude this initial phase of our journey, there is one more crucial step that we need to take. Each of you has been assigned a set of supplies to carry; I ask that you follow me to the wagon at the end of this caravel and collect them. Do so in an orderly fashion – let us not spend any more time on this than we have to.”

From there, Laurence aided Ludwig and his men in unloading the various travelling bags that had been prepared. Within these pieces of luggage was food, water, medical supplies, pillows and blankets to use for sleeping and even a few tents, among various other tools they would need to survive in the labyrinths. Not one to place the burden solely on others, Laurence was given his own load to carry; it was by no means a huge bag, but it was nevertheless somewhat heavy, having been filled to its utmost capacity. But by splitting the weight amongst themselves like this, they could at least ensure that they could make their way through the labyrinths at a reasonable rate and hopefully not allow themselves to fall victim to fatigue.

Once everyone had received their provisions, Ludwig once again approached him. “Well, I’ve done all I could. I wish you all the best of luck.” He said to them.

“Thank you, Ludwig.” Said Laurence, sharing a smile with him as he placed a hand on the stablemaster’s shoulder, a gesture that he returned in kind. As this happened, Lady Maria approached them, with her white horse in tow.

“We will have to get moving soon. I’m assuming that we are to leave our horses with you?” She said to Ludwig.

“That is correct. We’ll take them back to our stables and house them until your return. I will see that they are treated well.” The stablemaster replied.

“Very well.” Maria held out the reins of her horse to him and upon accepting them, she turned in order to stroke the animal’s neck and mane. “Be good, Siegward.” She softly said, with the animal bringing its head closer to her as a response to the affection. Though she remained composed, it was clear that she parted from her steed with a heavy heart.

She would eventually allow Ludwig to lead Siegward away, after which he finger-whistled to get the attention of his men.

“Right then, you all know what you have to do! These horses need a place to stay while their masters are away and we’re going to provide it! Remember, that these just aren’t any horses, so handle them with great care!” In turn, several men came down from the carriages and moved to claim one of the horses from the knights, who dutifully handed over the reins. As Laurence watched this unfold, he turned to look at Lady Maria, who was still looking as Ludwig led her horse away.

“Worry not, my lady. They’re in good hands.” He assured her, causing her to turn towards him.

“I’m sure.” She didn’t sound entirely convinced, not that it really mattered.

“Oh, but never mind that. We must move on.” Maria then said.

“Of course. Where do we go from here?” He asked her.

“Down this way.” She pointed to a nearby staircase, which seemed to lead into a building right next to the bridge. “There’s a path that will take us to a lift and beyond that, another bridge just past the aqueduct; that will take us where we need to go.”

“The Tomb of Oedon.” Laurence concluded for her.

“Indeed. And once we get there, the real journey begins.”

Once everyone was ready, Maria and her knights escorted them down into the dimly lit and seemingly abandoned building below, which led to a wide-open area that took them to the lift she had mentioned before. It took several back-and-forth trips before everyone was brought down to the lower level, but once they did, they were able to make their way across the bridge. At this point in the day, the city had all but fallen silent, with the only discernible noise being the steady stream of water from the aqueduct below. But at the same time, one was unlikely to find anyone in this area of the city, even during the busiest hours of the day.

In time, they found themselves entering what could only be described as a graveyard. Tombstones littered the plot of land and at its center, a large ornate structure resembling an obelisk, which was built around a stone statue of a man wearing a cloak and a hood, whose identity was a mystery.

“So, this is the Tomb of Oedon.” Laurence said, having never been to this location before.

“Yes. This was where the first Pthumerians descended below and from where the first Yharnamites emerged. There are many other tombs like it, but this one lies at the very center of the network of tunnels that have been carved out below.” Maria explained as she approached the structure.

“Yes, yes, very interesting. But how do we get in?” Micolash impudently asked, which made Laurence give him a warning glare.

“Don’t be hasty, professor. A seal has been placed on these tombs, one that we must first break if we wish to enter.” Lady Maria turned back around and looked over to two of her men.

“Emil. Harold. It is time.” Two knights broke away from the group and made their way past her towards the structure. Both of them were carrying a bag that was strung over their shoulder, from which he saw one of them take something out and place it down in front of the monument; after he stepped back, Laurence spotted an object that resembled a chalice, only with what seemed like a human skill carved into the stem instead of a usual bowl.

“Pay attention. This bit’s important.” Gehrman whispered from behind them.

The next thing that the two knights took out looked to be a handful of withered flowers and after that, a single vial containing a red liquid. The substance in question was of course blood, but it seemed to be of a special variety, for it seemed to be pulsing within its container, as if it were somehow alive.

As all this was happening, Laurence heard a quiet, yet discomforting noise coming from his right. Turning towards it, he found Caryll with her eyes shut, placing a hand to her temple as if she were contending with some sort of headache.

“What is it, Caryll? Are you alright?” He asked in a quiet voice, not wanting to draw any attention to her. Taking notice of him, she opened her eyes, took a deep breath and strengthened herself out.

“I’m fine, it’s nothing.” She must’ve known that her answer wasn’t all that convincing, but there wasn’t much Laurence could do at that moment besides taking her word for it. From the looks of things, the ritual was all but complete.

The knights placed the bundle of withered flowers within the chalice’s “mouth” before handing the vial to Lady Maria, who herself approached the monument.

“In the name of the Old Lords, in the name of the true descendants of the Pthumerian line, may the path to the homeland be revealed once more!” Tipping the vial to the side, she let the blood flow out into the chalice’s awaiting maw, pouring over the withered flowers as it dripped inside.

At first, nothing happened, but then suddenly, the flowers seemed to revive before their very eyes; after a while, they went into full bloom, revealing a blood-red center surrounded by pale-white petals. Yet almost as soon as it bloomed, the flower disappeared in a bright flash of light and a loud sound that resembled the ringing of a bell. That left only the chalice, with an eerie white mist pouring out of the skull’s mouth and eyes.

“Was that it?” He heard Micolash say.

“Yes. It should be ready for use now.” Maria replied. Admittedly, the ritual had been far simpler than Laurence expected, but even though it had concluded, he could not see a way for them to reach the labyrinths.

“So, what’s next?” He asked Maria, who looked over in his direction.

“Come to me.” She said after a brief pause. Slightly taken aback, Laurence looked back to Gehrman, who gave him an affirming nod, after which he decided to comply with the request.

“Now, all you have to do is simply kneel down and hold out your hand to the chalice; after that, wait a few moments and the process should be complete.” She explained to him.

“Is it that simple?” “It is that simple.” She confirmed.

Laurence then looked down at the chalice. With all the secrecy that surrounded the labyrinths, he would’ve thought that the process to access them would be a little more complicated than this. But perhaps this simplicity was the very cause for the secrecy. With the correct materials, he hypothesized that just about anyone could make use of them.

In any case, the professor set about following Lady Maria’s instructions, kneeling down in front of the chalice and reaching for it, stopping just as his hand was about to touch it. Seconds ticked by and yet nothing happened, which made him wonder whether he was doing something wrong.

“Wait for it.” He heard Maria say.

As Laurence continued to wait, he noticed an ethereal white light emerging from the ground around him and very soon, he found himself being enveloped in it. In an instant, he felt as if he was drifting into a deep sleep - being pulled into another plane of existence as whisperings in a language he couldn't even begin to comprehend erupted around him. The last thing he saw was his hand dematerializing right in front of his eyes, which happened so quickly that panic did not even have time to manifest.

And just like that, he was gone.

....

Only for Laurence's consciousness to return just as suddenly as it had faded, leaving him disorientated as he tried to make sense of what had just happened. A simple glance confirmed that he was no longer in the Tomb of Oedon. Instead, he found himself in a wide corridor, with a thick layer of sand on the floor and roots growing over the walls. The air was thick and humid, accompanied by what seemed to be a steady wind, blowing sand across the floor and through the air.

Pulling up his hood in order to protect his face and eyes from the blowing sand, the professor attempted to rise to his feet, which resulted in him experiencing a sudden rush of vertigo. He stumbled over and leaned against a nearby pedestal in order to regain his composure. If he had to describe it, he felt much like one would when one was suddenly roused from sleep, leaving their body to slowly adjust to the change.

Except, he hadn’t been sleeping, had he? Truth be told, he wasn’t quite sure what had happened to him.

As some semblance of normalcy returned to him, Laurence heard something coming from behind him; that same ethereal sound he had heard back in the Tomb. Turning around, he found several rays of bright white light – just like the ones that had enveloped them in the Tomb of Oedon – had started rising from the ground. Only a second later, a figure appeared within this sphere of light and almost instantly rose to their full height. This was of course Lady Maria, who looked around the room before her eyes settled on him.

“So, you made it.” She said.

“You sound disappointed.” He noted.

“Not at all.” For the next few seconds neither of them said anything, during which she seemed to take note of his predicament. “Feeling lightheaded?”

“Just a bit, but I should be right as rain soon enough.” Laurence couldn’t help but notice that she didn’t seem affected by the same ailments and if she was, she was hiding them rather well. Still, her question suggested familiarity with this ‘side-effect’ of the process.

“What happened, exactly?” He asked her.

“We broke the labyrinth seal, or bypassed it, anyway. My ancestors left them in place to ensure that whatever or whoever still dwelled here could not escape; the ritual like the one you just witnessed was their way to ensure we could still return while keeping the seals in place.”

“I see.” That still left one question. “But if that’s the case, how are we meant to leave?”

“Behind you.” Laurence once again turned to find that the pedestal he had used to support his weight was actually a sort of altar, which was located at the base of a stone carving depicted several robed figures, each with a somewhat ghoulish expression. Somehow, it was also decorated with several burning candles.

“This altar serves as a link to the chalice we left in the Tomb of Oedon. So long as it's active, we may use this altar to transport us back above ground.” Maria briefly explained as she came to stand beside him.

“And how long will that be?” “Fret not. As long as it isn’t removed from its spot, we will be able to leave at any time.” Laurence turned his gaze towards her, more than aware of why she chose to frame her answer this way.

“Good. Then we won’t have to rush things.” He replied. Silence once again settled over the sandy room, during which no one else was transported inside.

“Speaking of which, when can we expect the others to get here?” He had expected them to start turning up as they spoke, but so far, it was still just him and her.

“Oh, well, you see, the problem with this method is that it can only transport one person at a time. And while the process may’ve felt almost instantaneous for you, it…may take a minute or two for the process to conclude.” She sounded none too pleased to reveal this, a feeling that Laurence immediately found he shared.

“Wonderful…” He groaned, which made Maria smile.

“Yes. I advise that you make yourself comfortable. We will be here for a while.” She said to him.

“Don’t worry. I think I have a way to pass the time.” Laurence took off his knapsack and set it down on the ground beside him in order to lessen the load. After this was done, he dug into his personal satchel and took out his journal, as well as a pencil. Looking back up, he saw Lady Maria still standing by the altar, eyeing him with a curious look.

“Um…excuse me.” She raised a brow at him.

“Excuse me ?” Lady Maria sounded more confused than offended.

“I just want a good look at the altar and well…” He motioned to the side with his pencil. “I’m going to have to ask that you stand aside.” She appeared rather surprised by this request, which momentarily made Laurence think that he stepped out of line.

“Oh. Of course, by all means.” Maria eventually replied, stepping off to the side and motioning for him to come over. Nodding his thanks, Laurence approached the altar and started carefully looking it over in detail before turning his gaze down to his journal and preparing his pencil.

“Do you intend to take notes?” He heard Maria ask from off to the side, who had by now brandished what looked like a saber.

“Something of the sort. But they’re…visual notes, so to speak.” He replied.

“You mean to say you’re going to draw it.” She said after a brief silence, motioning to the altar with her weapon.

“Are you warning me against it?” Laurence said with something of a smirk on his face, meeting her eyes after looking at her weapon, which made her produce a smile of her own.

“Not at all. Have at it.” Maria’s attention turned to her weapon, which she started to clean with a piece of cloth, which allowed Laurence to turn his own attention back to the altar.

Putting the pencil to the page, the professor started drawing a rough outline of the carved image above the altar, which depicted what looked like a group of hooded figures looking up at the heavens. From what he understood, similar images could be found at the altars in other parts of the Labyrinths that Byrgenwerth’s scholars had been allowed to visit in the past, but no one had yet to decipher who these carvings were meant to represent.

“Do you do this sort of thing often? Drawing, I mean.” Maria suddenly asked him, breaking his focus.

“When I have the time.” He said with a shrug. “It helps take my mind off things, though I can’t really say I’m much good at it.”

“I am in no position to make a judgement on that.” Maria said as she continued to clean her weapon. Speaking of which, he noticed that the saber he had seen earlier was somehow connected to another smaller blade.

Well, this was certainly an interesting situation he was in, Laurence thought. Making small talk about his hobbies in an ancient ruin, with a knight, no less. Still, perhaps he should just turn his attention back to his drawing. Or maybe…

“Nor am I in a position to judge the quality of your weapon. Even so, it is of a rather…interesting make.” He commented. Her weapon was the first thing that sprang to mind when thinking of a way to continue the conversation, which he decided to go along with.

“I did not design the weapon. I merely wield it.” Was her reply, which seemed to suggest she recognized the peculiarity of her choice in arms.

“To great effect, I would presume.” Laurence said as he continued his drawing, though this did not stop him from noticing Maria’s head turn back towards him.

“You will see for yourself soon enough.” He smiled to himself upon hearing this, but kept his attention on his sketch.

“Though, I see you’ve tried to come prepared yourself.” He quickly realized that she was referring to the dagger that Gehrman had given him earlier that day, whose sheath was now attached to his belt.

“Oh, you mean this?” Laurence said as he took hold of the dagger’s handle. “I was told it would be a good idea to bring something like it along.”

“Perhaps. But I’m going to have to ask that you refrain from any heroics, for your own sake.” There was a hint of warning in her voice, which he supposed was to be expected.

“By all means, my lady. I shall leave the heavy lifting to you.”

With that, he finally turned his attention back to his sketch and likewise left Lady Maria to her own devices. He recognized that this was the calm before the storm; once everyone had joined them, they would set out and be confronted with the dangers that lurked within this ancient and all but forgotten land. Only time would tell whether they could weather this storm, but either way, they first had to face it.

...

Chapter Text

In time, the rest of their respective teams would be transported into the chamber one by one; once enough of them had arrived, both Laurence and Maria organized a roll-call to make sure everyone was present and accounted for.

“All accounted for here. What about you?” Lady Maria eventually announced.

“Let’s see…” Laurence looked over the gathered group of scholars, who stood in a straight line just in front of him.

“We appear to be one short.” He eventually announced.

“Who are you missing?” Almost as soon as Maria asked this, yet another sphere of light appeared on the ground, within which the form of a man started to take shape. This soon revealed to be the older scholar she’d confronted earlier - Gehrman, she remembered he was called -who rose to his full height and stretched out his shoulders and arms, appearing more like he was stepping out on his porch on a pleasant summer morning rather than an underground labyrinth.

“Ah, how refreshing.” All those gathered in the chamber now had their attention on Gehrman, who soon relaxed his posture as he went over to join Laurence and the rest of his scholars.

“Well, I suppose that’s everyone now.” He finally replied to Maria’s earlier question, looking over to her side of the chamber.

“In that case, we can finally get moving.” She told him.

“Lead the way.” Laurence prompted in return.

Motioning to her men to follow her, Lady Maria went through the narrow doorway, with Laurence and his team following suit. The passageway led to another, albeit much larger corridor. Despite the visible age and overgrowth of the hall, the scent within was surprisingly pleasant, which she knew to be due to the numerous censers that hung from the ceiling, which were still producing smoke. But this smoke was not the result of a fire, but rather, the burning of a special kind of incense, which repelled beasts from this part of the labyrinth.

The group of travelers soon turned the corner and found themselves confronted by a metallic door; it did not appear to have any handles or attached mechanisms that would allow anyone to open it. Once they were close enough to it, Maria put up a hand to get everyone to stop before turning around to face them.

“Before we go any further, I must warn you all now. Past this point, you will need to remain ever vigilant; do not drop your guard for even an instant. Knights, ready your weapons and wait for my order. Scholars, remain here for now and allow us to clear out any threats; only enter once we tell you to. Understood?” This last question was very clearly directed at him.

“Understood, Lady Maria.” He replied.

“Good. Now, prepare yourselves.” She said before turning towards the door blocking their path.

Getting down in a squatting position, Maria reached for the bottom of the door with her hands; with an audible exertion of effort, she started to lift the metal structure upwards, which she got it up to her chest before giving it one last overhead push which send it straight up, with clusters of dust and gravel falling to the ground around her. Without even having to recover from this impressive feat of strength, she quickly brandished her sword and turned her head towards her company.

“Follow me, slowly.” She said in a quiet voice.

Cautiously leading the knights through the doorway, they made their way through another narrow passageway before they found themselves in a vast, open area. Rectangular pillars rose up high to the ceiling far above, from which the odd ray of natural light shone down from holes that had formed there. And wandering around these pillars was a sizable group of hunched, hooded figures, who had seemingly not yet taken notice of their presence.

Lady Maria once again motioned for everyone to stop as she eyed the mysterious congregation. Turning her head to them, she put a finger to her lips to warn everyone to stay quiet before making a set of gestures to her men. Once this concluded, the knights split apart into three groups: three of them moved to the left to the room and another three to the right, with Lady Maria herself approaching from the center, backed by the rest of her company. There was no discernable way for them to clear them all out silently, but they could at least catch them by surprise.

By the time Maria spotted the hooded figure who was blending in with the left side wall, it was too late. It rose up as the knights wandered by none the wiser and let out a loud, inhuman screech, which echoed through the halls and immediately alerted the other dwellers in the hall.

“All of you, to me! NOW!!” Lady Maria quickly called out to her men, who quickly clustered together near the center of the room, weapons at the ready as the congregation slowly approached them.

“Pick a target and attack. Do not hesitate!” With the order given, each knight broke away to focus on a singular opponent, each of whom stood their ground and prepared for battle, with a few even screeching in challenge.

Eyeing a particular figure near the pillar, Maria split her Rakuyo in two and tightly gripped it as her and the creature circled each-other. It was significantly larger than its followers, with sharpened claws, glowing red eyes and a beastly visage that gnarled at her from beneath its hood, with a strange purple liquid oozing from its maw. If she had to guess, this was the head of the pack.

Eventually, the creature moved in and swiped at her with her claws, an attack that she managed to easily anticipate and evade, before just as quickly moving in herself and slashing at her beastly opponent with both of her weapons. Taking full advantage of its broken defenses, Maria followed up with several more slashes of her blades, each one leaving a gash and eliciting a cry of pain from her opponent, but not enough to slow it down. Now recovered, the beast retreated but did not retaliate, seemingly weighing its options.

“Captain, behind you!” Maria was just able to evade a lunging attack from one of the smaller creatures, which no doubt intended to protect its leader. Turning on her hill, she reattached the two parts of the Rakuyo and swung at the creature, which didn’t even have time to react before its head was cut clean off. Hearing movement from behind her, she quickly drew her Evelyn and fired at another approaching beast, stopping it dead in its tracks and allowing her to rush forward with another swing, slicing it in half at the waist.

Taking advantage of her distraction, the larger creature attempted to move in and grab her, which she just narrowly avoided, leading to it stumbling right past her. Not wasting any time, Maria acted, plunging her sword through the beast’s exposed back and as it wailed in pain, detached the dagger with her free hand and plunged it into the back of its head with a sickening crunch, ceasing its noise immediately. Getting her weapons free, she allowed the beast to crumple lifelessly to the ground, blood oozing from its two gaping wounds.

Looking around, she found that the rest of its pack had themselves been slain, with her men standing over their corpses.

“Any wounded?” She called out.

“No, captain.” One called out. “None here, captain.” Said another. When the calls ceased, Maria then turned to the knight that had warned her of the incoming attack, who was holding a bloody Reiterpallasch.

“What about you, Matthias?” She asked him.

“All is well, Lady Maria.” He assured her. “And yourself?”

“Unharmed. My thanks for your warning.” Matthias acknowledged her statement of thanks with a bow of his head. “Of course, my lady.” He said before offering her a soft smile.

Matthias had always been a valiant knight, something that she had keenly observed as she oversaw his training. Maria had observed similar qualities in each of his fellows present here today, but he had proven himself exceptionally during his service to Cainhurst, which was exactly why he was chosen to be her second for this expedition.

A few moments later, Lady Maria turned back to the way they came in. “The room is clear. You may enter!” She called out to the scholars and soon enough, she could see Professor Laurence leading them into the room. As they made their way over, they did their best to avoid the bloodied remains of the creatures, all except one – Gehrman. Where his fellows looked down at the beasts with a mixture of terror and amazement, there was no sense of awe about him. In fact, the only thing she could discern from him was a sense of pity.

However, this wasn’t entirely the case. There was one other scholar among them who seemed more curious about the beasts, going up to one of them and crouching down to observe it. She had noticed him before, particularly because, in stark contrast to the rest of Byrgenwerth’s representatives, he appeared to be of Oriental descent.

“By the heavens, the legends are true.” He said to himself.

“Be careful, Lobsang. Try not to get too close.” The head professor advised.

“Relax, Master Laurence.” Gehrman said as he joined who she presumed was Lobsang. “She can’t hurt anyone anymore.”

Lobsang looked up in surprise. “She?”

“Aye. With this breed of beast, it's easy to tell the genders apart; the females tend to be bigger and naturally, stronger.” The older scholar explained.

“But they were not born that way, are they? This… thing was a woman once, was it not?” In response, Gehrman simply frowned.

“Different people were affected by the scourge in different ways. Some transformations were more severe than others.”

Lobsang then looked back down at the beast. “And more painful.” He said more as a statement than as a question.

“Very likely, yes.” Gehrman said. “Nasty business, but I’m afraid they will not afford you the same pity you do them. They are governed now only by the basest of instincts.”

This was something that he clearly wanted everyone gathered there to take heed of, but it was something that Maria didn’t need to be told. Regardless of who these creatures were before the scourge took hold, that which made them human no longer exists.

“As insightful as that is, we mustn’t dwell on it. We should keep moving.” She said after a momentary pause.

“Get moving where? We saw a passageway at the other end of the room, but it’s gated off.” She heard Laurence ask her and just as she was about to reply, Gehrman suddenly started speaking.

“Then we aren’t meant to head that way, at least not yet. It is locked by a mechanism hidden somewhere around here; we will have to find and activate it before we can go any further.” He briefly and accurately explained, which took Maria completely by surprise.

“Yes, that’s exactly it.” She confirmed, continuing to eye Gehrman suspiciously. Professor Laurence had said he was a senior scholar, which she took to mean he had been to a previous excursion here before, if not several.  

“And what of that other passageway back by the altar? Where does that lead?” It was Micolash who made this inquiry.

“We are unlikely to find the mechanism there, but what we are likely to find there are artifacts – no doubt well guarded ones.” She replied to him.

“But I presume it would be better that we unlock the following area first?” Laurence said.

“I believe so. But worry not, you will get the chance to explore this labyrinth in its entirety…in time, of course.” She replied.

Suddenly, she heard a voice coming from behind here. “Captain! Over here!” It was Matthias. Through the thin layer of fog that had settled over the area, she could see him standing in front of what looked like a ladder and just beside that, another passageway.

“So, two paths. Which one do we take?” Micolash asked.

“I cannot say for certain. Either one may lead to what we are looking for and if not that, perhaps something else worth searching for.” Said Maria.

“If that’s the case, then may I suggest that we split up? Having two groups exploring both paths simultaneously will save us valuable time as opposed to if we all remained together.” Laurence spoke up.

“What you propose is dangerous, Professor. None of us know what lies in wait in these halls.” She told him.

“I am aware. Which is why we must tread carefully.” He replied, leaving it to her to consider his suggestion further.

He was of course correct that they would be able to find what they were looking for and cover more ground faster if they split up, but at the same time, if the scholars separated, then her men would have to separate as well. This usually wouldn’t be too much of a problem, but in this environment, they stood far more of a chance if they stayed together.

After mulling it over for a couple more moments, she reached her decision.

“Very well. We will do it your way.” She said, earning a few surprised stares from her men. “Matthias. Take Robert and Emil to scout out the path on the upper level.” Her second dutifully nodded his head.

“Very well. And what about you, Captain?” He asked her.

“I will do the same on this level. Once we’re done, we will rendezvous back here.” Upon saying this, she turned her attention back to Laurence.

“Well then, Professor, what of you?” After a few moments of silent consideration, he turned to one of his followers.

“Micolash.” The clearly eager scholar stepped forward. “Yes?”

“I want you to take a group to the upper level. Lobsang, Damian, Norbert: you three go with him. The rest of you, come with me. But regardless of which path you’re taking, remember to keep yourselves out of harm’s way; as Lady Maria said before, allow our guardians to deal with any trouble. The work we’re doing here is important, yes, but surely I need not tell you that our findings will be worthless if we do not live to tell about them.”

He then turned his gaze back to her, nodding to signify she could commence her scouting, which she returned in kind. Before doing anything else, she glanced at Matthias to signal they were to break apart, which allowed him and his two compatriots to start making their way to the ladder.

“You stay down here for now. We will inform you when it’s safe to climb up.” She heard him tell Micolash just before he started climbing up the ladder, with the two others waiting for their turn to do the same. Maria then prepared to make her way into the corridor before her.

“Oh, and Captain.” It was Matthias again, who had stopped partway through his climb to take off a still lit lantern that was hanging from the ladder, which he held down to her. “Here. Something to light the way.” After staring at the offering for a few moments, she accepted it.

“Thank you.” With another nod, he continued his ascent, leaving her holding the lantern. Once he had ascended out of view, she turned back to the rest of her company. “Come along. Keep your weapons at the ready.”

With that, they cautiously entered the corridor. It was devoid of any source of light and a sort of mist hung over the area, which made the lantern that Matthias had given her especially useful as they tried to spot anything that could pose a threat. Even after turning the corner, she could not see nor hear any sort of beast, which seemed to indicate that the coast was clear. She then turned around and silently motioned for Professor Laurence and his scholars to follow them, waiting for them to catch up.

After turning another corner, Maria spotted another doorway, beyond which lay a will-lit area, which naturally became their next destination.

“Wait here.” She once again told the scholars before her and her men started making their way to the next room.

“Now, hold on just a moment!” Maria stopped and turned to find that Gehrman had broken away from the group and was moving towards them.

“What are you doing? I thought I told you to wait.” She reminded him, more than a little peeved.

“You did, but I feel you’d do well to heed your own advice for a moment.” He replied, stopping just a few steps away from her.

“Is that so? Would you care to tell me how?” In response, Gehrman simply smiled.

“Simple. Just look up and then down.” As he said this, he motioned in the direction they were heading towards.

Though confused by his suggestion, she complied with his instructions and looked towards the ceiling, holding her lantern up high to help see more clearly. At first, she couldn’t spot anything out of the ordinary, but eventually something caught her eye; it was a large steel, bladed object resembling a guillotine, which blended in well with its misty surroundings. Looking down, she was able to spot a floor tile that rose just a bit higher than the rest, which must’ve been what triggered the blade to fall. Just one more step and it would’ve come down on her with lethal force.

“A rather ingenious trap. It’s as if they knew those who would venture here would be far too focused on what lies ahead that they’d lose sight of anything else.” Gehrman commented as he came to stand beside her.

“Yes, yes, it’s all very profound. All it shows is that we must remain vigilant.” She replied before she prepared to go around the trigger.

“Wait. You hear that, don’t you?” Gehrman said to stop her and sure enough, she could hear the faint sound of footsteps, as well as a series of animal-like growls. Something quite large was waiting for them.

“Now, now, before you do anything hasty, consider the options you have at your disposal. Is a full-on attack really your best option here?” He stopped her from moving forward once again, making her grow all the more impatient with his lecturing.

“Do you have a better idea?” Instead of offering a verbal response, Gehrman simply smiled, turned his head towards the passageway and placed his fingers to his mouth to let out a loud whistle, an action that shocked Maria to her core.

“Have you lost your mind?!” She cried out as she hastily gripped her weapon, knowing full well that his action had alerted whatever awaited them.

“Ah, ah, wait for it.” He replied, remaining just as calm as he was before, even as the sound of dragging claws grew closer.

Soon, Maria spotted a creature emerge from the pillowing smoke from the next room; a large, lanky creature only loosely resembling a wolf, which stood and moved on all fours. Saliva dripped from its snout as its glowing yellow eyes spotted them, letting out a growl as it slowly started to approach them. The creature continued to get closer and still, Gehrman did nothing, with every passing second eroding Maria already stretched patience. But even as she was about to rush towards the beast, he stopped her by putting an arm in front of him.

“Just a little longer.” He insisted, keeping his eyes squarely on the beast.

Once it became clear to it that no one intended to attack it, the beast rushed towards them, ready to rip them to shreds. Yet as soon as it lunged at them, Gehrman finally acted, pushing down on the triggering floor-tile with his left foot. A sound resembling a bell echoed through the hall as the blade dropped down on the unsuspecting beast’s head, with the force of the impact easily caving in its skull and splitting it in two, splattering its blood and cranial matter all over the ground. The beast’s body convulsed even as the blade rose back up to its original position before finally going limp.

Maria’s racing heart gradually slowed down as she turned her gaze from the beast’s brutalized body to Gehrman, who hadn’t so much as budged since he had alerted the beast.

“And there we go. Cleared without a hitch.” He said while casually brushing off his hands, which only served to baffle her further.

“Well, go on then.” The impudence in his statement hardly registered, seeing as she was still far too shocked by his audacious display. Once she had regained her bearings she turned back to the rest of their company, who seemed just as amazed as she was.

“Let’s go.” Was all she managed to say, before turning around and carefully making her way around both the trigger and the mangled beast, not wanting to suffer the same fate as it had.

The first thing she noticed when entering the room were two small braziers from which the billowing smoke was flowing, which she promptly destroyed with a swing of her saber in order to clear up their view. The room they found themselves in seemed to be empty, aside from a few wooden containers, pieces of pottery and some strange wooden carvings that depicted miniature ghoulish looking figures with circular mouths, each one holding a long staff. There was no sign of the mechanism or another path anywhere in the room.

“There’s nothing here. You are free to come in and try to find anything we might’ve missed.” She announced. 

“Mind your step, Master Laurence” She heard Gehrman say, turning to find the head professor and the rest of his cohorts making their way around the body. Some of them were very clearly disturbed by the grisly sight before them, with one woman in particular covering their mouth as she averted her eyes.

As all this happened, the wooden statues that littered the room caught her attention. As she went up to inspect one of them, she quickly took notice of another pressure pad nearby. Once she was close enough, she cautiously placed her foot down on it, causing that same clicking sound from before ringing through the hall just before a flaming arrow fired from the statue’s mouth, whizzed past her and embedded itself in the wall on the opposite end of the room.

“Another trap. Keep an eye out for these statues in the future; if you see them, either make your way around or destroy them.” She told everyone who was gathered in the room.

“Hmm, that is a lot of traps in place for one small room. They must be here to protect something, but what?” Gehrman hypothesized.

“A good question.” Laurence said in agreement. “Everyone, spread out and start looking. We have to be missing something.” He then ordered, prompting his followers to each spread out and begin their search. Maria and her men left them to their work, but nevertheless kept a close eye on them. There was a small chance the thing that Queen Annalise had asked her to find was hidden in this room.

“Professor, I think I found something!” She heard a female voice call out.

“Where, Amelia?” He called back from across the room.

“Over here.” The one known as Amelia replied, drawing both her fellow scholars and Maria to her, finding that she was crouching down in front of a now opened chest.

“What’s inside?” Maria demanded as she approached, causing the scholars to cautiously eye her.

“I’m not sure. It’s just a few vials; I’m not sure what’s inside.” The young woman’s answer immediately caught Maria’s attention.

“Let me see.” Amelia appeared reluctant to grant her request, which led to Laurence placing a hand on her shoulder.

“It’s alright. Do as she says.” He instructed.

After a few more seconds, Iosfeka stood aside and allowed Maria to inspect the contents of the chest. Carefully taking out one of the vials and holding it out in front of her, she could clearly see that it did indeed contain blood. However, she could quickly tell that this was a familiar sort of blood which was used in order to break the labyrinth seal rather than the blood that Queen Annalise desired.

“Well?” Laurence asked, breaking her out of her thoughts.

“I’m afraid that I cannot allow you to keep this. I hope you understand.” It was clear that Laurence and the others were disappointed to hear this, but at the same time, there was really nothing they could say or do to protest this decision.

“Very well.” He eventually conceded.

After taking out the second vial, she safely stored it away in her satchel. As much as it no doubt pained them to give up such a precious commodity, she couldn’t afford to let them claim it. Allowing regular citizens the means to access the Tombs of the Gods at their leisure was a recipe for disaster.

“We should get back. There is nothing more for us here.” She said once she was finished putting the vials away.

“Then let us hope the others have better luck.” Laurence replied.

Maria then began to escort them back to the doorway, only for them to stop part way there. She turned around in order to determine the cause and found that one of them had stayed behind on the other side of the room, seemingly staring off into nothing.

“Caryll, we’re leaving!” The head professor called out to get her attention, after which she seemed to snap out of her daze and turn back towards them.

“Oh, yes. One moment.” As she quickly ran to rejoin her fellow scholars, Maria looked behind her to see what had caught her attention, but saw nothing but a plain wall. Yet despite this, Caryll still seemed rather unnerved.

“What is the matter with you?” She questioned the scholar.

“Nothing. I just got distracted.” Caryll insisted, albeit unconvincingly.

“There is no room for distractions down here. You either keep up or we leave you behind. Understand?” This warning clearly frightened her somewhat, but from the looks of things, Laurence was not fond of this, as he proceeded to stand in front of Caryll and give her a rather stern look.

“With all due respect, Lady Maria, no one is being left behind.” He said and rather sternly at that.

“You know I can’t guarantee that.” She calmly replied.

What followed was a tense few moments where neither party said or did anything. Perhaps her position seemed harsh, but in her eyes, it was by no means unreasonable; she and her men could only do so much to keep the scholars safe, after all. Besides, they were just as much Laurence’s responsibility as they were hers, if not more so. If one of them fell behind or was somehow lost entirely, it would ultimately be because he had failed to keep track of them, not because she failed to protect them.

The tense scene was soon interrupted by the sound of gunfire, followed by some additional indiscernible noises, which caused them all to turn to the source.

“That sounded like it was close.” Gehrman noted.

“Then they must not have gotten far. Come on.” Maria and her knights quickly moved back to the passageway and after maneuvering around the pressure pad, rushed back down the corridor. As they moved, Maria could make out the sounds of battle much more clearly; As the noise was coming from above them, she looked up and found a large hole in the ceiling, which seemed to connect to another room.

“FIRE! DON’T LET IT REACH YOU!” She heard Matthias call out. “I’M TRYING! IT’S TOO QUICK!” Emil cried out in turn. And between all of this, she could hear the sound of scraping metal and loud, blood-curdling screeching.  

“Matthias, can you hear me?! If you can, help is on the way!” She called out just before she and her men continued to rush down the path. Once they exited the corridor, she found Micolash and the other scholars by the base of the ladder; they appeared to be out of breath.

“What happened?” She demanded.

“We found the mechanism, but it’s being guarded by some foul madman; once it spotted us, it cleared the length of the room and was upon us before we even had time to blink. Your knights told us to run and stayed behind to fend it off, but I just don’t see how they can keep up with it.” Micolash explained, appearing rather shaken.

“Stay here. We’ll go help them.” She said before almost immediately making her way onto the ladder. As she climbed, she could still hear the ongoing battle, suggesting that their luck had yet to turn. Though part of her was sure that Matthias and the others were more than capable of defending themselves, she couldn’t sit idly by when she could be helping them.

Once she reached the top, she rushed into the nearby room, finding Matthias, Emil and Robert locked in combat with a tall, yet lanky pale-skinned opponent with long black hair and a sickle in its hand. At the moment, they had it surrounded, but the incessant swinging of its weapon prevented them from getting close.

“Captain? What are you doing here?” Matthias said as he caught sight of her, with the momentary distraction motivating their target to rush towards him at blinding speed.

“Matthias, watch out!” She called out, rushing forward even though there was no way she could reach him in time.

Thankfully, he was able to raise his blade just in time to divert the madman’s hook, which would’ve almost certainly taken his head off if he hadn’t reacted in time. This did little to impede the assailant, who quickly recovered and continued his onslaught. Backstepping to avoid his opponent’s relentless flurry of swings, Matthias brought his weapon to his face and activated the small firearm that was built into the guard of his weapon, which fired a single shot and managed to hit the madman amidst his wailing, knocking him off balance and momentarily forcing it to its knees. Not wasting a moment, Matthias propelled himself forward and thrust his weapon forward, managing to impale the madman through the mouth. In a few seconds time, the hook fell from the madman’s hand and its pained gurgling ceased, after which he pulled his sword free and allowed it to crumple to the ground dead.

With the madman dead, Maria saw it fit to approach her men, all of whom were visibly relieved that the battle was over. Matthias in particular was still trying to catch his breath, still holding his bloodied sword.

“How nice of you to join us, Captain.” He jested as she approached.

“A bit late, it would seem.” Matthias briefly chuckled before wincing in pain, taking hold of his chest.

“You’re hurt.” “I’m fine, it’s nothing - just a graze.” He assured her, straightening himself.

“Just one graze?” Matthias appeared rather hesitant to answer. “Well…”

She softly smiled. “As I thought.” Even for the brief period she saw the madman in motion, it was very likely it managed to tag him more than once.

Maria then turned to Emil and Robert. “And the rest of you?” She inquired, receiving similar non-answers. With an amused sigh, she turned back to Matthias. “The scholars tell me you found the mechanism?”

“Yes, it’s just through there. This cretin here was the only one standing guard.” He said, pointing to a passageway on the far-right side of the room.

“Nicely done, all of you. You may return to the others; I will finish up here in your stead.” Though Matthias appeared hesitant, he nevertheless nodded his understanding.

“Of course, Captain.” He said.

Maria watched her men return the way they came before turning her attention to the passageway. Making her way inside, she found a small room containing a stairwell and at its base, a lever. Though she had been assured that its guardians had been eliminated, she nevertheless remained vigilant in the off chance something else lay in wait, but thankfully, she reached the bottom of the stairs without issue. Standing before the switch, she carefully stepped onto a miniature altar and pulled it to the side, resulting in a loud mechanical sound echoing through the room. Once she let go of the switch, it slid back into place, but it was clear that it had served its purpose. They could now progress further into the tombs.

Those who ventured here quickly came to understand that the Pthumerians were quite defensive of their homeland and the secrets that it contained. Perhaps it was because they believed themselves to be the only one’s worthy of the Eldritch Truth, but whether this belief was due to avarice or simply because they saw it as a burden only they could bear, one could not say for certain. Yet the most likely option is that the sheer volume of defenses they mounted was entirely due to their reverence for the Great Ones, whose ‘resting places’ they wished to remain undisturbed.

Hurrying back to rejoin her fellow travelers, she found them already gathered close to the gate on the far side of the hall.

“There you are.” Laurence said as she approached. “We heard a noise coming from the gate. I presume that means it's unlocked?”

“It should be.” She replied.

“Then are we to move forward?” Originally, Maria’s answer would’ve been a simple yes, but recent events made her stop and consider the consequences of such an action.

“My lady?” Laurence said after she didn’t speak for a while, prompting her to quickly try and make a decision.

“Right. I think I have a plan, but you’re going to have to bear with me.” She eventually said, which seemed to surprise him somewhat.

“Alright. What is this plan of yours?” He prompted.

“Firstly, you and your scholars will have to stay here.” The professor appeared ready to protest, which prompted her to continue giving the rest of the details. “For now. Me and my men will go forward to scout for any threats and return to you when we’re sure it's safe to progress. In the meantime, there’s something I’d like you to do.”

“And what’s that?” He asked.

“I think it would be wise to set up a base of operations here. Your company holds the majority of our supplies, so while I take my men forward, you can start setting it up. That way, both tasks should reasonably be finished within the same time range.”

Laurence took a little while to consider her proposal. “A worthwhile suggestion.” The professor said before turning to his followers.

“Listen up! It would seem that we are setting up camp sooner than expected. Each of you are expected to aid in its construction; once it is completed, our exploration will continue soon after.” He announced before he started issuing a set of orders.

“Wait, Professor! What about them?” Amelia called out, motioning to the corpses of the beasts Maria and her men had slain only moments ago.

“Leave them to us.” Maria spoke up. “Leon, Frederick, Robert: help me dispose of the bodies. The rest of you, stay here and help out here however you can. Follow Professor Laurence’s instructions to the letter.” She instructed.

“Just as she was about to commence her work, she suddenly became aware of Gehrman standing just beside her, having approached so quietly that he had gone undetected until that moment.

“Lady Maria, if I may, I would like to offer you my assistance in your cleanup.” He told her, hardly seeming to realize just what it was he was asking her.

“I cannot ask you to do such a thing.” She replied.

“Come now, I will have to get my hands dirty sooner or later. Besides, I relish the opportunity to observe creatures such as this up close.” Maria couldn’t help but raise a brow at his insistence. It was an odd thing to be fascinated by, to be sure, but she supposed that understanding these unfortunate souls would be beneficial to understanding Loran as a whole.

“If that is the case, then you are permitted to observe us, but I must nevertheless insist that you leave the disposal to us.” She said to him.

“As you wish.” Was his reply.

With that, everyone set off to work, with Laurence taking responsibility for coordinating the campsite’s construction while she and her men set about disposing of the slain beasts. As there was nowhere to properly bury them, the most they could do was pile them together away from the camp. She briefly considered lighting the corpses ablaze, but ultimately decided against it. With how many there were, it would take far too much firewood to properly accomplish. Though it felt wrong to leave them in this horrid state, Maria recognized that she had already done all she could. At the very least, their pain was over.

Once this unsavory task was concluded, Maria and her men prepared to return to the soon to be erected campsite. Just before they were to exit, she looked back to find Gehrman crouching down in front of the pile of corpses and observing them with a keen eye; at the moment, he was seemingly attempting to extract something from its mouth, transferring it into a small tube that he held in his other hand.

“The three of you may leave. Gather the others and wait for me by the gate – once I arrive, we move forward.” She told her men, prompting them to leave and allowing her to approach Gehrman.

“May I ask what you’re doing?” She said to get his attention. Turning his head towards her, Gehrman held up the tube he was holding, which now contained a purplish liquid.

“Collecting samples. It’s venom, from the looks of things; its claws seemed to be coated in it as well.” He told her. This made her remember the substance she had seen the largest beast in the pack producing.

“You’d be wise to ensure you don’t allow those creatures to graze you going forward. Heaven knows what will happen if they do.” He followed up by saying, but Maria didn’t respond to him, choosing to observe his work for a few more moments.

“You seem to be quite familiar with these labyrinths. Am I right to assume you’ve been here before?” She eventually asked him.

“Well, I haven’t been here specifically, but yes, this isn’t my first tour.” He confirmed.

“I see. And these beasts, you study them?” Was her next inquiry.

“Indeed, I do. Putting aside any peculiarities, it is much like studying fauna: their behavior, their anatomy, their…evolution.” This last part of his list caught Maria’s attention.

“You mean you know…” “What made them this way? No, only that they were all human once.” He said before letting out a small sigh. “Poor souls, but it does beg the question – does this primal nature lurk within all men, just waiting to be awakened?”

This was a question that Maria herself pondered on occasion. The sheer volume of the outbreak of the beastly scourge that had afflicted Loran seemed to point the arrow in a certain direction, but at the same time, many others had escaped unaffected. It was certainly something to consider, but not something she liked to dwell on - the implications were far from pleasant.

“I would hope that you never have to find out.” She could see a small smile forming on the old man’s lips.

“As do I, my lady.” He solemnly replied.

Maria continued to silently observe Gehrman’s work for a few more moments. At first, she considered trying to get a little more information out of him, but ultimately decided that now was not the right time. Duty calls.

“I must go. Once you’re finished here, return to the camp. You’ll no doubt get many more chances to conduct your ‘research’.” She said to him.

“But of course. I’ll be with you in a jiffy.” With that, Maria turned to leave.

Maria couldn’t help but note that Gehrman seemed rather enthusiastic about being here, at least in comparison to the rest of his cohorts. Whereas the other scholars took on a more serious disposition, he was just about the only person in the labyrinth with a smile on his face. Whether this was the result of natural optimism or merely his method of contending with his dreary surroundings, she did not know. But at the same time, she could see how such an ethos could be beneficial.

She returned to find the campsite had already started construction. Though they had no traditional tents to speak off, the scholars had nevertheless brought a number of tarpaulin sheets, which they had set up in order to protect their food and sleeping gear from the flowing sand. With their limitations in regards to pack animals, they were never going to be able to bring enough to ensure they could settle in for more than a few days. Because of this, they could not afford to waste any time.

Her men were waiting for her by the gate, as instructed. As she approached, they quickly took notice of her and stood at attention, allowing her to move towards the gate. As she did this, they began to fall in line behind her, but when Matthias attempted to do so, she put forth an arm to stop him.

“Not you. You stay here.” She told him, an instruction that he seemed rather surprised by.

“What’re you talking about? I’m coming with you.” He insisted.

“Not in your current state, you’re not. What you need is rest and medical attention.” Maria replied.

“And how, pray tell, am I to receive the latter?” Though he clearly thought this was a question she wouldn’t be able to answer, that was far from the case.

“Professor Laurence! A moment, please!” He was in the process of aiding in the construction of the campsite, working alongside Amelia to organize what looked to be their medical supplies. Hearing her call, he excused himself and went up to them.

“Can I help you?” He asked her.

“That depends. How far does your expertise on medicine extend?” Laurence raised a curious brow.

“Well, I became a physician before I started teaching, as you do. Can’t teach medicine without first practicing it, after all.” This was no doubt his indirect way of telling her that this was a very silly question to ask someone who not only taught medicine, but was also the head of the faculty itself.

“Why do you ask?” “I have a small favor to ask of you. I fear that Matthias here has been wounded; can you take a look at him for me?” Maria told Laurence, much to her second’s chagrin.

“Captain, I assure you that this isn’t necessary.” Matthias said.

“Perhaps not, but we can’t be sure just yet. Even a minor cut may prove fatal in these conditions, assuming it is left untreated.” Laurence replied, stepping a little closer to him. “Come with me, my friend. Let me see what I can do.”

Matthias was slow to accept the Professor’s offer, but Maria gave him a stern look to let him know that they weren’t going anywhere until he got the proper medical attention.

“Well, if the Captain insists upon it.” He eventually conceded.

“Excellent.” Laurence turned his attention back to her. “Will that be all?”

“Yes. Thank you, professor.” Was her reply.

“My pleasure. I’ll see that he’s well looked after in your absence.” He assured her. With that settled, Maria turned back to the gate.

“Oh, and… good luck.” The professor suddenly added on, recapturing her attention. For whatever reason, she found herself unsure of what to say, prompting her to simply nod her acknowledgement, which he did in kind.

Finally going up to the gate blocking off the next part of the labyrinth, Maria once again crouched down and lifted it up, allowing them passage inside. Turning back to motion for her men to follow her, she also managed to spot Laurence leading Matthias away, who turned his own head back to look at them, very clearly not pleased by being separated from them. Despite this, Maria knew she had made the right decision; minor or not, his wounds would slow him down and make him an easier target for whatever awaited them next.

Proceeding forward, they discovered yet another long corridor, similar to the one that they encountered when first entering the dungeon. Much like last time, there was no sign of anything that might pose a danger, but she nevertheless kept her guard up.

“Captain, look. Up ahead.” One of her men – Robert – pointed out. “Another passageway. Do we…”

“No. Leave them alone for now. Our partners are no doubt keen on exploring them alongside us.” She promptly told him, not even slowing down to glance at the passageway.

“I see.” Robert said as he fell back in line.

“You know, for a moment, I thought we were preparing to leave them behind.” Harald suddenly said.  

“Doing so would reflect rather poorly on us, wouldn’t you say?” Maria replied.

“Maybe so, but we would certainly be making much more progress if we didn’t have to also keep them from stumbling into the jaws of a beast.” He complained.

“They are here with Her Majesty’s blessing. She says that we need to keep them safe and so it shall be.” Was all Maria said in response, secretly hoping to end the exchange then and there.

“Ah yes, so they can help fulfill their master’s vision.” It was Emil who spoke this time. “Pfft, the old man is playing a dangerous game, as does Her Majesty by enabling his delusion.”

Stopping just before the end of the corridor, Maria turned to face her company, all of whom almost immediately came to a stop as well.

“If you have concerns regarding Her Majesty’s choices, you are more than welcome to bring them before her.” She told Emil before turning to face the rest of her men. “As for the rest of you, remember that while we have a primary objective, it does not nullify our secondary ones. We are not guaranteed to find what we seek here, but what is guaranteed is Her Majesty’s wrath if we fail to protect Byrgenwerth’s scholars. Are we clear?”

Her men didn’t respond right away, with a few of them sparring a couple of apprehensive glances at each-other. Eventually though, they all slightly bowed their heads to signify their understanding.

“Of course, captain.” Harold spoke on their behalf.

“Wonderful. Now, if there are no further interruptions…”

Suddenly, Maria heard a loud, but distant growl coming from behind her, causing her to quickly turn around to determine the source. She found that the path was sealed off behind a stone door, engraved with various pieces of iconography and depictions of robed figures.

“What was that?” Asked Emil.

“Nothing good. Prepare yourselves.” Maria then proceeded to approach the door, behind which they would no doubt find their next major challenge.

Pushing forward with all her might, she was able to open the door just enough to see inside, finding a vast and surprisingly well-lit antechamber, containing numerous candles, lanterns and chandeliers. However, before she could process any of this, she was made aware of something else present within the room; a large, dark figure quickly approaching her position.

“Get back!!” She quickly called out, moving away from the door just as the figure reached it and swiped forward with its claws, though it only managed to hit the door. Maria then saw a large, clawed paw wrap around the left side of the door before violently jerking it to the side before doing the same to the right half, forcing it completely open.

Recognising that the creature was attempting to escape its enclosure, she rushed forward and with all her might, rammed into the beast with her shoulder, forcefully dragging it back into the room and knocking it off its feet. This gave her men just enough time to pour into the room and completely block off the exit, but in almost no time at all, it was back up and appeared none too pleased by their interference.

It resembled a rabid, malnourished canine, though it also sported a pair of horns resembling that of a ram on its head. Once it stood to its full height, they found that the creature towered over them and was eyeing them with a distinct look of hunger in its ravenous eyes.

“Stand your ground! Do not let it pass!” Maria called out.

Letting out a roar of defiance, the beast once again rushed directly at her, no doubt angry at her for preventing its escape. It clawed at her countless times while maintaining its approach, forcing her back more and more each time as she tried to stay out of range of its attacks. However, the beast’s hyper-focus gave her men an opening for an attack, with two of her knights rushing towards it and slicing at its back.

However, the beast appeared far more durable than its scrawny frame would suggest and it quickly spun around with its claws, forcing its assailants back as well. Her men continued trying to surround it, with each of them trying to find an opening to attack in between its incessant clawing and biting. Right now, their best course of action was to tire the beast out and once that happened, overwhelm it with superior numbers.

Much to their surprise, the beast stopped its ravenous assault and looked around it, appearing to recognize its precarious position. They cautiously looked on as it raised its clenched paw in front of it, just before the unthinkable happened. In a split second, a searing fire formed within its palm, which it sprayed as a quick torrent that it aimed from left to right.

“Watch out!” The encirclement was quickly thrown into disarray as her men scrambled to avoid the incoming flames, which allowed the beast to run forward and regain its advantageous position. When the other members of her company ran after it to try and surround it once again, it quickly shimmied to the side, very clearly not intending to let the same tactic work again.

“All of you, back off!” Upon hearing this order, her men cautiously complied, allowing her to approach their opponent.

“Save your strength. I’ll deal with this.”  

The beast did not attempt to meet her approach. Instead, it reared its head and roared as it formed two large fireballs from its hands, lobbing both of them towards her one after the other. Maria quickly moved to the right to avoid the first projectile before moving to the left to dodge the next, which hit a nearby pillar and obliterated it in one shot. Both of these evasive maneuvers brought her a little closer to her opponent each time and once she had safely evaded both fireballs, she spun around with her saber outstretched, allowing her to reach it and inflict several gashes.

The wounded beast quickly scurried back, but Maria did not let up, chasing after it and thrusting forward with both of her weapons, intending to skewer it before it could do anything else. Seemingly recognizing that keeping her at a distance wasn’t going to work, the creature instead attempted to claw at her once again, hoping to force her back on the defensive. Seeing right through this strategy, she backstepped, quickly reattached her two weapons to grant herself more range and thrust forward, managing to impale the creature’s shoulder.

Before the beast could even finish its pained cry, Maria continued her assault, unleashing a flurry of strikes that eventually led to her detaching her two blades mid-combo and continuing her attack that way. She kept going as long as her endurance could allow, after which she moved back a step in order to get out of range of any potential counterattack.

By now, the beast was visually battered and was breathing heavily, indicating its exhaustion. Maria had hypothesized that since it had sufficient enough means to control space through its command of fire, flanking maneuvers were not the ideal method to deal with it. However, when faced with a foe that could close the distance quickly and force it into close quarters combat, the beast would be put in an unfavorable position and wear itself out trying to escape. Evidently, she had been right.

In a last-ditch effort, the beast once again released a torrent of flame in order to force her back, but this time, she didn’t play into its hands. Instead, she ran forward and jumped right through the incoming flame; as she came down, she swung her saber at a sideward angle, immediately severing the hand which had produced the fire.

The creature’s enraged cry echoed through the room as it pulled back its bleeding stump, leaving it wide open for another attack. Almost as soon as her feet reached the ground, she swung both blades in opposite directions, inflicting an X-like wound into the beast’s flesh and forcing it to its knees. With its defenses irreversibly breached, Maria drove her saber right through the beast’s chest, piercing its heart.

As the beast let out its final, pained whimpers, she looked into its eyes. Its pupils no longer resembled that of a human, appearing to have somehow collapsed in on themselves and turned to mush. Yet despite that, she could almost see what appeared to be the smallest hint of fear in its eye, before even that faded away into nothing.

“It is over. Farewell.” She whispered.

With the beast now dead, Maria swiftly pulled her blade free and allowed it to fall to the ground. As she stood trying to catch her breath, she looked down at its corpse, finding that she felt neither triumph or disdain; instead, she felt only pity.

With the threat eliminated, her men went up to join her around the slain creature. “I can’t believe it. It commands the flames, just like the clerics of old.” Emil said.

“The clerics? Do you think is what became of them.” Harold then asked.

“The scourge does not discriminate.” Maria reminded them. Everyone within Loran – regardless of social rank – had been in danger of succumbing to the scourge, which was exactly why it had to be abandoned.

“Even so, how is it possible for a beast to retain this power?” Asked Emil.

Admittedly, she found herself pondering that very same thing. In the past, command of fire was a gift only bestowed to the most seasoned of Pthumerians: clerics, elders and the ever-vigilant watchers, each of whom used their gift to better serve and protect the Old Lords. The secrets of pyromancy had fallen into obscurity since the abandonment of the labyrinths, but it didn’t take much to imagine that mastery of this art required a great deal of control. From what she’d seen, this beast utilized fire in a primitive and chaotic manner, but that didn’t make its command of it any less impressive.

“It would seem that some fires simply cannot be extinguished.” Was all she said.

The knights remained in this position for several more moments, each of them seemingly lost in their own thoughts. No matter how hard she tried, Maria couldn’t stop wondering about the nature of her quarry. It had been rather crafty, at least when compared to its brethren and made use of the tools at its disposal in order to counter their strategies rather than mindlessly attacking. All of this made her hearken back to her earlier conversation with Gehrman – to the ever-pressing question he had raised.

Deciding they had lingered here long enough, she fixed her gaze straight ahead. “We’re done here. Let us return to the others.”

They returned to the hall to find the camp all but completed. She couldn’t say for certain how long they’d been gone, but however long it was, the scholars had used it well.

Maria soon spotted Professor Laurence crouching down besides Matthias, appearing to be in the process of cleaning the wounds on his chest with water and cloth. With him was Amelia , besides whom were various medical supplies, which she would no doubt hand to her superior when asked.

“You are relieved for now. Take some time to recuperate and if you wish, help out where you can. We’ll resume our duty shortly.” She told her men, who dutifully nodded and split off to go in varying directions, leaving her to go check on their comrade. As she approached his position, Matthias quickly took notice of her.

“Captain!” He called out, making both of his caretakers turn towards her as well.

“Ah, Lady Maria, you’ve returned. Thank goodness.” Said the professor, whose relief soon turned to concern as he observed her more closely, no doubt noticing the slight scorches that had been left on her garb. “What happened?”

“We…ran into a bit of trouble, but nothing we couldn’t handle.” She tried not to draw too much attention to herself and instead, decided to enquire on Matthias’s condition instead. “Will he be okay?”

“As you can see, he sustained a handful of cuts, but thankfully none of them were deep and the bleeding wasn’t severe. So long as we can keep them from becoming infected, he should be fine for the remainder of the expedition.” Laurence explained as he folded the cloth he had been using.

“Good. Assuming you’re finished here, Professor, I’m going to need a few moments of your time.” She told him flat out.

“Just a moment.” He turned back to his two followers. “Amelia, I want you to stay with Matthias here for a little while longer. I’ll be back as soon as I’m able.”

She nodded her understanding. “Of course, professor. Consider it done.”

“Good. Now, do excuse me.” Standing back up to his full height, he walked over to join her.

“Say, if you don’t mind me asking, have you seen Gehrman anywhere? I’m afraid I haven’t seen him since he went with you to dispose of those bodies.”

This question caught Maria by surprise. “When I saw him last, he was still in the preceding corridor. Perhaps he’s…”

“Oh, hold on. There he is.” She followed his gaze to find that Gehrman was approaching them.

“Master Laurence. Lady Maria.” He greeted the two of them. “I hope I’m not intruding.”

“Not by any means. We were just wondering where you ran off to.” Laurence said.

“Oh, my apologies. I must’ve gotten a little too absorbed in my inspection. I will see that it doesn’t happen again.”

“That is good. With how things are, it is best that we all stick together – makes it easier for me to keep track of you all.”

Gehrman nodded his head in agreement. “Very good, sir. Now, how may I be of assistance?”

“Well, I’m afraid you’re rather late to help with the set-up, but seeing as I have you here, may you please go and check on Caryll for me? She’s just over there.” He motioned over to a specific tarp close to a pillar, where the scholar in question appeared to be sitting cross-legged and holding a journal in her hands, which she appeared to be in the process of writing in.

“Gladly, sir.” Just before Gehrman departed, he looked over to her. “My lady.” He said to excuse himself before he finally walked away, leaving her to eye him for a few moments before she turned back to her counterpart.

“Is she alright?” Maria asked him.

“You mean Caryll? If so, she’s just having a short rest. Hopefully, it’ll help clear her head.” He briefly explained.

“That is good to hear.” Was all Maria chose to say in response. She doubted he had forgotten what she had said before she had attempted to come to Matthias’s aid, but decided now was not a good time to remind him of it.

That said, Maria still found herself wondering just what was going on with this Caryll. She had appeared somewhat distracted ever since they arrived here, hardly saying a word and seeming to be constantly on edge. This may very well be because she was aware of the dangers that this place presented, but at the same time, she remained this way even when no threat was visible. Regardless of the reason for this odd behavior, Adrian’s advice to keep an eye on her was still fresh in her mind.

“Ah, but enough distractions.” Laurence eventually said. “What did you wish to discuss?”

“We’re going to have to decide how we are going to proceed right away. Your strategy proved fruitful this time, but I fear that if we continue with it, we will grow increasingly isolated from each-other.” Said Maria.

“That is a valid concern, but I still maintain that our best course of action is to continue exploring in groups rather than all together. As we’ve already seen, we will cover more ground quicker and much more effectively.” Laurence replied.

“And what if along the way we encounter a force that we cannot overcome with smaller numbers? I hope you realize, Professor, that if my men fall, then your scholars will shortly follow suit.” She bluntly reminded him and judging from the silence that ensued, this reminder forced him to reconsider his position.

“Hmm… then what do you say that we handle things on a case-by-case basis?” Was his eventual proposition.

“What do you mean?” Laurence proceeded to explain. “Each part of the Tombs that we enter, we initially do so together. Once we have established both the general layout and the threat level present within, then we come to a decision on whether we should stay together or split apart.”

“So, a compromise?” Maria summarized.

“If you would accept it as such.” Was Laurence’s reply, leaving her to mull it over for a few moments. Eventually, she came to a decision.

“Very well. But as you’ve no doubt already concluded; we will not be able to have everyone on active duty. This camp will need to be maintained and guarded.” She said.

“That is for the better, I think. If someone needs to rest, then they have a place to do so; once they have recovered, then they may either rejoin us or take the place of another who wishes to temporarily retire.” This was admittedly a well thought out idea. The last thing either of them needed is dragging along someone who was exhausted or wounded.

“I agree. Let it be so.” Maria told him.

“Then it is settled. Once we are finished here, we will decide what our next target shall be.” Laurence conclusively said.

“Of course.” Believing that their negotiations had concluded, she prepared to depart.

“Before that, does anyone else in your company require medical attention?” He asked when she was a few steps away.

“You are free to ask them if you wish.” Maria replied.

“Then shall we start with you?” She looked back at him in surprise, finding that he now sported that very same shrewd, yet inviting smile she remembered from the night of their meeting. Though their surroundings hardly justified such a thing, Maria couldn’t keep herself from offering him a smile of her own.

“Oh, do you wish to inspect me, Professor?” She kept her voice just low enough so that only he could hear her amongst the noise in the hall.

“Do you wish to be inspected, my lady?” He replied. From the looks of things, that boldness she observed during the banquet wasn’t a fluke after all. All the better, she thought to herself.

“Not the time or place, I’m afraid, but perhaps sometime soon.” Maria told him, which didn’t seem to hamper him in the slightest.

“I will hold you to it then.” The two of them maintained their eye contact for a few more moments until Maria finally managed to break it and continue on her originally intended course, leaving Laurence to likewise turn his attention to other matters.

As she walked away, Maria kept on smiling. As she expected, Professor Laurence wasn’t going to let her be the sole deciding authority on this mission and was perfectly willing to challenge her if he saw it fit. But at the same time, he was just as willing to listen and compromise as he was to contest and resist.

This was a most welcome surprise. Had he been someone who was unwilling to stray from his preconceived plans, then their inevitable bickering would’ve slowed their progress to a grinding halt; at the same time, Maria wasn’t fond of the idea of dragging along a counterpart who showed no initiative and did as she said without question: neither were marks of a capable leader. But clearly, Laurence was aware of the authority that had been vested in him, but was likewise aware that it wasn’t absolute and that the two of them needed to cooperate if they had any hope of surviving here.

“ How refreshing .” Maria thought to herself.

She had gotten used to dealing with men in either extreme: those who were too afraid to challenge her and those who were far too pompous to afford her even the slightest dignity. This made getting the opportunity to correspond with someone who exhibited neither of these shortcomings a rare treat indeed, one that he seemed to have enjoyed indulging in just as much as her. Of course, that hadn’t been the only thing they’d indulged in.

Turning her head back, she found that the professor had rejoined Amelia  as he had promised and was already back to work in checking on Matthias. Him offering to do the same for her could be seen as a simple gesture of good-will, but she was able to detect just a sliver of subtext in his words that completely changed the nature of his offering…and she couldn’t help but play along.

Thinking back to the conclusion of their initial meeting, Maria recalled the rather precarious position she had put the two of them in. It had been a test, of course, to see how well he would hold up under pressure: would he pull away in embarrassment or would he hold firm? He, of course, chose the latter option, leaving them standing a mere hair’s breadth apart from each-other, his eyes boring into hers. Of course, this wasn’t the first time she had found herself recalling that moment, because as much as Maria would’ve liked to say that she had remained unaffected by the tension she had created, it would be far from the truth.

The truth was that she felt drawn to him and from the looks of things, he was experiencing a very similar draw as well. Was dallying such as this becoming figures of their standing? No, perhaps not, but that didn’t make it any less fun. But that’s all it was, just a little bit of fun. At the end of the day, they were still representatives of respected orders and their interactions ought to retain a sense of professionalism, especially in front of their cohorts.

Besides, neither of them knew what would happen after their partnership drew to a close. Why not make the most of it?

....

Chapter Text

It was a while before they departed again. Laurence decided it was best that he conduct a full quality check of their newly established camp in order to ensure everything was up to standards and once that was done, he had to gather his team together in order to decide who would be assigned where. Ultimately, it was decided that two of them – Caryll and Norbert – would stay behind at the camp while the rest of them carried on. For her part, Lady Maria assigned two of her men to stay and watch over them: from what he understood, Emil and Robert were their names.

However, those who would be leaving did not mean to go forward, but rather back. There were still two places in this part of the tombs yet to be explored and their guardians had promised that they would be able to explore it in its entirety. Even if they hadn’t made that pledge, Laurence would’ve insisted on it regardless; they could not afford to cut any corners.

They had two paths to choose from, but settled on the one that they had spotted when they first arrived, which they were far overdue to visit. Laurence would’ve preferred that they sent out two teams to explore both of them simultaneously, but upon Lady Maria’s insistence, he had been forced to walk back on this. It would’ve been foolish of him to expect to get his way on every matter in the best of times and especially not when his decision could potentially put others at risk. Still, her willingness to consult with him instead of simply deciding their course of action herself had been most appreciated.

Much like before, Lady Maria lifted the bright-red door open with relative ease, showing a remarkable amount of strength in doing so. Beyond was a long, narrow, dimly lit corridor, with a faint light just barely visible in the distance. By now, everyone knew what the general procedure was - she and her knights would go first to weed out any potential threats and they would follow close behind – which meant that everyone stayed relatively quiet as they entered the corridor.

As Lady Maria led them forward, a torch in hand, Laurence made sure to keep both his eyes and ears open, not just for potential danger, but also to get a better understanding of their surroundings. The labyrinths were an architectural marvel, but the reason for their existence was perhaps even more astonishing. 

Worship was a hallmark of many an empire in history. Farmers believed their crops grew because their Gods had blessed their harvest and armies marched because they believed they were fulfilling the will of their Lord. Civilization was built in part on faith and this had been especially true in the case of Pthumeru, which existed almost solely due to the devotion that was so ingrained into its people.

But as they say – “the Lord giveth, and the Lord taketh away”, a reality which clearly wasn’t confined to a single faith.

Not even a quarter of the way into the corridor, Lady Maria put up a fist, causing them all to come to a stop. Without even saying a word, she walked forward a few steps and peered around a corner into one of the breaks in the wall just before she thrust her saber forward and just as quickly pulled it back. There was a brief stutter of pain and surprise and then, a dark figure fell forward into view, having been slain by her hand. 

After quickly flicking the blood from her sword, she silently motioned for everyone to continue following her, leaving them to silently pass by her victim. It was a feeble creature, much smaller than what he’d seen so far, but no less hideous in appearance. It had no doubt been lying in wait, waiting for them to pass by so it could catch them by surprise, seeing as its feeble stature made it no match for them or the other denizens of Loran. 

It wasn’t long until they were again motioned to stop, but this time, Maria nor any of her other knights moved a muscle, their gaze fixed directly ahead.

“Professor, I need you to take your scholars back the way we came, now.” Despite the calmness in her voice, there was nevertheless a clear sense of urgency, one that he was quick to heed.

“You heard her. Go back.” He turned and told his followers, being sure to keep his voice similarly calm so as to not stow panic.

While they moved back, Lady Maria and her men moved forward towards whatever threat awaited them. Over the sounds of their footsteps and the blowing sand, Laurence was able to make out what sounded like a low growl, not unlike what he heard from the large creature that Gehrman had lured to its grisly demise. Unfortunately, it did not seem that this tactic could be repeated again here; Lady Maria and her men had no choice but to face it down.

Laurence and his team stopped once they seemed a safe distance away and turned back to observe what the knights were going to do. From their position, Laurence could just hear Lady Maria’s voice.

“Back, back!” She cried as the torchlight danced across the walls. If he were to guess, they were trying to push the beast out of the narrow corridor and into a more open area; clever.

“Professor, shouldn’t we do something?” Lobsang asked him.

“If you mean that we should try to help them, I fear that staying back here is all we can do. Otherwise, we’d just get in their way.” Laurence replied.

“I know, but it just doesn’t feel right being so passive.” He reasoned.

“I understand, Lobsang, but they agreed to bear this responsibility.” 

“Indeed, they did.” It was Gehrman who spoke this time. “And you must not underestimate the courage they must’ve had to do so. This is one duty one cannot take lightly.”

He was right, of course. The few creatures that they’d encountered so far would make just about any man’s blood run cold and would just as easily tear those same men to ribbons. Mustering up the courage to face down such threats would be impressive on its own, but battling them and winning? Very few could boast of such a thing, he was sure.

Very soon, the corridor once again fell silent, suggesting that a victor had finally emerged in the battle taking place in the next room. At first, he found himself wondering who that victor is, eyeing the passageway in the off chance the beast came through. However, it was Matthias that eventually appeared.

“It’s safe! Come along!” He called out to them, prompting them to begin their approach. 

They entered the proceeding room to find the knights standing over the bloodied corpse of a similar wolf-like beast to the one they encountered before. Its body was riddled with numerous slashes and burn marks, but it had nevertheless ended up in much better shape than its predecessor. Laurence was unlikely to forget that sight for a very long time.

As he observed the deceased beast, Lady Maria went up to him and held out the torch she borrowed. “Thank you.” She told him.

“It was nothing.” He replied as he accepted it back. Looking around the room a little more closely, he found two possible ways for them to go: a grand staircase leading up and a small doorway to their left. 

“Yet another crossroads.” Laurence noted.

“It appears so.” Said Maria. “What do you…”

Before she could even finish her sentence, an eerie sound rang through the hall, turning everyone’s attention towards it.

“What was that?” Micolash asked.

“I’m not sure. It sounded like…” He heard the noise once again and sure enough, it sounded like the chiming of the bell, which seemed to be emanating from the passageway to their left.

“Oh dear. That can only mean trouble.” He heard Gehrman say and for the first time since they got her, he sounded somewhat nervous.

“What kind of trouble?” The answer to Laurence’s question soon revealed itself. 

A humanoid figure bound in rags appeared around the corner and wasted no time in besieging them, forcing the knights to immediately go on the defensive. As it swung its twin blades from side to side, Laurence couldn’t help but notice the reddish aura that enveloped this particular assailant. It wasn’t long before their attacker was struck down by Matthias, yet almost as soon as its body hit the ground, its body quickly faded away into nothing.

“That’s new.” One of the knights commented just before they heard additional movement coming from the nearby room. 

Very soon, the incoming attacker appeared at the door way, but rather then being a humanoid or canine-like creature like they had grown used to, they instead found themselves besieged by a massive spider, which almost immediately leaped at one of the knights. Thankfully, he was able to hit it with his sword and knock it on its back, after which one of his fellows quickly stabbed it in its soft underbelly. However, the slain spider was soon replaced with another one, and then another, who started pouring into the room. And as Lady Maria and her men fought back against the invaders, Laurence couldn’t help but grip the handle of his dagger. 

Of course, there were spiders. Why did there always have to be spiders?

As their guardians cut the last of the spiders down, they heard another ringing bell in the distance, which prompted Matthias to run into the next room in order to hopefully spot where it was coming from. After looking over to the apparent source, Laurence saw a worried look creep onto his face.

“There’s more on the way!” The rest of his comrades ran to join him, but just as Lady Maria was about to enter the next room, she turned back to them.

“Follow me, all of you. Stay close to us.” Laurence found himself taken by surprise, but nevertheless nodded his understanding. 

He then turned to his scholars. “This way, quickly!” Despite their evident apprehension, they quickly complied with his order, allowing Lady Maria to lead them to her company, who were in the process of repelling the oncoming horde of crimson attackers.

“All of you, form a shield around the scholars – don’t let them break through!” Their captain instructed as she moved to the head of the group. “Push forward! Find that bell!” Was her next order.

The creatures continued to rush down the stairs, but the knights were thankfully able to cut them down with relative ease. As they pushed forward, Laurence and his scholars made sure to keep pace with them; when a small group of their attackers tried to flank them from behind by descending down the other flight of stairs, two of their protectors moved to repel them.

As all this happened, Laurence and his scholars remained at the center of the carnage. The few moments he was able to take his eyes off of the endless swarm of spiders and assailants, the professor was able to see his scholars huddled close together, noticeable terror in their eyes.

“Stay calm. Just keep moving.” He told them to keep their spirits up, though he couldn’t exactly blame them for being frightened. His heart was racing, his skin was soaked in a nervous sweat, and his mind was unremittingly conceiving scenarios where the knight’s defense failed, after which they were almost certainly going to be overwhelmed.

But this was by no means an inevitability. The knights of Cainhurst were still fiercely defending them, not faltering even as the creatures kept on coming in ever growing numbers. And at the vanguard was of course Lady Maria. This had been the first time he had gotten to see her in action and what a sight it was; each of her movements was graceful, refined and devastatingly effective.  

Very soon, they were getting close to the top of the stairs and to the source of the bell. Sand blew through the air and obstructed their view, but the room was soon illuminated by a bright red light, which was accompanied by several more spiders rising out of the ground to join the ongoing assault. In the process, it also revealed the silhouette of a hooded, feminine figure, whom he had seen ringing a small bell just before the creatures had appeared.

“Over there! That woman!” Laurence called out, pointing in her direction. The knights had been preoccupied with battle and did not appear to have noticed her just yet, but Lady Maria was quick to heed his alarm.

“Hold the line!” She ordered just before she broke from the group and made a beeline for the mysterious bell ringer, quickly slaying the two spiders she had summoned along the way. 

This momentary distraction gave the summoner just enough time to prepare for Maria’s approach, allowing her to draw a dagger and rush towards her. However, this only served to make things easier for the captain. With the summoner now close, she swung her blade at an upwards angle and severed her arm; the woman barely had the time to clutch her bloody stump before Lady Maria thrust forward with the shorter blade, stabbing the woman in the chest. 

Throughout all this, her summons kept on attacking right up until the bell-ringer stopped struggling, after which they all froze themselves. They looked on as their assailants all suddenly fell to the ground and faded into nothing, clearly not being able to maintain their form with their summoner now dead. Knight and scholar alike then breathed a sigh of relief, seeing that the onslaught had finally come to an end and not a moment too soon. 

Silence settled over the room as everyone tried to catch their breath. Meanwhile, Lady Maria stood over the slain bell-ringer, tightly gripping her weapon. From the looks of things, she too had not gone unaffected by the turbulence of the last few minutes.

Very soon, she turned back around. “Is everyone alright?” She asked.

“Yes, thankfully. The resolve of Cainhurst’s knights truly does live up to their reputation.” Laurence believed that he spoke for everyone in making this commendation. 

“Flattering, but I must ask that you save your praise until our task is complete.” Lady Maria told him, clearly not one for adulation. 

“Very well. But regardless, I think you and your men are overdue for a recess.” He replied, looking around to find that she and her knights were clearly growing tired.

“That won’t be necessary.” She insisted, but he wasn’t having any of it.

“Please, I insist. My scholars would benefit from such a respite as well. And in the meantime, we wish to study our latest…obstacle.” For the next couple of seconds, nobody said anything. Though she appeared like she wanted to argue, Lady Maria sighed and sheathed her weapon.

“You have three minutes.” 

“Then so do you. You are relieved.” He said in reply. 

Lady Maria proceeded to walk past him in order to join her men, who were more than ready to take advantage of the time afforded to them to catch their breath. With the bell-ringing woman’s body now unguarded, Laurence motioned for Micolash to follow him, after which the two of them went up and knelt down beside her body. Of course, the woman herself wasn’t of much interest to them, but rather her richly-decorated bell, which Micolash was quick to pick up.

“What do you make of it?” Laurence asked his fellow professor.

“Hmm, this is certainly no ordinary bell.” Was Micolash’s simple reply.

“Hmm, I could’ve told you that.” 

“You jest, but that is all I can say for certain at the moment. It is clearly imbued with some sort of mysticism, but I can only speculate what it is.” He explained while turning the bell around in his hands. 

“Still, its properties are truly fascinating. You saw how it seemed to summon those fiends to fight for it, did you not?” Laurence nodded, thinking back to how almost instantaneous the summoning process had been. But what was it she had been summoning? The souls of the dead? Constructs derived from her mind? Existing creatures that she further empowered with her sorcery? But in this slew of questions, a particular one was most pressing. 

“Do you think its power is specific to the wielder?” Micolash didn’t reply right away, seemingly pondering the question himself.

“Hmm…” Without warning, he rose to his feet and held out the bell, which he then proceeded to ring in a similar manner to its previous owner.

Laurence shot to his feet. “What’re you doing?!” He demanded in shock.

“Answering your question.” Micolash replied, still ringing the bell. His action had already alerted everyone else, particularly the knights, who quickly drew their weapons and cautiously eyed him.

“Keep calm. It’s only an experiment.” He calmly insisted, but this seemingly did little to quell their worry.

“Put it down, you fool! Put it down!” Lady Maria ordered, going so far as to point her pistol at him.

“Not until I…I…” Suddenly, Micolash cried out and clutched his head with his hand, dropping the bell in the process. He then fell to his knees, with Laurence moving in to support him as the bell rolled away, now glowing with a reddish aura. Seeing this, Lady Maria quickly moved in and crushed it beneath her boot, prematurely silencing its ring.

Micolash continued to clutch his head, though whatever agony he had been experiencing seemed to have subsided. “Are you okay? What happened?” Laurence asked him.

“I don’t know, but it felt like…like something was being torn from me.” He brought his head up, looking around as if he didn’t even recognize where he was. “Everything seems…dimmer now.” 

Suddenly, Lady Maria grabbed him by the collar and hoisted him up to eye level. “It is a miracle that you could see at all. Did you even consider what you were doing?” She glared at him, a palpable anger in her eyes. 

“I didn’t mean to…” “Didn’t mean to what? You knew full well what would happen if your ‘experiment’ succeeded. And regardless of whether it succeeded or not, you just made our presence known to every creature within earshot!!” Maria angrily berated him in front of everyone.

“I’m sorry, I…” 

Deciding to finally intervene, Laurence placed a firm hand on Maria’s shoulder, her angry eyes snapping away from Micolash towards him.

“Enough, Captain. Let him go. I’ll deal with him later.” 

She maintained her tense gaze for a few more seconds before once again turning back to Micolash, whose skin had by now become almost as pale as hers. Soon after, she did as Laurence ordered, but not without shoving his fellow professor a few steps away. 

“Thank you.” Laurence then said to her, which once again turned her gaze to him. And very clearly, her anger had not yet subsided.

She took a step toward him and he had to resist the urge to take a step back. “You would do well to keep your scholars in line, professor. I’m afraid I can’t protect them from their own foolishness.” Lady Maria’s voice was barely above a whisper, but made her words seem more threatening than a tirade ever could.

“Duly noted.” He replied, not breaking her gaze for a second.

Very soon, they heard a myriad of growls, which were growing closer by the second. “Something’s coming!” One of the knights called out.

A few seconds later, Lady Maria turned away from him with an irritated sigh, leaving him standing in place. “Ready yourselves! Keep them out of this room!” She ordered, drawing her blade and leading her men to a nearby passageway. 

Laurence watched them go in silence. He had kept his hands behind his back and was now gripping them tightly together to keep them from shaking. Somehow, she had managed to frighten him more than any beast they’d encountered thus far, but perhaps that was to be expected. After all, up until this point, she had been what was standing between him and them.

Once the knights were gone, Damian made his way over to Micolash. “Are you alright, sir?” Laurence heard him say as he helped him straighten out.

“Yes, yes, of course. Thank you.” Despite this, Laurence could see that he was still somewhat shaken up.

Once Micolash was on his feet, he looked over to Laurence with a somewhat grateful look. However, he was by no means happy with his fellow professor and he made sure to convey that to him with his responding glare. Taking note of this, Micolash’s expression fell and he and Damian started walking away.

He couldn’t say that he was angry with him - just disappointed. Micolash was a devoted scholar and strived to improve his knowledge on his area of study, but that devotion also made him impulsive. And Laurence hadn’t been the first to recognize the risk that this trait presented; Master Willem must have as well, which was why one of them was in a higher position of authority over the other.

As the sounds of battle raged on in the neighboring hall continued, Laurence spared one more look at the now crushed bell. It was most likely useless in its current state, but it would still be a shame to leave such a priceless artifact behind.

“Quite a lot of trouble for a small trinket, don’t you think?” Laurence looked to the side to see Gehrman approaching him.

“ This is considered a trinket?”

“Believe it or not, bells like this are dime a dozen in these parts. There’s always one ringing somewhere in Pthumeru.” Gehrman said as he stopped just next to him. 

“And yet we aren’t allowed to claim them?”

“It is a wide-reaching policy, Master Laurence. But think about it like this – just because something is common does not mean it is worthless.” 

Laurence once again turned his attention to the bell, thinking about what Gehrman had just said. With all the restrictions their “benefactors” had put in place, they were unlikely to leave these labyrinths with little more than hypotheses and a handful of trinkets rather than anything they could study long-term. 

Seeing as the knights were all still occupied in the next room, Laurence went up to the bell and picked it up off the ground, placing it in his satchel.

He then heard Gehrman chuckle, turning towards him. “Now there’s that scholarly spirit.” He said.

Soon after, Matthias reappeared at the doorway. “It’s done. We’re leaving.” He announced. Laurence then turned towards his scholars in order to relay the information to them, but soon noticed that something was wrong.

“Wait. Where’s Lobsang?” The rest of his team looked around in confusion, seeming just as unsure of his whereabouts as he was. A sense of dread almost immediately set in; had they somehow lost him?

“Lobsang!” He called out, hoping that he was still somewhere nearby. Very soon, he heard the sound of someone quickly running up the stairs.

“I’m here, professor!” Lobsang called back to him, coming into view soon after.

Laurence breathed a sigh of relief. “Oh, thank heavens. With all that’s happened, I feared the worst.” 

“My apologies. I was just on the lower level.” He told him, but didn’t quite elaborate on just what he was doing down there.

“I see. Well, just be sure to stay close to us going forward.”

Lobsang nodded his understanding. “Of course, professor.” 

With everyone accounted for, they went to where Matthias was still waiting for them, finding that he had by now been joined by his superior. 

“I trust everything went well?” Laurence asked once he was close enough.

“You’re all still alive, aren’t you?” Judging from this reply, Lady Maria’s mood hadn’t improved, not that he expected it too.

“Right.” He then took the opportunity to get a better look at their surroundings and found that they were once again faced with yet another branching path. On the right was a hallway leading to another large room, where most of Lady Maria’s company were still waiting; on the left, a wooden door.

“So, what now?” He asked.

“Well, I said that you’ll get to explore this labyrinth in its entirety and a promise is a promise. You are free to take a team to investigate what lies beyond that door.” Lady Maria replied.

“And what about you? Will you go to see what lies beyond that room?” “There’s no need. We found another hallway, but from the looks of things, it will only take us back to where we started.” She explained.

Matthias then stepped forward. “Captain, if I may, perhaps we should confirm your theory. You take some of our men in that direction and I’ll take Professor Laurence to see what’s past that door there.” 

At first, she appeared to be rather unsure about his suggestion, but rather surprisingly, she didn’t argue. “Very well. But in that case…” She pointed her weapon at Micolash. “You, come with me.”

When he nervously looked over at him, Laurence gave him a stern nod that told him to go along with her command, which he seemed to immediately understand. Him and Damian then proceeded to walk towards Lady Maria, who moved to the side to allow them to pass before turning back to them.

“Once you’re done here, meet us at the camp. Good luck.” She told them.

“Thank you, Captain.” Said Matthias.

The two parties then turned to go their separate ways, with Maria’s second almost immediately making his way to the door in order to open it up. As all this happened, Laurence went up to Gehrman and put a hand on his shoulder to get his attention.

“May I ask that you go with them?” 

Gehrman appeared rather surprised by this. “You refer to Master Micolash?” 

“Yes.” Laurence confirmed, making him smile.

“Afraid that our lady will gut him when we’re not looking?” 

“Not exactly, but I still think it would be better that you’re there.” Laurence replied. 

Though he was clearly hesitant, he eventually complied. “Understood, sir.” 

“Thank you, Gehrman.” The professor patted his shoulder just before the older man turned around and moved to join Lady Maria’s half of the company. As he made his way over, two other knights entered the hallway, no doubt ordered to join Matthias in escorting them.

“Oh, do excuse me, gentlemen.” Gehrman politely said as he passed them, causing them both to look on in confusion. If they were thinking about stopping him, they ultimately decided against it.

“Professor Laurence!” He heard Matthias call out, finding that he was still standing by the unopened door. “I suggest you keep up.”

“Just a moment.” The professor quickly ran up to join him, with Amelia and Lobsang following in tow. 

Once they and the other two knights were close, Matthias lifted the door open as had been done numerous times before. But even though he was able to open it successfully, the knight slightly stumbled to the side once he was done, managing to prevent himself from falling by placing his hand on a nearby wall.

Laurence moved to check on him. “Are you alright?” 

“I’m fine, professor. Thank you.” Matthias said as he stood back up to his full height, though that was clearly far from the case. 

“And here I was thinking I’d discharged you too early.” He jested, earning a small chuckle from him.

“Come now, you and your lovely assistant did a splendid job.” He heard Amelia utter a quiet “hmm” behind them. He would’ve liked to point out that she was much more than just his nursing assistant, but rather a doctor in her own right, but he decided now wasn’t the time nor place. 

“Anyway, let’s get moving.” Just before he stepped into the room, Laurence took notice of something on the other side of the room; once he spotted it, he grabbed Matthias by the shoulder to keep him from going any further.

“Wait! Look over there.” He pointed towards an arrangement of three wooden carvings, the same ones they happened upon earlier. “You weren’t there when we first encountered them, but they’re a trap. If you had stepped on that tile there, you would’ve been skewered by a flaming arrow.” Laurence explained to the knight, who appeared somewhat shocked by the news.

“Yes, I see.” He replied, looking back to the statues. “Well, we wouldn’t want that happening, would we?”

“No, we wouldn’t. It would be…inconvenient, to say the least.”

Matthias lightly chuckled in response. “Then we’ll be sure to exercise caution going forward.” He then said.

Laurence then watched as Matthias led his two companions inside, making sure to avoid the mechanism as they made their way towards the row of statues on the other side of the room. 

“Do you see anything?” Laurence asked when they were about halfway inside.

“Nothing yet.” Just a second later, Matthias focused on the right-hand side of the room, his reaction a mixture of dread and irritation. “Oh, you have got to be…”

A loud screech then echoed through the hall, one that almost made Laurence jump out of his skin.  This feeling of dread only grew worse when he saw what had produced this noise: a humanoid figure wielding two sickle like weapons, which quickly besieged the three knights. 

“Push it back! Keep it away from the scholars!” Matthias barked out as they struggled to keep up with the assailant.

Laurence watched the ensuing battle with a feeling of uncertainty. The creature displayed a frightening amount of speed, moving from knight to knight in the blink of an eye and attacking them with unparalleled aggression. Though they were managing to hold their own for now, the knights were clearly exhausted from their previous encounter with the bell maiden.

“Professor, what do we do?” Amelia suddenly asked him.

“Stay where you are – this is the safest place for us. That thing might be fast, but I doubt it can outrun an arrow.” He firmly replied.

“Wait a second. That’s it!” Laurence looked over to his cohort in surprise. “You remember what Gehrman did with that trap earlier, don’t you?”

“Of course, but…” The professor quickly deduced what Lobsang was planning. “Yes, I see, but this is far more likely to miss.” 

“What’s more likely to miss? Professor?” Amelia was very clearly confused by what was happening. After taking a few moments to weigh their options, Laurence turned to the others.

“We’re going to get its attention. Stay calm, but get ready to run if need be.” He instructed.

Amelia was evidently shocked by this plan. “That’s insane, it’ll…” Laurence put his hands on her shoulders.

“No, it won’t. Trust me.” He assured her. Though his pupil was clearly still skeptical about their plan, she soon nodded her head in agreement. Regardless of what happened, Laurence wouldn’t let any harm befall her.

Looking back into the room, they found that the creature was still locked in combat against the knights and more importantly, that the statues were still standing. Laurence was just about to whistle to get the creature’s attention as Gehrman had done, but relented at the last moment. Though doing so was likely to draw the Pthumerian’s attention, it was also likely to draw the attention of the defending knights; if for whatever reason their opponent paid no heed to the sound, that single moment of distraction would be enough for it to cut them down. They needed to find another way.

After frantically looking around, Laurence soon spotted a nearby pebble lying on the ground and picked it up. Taking aim, he waited for the pale figure to slow down and once he saw an opening, threw the rock with all his might, which sailed through the air and hit the attacker in the back of the head. Its head then snapped back to find the one who disturbed it, granting the professor his first good look at its skeletal, ghoulish visage.

Quickly forgetting about its current targets, the Pthumerian screeched and charged towards them. In the blink of an eye, its blind pursuit brought it close to the doorway and over the panel that activated the trap. The knights appeared ready to give chase, but Matthias seemed to quickly take notice of its current trajectory.

“Get down!!” He called out to his men just before the ringing sound rang out, pulling one of his fellows out of the way just as a flaming arrow flew past them.

Meanwhile, Laurence was likewise waiting to hear that sound, standing firmly as the madman bore down on them. Once he heard it, he grabbed Amelia and ducked to the side, hiding behind the cover of the wall. As he shielded his pupil, a swift procession of sounds followed: another screech from the madman; the approaching flickering of fire; the crunching of bone and flesh. And then, nothing. 

The professor cautioned a glance to find the madman had dropped its weapons and was sluggishly stumbling straight ahead, with the only sound coming from it being a painful whimper. He soon saw why; an arrow was sticking out of its back, about where its lungs should be. Even if its lungs had somehow gone unscathed, several essential arteries and veins would’ve no doubt been damaged as well, not even taking into account the internal damage done by the arrow’s flaming tip.

A few seconds went by where the Pthumerian continued on its feet, even as its blood seeped down onto the sandy ground. However, it wasn’t long before it fell to its knees and not long after that, collapsed to the floor, seemingly unmoving.

“Professor! Professor!!” Soon after the madman had collapsed, Matthias appeared at the doorway and hurriedly looked around the corridor, stopping once he spotted him and Amelia. 

“Ah, you’re alive. Thank goodness.” He said.

“Likewise to you, my good knight.” Matthias helped him up to his feet. “What about your men?” He asked him.

“They’re safe. We managed to move out of the arrow’s trajectory just in time.” The knight then turned and walked towards their attacker, who was by now lying in a pool of its own blood. “How fortunate it is that it managed to find a different mark. If it hadn’t, I could only imagine what would’ve happened.” He said as he flipped it over on its front, revealing the pained expression it had worn as it had died.

“Yes, indeed.” As Laurence said this, he looked over to Lobsang, who had managed to stand up himself and shared a small smile with him. It didn’t seem that Matthias had pieced together that it was them that had alerted the madman, much less that it was Lobsang who first devised the idea to do so.

“Ah, but no matter. Let us put this behind us.” Matthias said before turning back to face them. “I do hope this ordeal hasn’t dampened your thirst for discovery.” 

“Not in the slightest.” Laurence replied.

With that, the knight walked back the way they came in, leaving the deceased madman behind. Just as Laurence and Lobsang were about to follow him, the professor realized that Amelia was still sitting up against the wall, appearing to be rather shaken.

Laurence offered her his hand. “Come along now, Amelia.” He said in a gentle voice.

After a brief moment of hesitation, she took his hand and let him help her to her feet. Once she was standing, she buried her face in his chest and started to sob, which prompted the professor to gently embrace her.

“Shh. It’s okay. It’s over.” He said to comfort her. Once it seemed that his pupil had settled down somewhat, Laurence pulled back and looked her in the eye assuredly. 

“Now, we’re going to see what’s in that room. Are you okay to join us?” Several seconds went by without an answer, but she eventually gave a half-hearted nod. “Good. Stay close, now.” Laurence said.

With that, he turned towards the door in order to join the others inside, with Amelia following just behind him in silence. Despite coming out of it unscathed, the ordeal had clearly taken its toll on her, which was hardly surprising. Amelia was young - the youngest of them all, in fact. Whereas the rest of Laurence’s team was made up of tenured professors, she had only just concluded her medical studies little over a year ago, a process that he had overseen from beginning to end. But no matter how accomplished a scholar she might’ve been, nothing could’ve prepared her, or really any of them, for what they faced now.

Once they were inside, they were able to get their first good look at the room’s outline. Most of it was obscured by a thick wall of blowing sand, but he could see what looked like a white tree growing out of the ground just beside them; a most curious sight indeed. But what was perhaps more striking was the recesses within the walls, within which were an untold number of human skulls. 

“What in the world…” Laurence uttered to himself as they made their way further into the room. He had seen similar arrangements in other parts of the labyrinth, but never to this extent. The very air of the room was foul with decay and everywhere he looked, he saw dozens, if not hundreds more skeletal remains. So much death…

“Professor! Look over here!” It was Lobsang, who had ventured into the blowing sands. Laurence quickly ran up to join him and managed to spot what had caught his attention; a richly decorated chest, whose golden material starkly contrasted with its dreary surroundings. Except…

The two scholars went up to inspect the object in greater detail, which quickly confirmed Laurence’s suspicion.

“It’s a coffin.” 

Looking around the rest of the room – at the skeletal remains that lined the walls – he could only come to one conclusion.

“Then we are indeed trespassing upon a tomb…and not one meant for the Gods.” 

“Yes, it would seem so.” Lobsang said in agreement before turning his attention back to the coffin. “But then who is it meant for; I wonder?”

“Someone important, I would assume, seeing as they were honored with an individual resting place.” Laurence hypothesized.

“Honored, you say?” Lobsang was clearly skeptical, but the professor knew him enough to know he wasn’t disparaging his hypothesis. He was not native to Yharnam and naturally held beliefs that were vastly different from his. But far from driving a wedge between the two of them, they found that they had much to learn from each-other.

“In their eyes, perhaps.” Laurence paused for a few moments, taking a deep breath. “Shall we get better acquainted?” He asked his cohort.

Lobsang was clearly apprehensive at his suggestion, but the two of them quickly came to a silent agreement. Together, the two scholars placed their hands on the lid of the coffin and pushed with all their might, eventually managing to push it off. Within, they found the mummified remains of what looked like a woman, whose now brittle hair was adorned with a richly decorated crown, a clear symbol of the status she held in life. 

From what was understood, women were held in high regard among the Pthumerians, as their monarchs were almost exclusively female. However, he very much doubted that this woman had been one of those monarchs and if she was, her name had long been lost. But whatever her role was, it was likely she was esteemed not for her wisdom, but rather her ability to serve as a vessel, in a way only a woman could. 

As they observed the body, Laurence soon took notice of something that the mummy was holding against her bosom. It didn’t seem like any kind of object and appeared just as withered as its bearer, if not more so. Upon closer inspection, what it was soon became clear to him…and the realization came close to making him wretch.

“Oh, dear heavens…” He said as he forced himself to look away.

Not far away, Matthias took notice of his discomfort. “What? What is it?” He asked as he made his way over to them. Once he joined them by the coffin, he himself saw what had elicited this reaction and produced a similar shock in him.

In the woman’s arms was an infant, one whose body had withered down to a bony, ghastly state. Its eyes were hallowed, its arms were as thin as a twig and what was left of its skin was ashen dry: Laurence feared that a single touch would cause its body to crumble into dust. 

“Poor soul.” Lobsang lamented. “What do you think happened to it?”

“The same thing that happened to every other soul entombed here. It was infected.” Laurence replied.

“By the scourge, you mean?” “It has to be. The Pthumerians, they are not beholden to the passage of time nor can they succumb to hunger or thirst. These catacombs - they were not filled as the decades went by, but rather months, perhaps even weeks.” Laurence said, thinking of just how many Pthumerians rested here.

“You believe they died of illness?” Lobsang asked him.

“No.” Laurence replied, which seemed to surprise him. “The scourge would’ve been the catalyst for their deaths, not the cause. Given their nature, it would fester within their bodies, but never to the point where it could actually kill them. However, it could still be passed on to others, or at least, that must’ve been what they believed.”

“I see. So, in order for them to die, they would’ve had to be…” “Executed.” The two scholars looked over to Matthias, who had finished Lobsang’s thought for him, with the professor noting that he appeared even more shocked than they were.

“Yes.” The professor carried on. “History suggests that whatever it is that fell upon this land, they never found a cure or, in fact, any suitable treatment. In that scenario, more drastic measures must’ve been taken in an attempt to halt the spread.” 

Despite this being little more than a theory, Laurence was quite confident in his conclusion. Every doctor knew that it was essential to recognize signs of illness early, as this was when treatment was most effective; the longer the disease has to develop, the less effective treatment will be. But in this case, there was no treatment, but the illness nevertheless had to be eliminated, which would leave only one option.

“No wonder then that Loran was forsaken.” Said Lobsang. “But the question remains: Where did this ‘scourge’ come from?” 

“With any luck, that is a question we will soon answer.” Was Laurence’s reply. “But I’m afraid that answer does not lie here. We should move on.”

“Wait, Professor!” Lobsang called out as he turned to walk away from the coffin. “Are we to leave empty-handed?” 

Laurence took a moment to consider his colleague’s question. They could very well take the woman’s crown or perhaps even her late child if they were careful enough: either of these prizes could make prime candidates for additional study. But they had already defiled their resting place and the thought of defiling the dead was not something that appealed to him.

“Leave them be. There is still much for us to discover.” He ordered.

“Very well.” Lobsang agreed.

From there, Matthias led them back the way they came, which took them past the dead madman and beyond that, the bell maiden. Neither of these guardians appeared to have fallen to beast hood, but nevertheless appeared to have lost that which made them human. What was it that reduced them to that state, he wondered?

As they walked, Laurence fell in step with Amelia at the very back of the group, who was yet to say a word. “How’re you feeling?” he asked her.

“Better.” She replied. “Please, do forgive my earlier…mishap.”

“There is nothing to forgive, Amelia.” He assured her. “Regardless of what you might think, you showed great courage.”

“Did I?” She said, clearly unconvinced.

“You did. Like the rest of us, you stood firm in the face of peril. But unlike us, you were willing to show that you were afraid.”

Amelia looked at him, showing a clear surprise at his words. “But, professor, you chose me to accompany you on this journey because…” Laurence placed a hand on her shoulder, interrupting her.

“I chose you because you are determined, inquisitive: as the best scholars are. I did not choose you - nor anyone else here with us today – because I believed you to be infallible. You are human and thus, are subject to fear; without it, even death would go unlamented. But you are only governed by fear if you allow yourself to be.” 

After a brief silence, the professor continued. “But though I may have chosen you, I cannot force you to stay. If you so wish, you may leave at any time.” 

He kept his voice just quiet enough so as to not draw the attention of Lobsang or any of the knights, not wishing to place any unwanted attention on Amelia that may influence her answer. The young woman remained silent for several more moments, no doubt mulling over what he had told her. Yet despite that, Laurence felt like he knew what she would say before the words had even formed on her lips.

“No, professor. My place is here, by your side.”

The professor smiled. “And so, it shall be.” He said.

From there, they walked in silence until they returned to their camp, where they were relieved to find those who had separated from them, as promised. Lady Maria was the first to take notice of their arrival, stepping away from her resting men in order to come over and greet them.

“Welcome back. I trust that all went well?” This question appeared to be directed to Matthias, who promptly responded.

“We ran into some minor resistance, but we were able to overcome it. For their part, Professor Laurence and his scholars displayed…remarkable fortitude.”  At first, Laurence thought nothing of this comment, but he soon picked up on a certain implication in what the knight had said. Turning his eyes to him, he saw Matthias lightly smile, but nothing more.

“I’m sure they did.” Said Lady Maria, promptly turning her gaze to him. “And what of you, Professor? Any discoveries to speak of?” 

“Yes, we found what seemed to be a catacomb – we took time to study those who rested there, but otherwise, left them undisturbed.” Laurence decided to leave out their actions before this occurred, just as Matthias seemed to have done. 

“I see. And I presume you wish to explore further?”

“If you and your men are willing.” Laurence replied.

Lady Maria turned back to her company, who were all taking the time to recuperate in their own ways: reclining and chatting with their fellows. To no one’s surprise, they appeared quite tired. 

“I will see who I can muster, but I fear we cannot afford to keep going much longer.” She told him.

Laurence then looked to his own scholars, who he could tell were getting similarly fatigued. “Understandable. Once we are finished, I believe a reprieve is in order.” He said.

“I must concur.” Maria replied.

The two parties then split off in order to determine who will be staying and who will be going. Laurence, Lobsang and Amelia went to rejoin their fellow scholars, who had gathered by a fire that had been organized near the center of the camp, which was being fueled by their own firewood and remains for some empty coffins they’d found nearby.

Gehrman was quick to notice them. “Ah, and so our wanderers return. Find anything interesting?” He asked them.

“We did, but unfortunately we do not have time to tell of it. We are due to set out again soon.” This announcement did not see much jubilation, not that Laurence expected anything different. 

“Yes, yes, ours is a most toilsome task, but the miner cannot expect to strike gold by simply venturing into a cave. Every piece of rock he chips away brings him ever closer to his coveted price. Perhaps it will be found beyond the very next stone or perhaps in a different cave entirely; he will only know for certain if he presses on."

The scholars shared a few glances among themselves, something that made the professor smile. He then continued his address. “But at once, a miner with aching limbs and an empty stomach is unlikely to make much progress.” He then looked behind him. “Lobsang!” 

“Yes?” He promptly replied.

“What do you say we start putting that fire to good use, hmm?” 

A moment later, Lobsang smiled. “Any requests?” 

“Surprise us.” He then turned back to the rest of his scholars, who seemed slightly more alight.

“It’ll be a while yet before our meal is prepared – more than enough time for us to do a little more scrounging. And a hard day’s work is likely to make it all the more fulfilling.” Laurence said, slightly putting his hand forward in invitation. “Now then, shall we?”

For a few moments, no one said anything, leaving it to Gehrman to break the silence. “I’m convinced.” he said, going up to take his place beside him.

Laurence then waited for the rest of them to follow suit, which they soon did. However, when Micolash started to do the same, he hesitated and did not rise from his seat, instead opting to look up at him expectantly. This was no doubt a result of what occurred before they were separated, something that Laurence had by no means forgotten. Despite this, he silently motioned for Micolash to join them; this obviously surprised him, but it only kept him from standing up for a few more moments. Laurence had no intention to let his colleague’s earlier action slide and he fully intended to have words with him once things settled down somewhat, but he also didn’t want to make a scene in front of the others. 

“You stay as well, Amelia.” He then told his student. “You’ve been on your feet ever since we arrived here. If anyone deserves to rest, it's you.” 

The young woman nodded. “Yes, sir. Thank you, sir.” 

With all that decided, the professor turned around. “The rest of you, with me. Onwards we go!” 

He proceeded to lead Gehrman and the rest of his scholars towards the right-hand gate, which lead further into the labyrinth. They were yet to see what lay beyond its boundaries, which made the prospect of exploring it all the more enticing. 

Near the gate, they reunited with Lady Maria and her company. The two knights who had accompanied Matthias returned to guard the camp, but their superior remained by his captain’s side. Without needing to say a word, Laurence and his counterpart shared an understanding nod before their respective teams joined together and continued past the gate.

From there, the journey proceeded much like the last: there was a gate, a dark corridor and a handful of beasts for the knights to swiftly dispose of. Much of the scenery that they encountered seemed to blend together, with hardly any distinguishing features to separate their current path from the last; there were no engravings, nor did there seem to be any change in the art or brickwork. 

As they made their way through what at first appeared to be yet another dimly-lit corridor, Laurence noticed that Caryll had fallen behind from the rest of the group and was staring down a passageway branching off their main path.

“What is it, Caryll? Are you alright” he asked in concern, but she didn’t even seem to notice him. Before he could ask any other questions, she took off running down the corridor. “Caryll!” he called out as he chased after her.

“Master Laurence!” He heard Gehrman call out to him, but he didn’t pay him any mind, turning the corner after her 

As he ran after his friend, the air somehow became clearer and easier to breathe, a welcome relief from the almost suffocating humidity they had been forced to contend with. But that wasn’t all. Nearby, Laurence could hear the sharp sound of flowing air, but it wasn’t like the steady gust that carried the sand throughout the halls – this was wind. Real wind.

Very soon, he passed through the doorway and saw Caryll standing at the edge of what looked like a cliff. “What were you doing? You could’ve…” 

The words he wanted to say were instantly forgotten as he found himself staring at a most astonishing sight. From the small platform he was standing on, he could see a long, wooden bridge stretching across a wide chasm, creaking in the wind. Looking further still, he could see countless more bridges of a similar make and above them, he looked up to see an opening in the rocks, beyond which he could see the sky.

So enraptured was he that he barely noticed Gehrman and Lady Maria join them on the platform, no doubt having pursued him there. 

The captain began to approach Caryll, clearly displeased with her rash action. “You! What were you…” She stopped short of finishing her sentence as she too saw where they were. As the rest of the knights and scholars began to join them, they all displayed very similar reactions of awe.

“Well, I’ll be.” He heard Gehrman say as he walked to his side. “This is definitely a first.”

As they continued to stare at the scene in front of them, Laurence soon took notice of something. “Look, over there!” He pointed across the chasm, where he could see a burning torch. “It looks like there’s another path up ahead. Shall we investigate it, my lady?”

There was no response. In confusion, he looked to Lady Maria, finding that she was standing completely still, almost as if she had been turned to stone. “My lady?” He repeated, which seemed to snap her out of her daze.

“Oh, yes.” Her voice was much meeker than he had grown used to. “I…I think we should return to our path – see where it leads first.”

“If I’m not mistaken, that would be down there.” Matthias spoke this time, with them turning to find him looking at the left-hand edge of the platform they were on. Laurence went up to join him and found that sure enough, there was another passageway leading to another bridge.

“It is still worth investigating, I think.” Laurence soon said, turning back to Lady Maria. “We can send two teams: one for each bridge.”

“No.” She said rather abruptly, catching everyone off guard. “I mean, not until we’re certain these bridges are safe to cross.” 

Matthias soon stepped forward. “Then allow me to be the judge.” He said.  

At first, Lady Maria appeared hesitant to accept, but surprisingly did not rebuke her knight. Instead, she silently nodded her approval, a gesture that Matthias returned in kind; for the briefest moment, Laurence thought he saw what looked like a glimmer of gratitude in the captain’s eyes.

Everyone turned to watch as Matthias stood in front of the bridge, which creaked and swayed in the wind. After the knight had gathered his courage, he stepped onto its wooden boards and then took another step forward, and then another, and another. Each step he took was cautious and mindful of the wind blowing through the cavern; if he lost his balance, he would surely be plunged into the depths below. Thankfully, the bridge held firm, which allowed Matthias, and those watching him, to allay some of their fear. 

“It seems sturdy enough.” He announced. “We should have no trouble crossing it, assuming we remain cautious.” 

Laurence then looked to Lady Maria, awaiting her judgement. “Very well.” She eventually said, albeit reluctantly. “Though, it is doubtful that they will bear our combined weight.” 

“But surely, it will be able to bear the weight of a smaller group.” Laurence replied.

“Yes, perhaps so.” Lady Maria then turned to her company, in particular, a man with a well-combed red beard. “Emil, I want you to take a team down the path we saw earlier. If it does indeed lead to the bridge below us, cross with great caution.” 

Emil nodded his understanding. “Of course, captain.”

This now left Laurence to decide who within his company would go where. His first instinct was to once again assign Micolash to head the other group, but then he remembered the rabble he had caused earlier. Handing off such responsibility after what he did would not reflect well on him, as well as having the potential to cause further friction with Lady Maria, who was also unlikely to trust him in such a position so soon. After looking through his gathered scholars, he came to a decision.

“Norbert!” 

A somewhat plump man stepped forward. “Yes, Professor Laurence?” He asked.

“I want you to accompany Emil’s company down to the lower level. Can you do that for me?”

Norbert had clearly not anticipated this request, but soon complied nonetheless. “Yes, I believe I can.”

“That is good.” Laurence replied. “Take Micolash and Damian with you; be ever careful.” 

“Be sure to do the same, my friend.” Said Norbert, placing a hand on his shoulder, a gesture that Laurence returned in kind.

He then watched as Norbert turned and followed Lady Maria's representative back the way they came, leaving Damian and a noticeably disenchanted Micolash to follow him; before he left, Laurence's fellow professor gave him something of a dismayed look before finally turning to leave. It was not lost on him that Micolash had expected to be the one to lead the others on and in any other case, Laurence would’ve chosen him without a moment’s hesitation. But he also had to maintain a degree of order within their ranks and this was a perfect opportunity to make that clear not just to Micolash, but everyone else as well.

Once Norbert's company were all gone, Laurence turned to the two scholars that still remained with him: Gehrman and a still distracted Caryll. While the former had been carefully observing the departure, she had been staring out across the chasm, similar to what she had done the last time she had accompanied him. She didn't seem to notice him walking up behind her and almost jumped when he placed a hand on her shoulder to get her attention, sharply turning her head around in his direction. Taking note of her uneasiness, Laurence smiled at her.

"Come, Caryll."

A few seconds later, she nodded and proceeded to follow him. Clearly, whatever afflicted her had not gone away, which made him all the more resolute in his decision to keep an eye on her; the last thing he wanted was for her to get herself hurt.

Before they could step onto the bridge, they first had to wait for Lady Maria and the few members of her company that remained to go before them. It took a surprisingly long time for her to take even a step onto the bridge and even longer still for her to start moving at a somewhat constant speed. In stark contrast to his captain, Matthias stood confidently about a quarter of the way along the bridge.

“Come along, now. Mind your footing…and don’t look down.” 

Laurence did well to follow the knight’s advice. Though the wide expanse of the bridge mostly hid it from view, they were very, very far off the ground. And to make matters worse, there were no support beams or ropes or any kind for them to regain their balance were they to lose it, which made it most prudent to go at a slow, careful pace.

However, it seemed that Lady Maria had taken this advice to heart a tad too much, for she soon started walking forward at an almost glacial pace before stopping entirely. “My lady, why have we stopped?” Laurence asked, but there was no response – not even so much as an acknowledging glance.

From behind her, he could see that she was tightly grasping the hilt of her weapon and even over the sound of the wind, he could hear the sound of her breathing. Just as he was beginning to get worried, he saw Matthias standing on the opposite end of the bridge, looking in her direction.

“Come, captain. It’s just a little bit further.” His words were resolute, but assuring. 

Lady Maria remained in place for a few more moments before she finally took a tentative step forward and continued on her way, allowing the rest of them to do the same as well.

“How very odd.” Gehrman quietly commented, and Laurence couldn’t help but agree.

A few moments later, they were all safely over the bridge, allowing the professor to look back across the vast chasm they had to cross to get there. As he did, he spotted Norbert’s company attempting their own crossing; not wanting to unnecessarily startle them, he limited their interaction to a wave, which Norbert mirrored further down. Laurence couldn’t help but smile as he observed their crossing, which he was soon joined in doing so by Gehrman.

“Remarkable, is it not?” he said, glancing around the chasm. 

“Indeed. No one’s going to believe this.” Laurence replied, prompting Gehrman to chuckle.

“Oh, I very much doubt your headmaster will find much interest in vistas like these. His eyes are set firmly beyond the horizons.” 

“I know.” Laurence replied. He knew better than anyone that Master Willem had long found little pleasure in worldly delights: things like food, scents and splendorous views. Wherever it was he looked, his gaze was set on what lay beyond the confines of this plane and his mind was set on determining how to reach it.

“Then shall we keep looking? We are bound to find something that will pique his interest eventually.” 

Gehrman smiled in response. “Lead the way, sir.” He prompted.

They turned to find the knights standing close to the doorway, with Lady Maria standing particularly close. “Are you sure you’re alright, my lady?” Laurence asked her.

“I’m fine.” She said, keeping her eyes straight ahead. “I’m fine.” 

Laurence couldn’t say he was entirely convinced, but recognized it wasn’t his place to pry. “Well, then in that case, lead on.” He told her.

Lady Maria proceeded to do just that, entering the proceeding corridor with a bit more haste than they’d grown used to. As usual, everyone remained vigilant for any possible threats, though from what he could see, this particular corridor appeared to be empty, save for a wooden coffin that was leaning against the wall. Despite how inconspicuous this was, the company remained wary as they passed by the object, but ultimately managed to pass without issue.

In time, they came to stand before yet another closed door, which Lady Maria proceeded to open before her and her knights entered to check if the coast was clear. “There’s no one here.” She soon announced.

Laurence and his two companions saw this as an invitation to enter and upon stepping foot within the room, he found himself standing, mouth agape, as he saw what they had discovered. At the very front of the room, he could see a vast collection of treasure, which were littered around an altar; furthermore, there were numerous chests in various corners of the room.

“So, have we struck gold yet?” Gehrman jokingly asked as they observed the room's contents.

“Let’s find out.” 

Laurence then started making his way further into the room, past the knights and towards the altar. Sure enough, he found numerous artifacts: pots, shields, cups, candlesticks and even a couple of swords, all of which were in surprisingly good condition despite the deteriorating sand surrounding it. With how many no doubt valuable items were stored away here, he was genuinely shocked that they were unguarded.

Or at least, that’s what he thought.

“Laurence, above you!!” He heard Caryll cry out, which made his eyes shoot up just in time to see a round, black shape descending on him.

Within a split second, a crushing weight knocked the professor on his back and he quickly became aware of what was attacking him: an enormous spider, its four lidless eyes boring into his soul as it loomed over him. However, it did not seem to possess any fangs like a normal spider, leaving it to attempt to stab him with its pointed legs. 

In a panic, Laurence narrowly evaded the creature’s attempts to skewer him and attempted to crawl out from underneath it, but it did not let up, clearly not wishing to give up its advantageous position. However, it had no way to pin him down, which allowed him to reach for his dagger as it bore down on him again. As soon as it was out of its sheath, the professor quickly thrust it upwards and managed to impale its abdomen, causing the spider to cry out in anguish. 

By now, terror had firmly taken hold and Laurence’s mind was focused solely on ensuring his own survival. Pulling out the blade, he stabbed the spider again and again, before bringing it out and plunging it into the center of its head, firmly grasping the hilt until it stopped writhing and its legs gave out, causing it to fall onto him, dead.

Though his attacker was slain, Laurence found himself unable to move, staring up at the ceiling as he sucked in breath after breath in a bid to calm his racing heart. Throughout this terrifying ordeal, surrounding sounds hardly registered to him, but he was now able to hear someone running to him.

“Laurence! LAURENCE!!” It was Gehrman, who pushed the dead spider off of him and knelt down by his side, with Caryll by his side.

“Look at me.” He gently said as he put his hands on either side of his face. “Look at me, are you hurt?” Finding that he couldn’t bring himself to speak, Laurence managed to shake his head no. “Are you absolutely sure?” This time, the professor nodded, which brought some relief to the worried Gehrman.

“Oh, thank goodness.” He uttered, smiling in relief before looking at the deceased spider, who still had the dagger lodged in its eye. “Came in handy after all, eh?” 

In response, Laurence managed to force out a smile, though he was still quite shaken by the ordeal. His attacker’s blood had stained both his clothes and his face; in the chaos, he hadn’t noticed that it was coloured red like a human, rather than the blue that was expected of a spider. 

“Get out of the way! Out of the way!” Lady Maria suddenly ran up to his side, crouching down beside Gehrman.

“It’s okay, my lady. He’s alive.” 

Her eyes turned to him and then back to Laurence. “And unharmed?” Once again, he nodded to confirm, which made her worried look shift into a soft smile. 

“Good. That’s good.” 

For the next little while, the two of them continued to look and smile at each-other until Lady Maria held out her hand in order to help him up, which he accepted.

“Forgive me.” She said as she helped him up to a sitting position. “We were ambushed by two more of its kind – they kept us from coming to your aid sooner. I have no idea how we missed them.”

“Do not fret yourself, my lady. They hid themselves well.” Gehrman said. “Still, it is fortunate that Caryll was able to spot them when she did. Otherwise, I fear things would’ve turned out differently.”

 This brought Laurence’s attention to Caryll, who was standing just a few steps away, no doubt to keep her distance from Lady Maria. Despite this, the captain soon turned to her as well.

“Yes, indeed.” She stood up and approached her. “I commend you, good scholar – you have a keen eye.”

Caryll was clearly surprised by this compliment but eventually bowed her head. “Thank you, Lady Maria.” 

As this happened, Gehrman remained by his side. “Well, Master Laurence? You haven’t forgotten how to speak, I hope?”

“Oh no, not at all.” Laurence finally managed to speak, forcing himself to stand up with Gehrman’s aid. As he did, he was reminded of the hoard of treasure that had originally drawn him here. 

“We should alert Norbert and the others – tell them to come join us. We will surely need help getting everything back.”

“A fine idea.” Said Gehrman, turning back towards the exit. “They are likely to be starting their return journey soon, assuming they haven’t started it already. I’ll tell them to come straight here; in the meantime, you ought to get your breath back.”

“Who says I need to?” In response, Gehrman stopped and turned back to look at him, a somewhat serious glint in his eye.

“Trust me, young master.” He said before continuing on his way, leaving Laurence to look after him.

Once the older scholar disappeared from view, Laurence turned around in order to retrieve his dagger, which was still impaled in the spider’s head. Though now he could see that the creature that attacked him had twelve legs as opposed to the traditional eight, which together with the lack of fangs and the red blood that still dripped from it numerous wounds led him to conclude that it was no ordinary spider, but rather yet another victim of the scourge.

It took a couple of tugs to remove the dagger from the spider’s flesh, a process that made Laurence coil in disgust. Once it was free, the professor looked down at his blood-stained blade, the weight of what he’d done finally setting in. As a doctor, he was no stranger to death, but he had never inflicted it on man or beast, nor had he had ever wished to.

“It had to be done.” Lady Maria’s voice cut through the silence, causing him to look to her across the room. She was herself no stranger to death, but her duty made it so it was left in her wake. But deep down, Laurence knew she was right. A part of him had hoped to never have to use the blade, but without it, he would’ve almost certainly met his end then and there.

But in the end, it was not an experience he wanted to relive.

….

In time, Norbert and the rest of Laurence’s scholars rejoined them and eagerly started shifting through the room in search of worthwhile treasures. Upon their arrival, the professor noticed that they all appeared somewhat despondent, something that their discovery only slightly improved.

“And where did your travels take you, if I may ask?” Laurence asked Norbert as they searched together.

“Nowhere pleasant.” Norbert replied. “Even before the bridge, we happened upon a group of rotten bodies hanging from the ceiling. Past it, we found nothing but a coffin in a room flooded with blood and corpses. You really should be glad you weren’t present; the stench was unlike anything I’ve ever encountered.”

“I’m afraid I felt it all the same.” He told his friend, recalling that unpleasant odor he noticed as he waved to them earlier. “Was that all?”

“I wish it were. That coffin I mentioned before, it was guarded by perhaps the most hideous creature I’ve ever had the displeasure of witnessing. Its skin hugged its bones, if they weren’t already jutting out; its claws became as long as swords on a whim; but worst of all was its head - it looked as if its neck had been snapped to one side, yet it carried on undisturbed. What’s more, if you looked at its jaws, it almost looked like it was…smiling.”

Just hearing Norbert describe the beast sent a few shivers up Laurence’s spine, which he imagined was but a fraction of what he had felt when he beheld it. Clearly, they had only just begun to see the depths of the horrors that dwelt in this land.

“A continuation of my shoddy luck, I suppose.” Norbert said as he picked up a goblet.

“Hmm?” Laurence asked, unsure of whether he heard him correctly.

“You recall the conclusion of my first outing, do you not? Perhaps foolishly, I thought that madman was the worst thing this labyrinth could throw at us, but it seems determined to prove me wrong.” 

The professor lightly nodded along. “None of us have the gift of foresight, I’m afraid. Though at once, I cannot say that there is much wisdom in always expecting the worst.”

“No, perhaps not.” Norbert eventually conceded, looking around the room they were in. “I do hope we will come across more oases like this one – finally, something to show for our trouble.”

Laurence smiled. “Indeed. Let’s hope.” 

The two of them continued to go through the treasure in silence for a few moments. As Laurence spent time observing a somewhat rusted sword, Norbert picked a small pot. 

“Why do you suppose all this is here?” He suddenly asked.

“It could be for any number of reasons. This could be a treasury, or perhaps, they left these items here to safeguard them from the chaos outside.” Laurence hypothesized, though he obviously did not know for certain.

“Is it not obvious? They are offerings - this is a shrine.”

Both of them then looked over to Caryll, who had not joined them in scouring through the artifacts and had instead been standing in front of the altar, seemingly writing something in her journal. Despite the mundanity of what she was observing, her eyes were alight with wonder.

“A shrine for what?” She did not reply to his question and instead closed her eyes. “Caryll?” Again, there was no response, prompting him to stand up and make his way over to her.

By now, he was rather concerned; it was unlike her to lose focus like this. As he got closer, he could see that she was still tracing in her notebook and quietly uttering in a tongue he could not even begin to comprehend. It looked like she was in a trance of sorts, one that he found himself reluctant to break her out of.

“What’s happening over there?” He heard Lady Maria ask from behind them.

“I’m…I’m not sure.” He answered truthfully, not taking his eyes off his friend. When even their words did not seem to break her trance, Laurence cautioned a glance at Caryll’s journal. But what he found was not writing or sketches as he had expected, but rather something exceedingly strange. 

In the pages of Caryll’s journal, he saw what could only be described as a set of seemingly random symbols, one that she was in the process of sketching. Though it was faint, it was made up of a set of three lines – the middle of each was smaller than the rest - each topped off with a thick dot and intercepted by a shape slightly resembling a horseshoe. Understandably confused, Laurence attempted to get a clearer look at the symbol and as its outline became more apparent, he felt a sharp twinge deep within his mind, causing him to clutch his head and back away from Caryll.

Seeing this, Norbert went up to him and took hold of his arm to steady him. “Laurence, what’s wrong?” he asked, a question that the professor was not able to answer, for he did not know.

As the pain subsided, something slowly became clearer to Laurence: a distant, unintelligible voice. He looked around the room in an attempt to determine the source; it did not sound like it belonged to anyone present in the room, nor were any of them attempting to speak to him at that moment. But as the moments went by, he realized that the voice wasn’t coming from away, but rather, it seemed to be coming from within his very mind.

“Professor?” He just managed to make out the sound of Lady Maria’s voice amidst the chaotic whispering, finding that she was eyeing him with suspicion. 

At first, Laurence felt compelled to ask whether she or indeed, anyone else could hear the voices, but it was evident that they were discernible only to him. “It’s nothing. Just a small headache.” he lied.

Clearly, Lady Maria was not entirely convinced, but surprisingly, she did not pry further. “Then perhaps that’s a sign we’ve been here long enough.” She said, “Wrap up your search – we’ll be leaving soon.”

After nodding his understanding, Laurence turned back to Caryll, finding that she had shut her journal and was now looking at him with some concern. Neither of them said anything and eventually, he decided to move along and start informing the others of their imminent departure, trying his best to wipe the symbols from his memory.

Yet even as they finished claiming their spoils and began crossing the bridge, the voice persisted. But the further they got from the room, the fainter it became and by the time they were nearing the end of the corridor that had brought them there, it had disappeared completely. Throughout all this time, Laurence kept quiet in the hopes he could understand some of the utterances, but this ended up going nowhere. However, amidst the incomprehensible gibberish he was able to discern one thing – a name.

Oedon.

....

Chapter Text

Back at the camp, the scholars of Byrgenwerth were quick to reunite and share their spoils amongst themselves; pouring over and admiring various pieces of stoneware, gold and metal work, the crafted theories and narratives about their origins. This had been their first major discovery in the expedition thus far, which seemed to have raised their spirits substantially.   

As Lady Maria watched this scene unfold, she turned her eyes back to her own company, who by comparison, looked completely and utterly spent. Almost the moment they had returned, they had all but collapsed to their knees and left their weapons by the wayside, desperate as they were for a chance to so much as catch their breath. This was all to be expected; after all, not only did they have to trek through the suffocating, humid air, but they had also been forced to battle exceedingly dangerous foes, all to ensure the scholars could have their little celebration.

“You have all done well. Your reprieve is well-deserved.” Lady Maria commended her men, causing them to look up at her.

“I’d like to see someone claim otherwise. After that last beast we encountered, I think I’ve had enough of these forsaken halls for one day.” Said Emil.

“Yes, I’m sure it must’ve been daunting.” Matthias replied more than a little sarcastically, something his comrade immediately picked up on.

“You haven’t seen the creature. It was…unsightly, even by the standards of this place.” There was no lie in his words. Maria herself had not laid eyes on the beast, but Emil and the others who claim to have encountered it appeared both exhausted and disturbed.

“Then we can only hope that we do not run into anything like it again.” Maria said to end the discussion before it escalated further. “For now, take the time to regain your strength. There’re still more battles to be fought.”

“Perhaps we can help you with that?”

Maria turned around to find Professor Laurence standing not far behind her, a welcoming smile on his face. “As you can see, my companions are just about to have their supper. Would you care to join us?” sure enough, she could see the scholars lined up and waiting to be served by Lobsang, who was pouring some sort of soup into their bowls; the smell of it being prepared had filled the halls even before they returned, which had ignited Maria’s hunger even further.

Yet despite this, Maria couldn’t bring herself to accept. “Thank you, but we have our own provisions prepared. You focus on ensuring your scholars are provided for.”

“Then won’t you at least join us for tea? I’m sure your provisions don’t include that.”

“He’s right, they don’t.” It was Matthias who spoke this time, causing her to give him a glare to ensure his silence.

“We appreciate your offer, professor – really, we do – but it isn’t necessary.” Said Maria.

“Nonsense. With the stalwart protection you’ve provided thus far, this is the least we can do in return.” Laurence paused for a moment before speaking again. “Besides, we mustn’t allow a gulf to form between us just because our duties are adjourned.”

Maria was left to contemplate her response. Turning back to her men, she found that none of them were willing to offer their thoughts, but also that none of them outright rejected the offer either. In particular, she noted that Matthias’s expression was an eager one, which was accompanied by a faint nod. Turning back to Laurence, she finally gave her reply.

“No, I suppose not.”

The professor smiled. “My thoughts exactly. Please, come with me.”

With some hesitation, Maria and the rest of her knights followed him to the fire, bringing along their belongings. As they got closer, the scholars looked up from their bowls in surprise, watching as their leader led them towards the fire, where their apparent chef – Lobsang – was tending to a cauldron hanging over the fire.

“Has everyone been served?” Laurence asked him.

“They have. But not to worry, there’s still plenty…” He looked up and spotted her standing next to the professor, followed by the rest of her company behind her.  “Left…” Lobsang concluded, clearly having not expected them to turn up.

“Fret not. We weren’t expecting a share; we’re just here to…observe.” Maria assured him.

“Oh, I see. Well, in that case, welcome.” Lobsang said, gesturing for them to sit down around the fire, which they did. As they settled down, the chef poured some more soup into a bowl, which he handed to Laurence.

“Thank you, Lobsang.” He said as he received it, after which he peeked inside the cauldron. “Hmm, looks like you really outdid yourself.” This made Lobsang chuckle.

“I merely wanted to ensure everyone got their fill. Still, that’s quite a lot to leave to waste.”

Initially, Maria was going to remain silent, but then found herself reconsidering. Looking at her men, it was clear they were hungry and it was unlikely their meager rations would be enough to satiate them.

“How much is there?” She asked, drawing the attention of both scholars, who quickly picked up on what she was insinuating.

“I believe there’s just enough for your company, assuming you each receive a limited portion, that is.” Lobsang told her, prompting Laurence to turn his gaze firmly towards her.

“Well, my lady? What say you?”

Maria spent only a few more moments in thought before she turned to her men, who were awaiting her call. “You may take what’s left.” She told them, much to their surprise.

“But captain, what about you?” Matthias asked.

“I’ll be fine. Now, go on and don’t be greedy.”

With this assurance, her knights exchanged a few uncertain glances, but ultimately didn’t protest her decision. Though even if they had, Maria wouldn’t have changed her mind – she needed them strong and for that to happen, she needed to be sure they got something to eat, even if it meant she didn’t.

Her men then lined up in front of the cauldron, allowing Lobsang to individually serve them; in time, and with some careful portioning on Lobsang’s part, each of the knights managed to receive a serving of his dish, Maria included. Sitting back down beside the fire, Maria looked down at the food that had been served to her: an unfamiliar type of soup containing an assortment of vegetables, some pieces of meat and most prominently, something that resembled pasta, but much flatter in shape and cut into smaller pieces.

“Well, go on then. Eat while it's still warm.” She heard Lobsang say, who was himself just starting to eat.

Maria noticed her men suspiciously eyeing the dish, regardless of the fact they’d seen numerous people eating it beforehand. Deciding to take the initiative, she took her wooden spoon and scooped up some of the soup, bringing the still steaming broth to her lips. The initial taste was promising, which motivated her to try the rest of it and as she chewed, it only improved. Despite its seeming simplicity, it was unlike anything she’d tasted before.

“I do hope it's to your liking, Lady Maria.” She heard Lobsang say.

“Very much so. What is it?”

“Noodle soup – hand-pulled noodle soup to be more exact. It’s a common dish where I hail from.” He replied, which made her rather curious.

“And where do you hail from?” She asked, but for whatever reason, the scholar didn’t answer; in fact, he appeared rather troubled as a result of her question.

“I’d…prefer not to say.” Was how he eventually answered, after which he carried on eating without saying a word.

“As you wish.” Maria replied before doing the same. She had to admit she was rather disappointed that he hadn’t given her a straightforward answer, but at the same time, it appeared that wherever it was that Lobsang originated from, his memories of it must not have been fond ones.

Soon after this, Laurence reappeared, carrying a kettle over to the fire. “Here we are.” He set it down and turned to his chef. “I assume you’re finished here?”

“Yes, sir. Just set the cauldron off to the side and hang it up.” Lobsang replied. With a nod, Laurence carefully took hold of the cauldron’s handle and took it off, allowing him to put the kettle in its place.

As she watched him work, Maria smiled to herself. “You are planning on settling down sometime today, aren’t you?” She asked, which made him look at her in surprise, only to smile a moment later.

“Come now, you worry too much.” He replied.

Laurence soon finished setting up the kettle and took a seat next to Lobsang, after which he picked up his own bowl and began to eat, leaving Maria to likewise turn her attention back to her food. As she ate, she managed to catch him looking at her, causing his eyes to quickly dart away and for her to ever so slightly shake her head in amusement

The silence that ensued persisted for well over a minute, during which Maria and her knights ate up the food that had been given to them as the rest of the scholars looked on in uncertainty. Her men clearly wished to focus more on filling their empty stomachs rather than making small talk, but something told her that their counterparts had little interest in such a prospect either.

“Um, excuse me.”

One of the scholars – Amelia – finally broke the silence when she said this to Matthias, who was seated not far from her.

“What is it?” Matthias said, looking up from his bowl, seeming more perplexed than irritated.

“Oh, I’m sorry. It’s just I couldn’t help but notice the ribbons you’re all wearing; I was wondering why that is.”

Matthias and the rest of them looked to Amelia in confusion, which she quickly took note of. “Don’t get me wrong, they’re really…elegant and all, but…” she started to say, but Matthias smiled before she could properly finish.

“Ah, no worries. If you must know, they’re given to knights once they reach a certain rank – a manner of distinction, if you will.” The knight explained.

“Oh, I see.” Upon saying this, she looked behind Matthias’s head at the ribbon or rather what was attached to it. “And what about the ponytail? It looks to be a different color from the rest of your hair.” Amelia’s observation was correct. While Matthias’s hair was a chestnut brown, the ponytail appeared to be made up of silver locks.

“Well, that would be the real mark of distinction.” Was his reply.

“So, it’s a wig.” Amelia concluded, which made the knight slightly blush. “Yes, I suppose it is.” He replied.

Maria observed this brief interaction with a degree of amusement, but chose not to interject, continuing to eat in silence. That was until the female scholar’s attention turned to her. “And how come you don’t have one, Lady Maria?” She asked her.

Once again, Amelia proved perceptive. Whereas each of her men possessed their own wig and ribbon that clashed with their natural hair color, Maria only possessed the ribbon, which she used to tie back her light blonde hair. This wasn’t because of a difference in rank or even a difference in gender – knights of all standings and backgrounds could receive the wig and did so gladly – but Maria differed from the knights in one key area, which formed the basis for her decision.

“Simple. I did not desire one.” Was Maria’s firm, but concise reply. Though she hoped this would be the end of her involvement in this discussion, it was not to be, as her words made Gehrman softly chuckle to himself.

“Yes. Someone of your standing is sure to receive whatever they desire and more.” He said, briefly pausing before posing her a question. “Do tell me, my lady, what desire drove you to come here – to scour these age-old ruins with a band of ragged scholars?”

Nothing that he had said came across as judgmental or dismissive; rather, the old scholar seemed genuinely curious. And to be fair to him, it was something of a valid inquiry. As a noble, she could have just about anything she wanted; land, riches, servants and much, much more. But there were of course certain preconceived ideas as to how someone of her position should act and they certainly didn’t include the task she was currently undertaking.

“I have my reasons, as I’m sure you do as well,” Maria replied. “All that matters is that our ‘desires’ happen to align, at least for now. With any luck, they will each be fulfilled.”

Far from discouraging Gehrman, her answer only made him smile. “But of course. Forgive me if I caused any offence; far be it for me to question your resolve.” he said. “All I can do is hope that you reach your desired outcome; if not this time, then perhaps later down the road.”

Maria had nothing to say in response to this and instead simply nodded her head before turning her attention back to her meal, which was slowly starting to grow cold. But before she could do any serious reflection on what Gehrman had said, the kettle started to boil, prompting Laurence to set aside his empty bowl and take it off its hanging place.

“So, any preferences?”

…..

As it turned out, just about everyone liked their tea a different way; thankfully, they had brought along a selection of various leaves and a few additional sweeteners like sugar and mint, allowing them to brew their cups as they desired. Perhaps this may’ve been unnecessary in the grand scheme of things – they could very easily survive without it – Laurence thought it best that his followers got the chance to relax and indulge themselves during this toilsome time, if only for a little while.

And looking around the camp, it looked like this idea had paid off somewhat. Though their supper had ended, Laurence and Maria both agreed to leave their followers to their own devices for a while longer. Most chose to simply remain by the fire and chatter among themselves: in particular, Norbert had brought along a chess set, which allowed them to set up something of a tournament, though they ultimately agreed to switch to draughts after they got tired of their pieces being knocked over by the wind.

“And…king me.” Said Matthias as he managed to move one of his pieces to Laurence’s end of the board, claiming one of his own pieces in the process.

“Damn it all...” Laurence uttered to himself, which made the knight chuckle in amusement.

“I’m surprised, professor – I thought you’d be a lot more attentive.” He looked over to the smirking Matthias and smiled himself.

“And I thought you’d be a lot more courteous.” Laurence countered as he pondered his next move.

“I can tell you where you went wrong. Do you consider that to be courteous?” The knight asked, surprising Laurence yet again. Were all of Cainhurst’s knights so impudent?

“Thank you, but I’m not finished just yet.” The professor replied.

“Whatever you say, professor.” Matthias replied.

From there, the two of them continued their game, but it remained clear that the knight held the advantage, constantly managing to counter Laurence’s attempts to regain control. Though after watching Matthias’s previous game against one of his fellow knights – Harald, he believed his name was – it had quickly become clear that he was quite talented at the game, seeing as his comrade attempted to be matched against someone else before the game even started.

Very soon, the last of Laurence’s pieces was claimed, marking Matthias’s victory and his elimination from the tournament. “Well, well. Congratulations.” The professor said once all is said and done.

“Why, thank you. You played quite well yourself.”

In response to this claim, Laurence looked to the meager amount of pieces he’d managed to capture in comparison to his opponent. “Did I really?” he humorously asked, to which Matthias shrugged.

“Well, it’s the effort that counts, right?” There were a few scattered chuckles among the crowd, mostly from Matthias’s fellow knights, but also from Laurence himself.

“Right.” The two of them then started resetting the board for the next pair of players. “Now, who’s up next?”

“That would be…” Gehrman, who had been keeping track of the brackets, looked down at his notebook. “Norbert and Emil.”

The two competitors went up to take their place by the board and as Laurence moved to make way for his fellow scholar, he put an encouraging hand. “Good luck, my friend.” He said to Norbert, who gave him an affirming nod.

The professor then joined his fellows in watching the game. Though it hadn’t been the initial intention, the tournament quickly spiraled into a competition between them and the knights, one that they were able to keep friendly…well, mostly. With him eliminated, Norbert was the only one of them who still remained in the running; whoever won this match would go on to face Matthias in the finals. But out of all them, Norbert was the most likely one to pull through, for his proficiency in both chess and draughts was unrivaled in Byrgenwerth.

His focus on the game was soon broken when someone tapped a finger on his shoulder, which he turned to find was no other than Lady Maria.

“Out of the running, are we?” She asked in a quiet voice.

“Your apprentice saw to that.” Laurence replied while motioning to Matthias with his head, which made Maria smile.

“I expected nothing less.” The only response the professor managed to muster up was a simple “hmm…”, as the two of them looked at each-other. “Well then, seeing as you no longer have to wait your turn, do you have a few minutes to chat?”

 Laurence raised an inquisitive brow. “Just to chat?”

“Just to chat,” she confirmed. Somehow, Laurence doubted that official matters wouldn’t seep into whatever she had in mind, but either way, he couldn’t say that he would mind that.

“I don’t see why not.” He eventually said.

“Then we should find a more suitable location.” Upon saying this, she started moving away from the crowd. “Come, professor. Walk with me.”

After a moment’s hesitation, Laurence accepted her invitation and followed Lady Maria away from the others, of which only Gehrman took notice of their departure. Taking note of his concerned expression, Laurence silently mouthed “official business,” to assure him all was well; in response, Gehrman smiled and nodded his head before turning his attention back to the ongoing match, the status of which Laurence had unfortunately lost track of.

From there, Lady Maria led them back along the path that led deeper into the labyrinths. “How’re you feeling?” she asked once they were out of earshot.

“What do you mean?”

“Have you repressed the memory already?” Maria’s words were rather facetious in tone, but they nevertheless helped remind him of what she was referring to.

“Oh. I’m fine; just trying not to dwell on it too much, is all.” He replied.

“That is for the best.” Said Maria. “But do not block it out entirely. If nothing else, it should teach you a valuable lesson.”

“Let me guess. You’re never truly safe here?”

Maria nodded her head. “Precisely, and it is imperative that you understand this now.”

At this point, the two of them had passed by the entrance to the path they’d taken before their hiatus and were fast approaching another opened doorway, one that he had not ventured past until now. Once they were inside, Laurence was quickly made aware of a corpse lying close to the center of the room, belonging to a beast far larger than anything they’d encountered so far.

“I take it that’s your handiwork?” Laurence guessed, taking notice of the numerous deep cuts in the creature’s flesh.

“Unfortunately.” Maria walked right past the beast and stopped just before the end of the room. “It was a formidable foe, but I fear that we’ve only scratched the surface of what Loran has to offer.”

Laurence walked up to join her and found a large, rectangular platform with a circular pressure pad in the center; looking further up, he spotted a number of chains that extended far up into the ceiling. This all seemed to suggest that what he was looking at was a lift of sorts, one that would no doubt take them even deeper into Loran.

“That is a rather worrying thought.” Laurence said.

“Indeed, it is, but we must press on regardless.”

A brief period of silence then followed, which ended when Maria asked him a rather unexpected question.

“May I see your dagger?”

Laurence looked over to her. “I’m sorry?” He said, unsure of whether he’d heard her correctly.

“Your dagger. May I see it?” Lady Maria held out her hand, indicating that this was more of a command than a request. A few seconds later, Laurence complied and handed her the dagger, allowing her to look it over in detail.

“Hmm. What an odd material – unlike any steel I’ve ever seen.” She said as she inspected the dagger. Very soon, she looked back up at him. “Where did you get this?”

“It was a gift.” Lady Maria appeared somewhat skeptical at his claim, but it was the truth; regardless, he was just as ignorant of its material as she was.

“And a fine gift it is.” She eventually said. “Have you any experience with it?”

“Not until recently.” Laurence admitted, which made her softly smile.

“That’s what I thought. But in any case, a blade can be deadly in anyone’s hands, assuming they know how to wield it.”

Laurence could immediately tell where she was leading with this. “I’m listening,” he told her.

“First, show me how you wield it.” She instructed as she held out his dagger, prompting him to take it from her and firmly grasp its handle, as one would a hammer or most other tools, leaving the blade pointing forward.

“Not bad,” said Maria after a brief inspection, just before she suddenly reached for one of her own sheathes and drew her own dagger. “But now the question is whether your grip will hold firm.”

Laurence’s eyes widened in shock at the sudden escalation, which judging from the soft laugh that escaped her lips, clearly amused her. “Calm yourself, professor. You’re not in danger,” she assured him. “But if you happen to be, it’s best to know how to defend yourself and just having that blade in your hand grants you much greater odds of survival than if you were unarmed.”

As Maria spoke, she placed her free hand on the handle of her sheathed sabre. “A traditional sword may grant greater range and power, but their size often makes it difficult to attack quickly and to defend yourself if your opponent manages to get close. The dagger is the inverse; it is light and nimble, but does not reach as far or inflict nearly as much harm: but it is by no means harmless. One good cut to a vital area will spell doom for whoever’s on the receiving end.”

“Should I be taking notes?” Laurence jested after his lengthy silence.

“It is difficult to consult notes on the battlefield, professor. What I need from you is undivided focus.”

“Which I will gladly provide, my lady.” He replied, softly smiling all the while.

With a smile of her own, Maria entered something of a fighting stance, putting both her blade and her free arm out in front of her. “Though it should go without saying, you should always keep your blade out in front of you and keep yourself in a defensive position, ensuring that you are ready to strike at a moment’s notice.”

Her explanation prompted Laurence to attempt to take up a similar stance, holding out his dagger, positioned one foot slightly in front of the other. A few moments later, Lady Maria exited her stance and walked over to him in order to correct a few aspects of his stance; straightening his posture somewhat, bringing his free arm slightly higher so that it covered his neck and chest and finally, tucking in his chin.

As she did all this, she continued her lecture. “In an encounter, your main focus should be on ensuring no major harm comes to you. As such, you must do your best to ensure vital areas – the chest, the throat and so on – are protected.” Though he did his best to pay attention to what she was saying, Laurence couldn’t help but be distracted by the frequent and almost casual nature of her touch; a part of him was certain there was another, less intrusive way to correct his stance, but at the same time, he wasn’t about raise a rabble about it.

“However, the best way to do this isn’t to stand guard as you’re doing now, but to constantly be on the move: evading your opponent’s attacks, tiring them out and capitalizing on whatever opening is afforded to you.”

She came to stand just beside him, once again drawing her blade. “Of course, there is no one method of attack that applies for every situation, which is why you have to decide what you’re going to do at a moment’s notice. Let me show you just a few things you can do.”

From the next few minutes, Lady Maria showed him a handful of different thrusts and slashes, as well as a few things he could do with his free hand if given the opportunity, primarily involving his fist and elbow. As she showed him these techniques, Laurence recreated them, though obviously nowhere near as graciously.

“My, my. You’re much more eager than I was expecting.” Lady Maria eventually said.

“Far be it for me to deny an opportunity to learn, especially from one so…well versed.”

And it was clear that she was. Laurence recognized just how thoroughly and passionately she explained the intricacies of combat, which had made following along with her surprisingly enjoyable. But then again, passion for a subject was all but essential to teaching it effectively; he should know.

“Then you’ll be happy to know that I still have a little more to show you.” Laurence was fully prepared for another brief address, but instead what he received was an instruction.

“Turn around.”

Understandably quite surprised, the professor stayed still and waited to see whether she would say something more, but no such thing occurred. Instead, she just stared right back at him, smiling in amusement.

“Well? Go on then,” the way she spoke, it almost sounded like a dare - as if she was fully aware of his uncertainty and was even teasing him for it. And a few moments later, Laurence finally relented, turning away from her and awaiting whatever came next.

“Until now, I’ve shown you what to do when faced with a fully aware foe, but that is a situation you should always strive to avoid. Before you choose to engage in battle, you must first try to find a way to eliminate your target before they get a chance to retaliate. And the best way to do that is to catch them when they are at their most vulnerable.”

The more she said, the clearer it became as to why she had asked him to put himself in this position. Almost the instant she finished speaking, Lady Maria’s hand covered his mouth and brought her blade mere inches away from his throat. Despite having anticipated her doing something like this, Laurence’s body still jumped in shock; not so much from the action itself, but rather from how efficiently she had performed it.

“Surely, I need not explain what happens from here.” Her voice was almost right by his ear - a soft, almost calming thing, like that of a mother lulling her child to sleep. Yet it was a rather unnerving thing to hear in such a situation, where if she so wished, she could easily slit his throat without anyone being the wiser.

Seeing as his mouth was still covered, Laurence shook his head, being mindful of her blade even if he now saw that she had taken care to point the edge away from his flesh. “Good,” Shortly afterwards, Lady Maria released him, leaving him to take a deep breath as he tried to calm his racing heart.

All things considered, she’d been gentle or at least, as gentle as one could be when demonstrating an execution. There was no sudden pull and she had kept her dagger a fair distance away from his throat, with the edge pointing away. But even with all this, she managed to remind him of just how intimidating she could be if she put her mind to it.

“I trust that no further demonstrations are needed?” Lady Maria said from behind him, causing him to turn around to face her.

“No…no I’d say you got your point across.” He replied.

“Then I suppose that concludes our little lesson. Though I do hope you don’t take it as encouragement to try any of what I’ve shown you for yourself.”

“I wasn’t planning to.” Laurence replied.

“Good. As I said, a blade can be deadly in any hands, but first, that blade needs to be honed and subsequently maintained to retain its edge. That is a process that takes a great deal of time and never truly ends. Perhaps one day you may choose to pursue that process yourself, but for now, continue to leave the bloody business to us.”

The professor really didn’t have all that much to say in reply, leading to him nodding his understanding. “Was this your idea of ‘chatting’?” He eventually asked.

“Oh, are you not satisfied?” she asked him. “Very well. Perhaps we can find something else to talk about; shall we start with the bell you took?”

This took Laurence completely by surprise. “Whatever do you mean?” he said in as calm a tone as he could muster.

“Please don’t take me for a fool, professor. Give it to me.” Lady Maria said as she held out her hand.

“And…what if I don’t want to?” Laurence somewhat brazenly said after a brief silence, with her only response being to raise her right brow in a way that told him that he should already know the answer to that question. And he did.

After staring her down for a few more seconds, Laurence sighed and reached into his satchel to take out the crushed bell, which he held aloft for her to see before he handed it to her.

“Thank you.” She said as she took it from him, after which silence once again fell over the room.

“I’m not in any trouble, am I?” he asked only half-seriously.

“No. Not this time,” was her reply. “But in the future, I hope you’ll come to consider your actions more carefully; if not, then I fear it will make your gestures of goodwill ring hollow.”

“I can’t help but feel that’s not all it’ll do.”

Upon him saying this, Lady Maria smiled. “All I will say is that I do not wish to see you harmed, as hard as that might be for you to believe.” Despite the nature of her words, Laurence could tell right away that she meant them as a warning.

“I see.” He said.

A few seconds of tense silence followed before Lady Maria hid the crushed bell inside her coat. “Now then, shall we return?” she proposed.

“By all means, my lady.”

With that, the two of them turned to make their way back to the others, not saying a further word to each-other the rest of the way. If nothing else, the last few minutes had cemented one thing in Laurence’s mind; though they were on the same side for now, it would be foolish to consider Lady Maria an ally…and just as foolish to make her his enemy.

.....

Chapter Text

The sound of shifting chains accompanied the company’s arrival in a new part of Loran. Laurence had been apprehensive on whether the old pulley system would even still be operational after centuries of neglect, much less whether it would be safe for use; thankfully, it seemed age hadn’t hindered it, allowing them to travel deeper into the old labyrinth.

As before, Lady Maria and her men led the way, with his scholars following close behind them. Now that they had gotten the chance to recuperate, both parties seemed ready to face the challenges ahead of them with renewed vigor. For how long this rush of inspiration would last, he did not know, but for now, it led them through yet another deserted corridor, though this one was noticeably different from the rest in one regard.

“Ugh, what is that stench?” Amelia complained, covering her nose and mouth with her hand. Very soon, Laurence picked up on the scent as well, with even the smallest whiff making him come close to gagging. Never had he smelled anything so foul.

“I think I might know.” It was Norbert who spoke this time, who had turned towards a gate along the side of the corridor. “It seems to be coming from here.”

“Then you can take solace knowing we won’t be going that way just yet.” Lady Maria told them. “Now, come along.”

Despite what she had said and the repulsive smell that was emanating from the sealed corridor, Laurence felt himself drawn towards it. He could hear the voice again; though it was distant, he was certain that it was beckoning him beyond this door.

“You feel it too, don’t you?” He was suddenly made aware of Caryll standing beside him. He had not yet gotten the chance to question her about the strange symbol he’d seen her draw – the source of this lingering voice in his head – but it was clear that she was aware that he had seen it.

“Yes.” He replied, turning his gaze back towards the door.

“Feel what? What are you two talking about?” Norbert asked, but unfortunately, Laurence didn’t have an answer for him. All he knew was that this path in front of them would lead them to something – something potentially important.

“Was I not clear?” Laurence and his two colleagues turned to find Lady Maria and the others standing close to the end of the hallway, looking at them in confusion.

“You were,” he replied. “I was just wondering if it’s possible for us to take a slight detour.”

“Patience, professor. We will get to it in due course.” Lady Maria replied.

“Then why not now?” he suggested. “Nothing is stopping us from going this way, after all.”

Rather surprisingly, it was Gehrman who spoke up. “Yes, but if I may ask, Master Laurence, what reason have we to?”

“Something important lies beyond this door. I just know it.” Laurence eventually replied.

“Be that as it may, we already have a task ahead of us.” Lady Maria reminded him.

“Not all of us need to go; I just need a small company to investigate what lies beyond this door. The rest can continue forward as planned.”

Though he expected her to rebuff his proposal right away, the captain instead took time to ponder it. “Hmm…” she remained in silent contemplation for several seconds before eventually turning to her men. “Tell me, are any of you willing to accompany the professor on his little escapade?”

At first, it seemed like no one was willing to volunteer, that was until Emil suddenly stepped forward. “Sure, why not?” he said, which seemed to come as a surprise to his captain. Clearly, she’d been betting on none of them being willing to go with him.

“Anyone else?” a few moments later, two more knights took a step forward, the same two who had gone with Emil back to the chasm. Seeing this, their captain sighed before turning back to him. “Very well. You may go on your ‘detour’, but tread carefully. We will reconvene here once our tasks are completed.”

“Agreed,” said Laurence.

This only left him to decide who would accompany him, a process that didn’t take very long. With one look at Caryll, she nodded to confirm she would be coming with him; the same was true of Norbert, who had remained with them. That only left Gehrman, Amelia and Damian, who respectively appeared uncertain, concerned and vexed about the change in events.

“Amelia, Damian: stay close to Gehrman. I look forward to hearing of your findings.”

“Yes, sir.” Amelia said, while Damian remained silent.

“Make haste, all of you!” Lady Maria called out to them, having already started leading her men to the next room. Just before she went off to catch up with her, Gehrman nodded to him, something he did in kind before watching him lead Amelia and Damian down the corridor, the former of whom looked back at him with a rather worried expression.

A part of him was reluctant in sending their two youngest scholars away like this, especially with someone they hadn’t even known before tonight, but at the same time, he knew they weren’t children. This expedition was an opportunity for them to exhibit their capability as scholars and they couldn’t do that if he and his fellow professors coddled them. Besides, Master Willem had sent Gehrman along for the purpose of protecting them and if Master Willem trusted him to do so, then so did Laurence.

Along the way, she and the two young scholars passed by Emil and his two comrades. “Let’s go, professor.” He flippantly said as he made his way over to the gate, which he proceeded to open, revealing a staircase leading down into a dreary cave. In doing so, he caused the foul odor to grow even more pronounced, to the point that it felt almost unbearable.

“Bet you didn’t miss this, eh, Norbert?” Emil said to Laurence’s fellow professor.

“Not in the slightest.” He replied, which made the knight chuckle.

“Well, no turning back now.” With that, he started leading them down into the cave. It was humid much like the rest of Loran, but unlike the dry air they had encountered thus far, this part of the labyrinths was distinguished by a significantly damper atmosphere, which only served to make the already putrid smell even worse.

The further inside the cave they went, the harder it became to see, forcing Laurence to slow down to avoid tripping down the stairs in the darkness. As they slowly and carefully descended down the stairwell, his ears picked up on something – sounds of skittering and squeaking, which seemed to be coming from further down in the cave.

“I think I hear rats.” He whispered to the others, recognizing the noises almost instantly.

“No surprise there. There are rats everywhere, especially underground.” Emil replied, not sounding worried in the slightest.

“No, you don’t understand. They sound…different.” Laurence struggled to find a way to convey what he heard in words, but he can say for certain that they didn’t sound like any rat he’d ever encountered before.

“Do rats make you nervous, professor?” the knight asked somewhat flagrantly.

“Perhaps…” Laurence said.

“Then I’ll be sure to keep an eye out for them.” Emil replied, clearly amused.

Very soon, they made it to the bottom of the staircase and found themselves standing at the entrance to a large, dimly lit room. “Hmm, doesn’t seem like there’s anything here.” Emil observed as he moved his torch around. “Not that it makes the place anymore welcoming.”

As Laurence walked up to stand beside the knight, the edge of his shoe came into contact with something wet, causing him to spontaneously pull it back. He was soon able to spot what it was he stepped in, which turned his minor fright into genuine horror; before them was an enormous pool of blood, within which lay countless hollowed corpses, some alone and others piled on top of each-other.   

As Laurence looked on in horror, Norbert came to stand beside him. “Not a pretty sight, is it?,” he asked.

“No, tis not.” Laurence said, finding himself unable to take his eyes off the gruesome sight before him. He remembered Norbert mentioning seeing a similar sight to this earlier that night, the implications of which were harrowing. How many more rooms like this were there in these tombs? How many more dead?

“Well, there’s no reason to dwell here longer than we have to. We should move on.” Emil said after a brief silence. And Laurence didn’t feel much like disagreeing.

Without another word, they started making their way to the other side of the room, sticking to the sides of the room that the blood had not yet managed to reach. All the while, Laurence periodically held his breath to avoid the horrid smell that came from it as much as he could.

They soon found themselves before the entrance to another cave, which was just as dimly lit as before. As they got close, Emil motioned for them to stop before venturing forth into the dark cave alone. He kept both the torch and his eyes up one the ceiling as he went further into the cave, almost as if he was looking for something in particular. Suddenly, he stopped and just as suddenly thrust his torch upward.

Laurence soon became aware of a black mass sticking to the top of the cave, which burst into flames and fell down before Emil’s feet, after which he thrust his torch down in order to burn it some more. The mass violently trashed around as flames engulfed its body before deflating before their eyes, a few sparse flames still crackling on its flesh.

After making sure that the mass was out of commission, Emil turned back to them, his face visible from the now faint light of his torch. “Almost got caught by one of these earlier tonight,” he said.  “Best keep an eye on the ceilings when you pass through these caves. You never know when one of these is lying in wait.”

“Sage advice, indeed.” Norbert commented, which earned something of a grin from the knight.

“Come along now.” Turning back around, Emil proceeded further into the cave, with the rest of them following.

Not even ten seconds later, Laurence once again heard that skittering sound from before, causing him to freeze in his tracks and look to the source of the sound behind them.

“Laurence, what’s wrong?” Caryll asked, but he didn’t look back.

In the proceeding room, he could now see what looked like glowing orbs moving rapidly in the darkness, orbs which soon turned straight towards him. Throughout all this, the noises never stopped; in fact, they seemed to be getting closer and much more frequent.

“Emil!” Laurence called out.

“What?” He must’ve immediately spotted what was wrong, for he quickly ran to stand in front of him, holding his torch out in front of him, revealing a pack of enormous, monstrous rats, who were momentarily stopped by the light and eyed them suspiciously. The orbs he had seen were in fact their eyes, which had grown so large that they looked like they were about to burst from their heads.

Upon seeing the massive rodent, the knights readied their weapons. In response, the head rat stood on its two hind legs, barring its enormous jagged teeth and hissing at them before continuing its approach, followed by several more of its brethren.

“Get back, now!” Emil ordered.

Laurence and his two colleagues promptly turned to move further into the cave, only to be stopped as they heard similar noises quickly approaching from in front of them.

“There’s more coming!” Laurence warned the knights, who had already started fending off the incoming horde.

“Robert, go!” In response to Emil’s order, one of the knights broke from his companions and ran to defend the scholars, who were forced into the middle of the cave as they faced down the swarm coming from either side.

The knights quickly drew their pistols. “Best cover your ears.” Emil advised as he and his comrades pointed them forward along with their swords.

“FIRE!!”

The sounds of gunshots echoed throughout the cave as the knights shot at the incoming rats; after firing from their pistols, they quickly followed up with a shot from their bladed weapons, which Laurence now realized had some sort of small firearm attached to it. This quick flurry of bullets managed to either injure or kill several of the incoming rodents, but not nearly enough to stop their incoming onslaught.

Once the rats got close enough, they either leapt or swiped at the defending knights, often attacking together with their brethren. Despite their seemingly overwhelming numbers, however, they went down rather easily, with Emil and his comrades managing to cut through them fairly easily. Despite them seeming to have a handle on the situation, Laurence found himself instinctively drawing and readying his dagger to prepare for the possibility of one of the rats breaking through their defenses, which would make him the only one equipped to prevent him and his friends from being overrun.

Overrun and eaten alive by a horde of ravenous rats. Oh, dear heavens, no…

Thankfully, there were soon very few rats remaining, who attempted to retreat once they saw the fate that had befallen the rest of their pack. Unfortunately for them, Emil was able to chase them down and slay them before they were able to retreat back into the cesspits they crawled from.

In between heavy breaths, Emil looked back towards them. “Anything on your side?!” he called out.

“Nothing!” Robert called back to him, having pursued the rats in the opposite direction.

“Good.” he let out a relieved sigh and started making his way back towards them, stepping over the bloodied corpses of the rats he’d slain only moments earlier. “You can put that away now.” Emil pointed to Laurence’s hand as he said this, which made him realize that he was still holding his dagger.

“Are you hurt?” Laurence asked as he sheathed his blade.

“No worries here. What about you two?” Emil asked his companions.

“Not a scratch.” “Likewise.”

“Good,” Laurence looked down at one of the dead rats, whose body was riddled with repulsive warts. “Disgusting creatures…” he uttered to himself. Even normal rats brought plague and disease wherever they went, but he could only imagine what filth these mutants carried.

“I don’t understand. What could’ve made them like this?” Norbert questioned as he knelt down beside the dead rodent.

“The same thing that befell the poor souls back there, no doubt.” Was the only answer Laurence could offer, but it was the only one that made sense and one that chilled Laurence to the bone.

None of the deceased appeared to have transformed before they died, or more likely, before they were executed. Clearly, the plague had grown so commonplace that symptoms became quickly identifiable and once these symptoms were spotted, the infected would have to be eliminated before it progressed further. But even in death, their flesh remained corrupted.

“Over here! There’s a ladder!” one of Emil’s comrades called from the other end of the cave.

“Wait, Harald! And keep your bloody voice down!” Emil quickly ran to join his fellow knight, leaving Laurence and the others no real choice but to follow.

The ladder in question would take them out of the pit and up into a circular room, beyond which they found a narrow, dilapidated bridge that would take them over yet another pool of blood. Around them, large metal cages hung from the ceiling, some of which were empty and some of which contained long decayed bodies. Yet despite these gruesome surroundings, Laurence’s gaze was fixed straight ahead, where he could see another sealed off door. The closer they got to it, the more intense the utterings became, urging him onwards to see just what they were leading him to.

Once they reached the end of the bridge, Emil forced the door open and revealed a small staircase leading down to one final seal. However, they didn’t even make it fully down the stairs before the knight came to a sudden stop, forcing the rest of them to do so as well.

“Why have we stopped?” Laurence questioned, but Emil didn’t reply, instead appearing to be focusing on something.

“I know that growl…” he said more to himself than to him. Having been so transfixed by the ethereal voices, Laurence had failed to notice the raspy, almost pained-sounding noise coming from behind the door.

Emil turned back to look at them. “Listen to me carefully. When I open the door, wait out here and let us deal with what’s inside. Be ready to run if need be.” Laurence couldn’t help but notice that he sounded rather nervous as he gave this instruction, but nevertheless followed him and his fellow knights toward the door.

After lifting it open as quietly as he could, the three knights cautiously entered and observed the room, seemingly spotting something. Sparing a glance inside, Laurence followed Emil’s gaze and was able to spot the source of the noise he had heard earlier. Sitting in a hunched over position on the opposite end of the room was a lanky humanoid figure, whose body was covered in a silver fur; it did not appear to have noticed their presence, which along with its position and the reserved noises it seemed to be making indicated that it was resting.

Remaining silent, Emil motioned for his two comrades to go to opposite sides of the room while he remained in the center, each of them walking forward slowly and carefully to avoid rousing the beast. This seemed to work for a time - that was until one of them accidentally hit a discarded chalice, causing a sharp clattering noise to echo through the shrine.

The creature lifted its head up and quickly rose to its full height, picking up a torch that had been lying beside it and holding it up just next to its head, its light illuminating its horrifying visage. The beast’s head seemed to be bent at a sideward angle; its mouth a gaping round hole lined with razer sharp teeth, which gave the appearance of a fixed, demented smile. This must no doubt be the creature Norbert had told him about, but his description didn’t even come close to describing how chilling it truly was.

“Strike now!” Emil ordered, after which he and the other knights charged at the beast. Seeing their approach, it swung its torch from side to side in order to keep them at bay; when one of them attempted to rush in, it quickly changed its momentum and clawed at him with its free hand, its nails growing to the length of their swords in an instant.

While it was momentarily distracted, Emil was finally able to reach the beast. Though the trajectory of his swing indicated that he was trying to sever its arm, it nimbly moved its limb out of the way, though it ended up losing a few of its exposed ribs in the process. Not letting up, Emil quickly thrust his sword forward, managing to impale the beast squarely through the chest.

Much to everyone’s shock, the creature appeared unfazed by this, not even dropping its torch. Suddenly, its body began to crackle with electricity, with Emil just managing to run and dive out of the way before it released a nova of lightning in its surrounding area, roaring as it did. Unfortunately, he didn’t have enough time to remove his sword, leaving it embedded in its chest.

The knight then tried to rise to his feet just as the beast leapt at him, extending its nails in midair and pointing them down. “Emil, look out!!” Robert called out, allowing his comrade to look just in time to see it approaching and roll out of the way, causing his attacker’s claws to hit stone ground.

Despite this unsuccessful attempt, the beast continued to chase after the unarmed knight, who had no choice but to dodge its attacks as he looked for an opening to retrieve his weapon. Seeing Emil’s predicament, his two comrades rushed in to help him, but just like before, the creature was able to avoid their attempts with uncanny ability. After leaping off to the right, the beast bent its head back as if taking a deep breath and blew on its torch, creating a torrent of flames that moved from left to right.

Once again, the knights were forced to retreat in order to avoid the flames. “Get rid of the torch!” right after Emil gave this order, Robert brought his sword close to his head and took aim; almost the moment the beast finished blowing the flames, he fired off a shot, managing to hit the hand holding the torch and forcing it to drop it.

The three knights then charged at the disarmed beast. While his comrades went ahead of him, Emil stopped to pick the discarded torch off the ground before joining in on their attack, thrusting the torch forward and causing flames to quickly sweep across its body as it cried out in agony. Extending its claws once again, it sliced wildly in front of it and although it managed to force its attackers back, the flames continued to burn.

“So, it doesn’t do well with fire, does it? How ironic.” Emil noted as they watched the creature struggle.

Eventually, the flames went out, though they had burned away much of the beast’s remaining fur, leaving several patches of burnt flesh across its body. Though the fire had subsided, its rage clearly did not, as it dropped down on all fours and rushed towards the knights. Caught off guard by its swift, and unbelievably unnerving movements, the knights scattered, struggling to pin it down as it clawed and snapped at them with its jaws.

Somewhere in between this chase, the creature suddenly stopped in its tracks and turned its head directly at Laurence and his colleagues, who had until then been watching the tense battle by the doorway. The professor tensed up as the beast’s crazed eyes settled on him – who it no doubt must’ve seen as easy prey – and turned to chase after him.

“Oh no you don’t!”

Before Laurence even had time to run, Emil rushed forward and grabbed the beast by its tail, causing it to stumble in its tracks. As it struggled to escape, the knight pulled with all his might and was able to throw the beast behind him, causing it to fly several meters and crash into the coffin it had been resting by with a brutal impact.

As it struggled to stand back up, Emil ran towards it, quickly scooping up his torch along the way. Just as it was about to recover, the knight charged forward with his shoulder and hit it square in the chest, causing it to fall back down; before the beast was even able to counterattack, Emil let out a cry and thrust the torch into its gaping mouth.

The creature squirmed in anguish as the knight forced the burning torch deeper down its throat, which was just long enough that Emil wasn’t in any danger of its jaws clamping down on his hand. As this happened, he pulled his sword free from its body and after removing the torch from the beast’s mouth, he brought the blade down on its twisted face, cleaving its head in two.

As the beast’s head fell to the floor and its body finally stopped moving, Emil stood and attempted to catch his breath, holding his retrieved sword in his right hand and the now burnt-out torch in the other. Seeing that it was now safe to enter, Laurence and his colleagues started making their way over to him.

“A well-fought battle,” he said as they approached, though he didn’t seem to hear him. Looking closer, he could see that Emil was tightly gripping both of his weapons. “Is everything alright?” This time, he managed to get his attention.

“Oh, my apologies. I…I might’ve gotten a little carried away.” He replied while looking down at the beast’s butchered body. It was undoubtedly the most brutal display of violence Laurence had witnessed and with the threats they’d encountered thus far, that was saying something.

“Anyway, you can go about your business now. Excuse me.” With that, the knight sheathed his sword, leaned forward to take hold of one of the beast's ankles and started unmindfully dragging it away from the coffin, leaving a trail of its blood behind. As he did this, his companions looked on in stunned silence, appearing similarly concerned and perhaps even a little frightened.

“Well then, Laurence?” Norbert said, bringing Laurence’s attention back to the matter at hand. “You said we’d find something important here. Where should we start?”

“Here.”

Both Laurence and Norbert looked to Caryll, who had already made her way in front of the decorative coffin before them. She then placed her hand on it and ran it along its shining metal before turning to look back at them.

“A little help, please?” After sharing a quick glance with each-other, Laurence and Norbert joined Caryll in front of the coffin and with their combined strength, managed to remove the coffin’s lid.

The three of them then peered inside; just as before, the body of the coffin’s inhabitant had long since decayed, but unlike before, it was not a woman they found inside. Instead, they found what looked to be a man wearing a set of lightweight armor; whoever they were, they must have no doubt been a warrior in life. But rather than holding a sword or a similar weapon, his hands were firmly placed on the handle of a rather peculiar item; a pair of sharpened points which seemed to be held together by little more than cloth.

“What is that supposed to be?” Norbert asked, something all of them must’ve been thinking at that moment.

“I haven’t got a clue.” Laurence admitted. Despite this, he found himself intrigued by the item, leading to him reaching into the coffin and attempting to wrest it from its owner’s long dead hands.

“What are you…?” Before Norbert could even finish his sentence, Laurence had managed to retrieve it, taking it by its handle and holding it up to observe it.

“Curious.” he uttered to himself. It surely felt a lot like a weapon, albeit a rather crude one, unbefitting of someone as renowned as its wielder must’ve been in life.

“Hold on...” Laurence ran one of his hands along one of the spikes, finding its texture to be rather smooth – a familiar type of smoothness.

“Bones.”

“What?” Caryll asked, clearly confused by what he’d said.

“These two points – they’re fashioned from bones. Look,” he held it out to give his colleagues a better look.

“I think he might be right,” Norbert remarked. “But if so, where did they originate from?”

“I don’t know, but I doubt it's from a human.” Laurence replied. However, that was about all he could say for certain in regards to it, seeing as the bones did not seem to resemble anything found in a human skeleton, as well as being longer than his arm.

But aside from that, there was something…else about them – something far more bizarre. The state of its wielder’s remains suggested that they had been buried for a long time, yet unlike him, these bones did not show any noticeable signs of decay. And as Laurence gripped the weapon in his hands, he felt a sort of drawing force deep within, one that he could not even begin to describe.

“What’s that you have there?” Laurence was quickly made aware of Emil standing not far behind them, no doubt having noticed their discovery.

“Truth be told, we’re not quite sure ourselves,” he admitted.

“May I see?” By now, Laurence was aware that Emil wasn’t making a request, but rather an order. And he had no choice but to comply. Turning around, the professor held the weapon out to him, who promptly took it from him and spent some time observing it, all the while sporting a puzzled expression on his face.

“Hmm…very odd indeed.” Emil said as he looked back up at them. “I presume you wish to study it further?”

“If it’s possible.” Laurence replied.

For the next few seconds, he waited for the knight’s verdict. As he did, he noticed that he seemed rather indecisive.

“That is something we will have to decide with the captain,” Emil eventually said, which didn’t surprise him in the slightest. What did surprise him however was the knight holding the weapon back out to him. “That being said, I don’t see the harm in letting you hold on to it, for now, at least.”

A few seconds passed before Laurence finally accepted his offering, nodding his thanks as he did. He had been almost certain that they would be prohibited from keeping such a mysterious item – something that might very well still be the case – but this gesture at least gave him a little hope.

“Now, unless anything else here has caught your eye, I think it’s about time we made our way back.” Emil suggested.

Looking around, Laurence couldn’t see anything that stood out from the last shrine that they had discovered, so after quickly checking to make sure Caryll and Norbert didn’t have any further inquiries they wanted to pursue, they started to follow the knights back the way they came. This unfortunately took them back through the pit they’d passed through before, forcing them to once again contend with its stench and wade through the slew of dead rats they had left behind. Yet despite this, the general feeling among the small company was a positive one, or at least, as positive as one could be in such a setting.

“I really must thank you for bearing with my ‘escapade’.” Laurence said to Emil along the way.

“No need, professor,” he replied. “After what you’ve done for us, it’s the least we could do.”

Laurence could only assume he was referring to his invitation from a few hours before, where he had offered them food and drink. “Please, it was nothing,” he replied.

“It might seem that way to you, but…” Emil seemed to trail off for a moment, his eyes travelling down to the floor as if he were unsure of something. “Well, it meant a lot to us.” He finally finished, turning his gaze forward once more.

The professor couldn’t find anything to say in response, instead finding himself thinking about what Emil had said. Lady Maria seemed to believe that there were ulterior motives behind his actions and while he had of course been hoping to strengthen ties between their respective companies, he still believed that ensuring that the knights were well-fed and well-rested had been the right thing to do, even if it didn’t amount to anything meaningful.

As they neared the exit, they suddenly heard several booming noises, prompting them to stop and try to pinpoint what it was, and where it was coming from.

“That’s gunfire,” said Robert. Sure enough, Laurence was able to recognize it as such and soon realized that it was coming from the direction the others had gone in.

“Captain…” he heard Emil utter, his worry evident.

They then all rushed towards the stairwell, realizing the danger that the other half of the company could be in. As they entered back into the corridor, they turned towards the path leading further into the tombs, where sounds of battle became all the clearer. Before they even managed to come close to it, Amelia ran through the doorway, followed closely by Damian.

“Professor! Professor!” she called out.

“Amelia!” Laurence broke away from the group and ran up to meet her, a wave of relief washing over him as he embraced his terrified pupil.

“There were so many…Lady Maria, she told us to run, but…” she said in a quiet, panicked voice.

“What, Amelia? What happened?”

…

Sometime earlier.

With a decisive swing of her sword, another victim of the scourge fell at Maria’s feet, joining three others that had ambushed them. With the apparent threat eliminated, she and her men remained alert, making sure that nothing else was lying in wait before turning back to the awaiting scholars.

“Let’s go,” she told them.

She then led them up a parallel staircase, keeping her eyes open for any more potential threats.

“Oh my,” she suddenly heard Amelia say, turning to find that she had fallen slightly behind the group and was looking up towards the ceiling, looking quite disturbed. Following her gaze, Maria was able to spot what had caught her attention; there were at least a dozen people hanging by their ankles from the ceiling, clad entirely in white robes and their hands bound over their heads.

“They’re not…alive, are they?” the young woman questioned.

“No, I do not think so.” Maria replied after a brief observation, but this didn’t seem to lessen Amelia’s horror nor did it make her look away from the gruesome sight. Seeing this, Gehrman went up to her and put a hand on her shoulder to pull her attention away.

“It’s alright, Amelia. Let’s keep moving.” She said in an understanding, almost consoling voice. A few seconds later, the young scholar nodded and started to follow Gehrman back towards the group.

“Be careful not to faint while you’re at it.” Damian said rather derisively as the two approached, leading to both of his fellows to glare at him.

“Your concern is noted, but not needed…or desired.” Amelia replied in a similarly dismissive manner.

“Come now, there’s nothing to be ashamed of – if you must blame someone, blame your master for sheltering you so.” This made her visibly angry.

“Like we can blame yours for robbing you of compassion?” She retorted.

“That’s enough!” Gehrman suddenly intervened, causing both scholars to look at her. “Do not forget why the two of you are here. Master Willem was most generous in allowing the two of you to partake in this expedition and your masters even more so in choosing you out of all your fellow disciples. Whatever squabbles you may have, now is not the time nor place for them. Understood?”

After a few tense moments, the two young scholars relented. “Yes, Mr. Gehrman, sir.” Said Amelia.

Maria and her men had remained silent as all this unfolded, remaining so up until Gehrman turned back towards them. “Apologies, my lady. Please, lead the way.” A moment later, Maria did just that, motioning for her men to follow her.

“Does this sort of thing happen often?” she asked Gehrman along the way. “Often enough, or so I’ve been told.”

“Told?” she repeated, finding herself rather confused by his answer.

“Do I strike you as a pedagogue, captain?” his question was delivered rather humorously, making it difficult for Maria to decide how to answer him.

“Well…” she started to say, which only made him chuckle.

“Worry not, there was no correct answer. I am a scholar, yes, but my work is of a more…independent variety.” Gehrman explained, though she still found herself rather puzzled by his words.

“If that is the case, then what are you doing here?” This was a blunt question, to be sure, but it was one worth asking.

“Well, knowledge isn’t worth very much if you don’t apply it every once in a while, is it?,” was the answer he eventually gave. Yet despite this, she somehow knew that there was more to Gehrman’s presence than he was letting on. But before she could pursue the matter further, they entered a circular room, which prompted her to hold a hand up to signal them to stop.

“Is something wrong?” Gehrman questioned, but Maria didn’t reply, focusing instead on scanning the room. Despite its relatively small size, it appeared entirely devoid of life, without a stirring to be heard. But if her time here had taught her anything, it was to expect the unexpected.

“Keep your eyes open,” she told the others before they made their way inside. There didn’t seem to be any other passageways, with the only other path being an upwards spiraling staircase to their right. Cautiously leading the others towards it, Maria tried to focus her vision to spot anything that could be lying in wait at the top, which was made exceptionally difficult by the lack of any light.

That would change once they were around halfway up, when an enormous ball of fire lit up at the top of the stairwell…and quickly started spiraling towards them.

“WATCH OU…!” Before she even managed to finish her cry, Maria felt herself being sharply pulled to the side; before she knew it, she felt the sweltering heat of the ball of fire safely pass by, after which she heard it crashing somewhere in the distance.

“Are you alright, my lady?” It was Gehrman, who she now realized had also been shielding her from the heat with his cloak.

“I’m fine.” She quickly replied, shaking off her shock and moving past him. He had managed to get them into a small cavity in the wall, with just enough space for them to get clear of the trap’s path. With the threat seemingly passed, Maria peered out and tried to spot her men along.  “Leon! Frederick! Where are you?!” she could not see them anywhere, leaving her to fear they had failed to get out of the way in time.

“Over here, Captain!” Maria quickly saw Leon peek out from a similar opening further down the stairwell, with Robert becoming visible soon after.

As she breathed a sigh of relief, Gehrman also looked out. “What about Amelia and Damian!” he cried out.

“They’re both safe!” Frederick called back.

Their relief was soon interrupted when Maria became aware of something flying towards them. This time, it was her who pulled Gehrman back into the opening, getting them to cover just as an object crashed down on the stairwell, exploding upon impact. A few seconds later, another small explosion erupted not far from their feet, which showed that the danger had only just begun.

“How very exciting.” Gehrman said, making her peer in his direction. He had acted surprisingly quickly in the face of peril, even if his actions were ultimately unnecessary; had she so wished, Maria could’ve gotten clear of the trouble just fine on her own.

“Just stay behind cover. We’ll deal with this.” She instructed, leaving him to calmly nod his understanding.

Maria waited for another explosion to go off, before calling out “NOW!”, rushing out of her hiding place and up the stairs, her men following close behind her. She was soon able to spot their assailant; a thin, white-skinned humanoid who continued chucking dark bottles at them even as they got closer and closer to him. One of its projectiles flew past Maria’s head, leaving the figure unable to react before she reached him and cut him down with a single swing of her saber, leaving his head to fly and land a few meters away. As its body crumbled to the floor, her two companions joined her at the top, though they found themselves with nothing to fight.

“It can’t be that easy.” Frederick commented, and she was inclined to agree. Soon enough, their suspicion was confirmed, as they heard a loud growl coming from a passageway just up ahead.

“No, indeed.”

As they readied themselves, they saw the hallway had become better illuminated, with more than one shadow dancing along the walls. More surprisingly, they could also hear hasty uttering in an unfamiliar language on top of the beastly growls, which also seemed to be getting closer and closer.

A few seconds later, another of the wolf-like beasts appeared at the doorway and peered in their direction, but something seemed to prevent it from attacking them on sight. As it exited the hallway, they soon saw why. There was an enormous collar around the beast’s neck, attached to a chain that was held by three other white-skinned humanoid; additionally, there were two hooded watchers on either side of it, both of whom were wielding flaming halberds.

The beast snapped its jaws at the knights, hunger gleaming in its eyes as its captors visibly struggled to hold it back. One of the hooded figures pointed at them and spoke something in an indiscernible language, after which the beast was released and charged at them.

“Scatter!” Maria called out, prompting her men to move off to the side as the beast bore down on her. As it pounced at her, she moved back just out of its reach, but found herself unable to retaliate as the beast started clawing and slashing at her. While it was focused on Maria, her two tried to attack it from the side; as it turned to swipe at Leon, Frederick was able to drive his blade into its side, causing it to roar in anguish and turn its attention to him, forcing him back as well.

As this happened, Maria saw the humanoid figures running to join the fight. “No, focus on them! I’ll deal with the beast!” she called to her men, who were promptly assailed by the beast’s masters.

This left her to face off with the ravenous beast, avoiding its wide-reaching attacks and countering with slashes of her own. Its skin was tough, which made it difficult for her to inflict any meaningful damage and with its relentless nature, it was hard enough to land a hit on it as it was. Her men weren’t faring much better. Though their opponents were much less physically imposing, they both had to deal with several of them at once; when one of them was left at a disadvantage, another was quick to attack in its stead, leaving the knights with few opportunities to attack.

In between the sounds of battle, Maria was able to hear a distant, yet very distinct sound – the ringing of a bell.

She had only a split second to dwell on her dread before she was forced back on the offensive. “Fight on! We need to hurry!” Maria cried, knowing that if they didn’t eliminate their enemies soon, things would quickly go from bad to worse.

Mere seconds later, the first of the summoned creatures made their way into the room, quickly followed by another, and then another. They quickly moved to attack her men, who now had to deal with even more overwhelming odds. Although they managed to cut some of them down, another would quickly come to take their place.

 And somewhere in the distance, the bell kept on ringing.

“Fall back! Retreat!!” Maria called out, quickly realizing that they were fighting a losing battle.

Though they were clearly shocked by her order, Leon and Frederick quickly turned to run from their assailants, with Maria distracting the beast just long enough for them to make it past before retreating herself. As the knights ran down the stairs, they saw the scholars peek out from their hiding places, no doubt having heard the commotion.

“All of you, run! Back the way we came!” Maria ordered and the scholars quickly complied, joining them in their retreat as their attackers gave chase.

Once they reached the passageway leading to the parallel stairwell, a red glowing spider suddenly dropped down in front of them, stopping them in their tracks. Thankfully, Leon was quick to strike it down before it could attack the scholars, but they soon saw others like it coming from the floor above; had they waited any longer, they would’ve been trapped.

“This way! Quickly!” They all ran down the stairs and back through the cave they went through when first entering, soon managing to make it out and coming before a small, circular pit, which they could only get out of via a ladder. Looking back, they could see the horde was fast approaching.

Maria quickly turned to Gehrman, who was himself showing signs of worry. “Get your scholars out. We’ll hold them off so you can escape.” Though he seemed somewhat reluctant, he nodded, which she did in kind before turning to face their pursuers.

“Come on, come on, both of you – climb! Quick!” she heard him saying to his two younger followers, no doubt making sure they both got out before he did.

 Thankfully, the summoned spiders made up the front lines of the pursuing force, which made it easy for Maria and her men to fight them off, at least initially. Very soon, the beast came into view, easily outrunning its summoned helpers and even crushing one under its paws as it approached them.

“Pistols at the ready!” Maria and her knights each drew their firearms, pointing them towards the fast-approaching beast.

“FIRE!” 

The deafening sounds of gunfire echoed through the cave as the three of them unleashed a hail of bullets at the approaching beast, which staggered back with each successful hit. Had it been hit by ordinary bullets, it would’ve gone unscathed, but these were quicksilver bullets, specially infused with their blood. But even then, the damage they did was minimal and with an angered roar, the beast resumed its advance, its eyes set on her once again. As it got closer, both Leon and Frederick readied their blades.

“Wait.” She said to stop them, clutching the handle of her sabre as the beast bore down on her. Keeping her eyes squarely on it, Maria watched as the beast leapt at her and swiped with its claw.

Just as she had anticipated.

With a single, quick slice of her saber, the beast’s left claw arm was cut clean off, leaving it to fall to the ground as its lost limb fell uselessly off to the side. As it tried in vain to get back up, Frederick quickly drove his own blade through its skull, killing it instantly.

“Lady Maria, it’s time to go!” she cautioned a backward glance to find that Gehrman was still standing by the ladder, with the two younger scholars seeming to have successfully escaped.

“For you, yes!” she turned just in time to slash at an incoming spider. “So, get moving!”

“And how do you plan to escape?” he called out as the horde in front of her grew larger and larger.

“That doesn’t matter! Go!” she couldn’t afford to turn back this time, so she had no idea if Gehrman had complied or not. All she and her men could do was continue to fight back against the seemingly endless sea of foes that came their way, slowly making their way back towards the ladder.

“You two get out. I’ll hold the line.” She told Leon and Frederick, who both looked at her in shock.

“But, captain, there are too many! You won’t be able to get out – you’ll be killed!” Leon argued with her.

“We’ll all be killed without reinforcements. What you need to do is…”

“Mind your heads!” The three of them were shocked to see someone drop down just in front of them, driving their sword through an incoming spider as they landed.

“Emil!” Maria called out, shocked by his arrival. “How’re you…?”

“We heard you got yourself in a bit of a bind.” He replied as he stood back up. “Surely, you won’t object if we help untangle you.”

Soon after, Robert and Harold dropped down on the left and right sides of the well, attacking the incoming horde from both sides. With a small smile, Maria prepared herself for battle once more.

“Onwards!” she rallied, charging towards the horde with Leon and Frederick in tow. As they cut through the front lines of the summoned creatures, Maria saw movement out of the corner of her eye, turning her head and looking up just in time to see Gehrman turning to walk away, disappearing out of view. She didn’t have time to dwell on this however, as another wave of enemies had already appeared.

Emil’s arrival helped turn the tide of the battle, allowing them to fight their way back through the cave and towards the staircase, which the spiders completely ignored by crawling down along the walls instead. Upon closer observation, Maria could see that they were coming from two sources: the path they’d originally taken and another from further up.

“We need to cut them off,” she said before turning to her men. “Emil, take your company and go further up. We’ll go through the middle path.”

“Yes, captain!” Emil replied.

With that, they continued fighting their way up the stairs, separating once they reached the middle. Maria briefly watched as Emil, Robert and Harold ran up an additional flight of stairs towards an unknown path, though if her hunch was correct, it would take them to the same location as them. Going back through the room from which they were forced to retreat, Maria and her two companions were able to get past the winding staircase and make it to the top once more. They found that they now had to contend with fewer spiders, which seemed to indicate that Emil was successfully drawing some of them away.

As they followed the sound of ringing bells, they found their way into a corridor that branched off to the right, only to be met by several more summoned enemies. As they prepared for battle, several of them ran off to the right, where Maria could hear them being cut down. Soon enough, Emil and his company appeared around the corner, slicing through the spiders that blocked their path. Almost as soon as they were slain, the bell rang out again and it was now clear that they were directly ahead of them.

“They’re coming from this way!” Maria called out, leading her men into the room ahead.

Once inside, they were able to see not one, but two bell maidens standing amidst the blowing sand. Additionally, the four soldiers they had encountered before had retreated here as well and once they spotted the knights, they formed a defensive line in front of the maidens and charged at them.

Thinking quickly, Maria thought of a plan of attack. “Emil, with me. The rest of you, cover us!'' With that, they charged, with four of her men running ahead to engage one of the individual guards and allowing her and Emil to focus on the bell maidens.

Seeing their approach, the two summoners began to ring their bells in unison, but instead of summoning additional defences, they instead created a large ring of purple energy, which moved towards them with blinding speed. Having sped up in the hopes of reaching them before their minions could spawn, neither Maria or Emil could react to the attack in time and once the energy hit, a sharp pain shot throughout her body, causing her to stagger and fall to her knees. Though her ears were ringing and her vision was blurred as a result of the attack, Maria was able to spot a blur of movement in front of her, one that was quickly moving towards her.

Reacting on a moment’s notice, she raised her sabre and was able to deflect the maiden’s incoming dagger before it could reach her throat. Maria managed to rise to her feet just before she attacked her again, enabling her to evade the maiden’s wild slashes with relative ease. Deciding to end the encounter before she could surprise her again, she parried the maiden’s dagger with her own, throwing her off balance and giving Maria the chance to drive her sabre through her chest; with a hollowed gasp, the summoner dropped her bell and weapon before falling to her knees, after which Maria pulled her blade free and allowed her to collapse to the ground.

She then heard a similar gasp off to her right, turning just in time to see that Emil had managed to cut down the other summoner. Behind them, the others had also dispatched the remaining guards, leaving them all to try and catch their breath.

“It is done,” Maria said, sheathing her sword. “Well done, all of you.”

She then turned her attention to Emil, who much like the others, looked exhausted. “Am I right to assume your task is completed?” Maria asked him.

“Yes, and from the looks of things, just in time, too.” She couldn’t help but smile at his reply.

“What of Professor Laurence?” “He’s safe. I told him and the rest of his followers to return to camp and wait for us there.” Emil replied.

“That is good,” said Maria. In hindsight, perhaps humoring Laurence’s seemingly spontaneous urge to explore may not have been the wisest choice.

“Forgive me, Captain,” Emil suddenly said. “It was foolish of me to divide us as I did.”

“There is no need for forgiveness, Emil. None of us knew what awaited us,” she replied.

“Perhaps, but…” Before Emil could finish his sentence, Maria stepped forward and placed a hand on his shoulder.

“Enough. Regardless of your choice, your timely arrival assured our victory here. We are all indebted to your valor.”

After a few seconds of stunned silence on his part, Emil simply nodded his head, with Maria doing the same. Though her earlier decision regarding their separation may not have been her wisest, she had the utmost faith that Emil and the others would be able to handle whatever came their way. And clearly, that faith was not misplaced.

She then turned to the rest of her company. “Now then, shall we continue?” she proposed.

Thankfully, they did not have to go far to find the mechanism that held the key to the next part of the labyrinth, which was located at the bottom of the room they found themselves in. It was to be expected that they encountered stiffer resistance than before; the deeper into the tombs they went, the more committed its residents would be to ensuring they didn't venture any deeper. No doubt, they had a difficult path ahead of them.

As they made their way back the way they came, Maria’s men chatted amongst themselves, clearly euphoric on the victory they had achieved. Though it heartened her to see them in such high spirits, she chose to keep to herself, not wanting to spoil their fun. The truth was that they had only narrowly avoided a much darker turn of events; had it not been for Emil’s reinforcements, her, Leon and Frederick would’ve been overrun. As a knight, she had to be prepared to risk her life in order to fulfill her duty, but as their captain, she could not risk theirs.

In time, they would once again find themselves in the narrow well from before and started making their way out via the ladder. Maria and Emil were the first to reach the top and as they waited for the others to join them, they looked across the room towards a sealed steel gate, which thanks to their efforts, was now unlocked.

“Well, captain, what now?” Emil asked her, which could only mean one thing.

“You wish to go forward?” she said more as a statement rather than a question.

“If that is what you think is best.” Was his reply, though it was obvious to her that he was only being half-honest.

“Emil, you have already exerted yourself enough – you all have. Is it truly wise to fight another battle so soon?”

“That is our purpose, is it not?” he pointed out. “Besides, I doubt that whatever is waiting for us will be an issue, seeing as we’d all be going together…and without anyone we need to worry about protecting.”

By this point, the rest of the company had made it out of the well and were silently observing their conversation. Despite this, Maria could clearly see the fire in their eyes; tired though they may be, they were still ready to fight. Nevertheless, she kept herself from making a decision immediately, choosing instead to weigh their options.

Though it would of course be prudent to rest before attempting any further excursions, the foe that was awaiting them was no doubt a formidable one, if the last penultimate beast was any indication. If they were to return later, they risked facing increasingly dangerous odds in a tired state, which as they just witnessed, would almost surely prove disastrous. Eventually, Maria came to a decision.

“Harald!” she called out, prompting him to step forward. “I want you to return to camp and get Matthias. I want the biggest force that we can muster."

"Of course. I will return in a moment's notice." Harald said before running off down the hall behind them.

"The rest of you, come with me. Prepare for battle."

Maria then led her men towards the unlocked gate and then into the following corridor. As they made their way towards the next part of the labyrinth, she focused her hearing in the hopes of getting some sort of idea of what awaited them. Unfortunately, she could hear nothing, but rather than calming her, this only made her more anxious.

Once again, they found a two-door gate blocking their path. After quietly prompting her men to ready themselves, Maria cautiously began to push them open, remaining wary of any potential surprise attacks. But no such thing occurred; instead, she was able to fully open it and allow them to step inside.

They found themselves within a small circular area, with several long-abandoned weapons and armor littering the ground. And at its center, there lay the body of an enormous beast, causing them to immediately prepare their weapons. However, the creature remained motionless, its long, bony limbs stretched at its sides. Upon closer inspection, Maria could see that the flesh on its back had been partly peeled off, leaving its spine exposed and its skin draped over its head. 

"Is it...dead?" Leon asked. 

"I'm not sure." Maria replied. Its grievous wound seemed to suggest so, but somehow, she had her doubts.

Tightly gripping her Rakuyo in anticipation, Maria began to cautiously approach the creature. A few seconds later, she heard the faint, but distinct sound of sniffing, causing her to freeze in her tracks.

Suddenly, the beast slowly lifted its head and looked in her direction, its skin hanging over it like a red hood. Not taking its eyes off her, it started to bring itself up on all fours, prompting her men to run up to join Maria, forming a defensive line. Yet even though it was clearly aware of these increased numbers, the beast stood its ground. Drool ran from its jaws and its eyes remained locked on them. And when she looked into them, Maria could see only one thing; a burning, ravenous hunger.

Standing up on its two hind legs, the beast unleashed an ear-splitting roar. Prey was finally within reach.

...

Chapter Text

The beast slowly lumbered towards them, seemingly savoring every moment of its advance. This gave Maria and her knights more than enough time to prepare a plan of attack.

“Surround it! Target its limbs!” her men proceeded to run off to do just that, leading their foe to claw at them as they got close. Doing so left its back exposed to Maria, prompting her to charge forward and attempt to cut off its leg, managing to strike the limb, but failing to pierce its bone.

The beast roared in pain and turned to slash at her, forcing her back. As she recovered, she noticed that a thick, sludge-like residue had been left on her sword, which she could tell right away wasn’t blood. She didn’t have time to dwell on this, however, as the beast lunged towards her, forcing her to move to the side in order to avoid it, which unfortunately allowed the beast to escape their encirclement and allowed it to go back on the offensive. 

Running back towards Maria, it stood up on its hind legs and attempted to grab her, bringing its jaws down at the same time, both of which she managed to evade. The beast quickly adapted to this and attempted to slash at her; however, it took a fair amount of time to wind up its swing and when it finally did, Maria was able to dash forward and dodge underneath its arm. Before it could recover from its attack, she quickly turned on her heel, combined her two weapons and drove her blade into its undefended side. As it roared in pain, Maria pulled out her Rakuyo and followed up with an additional upward slash, striking with enough force to knock the creature on its back.

The beast quickly got back on its feet and scurried away as Maria chased after it, causing her to miss her attack. Her men then ran up to join her, but before they could run past her, she put a hand to the side to stop them, choosing instead to determine what the beast was planning. Right now, it was slowly pacing the side, never once taking its eyes off them. Just as it seemed it would not attack again, it let out another furious roar, causing an eruption of that strange substance to erupt from its body.

Soon, the beast was upon them again, wildly slashing at them and leaving a trail of its mysterious fluid with each movement. As the knights split their line in two in order to avoid its onslaught, Maria saw a small puddle of the substance nearby and in that moment, managed to deduce what it was.

“Poison,” she uttered to herself, remembering the sample she’d seen Gehrman collecting earlier that night. 

In something of a panic, she quickly looked to her men, who had already launched a counterattack. “Be careful! Don’t let it touch you!” she called out as she rushed to join them.

“You don’t need to tell us twice!” Emil called back just as the beast set its sights on him.

"Emil, watch out!" she cried, but it was too late. The beast had already leapt towards him, its arms stretched out ready to grab him.

BANG!

A bullet suddenly hit the creature mid-flight, causing it to lose its momentum and crash to the floor. Emil moved out of its way just in time and turned towards the source of the shot, prompting Maria to do the same. At the doorway stood Matthias, still holding his Evelyn: Harald stood just behind him.

"Started without me, I see? I'm hurt."

Maria experienced a moment of relief before she heard the beast rising back to its feet, growling in anger. This time however, Emil was able to turn back in time before it caught him by surprise, avoiding its careless slash.

"Not this time, fiend!" he cried as he prepared to attack it.

"Emil, to me! Now!" Maria called out to him, stopping him in his tracks. After a moment's hesitation, he retreated, leaving the beast to chase after him. 

Despite its speed, Emil's head start allowed him to outrun it and rejoin the rest of them before it could catch up.

"What're we dealing with here, captain?" Matthias asked.

"Look closely. You see that substance coming out of its body? It's poison. Don't let it so much as graze you."

Almost the moment she finished speaking, the beast caught up with them, mindlessly slashing as it approached. However, Maria remained calm and waited for it to come closer.

"Now!" she cried as it performed what looked to be its final slash, after which her company once again split up and moved to encircle it. "Move in! Cut it down, quickly!"

The beast found itself assailed from all sides, leaving it unable to counterattack as it was cut, stabbed and shot again and again. Yet despite the advantage they now enjoyed, Maria nor any of her knights were able to deliver that decisive blow, wary as they were of the poison that flew every time their blades hit their mark.

Eventually, the beast stopped trying to defend itself and instead seemed to buckle under the pressure of their continuous attacks. However, Maria noticed that its poisonous substance was still oozing out of its body; in fact, it seemed to be being produced at a much more rapid rate. Her men must've noticed this too, for they ceased their attacks and backed off to avoid the continuous stream of poison.

That is, everyone except Emil.

"Enough of this!" he called out impatiently, running towards the seemingly helpless beast.

"Emil, no!" Maria cried as she ran to stop him, just as the beast stood up on its hind legs and unleashed an ear-splitting roar, sending a burst of poison out all around it.

The force of the attack was enough to knock each of the knights off their feet, landing hard on their backs. Disoriented, Maria could just make out the image of the beast quickly charging towards her. She tried in vain to stand up before it reached her, only for it to leap forward and pin her to the ground with its claws.

The force of the impact knocked Maria’s weapons from her hands, but in the split second the beast descended on her neck, she was able to grab onto its face with her hands, causing its jaws to snap on empty air. Using all of the strength she could muster, she struggled to hold back the beast, who kept on pushing and biting at her as poison seeped from its jaws.

“Captain!'' A few seconds later, a barrage of bullets hit the beast in the shoulders, causing it to let go of her shoulders and giving her the chance to push it off her with one forceful motion. After regaining its balance, it attempted to charge again, only for Emil to suddenly run up in front of her and block its path, holding his blade out in front of him.

“You won’t touch her again,” he declared, a clear anger in his words. A tense moment passed before the beast ran forward once again, but rather than waiting, Emil charged to meet it head on, swinging his sword and hitting its limb before it could even raise its claw.

“Emil!” Maria attempted to stand in order to retrieve her weapon, intent on aiding him. Yet almost the moment she started moving, a sudden rush of fatigue caused her to stumble back to her knees.

“Captain!” it was Matthias who called out this time, running up beside her. “Captain, are you alright?”

Instead of replying, Maria set her sights on Emil, who was still locked in combat with the beast, weaving around the beasts increasingly careless, yet still rapid slashes. Yet with every passing second, she could see his guard was gradually faltering, as if his opponent’s very presence was draining his strength. She had felt something similar when it had her pinned down, which she now realized was the result of the constant stream of poison coming out of the creature’s body. And very soon, its potency took its toll.

A sharp cry of pain rang through the room as the beast’s claws connected with Emil’s flesh, leaving three large scratches across his chest.

“No!” Matthias cried, rushing forward only to be held back by Maria. Them coming to his aid only put them at risk of being poisoned as well.

Maria then stood to her feet. “Emil, fall back!” she ordered just as he was once again forced to avoid the beast's attack, stumbling as he did. However, instead of doing as she commanded, Emil only spared her a brief glance before turning right back to his opponent, a fierce determination in his eyes.

“Come on!” he shouted at the beast, which snarled in response to his challenge.

Realizing what he was doing, Maria rushed to retrieve her weapon just as the two combatants charged at each-other. Before she was even able to reach it, Emil thrust his sword forward with a roar, not even bothering to avoid the beast’s incoming slash.

At that moment, the room fell silent. Maria came to a stop and looked on in shock at the sight before her. The beast’s claws had managed to pierce Emil’s side, yet despite this, he managed to stand upright holding his sword, which was now impaled in the creature’s mouth.

“You want blood, you disgusting monster?” the sound of a chamber being loaded could be heard. “Choke on your own.”

Emil then fired a shot from his weapon’s attached firearm, blowing a hole in the back of the beast’s head and sending it careening over onto its back. After a few seconds, its body went completely still, though its poison continued to seep out of its gaping wound out onto the floor.

Maria and the rest of her men stood in shocked silence as Emil stood bloodied and exhausted before them, breathing heavily as he turned to look in their direction.

“See? No issue at…”

Before he could even finish his sentence, he stumbled and collapsed to his knees, using his sword to keep himself from falling outright. Seeing this, Maria immediately ran to his side, catching him just as his grip on his sword failed.

“C…captain…” he weakly uttered.

“Be still. You’ve done enough,” she said as she set about helping him up.

As she lifted him up, the rest of her men ran over to gather around them. “Emil, you bloody fool,” Matthias said as he knelt down on the opposite side, helping her with his weight. “What were you thinking?”

“Enough!” Maria then looked to Emil, who by now was struggling to even lift up his head.

“Emil, can you hear me? We’re going to get you help. Just hold on.” As much as she tried to seem calm for his sake, she couldn’t stop her worry from seeping into her words. It was clear that the poison had taken effect and that its potency was increasing rapidly. If they had any hope of saving him, they had to get him to safety now.

Without another word needing to be said, she and Matthias worked together to carry him back the way they came, with the rest of her men either following suit or rushing ahead to prepare the lift that would take them up. Along the way, Emil seemed unable to even move his legs, with the only indication that he was still alive being a series of quiet groans.

“Hang in there, my friend,” Matthias said as they practically dragged him toward the lift.

“Lady Maria…” Emil suddenly muttered. “I’m sorry…I have failed you…”

“It’s okay, it’s okay. Everything will be alright, I promise.” Maria said in the hopes of soothing him, even as panic took hold of her.

As the lift came to a stop, she used her other arm to lift him up by his legs, surprising Matthias in the process. “Go! Warn Professor Laurence – tell him we need medical attention immediately!” she ordered him, who seemed rather taken aback by her urgency. Nevertheless, he complied and without another word, rushed ahead of them, with Maria attempting to go as fast as she could with Emil in her arms.

….

Back at the camp, Laurence found himself impatiently pacing back and forth, periodically glancing towards the passageway from where they came. Each time, he saw nothing, prompting him to resume his pacing.

"You really should relax, Master Laurence," said Gehrman, who was sitting nearby.

"Perhaps, but…they've been gone a long time." Laurence said with a sigh.

“I doubt that it has even been ten minutes since we saw them last,” he rightfully pointed out.

Laurence turned his eyes back towards the gate. “A lot can happen in that time…especially here.” he said. For all they knew, Maria and her knights had encountered a foe they could not overcome.

"You're worried."

It was Micolash who spoke this time, drawing Laurence's attention to him. "Is it so wrong that I am?" he asked.

"No." Micolash then stood up. "No, I suppose it's not, not after all you've done to curry their favor.”

Admittedly, Laurence had not been prepared for such an accusation. “And what would you have me do? Purposefully alienate them?” he demanded.

“For one, I would have you see them as they are – agents of a power that wishes to ensure we do not dig too deep. They are not our allies and never will be.”

“Do you think I don’t know that?” Laurence retorted.

“It is becoming difficult to tell.” Despite the simplicity of Micolash’s statement, they came with a clear connotation, one that both shocked and angered him.

“Be that as it may, know that I have no illusions to the contrary.” He said, keeping himself to rising to his provocation. “But whether we like it or not, they are the only thing standing between us and certain doom. If we are to have any hope of survival, we need to keep them in our good graces or else those beasts will be the least of our worries.”

Throughout all of this, the eyes of their fellow scholars remained squarely on them, no-one else daring to say a word. Laurence had known that disagreement would inevitably arise on how they would conduct their research and that said disagreement would inevitably come from Micolash. The two of them obviously didn’t see eye to eye on many things, but that was to be expected – they were men of learning, after all.

Micolash appeared prepared to continue their confrontation. “If you are so sure, then…”

“Professor! Professor Laurence!” someone cried, causing them to turn toward the source of the noise. Running towards them was Matthias, his expression worn and desperate. “Please, we need your help. Emil, he’s been…”

“Calm yourself.” Laurence said to him. “What happened? Where is the rest of your company?”

“They’re making their way here as we speak, but one of us has been wounded – badly.” Matthias explained once he regained some of his composure.

“Say no more.” Laurence said before he hurried over to the part of the camp they had reserved for the wounded. “Amelia, with me!” he called out as he walked, prompting his student to run to join him, with Matthias following close behind.

Laurence barely had time to put on his gloves before the rest of the knights had made their way into the hall, with Lady Maria at the forefront. Even from a distance, Laurence could see that she was carrying one of her men in her arms, whose body seemed almost limp.

“Set him down here,” he instructed as she got close, helping her lower the wounded knight onto a bundle of blankets and rest his head on a. The knight in question was indeed Emil, whose garb had been torn and stained by blood from wounds on his chest and side; additionally, his face was coated in a thick layer of sweat and his breathing was labored.

“What happened to him?” Laurence asked his captain.

“A beast, unlike any we’ve ever seen. He managed to slay it, but I fear it managed to poison him before its demise.” The worry in Maria’s voice was evident as she explained what had occurred, with the rest of her men gathering around them.

“How was this poison instilled?” “His wounds would be the main source, but I have reason to believe he also ingested it either orally or through his skin – I do not know for certain.”

Laurence looked down at Emil, who was evidently struggling to stay conscious. “Is there anything you can do?” Lady Maria then asked him and as Laurence looked back to her, he could see the desperation in her eyes.

“Wait here,” he said before standing up and turning to Amelia. “Remove as much of his garb as you can and make sure he gets water. I’ll be back.”

As Amelia began her task, Laurence rushed off to retrieve the metallic medicine chest he had prepared for their exhibition. The number of supplies packed away inside was limited, containing little more than the bare essentials like bandages, pliers and scissors, as well as an assortment of medicines that covered most common ailments. However, he had been advised by Gehrman to specifically prepare something that would help counteract poison, which they thankfully happened to possess.

After searching through his chest for a few seconds, Laurence finally managed to dig out a small brown pouch, which he proceeded to carry back to the wounded knight along with a set of bandages. Amelia was in the process of trying to get Emil to drink from a canteen of water, who struggled to even keep the liquid in his mouth. Seeing Laurence approaching, his student moved to the side to allow him to kneel down beside him, after which he quickly unfolded the pouch and revealed its contents – a collection of small, white tablets.

“Emil, if you can hear me, I have something that should help you, but you’re going to need to swallow it,” he told the wounded knight.

“It’s too late…” Emil managed to utter.

“Nonsense,” said Laurence. “Now, open wide.”   

As he held out two of the tablets, Emil eventually opened his mouth, allowing him to place them in his mouth. Afterwards, Laurence took the canteen that Amelia had been using and poured a little bit of its contents into his mouth in order to help him swallow the tablets, which he managed to do, albeit with noticeable difficulty.

Before he did anything else, he looked at Lady Maria, who had not left Emil’s side. “Were any more of your men exposed to the poison?” he asked her.

“It is possible, but I do not know for certain,” she replied. Regardless of this, Laurence handed her the rest of the tablets.

“Take these and distribute one to each of them. If they were, it should neutralize it before it takes effect,” he instructed.

At first, she seemed reluctant, but she ultimately took the tablets from him. “Yes, of course,” she said as she stood to her feet and went about her task. The truth was, Laurence really didn’t know if the tablets would help at all; they were used primarily to treat arsenic poisoning and it wasn’t certain whether they could be used to combat natural poisons, especially one that was produced by such a mysterious creature. But it gave Lady Maria something to focus on while he worked, which was exactly what was needed at that moment.

Without another moment of delay, Laurence set about trying to clean Emil’s wounds with water. “Did any of it get in your eyes?” he asked, but there was no response. Laurence could see Emil’s chest was still slowly moving up and down, which indicated that he was still alive, but it was obvious that every breath was taking up more and more of his strength.

“Emil, can you hear me?” Laurence asked again and soon, he saw Emil’s lips curl into a smile.

“Aye, I can hear you,” he replied, his voice still weak and raspy.

“Good. Now, let me ask again, did any…” “Oh, give it a rest, will you? We both know you’re wasting your time with me.” Emil suddenly interrupted him and as much as Laurence wanted to argue with him, to tell him everything would be okay, he knew he was right.

The knight weakly turned his head to the side. “Lady Maria…where is she?” Being just a few steps away, Emil’s captain was able to hear him say this and promptly made her way back to his side.

“Don’t worry, Emil. I’m here,” she said in a gentle voice, unlike any he’d heard from her before.

“I know,” he said. “I know.”

“You’re going to be okay. You just need to rest,” said Lady Maria, only for Emil to start quietly laughing.

“Do you really believe that?” Upon hearing him say this, her smile faded and for the next few seconds, she did not say anything. “That’s what I thought,” Emil then said.

Laurence continued to look on in silence as Emil took Lady Maria’s hand, who was momentarily broken from her melancholy stare. “Captain…Maria, listen to me. Fighting by your side – it was truly an honor,” he said.

Lady Maria clutched his hand tighter. “Don’t say that. We’re going to get you out of here.” Though she kept her voice low, she sounded exceedingly desperate.

“It’s okay, my lady. This is my purpose.” He paused for a moment, with his only sound being the sound of his breath, which was growing fainter by the second. “Yes…my purpose. I used to have nothing – used to be nothing, until you found me. And for that, I would gladly give my life, for I owe you mine.” Despite the somber look on his captain’s face, Emil continued to smile at her.

“Thank you, my dear lady…Maria…”

As he spoke these words, his eyes never left hers and even after he finished and a bleak silence settled over the hall, Emil kept staring blankly at his captain, who continued to hold onto his hand.

“Emil?,” she whispered when he didn’t say anything more. Putting a finger to Emil’s neck, Laurence checked for a pulse; after waiting for a few seconds, he looked over to Lady Maria and solemnly shook his head.

Without letting go of his hand, she looked down at her fallen knight, whose lifeless expression still retained traces of the warm smile he’d maintained while speaking to her. After a few moments of inaction, Lady Maria closed Emil’s eyes with her fingers and put his limp hand to his chest before bowing her head in silent mourning.

Soon after, the rest of her company started to gather around her, looking down at their comrade with shock and soon, similar grief. Seeing this, Laurence finally decided to take his leave, standing up and silently walking away, with Amelia doing the same. The rest of the scholars had taken notice of what was happening and had started making their way over to them, only to stop when they saw Laurence approaching.

“Laurence, what’s happened?,” asked Lobsang. Without saying a word, he looked back to the mourning knights, some of which had joined their captain in kneeling beside Emil’s lifeless body, with Matthias in particular placing a comforting hand on Lady Maria’s shoulder.

“What do we do now?” Amelia soon asked him, leaving him to ponder his answer.

“Leave them be for now,” he instructed. “We will decide our next course of action later.”

With that, he continued on his way, leaving the rest of his scholars to look on at the gathered knights. Returning to his medicine chest, Laurence somberly packed away his tools, most of which had gone unused. After closing the lid, he spared one more glance in the direction of the knights, seeing that of his scholars, only Gehrman still observed them. At first, it seemed like he wanted to go and join the knights, perhaps in order to console them; eventually, he too decided to leave them alone and walked off.

Thus, Laurence was left to ponder what he would do next – what they would do next. But before the future of this exhibition could be decided, Lady Maria and her company needed time to grieve…and to make a decision of their own.

...

Chapter Text

The camp remained drearily silent from that point on, with Byrgenwerth’s scholars all trying to occupy themselves with a certain task. Micolash and Damian continued to pour over the artifacts that they had recovered earlier, no doubt looking for hidden symbols or inscriptions; Caryll continued pouring over her notebook and whatever strange secrets lay within; and perhaps most strikingly, Lobsang was locked in meditation and could occasionally be heard reciting mantras in a foreign language.

As for Laurence, he tried and failed to find something to distract him from the events of the past few hours. The best that he managed was trying to study the strange weapon they had retrieved, which only served to remind him of how it was acquired.

Looking back to where Emil’s lifeless body still lay, his face having been covered by a cloth by his compatriots, who could only sit and try to process the tragedy that had occurred. However, they did so without their captain, who had retreated into the hallway leading to the altar some time ago; no-one has seen her since, with none of her men appearing willing to go after her. 

Looking back at the strange-clawed weapon in his hand, Laurence let out a heavy sign. When they had last parted ways, Emil had been vigorous and hearty, always ready to face whatever came his way. And in the span of a few minutes, all of that had been stripped away and he was left to perish slowly and painfully, all while Laurence had been unable to do anything to help him.

“Master Laurence, a moment, please?” A concerned voice came from behind him. Without even turning around, Laurence lowered the weapon. 

“What is it, Gehrman?” he asked.

“My apologies for the intrusion, but we’ve been at a standstill for a good while now. I understand that things have taken an…unfortunate turn, but we cannot stay here forever.” 

“I know,” said Laurence. In one way or another, there had to be some sort of resolution to this expedition; either they moved forward or they didn’t. But as it was, he couldn’t come to a conclusive decision – he didn’t have the right to.

“Young master, you mustn’t blame yourself,” said Gehrman, as if reading his thoughts. “He knew the risks of coming here – all of us did.”

“Perhaps, but this…this was entirely avoidable.” Laurence finally turned to look at the older scholar. “You were right. I shouldn’t have taken us on separate paths; it was a rash decision, one that only served to spread them too thin.”

He found that Gehrman’s expression was similarly somber. “Yes, maybe so, but do not forget – he chose to follow you. And besides, there was no way for him to prepare for the beast that slew him; the fact he managed to slay it as well is remarkable, to say the least.”

At first, Laurence was merely going to nod his head, until he remembered something – Gehrman hadn’t actually seen the beast that poisoned Emil or at least, not during this expedition. Despite that, he was the sole reason they had possessed medicine that could help counter poison.

“You knew this would happen, didn’t you?” Laurence asked Gehrman, which made him momentarily drop his gaze.

“I knew it to be a possibility, yes,” he acknowledged. “But it is impossible to know for certain what one will find down here.”

The last portion of his reply sent a clear message to Laurence. They still had a portion of Loran left to explore and several more obstacles to encounter along the way. And if the events of the last few hours were any indication, these obstacles would only grow more difficult.

“I must speak to Lady Maria,” he eventually announced, which didn’t seem to surprise Gehrman at all.

“Do you think she’ll let you?” “I don’t know, Gehrman. But I have to at least try.” Laurence replied.

In response, the older scholar lightly smiled. “In that case, I shall await whatever decision you come to,” he said to him. With a nod of his head, Laurence started making his way past Gehrman and towards the path Lady Maria had gone down.

“And Master Laurence!” Gehrman suddenly said, causing him to look back at him. “You’re doing the right thing.” Was all that he said, but it was enough to spur Laurence onward.

As Laurence made his way across the camp, the rest of his scholars took notice, as did the knights who had remained behind. One of them, Harald, stood up and moved to block his path. “Where do you think you’re going?” he demanded. From the red in his eyes, it was clear he’d been crying.

“I only wish to speak to your captain.” Laurence calmly explained.

“Well, she has nothing to say to you. She explicitly said that she is not to be disturbed.” There was a clear anger behind the knight’s words, which he supposed was understandable. Laurence was just about to turn back before Matthias spoke up.

“Let him pass, Harald,” he ordered, causing them and the rest of his compatriots to turn to him in surprise.

“But…” “I said let him pass.” Matthias repeated a little more forcefully. After a few seconds, Harald looked back at Laurence and reluctantly stood aside. After sharing an understanding look with Matthias, the professor continued on his way.

As he got closer to the altar, Laurence slowed down a bit, taking a deep breath before coming to a stop in front of the doorway. As he expected, he found Lady Maria standing alone with her back turned to him, her arms folded across her chest and her head hung low. After a few seconds of continued silence, Laurence tried to make his presence known.

“What do you want, professor?” Lady Maria said before the words could even leave his lips, no doubt having heard him coming. However, she had yet to turn her eyes to him, leaving him at a loss for what to say.

“Lady Maria, I…” he stopped himself for a moment. “I am truly sorry about Emil. I may not have known him for very long, but I know that he was a valiant knight.”

Even with this, she didn’t turn around. “You didn’t come here to give your condolences.”

Despite the fact she was entirely correct in her statement, it still somewhat stung to hear it from her. Finally choosing to step inside the chamber, Laurence stopped just a few steps away from her.

“My lady, though it pains me to disturb you at such a trying time, we are going to have to make a decision regarding this expedition sooner or later,” said Laurence, choosing his words very carefully. In response to this, Lady Maria finally turned to look at him.

“And have you?” she asked him.

Despite her best efforts to hide it, Lady Maria's grief was palpable. It was clear to him that she cared for Emil: for Matthias and for the rest of her men, who in turn were fiercely loyal to her. And as she stayed by Emil's side in his final moments, the mask of a cold, calculating knight had slipped and revealed... compassion. True compassion and very soon, even truer regret.

"No," he eventually answered. "No, I have not."

This clearly surprised her. "What?"

“You heard me correctly. I am sure that most of my colleagues want to continue onwards and in any other circumstances, I would fully agree. But that is not their decision to make, nor is it mine…not this time."

Lady Maria stared at him with an almost bewildered expression, seeming to be at a complete loss for words. Seeing this, Laurence decided to press on. “We can call off the expedition if you so wish. I cannot ask you to risk any more lives on our behalf.”

A few more moments of silence passed, with Lady Maria eventually seeming to find her bearings. “That is very gracious of you, professor, but…” she started to say, only to stop and lower her gaze again. A moment later, she took a deep breath and finally unfolded her arms.

“No. I…we still have a duty to fulfill. I am to leave no stone unturned, just as you are, no doubt."

She was right, of course. Master Willem would no doubt be furious if he learned that Laurence had chosen to abandon the labyrinth prematurely, given that none of them knew when they would get the chance to explore it again, assuming they got another chance at all. And somehow, he doubted that Queen Annalise would be that much more understanding.

But at the same time, there was no telling what lay ahead or whether either of them would find what they sought along the way. And to Laurence, the thought of risking lives on such uncertainty just didn’t seem worth it.

“Are you certain, my lady?” he asked her.

“Yes,” she replied. “It’s what Emil would’ve wanted.”

Silence once again settled over the chamber as Laurence pondered to himself. “Very well,” he eventually said “I will go and inform my colleagues. You may join us whenever you’re ready.”

“There is no need to delay. We have already wasted enough time – I will muster my men at once.” Lady Maria started walking forward as she spoke, forcing him to move to the side in order to let her pass, caught off guard by her sudden urgency. Seeing that she wasn’t stopping, Laurence followed after her; just as he was about to catch up to her, she once again surprised him by coming to a sudden stop, as if waiting for him to get close.

“Oh, and professor…” she said, causing him to stop in his tracks as well. Lady Maria didn’t turn all the way around, but nonetheless met his eyes.

“Thank you… for helping Emil. Though you, and I, knew it was hopeless, you were still prepared to do all you could to save him. I will not forget.”

Laurence found himself surprised by the sincerity of her words, finding himself unable to form any of his own. Instead, he simply gave her an understanding nod, which she returned in kind. With that, the two of them continued on their way, soon falling into lockstep with one another. Though the mood in the labyrinth remained solemn, it brought him some relief to see some of Lady Maria’s former conviction return to the surface.

He could only hope that it would stay that way.

Chapter Text

It was with heavy hearts that they set out again. The moment that Maria returned from her seclusion, her men had looked to her expectantly, awaiting her decision. Seeing them again made her momentarily second-guess herself, the haunting image of Emil’s lifeless expression running through her mind. Despite this, she managed to find her tongue and soon found that they needed little convincing to follow her onwards.

This time, they left no-one behind, with the camp being entirely cleared out, leaving only Emil’s body behind. Though the thought of a creature coming along and violating his body crossed her mind, she ultimately decided it didn’t warrant leaving a watchman behind; they needed all the strength they could muster. As for Professor Laurence, he similarly gathered his scholars and once again followed them into Loran’s depths.

Soon, they reached the end of the second layer where Emil had made his last stand… and where his killer’s body still lay. As they got close to the poisonous beast, Maria’s company looked at its carcass in pure hatred, with Harald going so far as to spit on it.

Maria then placed a hand on his shoulder, hoping to stop him from going any further. “We mustn’t linger here. Come.”

A moment passed before he quietly nodded his head and continued to follow her towards another lift, with the rest of her men following suit. Just behind them were the scholars and as they walked, Gehrman herded them away from the beast’s body. “Keep your distance. Even dead, they can still be dangerous,” he advised them.

This statement caught her attention. Had he encountered a creature like this before? He had certainly been aware of the poisonous nature of some of Loran’s beasts, which had been the only reason more of Maria’s men hadn’t been killed. Yet she had never stopped to wonder how had come to possess such knowledge.

Before she could get too preoccupied with this thought, Laurence joined them just in front of the left. “Well, Lady Maria?” he asked her.

“Yes, my apologies,” she replied. “Let us go.”

They then proceeded to gather on the left, being careful not to put on more weight than it could hold. All the while, Maria couldn’t help but think about the words they’d exchanged – about the offer he had made her. She had known he would come, but she had thought it would be in order to urge her onwards, to allow them to continue their research.

But he hadn’t done that. Far from it. Instead, he had left it to her to decide what would become of their expedition or rather, whether she could bear to risk the lives of any more of her men. And although he didn’t say it outright, he had seemed almost disappointed when she refused… and she could understand why. They both knew that going forward would only put more lives at risk, not just of Maria’s men, but Laurence’s scholars as well. Neither of them wanted that, but at the same time, neither of them could return to their masters empty-handed.

When all of them reached the bottom of the lift, they proceeded onward. In the corridor that followed, they found no doorways along the walls, leaving them with nowhere to go but forward. After lifting open the door blocking their path, Maria led the others further into the labyrinth and soon, they found themselves in a large rectangular room, with pathways leading in all four directions. Aside from that, the room was empty, save for a few wooden crates and what looked to be coffins along the walls.

“Where do we even begin?”, she heard Matthias ask from behind her.

“That is the least of our worries.” Maria replied, stepping a bit further inside. “If the rest of this place is any indication, both of these paths will lead us to the same thing. What we need to…”

Suddenly, a loud crash echoed through the hall, followed by an equally loud scream of pain. Turning toward the source of the noise, Maria saw that Matthias was clutching his face and backing away from a small, bipedal beast, which had seemingly appeared out of nowhere.

“Matthias!”, cried Robert, moving in to attack the creature. With its element of surprise taken away, the beast was swiftly cut down, not even having time to defend itself against the enraged knight.

Meanwhile, Maria moved to check on Matthias, who was already being crowded by the others. “Are you alright?” The knight then took his hand off his face to reveal three bloody scratches across his face, which thankfully had missed his eyes.

“I’ll live,” he replied, looking down on his bloodstained glove before turning to the now dead beast. “Damn thing came out of nowhere.”

It took only a moment of inspection to see that this wasn’t exactly true. Lying around the beast were various pieces of wood, which no doubt belonged to the coffin that had been by the wall just moments before. “It was hiding in the coffin. They must be cleverer than we gave them credit for,” she instructed.

“You don’t say.” Matthias said as he stood back up to his full height. “Now, what else is hiding down here?”

Mere seconds later, they heard snarls coming from the hallway on their right, as well as incomprehensible shouting from the one directly in front of them. And on top of it all was the familiar tolling of a bell – two of them.

“You just had to open your mouth, didn’t you?” Robert complained as he prepared himself for the inevitable struggle to come.

Soon, the enemies started pouring into the room: beasts similar to the one that had attacked Robert from the right and hooded humanoids from the front, some of which were carrying burning staff and others wielding cleavers, with the latter ones being a tinted red. Acting quickly, Maria formulated a plan of attack.

“Hold your ground!” she ordered, drawing her blades and waiting to meet the horde head on.

When they finally came, Maria and her men each focused on an individual opponent, primarily focusing on the ones they knew would stay down. For her part, she engaged the staff wielding watchers, evading their wild swings before slicing their wooden weapon in two, leaving them defenseless as she moved in for the kill. Once they were dead, she was left to contend with the summoned fiends, who she knew would be reborn shortly after death.

“Leon, Robert, Harald: with me! The rest of you, stay with the scholars!”

The summoned knights quickly finished whatever battle they were fighting and followed Maria into the following room, while the others crowded in front of the path they had come from; even with his wound, Matthias quickly established himself as the first line of defense.

After fighting through the newest wave of summoned warriors, Maria and her men crowded into the room from where they came. Quickly scanning the room, she spotted the first of the bell maidens, who was situated on the furthest end of the room; the second one was nowhere to be seen, but they could hear a bell coming from further up. Upon spotting them, the ghoulish woman prepared to ring her bell once again…only for Maria to draw her pistol and fire it at her, hitting her in the chest and causing her to slump up against the wall, perishing soon after.

Despite the maiden’s death, there were still several enemies running down the stairwells on either side of the room. “You two, go up that way.” Maria said to Leon and Harald, pointing to the staircase on the left.

Without a word, the two of them ran off, allowing her and Robert to take the right-hand side. By splitting up, they forced their attackers to themselves split their numbers in order to defend both pathways. In their case, they were blocked by another watcher at the top of the stairwell, who opted to toss explosive bottles at them while two spiders moved in to attack them. This turned out to be of little use, as the two knights each dispatched one of the spiders before running up the stairs towards the hooded figure, who was unable to even draw his cleaver before Maria ran him through with her saber.

“Go, Robert!” she called out, prompting him to run past her towards the bell-maiden. Off to the right, her two other men had to deal with a similar situation, with Leon dealing with the summoner’s guard while Harald joined Matthias in his attack.

As the maiden raised her bell into the air, Robert reached her and with a single swing of his blade, severed the arm that was holding it, giving her but a moment to wail and reach for the bleeding stump before Harold decapitated her, leaving her body to collapse to the ground surrounded by blood and body parts.

Once they were sure that the room was clear, Maria went to reunite with her men, who were still looking down at the maiden’s mangled corpse. “If I have to hear the sound of a bell one more bloody time…” said Harald, clearly irritated.

“If we do, we will overcome it,” Maria assured him. “They’re trying to wear us down. Do not let them.”

As she spoke, she started making her way towards a door on the right-hand side of the room. If their previous encounters with the summoners were anything to go by, they were guarding an important area. Squatting down in order to get a grip on the bottom of the door, Maria once again attempted to lift it up…only for it not to budge. After trying and failing to get it open the usual way, she stood back up and attempted to push it open instead, thinking that she might’ve missed something, only to come up short yet again.

“Is something wrong?”, she heard Robert say from behind her.

“It’s sealed shut.” Maria replied, finally ceasing her efforts.

“It is? Out of all the gates in this place, why is this one sealed?” His question was a pertinent one, and one that had only one possible answer.

“There must be something beyond it that they don’t want us to reach,” Maria said before turning back towards her men. “And I think I know what.”

Upon hearing this, their expressions turned to awe. “You mean…” Leon started to say, but didn’t finish his sentence, not that he needed to.

“Yes,” she confirmed. “We’re close. I can feel it.”

…

Back at the start of the dungeon, Laurence and his scholars continued to wait under the guard of the remaining knights. They had only caught glimpses of what had transpired ahead of them before Lady Maria and some of her men continued onwards, leaving them behind. Despite the ever-real danger of their situation, his colleagues appeared more impatient than anything else.

“It’s gotten quiet now,” Gehrman soon noted. Sure enough, the sounds of battle seemed to have ceased, but Lady Maria was still nowhere in sight.

After a few moments, Laurence decided to go up to their guardians. “Should we really still be waiting here?”, he asked Matthias, who maintained a readied composure despite the still-bleeding wound on his face.

“If they had fallen, we would know. We wait until she returns,” Matthias replied, turning his gaze towards where she went. He had sounded determined that his captain was still alive, which also meant that Laurence was unlikely to convince him to go forward.

Just as he was about to return, they spotted movement opposite them. As the knights relaxed their posture and moved away from their posts, Laurence spotted Lady Maria approaching them, determination in her step. Seeing this, he looked back at his awaiting scholars and motioned for them to follow, quickly going to join the knights at the center of the room.

As they got closer, Lady Maria took notice of them. “I trust that the danger has passed?”, he asked her.

“Indeed. Let us continue on,” She replied without a hint of hesitation, turning towards the passageway on the right-hand side of the room.

“Are you sure? What about…” “We go forward.” Lady Maria responded swiftly and decisively, not even turning back to look at him.

Despite his hesitance, Laurence knew he wasn’t in a position to argue. “Of course,” he soon said.

Without another word from anyone, they proceeded into the following corridor. As he walked just a few steps behind Lady Maria, Laurence couldn’t help but feel…concerned. The pain of losing one of her men still hung over her and already, her decisions were becoming increasingly rash, not to mention zealous. She no doubt wished to avenge Emil’s death or at the very least, ensure that it had not been in vain, but a part of him feared that it would only yield even graver consequences.

It wasn’t long until the captain brought them to a stop once again, cautiously entering the proceeding room, only for her guard to seemingly drop as she gazed around her. “What is it, Captain?” Matthias asked, going over to join her and similarly being entranced.

Seeing all this, Laurence broke away from the group and walked to Lady Maria’s side to see what had so caught her attention…only to be awestruck at what lay before him.

Carved into the cave was a ruined, yet still impressive temple, brilliantly illuminated by countless burning torches. High rising pillars rose from the ground, surrounded by innumerable tombstones and beyond that, countless bones and discarded weapons, the remains of warriors long past. As the rest of the knights and scholars entered the room, they also looked around in wonder, with Gehrman in particular making a long-winded whistle as he took it all in.

“Now, what could this be for, I wonder?”, Gehrman said as he came to stand just off to Laurence’s side, his question mirroring his own thoughts. The grandeur of this room compared to others they had visited suggested that it must’ve held some significance to the residents, but why?

“Get down!”

Suddenly, Laurence was swept off his feet and pulled off to the side. Before he could realize what was happening, he heard a loud explosion, as well as felt a sudden rush of heat coming close to where he had just been standing. Opening his eyes, he found Lady Maria looking down at him, having moved him out of the way and shielded him from the blast.

Before he could get over his shock, they heard another explosion coming from above them, which sent several sizable boulders falling down on the gathered scholars and knights.

“Back, back, all of you!” Matthias called as he herded the other scholars and knights back the way they came, but soon, the falling rocks crashed onto the ground, forcing him to move out of the way to avoid being crushed.

“No!” Laurence cried, rising to his feet and trying to run towards the site of the crash, only for Lady Maria to pull him back.

“Professor, wait! You must stay close to me!”

Another explosion rang out behind them as she guided him behind the pillars, putting him against one before peeking back out. “Hello! Hello, is anyone still out there!”

“I’m here, Captain!” Matthias called back, his voice seemingly coming from the other side of the room.

“Captain! Captain, can you hear me? We’re going to get you out of there!” Came a second, muffled voice, which sounded like it belonged to Robert. Sparing a glance, Laurence realized that it was coming from the direction of the entrance, which he could see now was blocked by a large pile of rubble.

“Belay that! We’ll find our own way out!” Lady Maria ordered. “Did everyone make it?!” 

“No one else is missing as far as I can see!” Robert called back in reply.

“What about my colleagues?! Are they safe?” It was Laurence who called this time, his worry superseding any logic.

“Laurence?!” Micolash called back in reply. “Laurence, is that you? If it is, everyone is…” he suddenly stopped, as if realizing something.

“Laurence, Gehrman isn’t here! Is he with you?! 

Upon hearing this, a chill ran up Laurence’s spine, his eyes set on the pile of rubble blocking the entrance. “Gehrman?! GEHRMAN!!” he called out.

“Yes?”

Both Laurence and Maria sharply turned to look behind them, finding Gehrman standing with his hands folded behind his back, with barely a hint of worry on his face. “Can I help you with something?” It wasn’t entirely clear which one of them he was posing this question to, but it was Lady Maria who recovered from her shock first.

“Yes. Stay with the professor and keep close behind me. We’re getting out of here.”

“Of course,” said Gehrman. “But I’m afraid it’s not going to be that simple.”

Very soon, they heard footsteps and yells coming from the opposite end of the room, after which a group of short, bone-thin Pthumerians poured into the room. As Lady Maria moved in front of them and prepared to attack, Laurence spotted what looked like a ball of fire coming towards them or more rather, the pillar they were hiding behind.

“Watch it!” Gehrman cried as he moved Laurence out from behind the pillar. Thankfully, Lady Maria managed to hear this as well and cleared the area before the fireball hit the pillar, immediately destroying it and sending rubble crumbling down. Immediately afterwards, she was forced to engage the Pthumerians, with Matthias running in to aid her soon after. Amidst all this chaos, Laurence was able to spot something in the cloisters above them; a brilliant white cloak and above it, a small flickering fire, which soon began to grow in size.

“We’d best keep moving.” Laurence then told Gehrman, who quickly caught on to what he was planning. “I think that would be wise.”

The two of them then started making their way across the battlefield, moving just fast enough that they were able to avoid the spells cast at them, but also staying within their sight to ensure they continued to fire. Not that they would’ve been able to avoid them regardless; as it happened, there were two sorcerers stationed on either side of the temple, granting them an eagle’s view of the grounds below. But with the fireballs focused on them, the two knights were able to fight their foes without any interference, whom they dispatched in short order.

“Come on!” Lady Maria then called to them, prompting the two of them to run and rejoin her.

The four of them then ran into the following room, finding two narrow stairwells that took them to the upper part of the temple. Before they had even stepped out onto the suspended walkway, Laurence had formulated a plan. “There’s one of them on each side! I suggest the two of you split up!” He called to the knights, who quickly got the message.

“You heard him! Go!” Lady Maria said to her subordinate, who dutifully nodded and ran off to the right, while his captain went left. Laurence was just about to follow before he felt Gehrman’s hand on his shoulder.

“I wouldn’t bother, sir. You’ve done more than enough,” the older scholar told him.

Deciding to take his advice, Laurence instead watched as the two knights descended on the two sorcerers. With each one being distracted by an assailant, they were unable to defend each-other from a range, which seemed to be where they were most dangerous. This was soon proven when they were forced to confront the knights head on, as they were dispatched in a matter of seconds.

Once it seemed that the coast was clear, Laurence motioned for Gehrman to follow him and together, they went over to join Lady Maria, who stood over the body of one of the sorcerers. His white cloak had been soaked with blood and his wooden staff lay uselessly by its side, but what stood out to Laurence were the curved horns that jutted out from beneath its hood. And it seemed that Gehrman had much the same curiosity, for he crouched down just beside its body.

“Hmm, interesting,” he uttered, grasping one of its horns and lifting up its head to get a better look at what was hidden under the hood, revealing a twisted, almost demonic visage. “Beasts don’t tend to have horns like these. What makes you so special?” Gehrman said, seemingly wondering aloud.

“He was a cleric once.” Lady Maria revealed, prompting both him and Laurence to turn to look at her.   

“A cleric, you say?” Laurence repeated.

“Yes. But that is all I will say.” Somehow, he knew that it was more that it was all she could say. Any more information would reveal something that Queen Annalise didn’t want them to know. Yet even so, one thing was clear. This creature’s status in life, and what he chose to do with it, likely led him to this point.

And for whatever reason, he found the sight before him rather…foreboding.

Shortly after, they heard Matthias’ voice. “Captain, there’s another door over here! Do we go through it or no?”

“Wait, Matthias! I’ll be right there!” Upon saying this, she turned back to them.

“The two of you go. The door just behind us will lead you safely back to the others. Wait for us until we return.”

“As you wish. Best of luck.” It was Gehrman who spoke this time, with Laurence merely nodding his understanding to her shortly afterwards. Her eyes soon fell to the floor and Lady Maria turned away from him and started walking in Matthias’s direction, leaving the two of them behind.

As much as she was clearly trying to hide it, Laurence couldn’t help but notice a change in her. Before, every word she spoke had been delivered with conviction, but now, they were hesitant at best. Not that there was anything that he could do about it. She had made her choice, after all.

Once she was a fair distance away, Gehrman stood back up. “Now then, Master Laurence. Shall we?” he asked.

The two of them then made their way into the short corridor behind them, which as Lady Maria had said led to a wooden door, one which looked to operate the same way as all the others they’d encountered. As Laurence tried to think of how they’d get it opened, Gehrman walked by him.

“Please, allow me,” he said, coming to a stop just in front of the door. Before Laurence could question what he was doing, Gehrman crouched down and started to lift it up, getting it open with minimal difficulty. Once he was finished, he dusted off his hands and turned back towards him, standing aside to make way for him.

“After you, sir.”

Once he got over his surprise, Laurence made his way through the doorway, with Gehrman following just behind him. The act of lifting such a weight wouldn’t have been too impressive, had it not been for the fact that Lady Maria had somewhat struggled in doing the same, even though her strength was clearly beyond that of an average human. Furthermore, it made him hearken back to Gehrman’s momentary disappearance mere minutes before; somehow, everyone had simply lost sight of him the moment the chaos began, only for him to reappear completely unscathed. How had he done it?

“You’ve gotten rather quiet. Is something on your mind?” Gehrman soon asked him, breaking him out of his thoughts.

“Don’t worry about me, Gehrman. I’m fine.” Laurence replied.

“Very well.”, he said, making Laurence think that it was the end of their exchange. “May I ask then how your ‘meeting’ went?”

Upon hearing this, the professor came to a stop, turning his head to see that Gehrman now stood a few paces behind him. “It was… productive.”

“So, I see.” Gehrman replied. “But was the result you reached desirable?”

Several moments went by and still, Laurence wasn’t sure of how to respond. Instead, he decided to answer his question with another question.

“Tell me, Gehrman. Do you think what we’re doing here is worth giving your life for?”

A brief silence followed, with Gehrman appearing visibly surprised by what he heard. “That is a rather hefty question, sir.”, he eventually said.

“Perhaps so,” Laurence acknowledged. “But I believe it is one worth asking.”

“Hmm…” another pause followed before Gehrman spoke again.

“Well, I cannot say that dying sounds all too appealing, but that is something we must all come to terms with sooner or later. Unless, of course, such concepts were to simply cease to be relevant.”

Laurence looked off to the side. “Yes, indeed.”, he said. “But who is to know when – or even if - such a thing will ever be possible?”

“I cannot say for certain. I doubt anyone can.” Gehrman replied. “But so long as that possibility exists, then people will pursue it, no matter how faint it might be.”

“I know. But what good are visions of a promised land if the prophet does not know how to reach it…or whether his disciples will make it there?”

At first, Laurence was prepared for Gehrman to protest his words – to explain to him the reasons why their research was the only way that such a fantastical thing could be possible, just as Master Willem had done so many times before. But instead, he didn’t do anything. No, instead, he simply…smiled.

“You are a fascinating fellow, Master Laurence. Nothing at all like what I expected.” he said as he started walking towards him, stopping just beside him.

“But to answer your question, people will follow whatever – or rather, whoever - they think makes the most sense. And they’re always open to new ideas.”

With that, Gehrman continued on his way, leaving Laurence alone with his thoughts. The elder scholar’s words had sounded both like genuine advice and something of a warning at the same time, as it probably should’ve been. Master Willem had a vision, yes, but he did not yet know how to achieve said vision…and neither did Laurence. Regardless of where it would take them in the end, there was but one, clear path forward.

For now, at least.

…

Shortly after parting with Laurence and Gehrman, Maria moved to open the newly discovered door, allowing her and Matthias to step inside. Within, they found a long, seemingly empty room, their view almost totally obscured by the darkness and the ever-shifting sands. Yet despite that, they were able to spot a faint light on the other end of the room, which could only mean they had found the place that the clerics had been guarding.

The two knights cautiously started making their way toward the light, not being foolish enough to think that the room was unguarded. Surely enough, Maria was soon able to hear a raspy voice amidst the wind, which brought the two of them to a stop. As she tried to pinpoint the source of the noise, she heard Matthias sigh in apparent annoyance.

“I’ll deal with this,” he said, taking a few steps in front of her.

“Matthias…” “Just…wait.”

Maria watched as Matthias continued to brazenly walk forward, which seemed to finally alert the room’s guardian. Almost without warning, an almost ghoulish figure appeared from the shifting sand, charging at them at an alarming speed. Yet, despite this, he kept on walking, showing not an ounce of fear. The instant that their attacker raised his sickles into the air, Matthias brought his weapon up and fired off a shot, the force of the impact being enough to knock the Pthumerian off balance and force him to his knees. As he crumpled, Matthias immediately swung his blade and took his attacker’s head clean off, continuing on without even sparing a glance at its body.

“Done. Now, let’s go.”

It took Maria a few moments before she chose to follow, walking past the Pthumerian’s headless body and towards what he had been guarding; the lever that would unlock the gate to what could only be the final portion of this labyrinth. Despite reaching it before her, Matthias stood off to the side and waited for her to join him, seemingly wanting her to do the honors. Yet when she came to stand in front of it, Maria found herself hesitating to pull it.

“Well?” Upon hearing this, she turned to look at Matthias, the scar across his face still seeping blood. After holding his gaze for a few more seconds, Maria sighed and turned back towards the lever, finally deciding to pull it.

“Captain, are you alright?” Matthias asked her, a clear sense of concern in his voice.

“I’m fine, Matthias,” she assured him. “We should get back to the others.” With that, Maria turned around to go back the way they came.

“What did Professor Laurence want of you?”

Maria stopped in her tracks, but didn’t turn to face him. “Nothing, he…” At first, she wanted to simply leave it at that and move on, but she knew it wouldn’t be enough to satisfy him. And she also knew that the only reason the professor had gotten a chance to see her was because Matthias allowed him to.

“He gave me a choice. To call off our mission and avoid any more…potential casualties.”

“And yet, here we are.” Matthias pointed out after a brief silence. “Why is that?”

“Her Majesty’s will must be done.” Was all Maria said in response.

“Much to your dismay?” Despite framing it as a question, she could tell that Matthias already knew the answer. Once again, she found herself unable to reply, leaving him to take a few steps towards her.

“Cap…Lady Maria, you mustn’t feel responsible for what happened. Emil – no, all of us knew that such a fate could befall us…and we made peace with that. Such is our…”

“Don’t say that!” she finally turned towards Matthias, who was visibly surprised by her forceful words. “You’re not my servant, Matthias. None of you are. You are all as much a knight as I and... they should never be seen as disposable.”

Silence settled over the room as the two knights stared at each-other, neither seeming sure of what to say. “My lady, I…”

Before he could finish his sentence, Maria walked back up to him and placed a firm hand on his shoulder. “There’s no need to call me that. Not here.”, she told him. “I am no more worthy of titles or accolades than you or any of our fellows. I only wish that Her Majesty will be able to realize that herself.”

She knew that she shouldn’t have been voicing such views, but she found it difficult to care. Besides, she trusted that Matthias would ensure that what was said between them would not leave this room, as he had done many times before. And why wouldn’t she trust him? He was her pupil. Her comrade.

Her friend.

Eventually, Matthias finally managed to find his tongue. “And you think us delivering her a certain prize would do that?” he asked.

“That is my hope.”, she replied.

For the first time in what felt like ages, Matthias smiled. “That remains to be seen, I’m afraid. But, in any case, there remains a duty for us to fulfill. And fulfill it we shall.”

After a few more moments of silence, Maria nodded her head and the two of them turned towards the exit. “And listen, no matter what happens, I want you to remember one thing.” Matthias said to her as they walked.

“And what’s that?”, asked Maria.

“That we do not fight for you because we are forced to, but because we choose to.”

As she looked over at her fellow knight, Maria’s lips curled into a soft smile. Words could not begin to describe how proud she was of him; of the noble warrior he had become. And what he likely would never be recognized for simply by the nature of his birth. But with any luck, his valor, and those of his fellow knights would soon become clear to all.

...

Chapter Text

Shortly after they reunited, the knights and the scholars collectively agreed to continue onward. The vast majority of them had been kept away from danger and had plenty of time to recover what little strength they may have lost beforehand, making any further respite pointless. And so, with Laurence and Lady Maria at the helm, they set out once again past the latest gate that had been blocking their path.

No one said a word as they made their way into a grand corridor, which just as all the others before it was devoid of life. But the further they made their way inside, they quickly came to realize that there were no additional paths they could take, which came as something of a surprise. Once this became clear, everyone’s eyes settled on a rather ominous looking tunnel just around the corner.

“Well, only one way to go,” said Laurence.

“So it would seem.” Lady Maria replied before moving ahead of him, her remaining knights quickly following suit.

With their vanguard in front of them, Laurence led his followers towards the tunnel, where they found a stairwell that took them downwards. The walls around them were overgrown with roots, which spread from the ceiling all the way down along the walls. Yet despite this decay, there was a sense of grandeur - and even more so, finality – as they made their way down. And if the preceding temple was any indication, Laurence believed that they had just stumbled across something truly extraordinary.

At the end of the stairwell, they found yet another stone gate, only this one seemed…bigger than the ones that came before, with carvings of various hooded figures being etched into it. Seemingly taking note of this herself, Maria made her way over to it, with the rest of them staying silent as they watched her cautiously approach it. First, she put her ear to it in order to listen inside and after this, she started to slowly push one of its doors, opening it just enough so she could peer inside.

“What?”, Laurence heard her whisper to herself, seemingly in disbelief.

“My lady?”, he said just loudly enough to get her attention, which prompted her to turn back to them.

“There’s…there’s nothing in there.”, she revealed, causing something of a stunned silence to settle over the group.

“What do you mean there’s nothing in there?” Micolash stepped up and asked.

“I mean that it’s completely devoid of life. There’s nothing standing guard.” Lady Maria sounded genuinely shocked by this, which made Laurence rather curious.

“And do you mean to say there’s something in there worth guarding?”

Lady Maria did not answer his question. Instead, she simply stood in silence, appearing to be struggling to even maintain eye contact with him. But in doing so, she gave him the clearest answer he could’ve asked for.

“Open the gate, Lady Maria,” he asked – no, demanded of her.

“I cann…” “Open it. Now.” Laurence interrupted her, taking a step forward as he did.

Lady Maria’s men tensed up, some of them even grasping the handles of their weapons, but this didn’t deter Laurence, who continued to stare her down. Eventually, she waved her hand in order to get her men to stand down and turned back towards the gate in order to push it the rest of the way open, not saying a word the entire time.

Once she was finished, Laurence walked over to her, making his way right past her as she stood at the entrance, much to her shock. “What do you think you’re…” she started to say, but he merely put a hand up to silence her, which surprisingly seemed to work. But truth be told, he had hardly heard what she had said, being far too fixated on his new surroundings.

He stood at the tip of a vast, circular area, somewhat resembling a coliseum. Several enormous chandeliers hung from the ceiling far above and countless statues of hooded figures, all holding lanterns, lined the walls, illuminating the vast open area. And at the center of it all, a large structure stood amidst the blowing sand, the only major landmark amidst the otherwise empty room.

“This…this can’t be it, can it? Surely, we must’ve missed something.” Laurence heard Micolash say as he himself entered, followed closely by the rest of the scholars.

“We didn’t,” said Caryll. “But this room…it holds significance. Great significance.”

Laurence turned back towards her, finding that she once again seemed to be in that state of lucid delirium he had been in during their time in the shrine. “How, Caryll? Significant, how?” he asked her with some haste, worrying that it could fade at any moment. At first, Caryll didn’t reply, but she soon pointed a figure towards the center of the room – towards the monument.

“It has been blessed.”

Suddenly, Laurence could hear that strange voice in his head again and more clearly than ever. Almost subconsciously, he started to make his way towards the monument, with the voice becoming clearer and clearer the closer he got. Soon, he could see something resting upon it; an old, pot-like chalice, with tendrils of white mist rising from within it. And as he finally came to stand over it, he peered to see what it contained.

Blood.

But rather than being repulsed by this gruesome sight, Laurence found himself drawn to it like a moth to flame. Because somehow, he knew that this wasn’t any ordinary blood. And so, he slowly reached for it with his hand, an almost unstoppable temptation taking hold of him…only for something to grab him by the wrist.

The professor’s eyes darted to his left, finding Lady Maria glaring at him. Somehow, he hadn’t even heard her approach. “That’s far enough, professor. Step away from the altar.”, she commanded, her voice as firm as her grip on his wrist.

Several tense seconds went by and still, she did not let go of him. Once it became clear that she wasn’t going to relent, Laurence slightly backed away, after which she finally released her hold on him and took his place before the altar. Once she peered inside, her eyes did not leave it and even from his position behind her, even after she should’ve been sure what it was she had found.

“At last. We have found it…” said Lady Maria, a sense of triumph in her words.

“And just what is it we’ve ‘found’, exactly?” Laurence asked, finally drawing her eyes away from the blood.

“That is no concern of yours.”, she said in a dismissive tone. “Oh, but it is.” Laurence quickly replied, crossing his arms as he did.

“Not anymore.” Lady Maria then stood to her full height, turning fully towards him. “This expedition is over. We’re leaving.”

There was a clear sense of force behind her words, which was amplified further by her demeanor and the glare she cast down at him. But even so, Laurence was not swayed and kept his eyes focused squarely on hers.

“No, not just yet.”

Somewhere off to the side, Gehrman started to approach him. “Master Laurence, let’s not…” he started to say, only to fall silent at a mere raise of his hand.

“First, you need to explain yourself. What is that supposed to be?” Rather than answering his question, Lady Maria took another step towards him, maintaining her cold glare as she towered over him.

“Do not…test me.”, she warned, her voice low and threatening.

Before things could escalate further, there was a sudden loud crash somewhere in the distance, causing everyone present to turn towards the source. Mere seconds later another crash shook the room, this time being powerful enough to shake the entire room, causing earth and a few small chunks of rubble to fall from the ceiling.

“Was that an earthquake?” Micolash asked.

“No,” said Gehrman. “Something much worse.”

What followed was several more violent crashes, each one coming in quicker succession than the last. Turning away from Laurence, Lady Maria drew her weapons and stood at the ready, prompting her men to do the same. And then, for a moment, the crashes seemed to cease, only for a part of the wall to burst open, causing bricks to fly and the surrounding pillars to crumble.

As scholar and knight alike looked on in unease, sparks of blue light could be seen behind the cloud of dust that formed around the collapsed wall. Then, a beastly palm grasped the edge of the hole, just as a pair of blood-red, glowing eyes became visible in the darkness.

“Matthias, get a sample.” Lady Maria ordered, much to the knight’s shock.

“But…” “DO IT!”, she yelled, turning away from the scene for only a moment. Without another argument, Matthias ran towards the altar, leaving his comrades to prepare for the incoming threat. Horror gripped Laurence as an enormous, bipedal beast started to enter the room, breaking away even more of the wall in order to fit through the hole it had made.

And the moment it was free, it charged.

“Hold it back!!” Lady Maria called out just before she and the rest of her men rushed to meet the beast head on. Once it looked like they were close enough, it swiped at them with its enormous claws, which would’ve surely cut them all too pieces had they not split their line in two, leaving it to cut at empty air.

“Now! Attack!” The knights then moved to encircle the beast, focusing their efforts on the beast’s limbs and undefended back. Yet despite the onslaught it faced, it hardly seemed phased by their attacks and angrily swung its fist to the side, forcing a few of them back. Not even a second later, the beast chased after them and assaulted them with a series of violent punches, which thankfully missed and instead only connected the ground in front of it. However, each blow shook the Earth beneath its feet, to the point where even Laurence – who stood several feet away – found himself stumbling as a result.

“Laurence, what do we do?” Norbert soon asked, finally drawing his attention away from the battle unfolding in front of them. His gaze then darted from his colleagues, then back to the rampaging beast and finally, towards the altar, where Matthias was still attempting to retrieve a sample of the strange blood.

It was clear that Lady Maria wasn’t trying to protect them, but rather to buy him enough time to finish with his task. What about it could’ve possibly made them willing to risk their lives simply to retrieve a few measly drops? But now wasn’t the time to be asking such questions.

“Run! RUN!!” he shouted to his fellow scholars, herding them all back towards the exit. The ground continued to shake as they fled, but even so, Laurence stayed beside the door and hurried everyone along in order to ensure they escaped. Soon, only he and Gehrman were left, who suddenly stopped just a few steps away from the door and turned towards where Lady Maria and her knights were still fighting for their lives.

“Gehrman, come on! It’s time to go!” he called out to him, which finally seemed to snap him out of it. Once the older scholar was safely through, Laurence moved to follow after him.

“I have it!” Matthias suddenly cried, causing the professor to stop and look back to see him holding a vial in his hands. Just as he did, the beast finally took notice of the young knight and broke away from his comrades, charging directly towards him.

It cleared the distance between shockingly quickly, with Matthias only having a split second to react and move out of the way before the beast swung its fist at him. Thankfully, it missed him and instead only managed to hit the altar, which it destroyed the moment its fist made contact with it. As it crumpled into rubble, the chalice fell from its resting place, causing the blood to spill out onto the floor; surprisingly, it itself remained intact.

Still eyeing Matthias, the beast snarled and prepared to attack again, leaving him to draw his sword with his free hand.

“NO!!”

The creature suddenly roared in pain, raising its head up high just before Lady Maria’s arm wrapped around its neck. Sharply pulling her dagger out of the beast’s hide – having used it to give herself the momentum to climb up – she held on for dear life, trying her best to steer it away from Matthias.

“ALL OF YOU, RUN! NOW!”, she cried out to her men, who all seemed too stunned to act.

“What?!” Matthias said in shock.

“JUST GO! THAT’S AN ORDER!”

Even with this, Lady Maria’s men continued to watch as their captain struggled with the beast, attempting to drive her dagger into its head or neck as it tried to either shake her off or grab her, both of which constantly caused her to miss her mark. In particular, Laurence noticed Matthias clenching his fists, struggling to choose a course of action.

“Follow me! Quick!”, he eventually called to his comrades, who themselves broke out of their frozen state and started running towards the exit. Rather than running himself, Laurence remained where he was and urged them along, knowing that if he didn’t, they were likely to turn right back around.

Once the last of the knights was through the doorway, Laurence prepared to follow them…just as the beast roared to the heavens. He looked back just in time to see Lady Maria rolling across the floor, soon managing to get herself in a crouching position as her eyes snapped back to her foe, who didn’t spare a second in chasing after her again. But unlike before, its fur now crackled with lightning and its fury seemed all the more pronounced.

As he watched Lady Maria struggle to evade her adversary, Laurence prepared to call out to her – to tell her to retreat. But before a word could get past his lips, she looked in his direction, causing them to catch in his throat. In the handful of seconds their eyes met, he saw regret, resolve and finally, resignation.

And when she looked away from him in order to continue evading her beastly adversary, he realized she had no intention of leaving.

Fighting back his own reluctance, Laurence finally fled the room, going up the staircase and back through the hallway. Very soon, he was approaching the lift that brought them there, finding Matthias, as well as Gehrman and Micolash waiting for him.

“Master Laurence!” Gehrman called as he got closer. “Oh, thank heavens. Are you alright?”

“I’m fine,'' he replied. “Where are the others?”

“We sent them ahead,” said Micolash. “We were just waiting for you and...”

Once they saw that Laurence was alone, the corridor fell silent. Soon, Matthias took a step towards him, a confused look on his face. “Lady Maria…where is she?”, he asked.

Laurence hesitated, despite knowing that whatever he told him would elicit the same reaction. Before he could properly answer, however, he heard the sound of shifting chains, looking over just in time to see the lift come to a stop just in front of them.

“That’s our cue to leave,” said Micolash. “Come on!”

Just as the four of them started to make their way towards the lift, a tremor ran through the ground, causing Laurence to catch himself on a nearby wall to avoid falling over. It had felt like the very foundations of the labyrinth were being shaken, but thankfully, it hadn’t been powerful enough to dislodge the lift. Not yet, anyway.

“We need to get out of here. Before the whole damn place comes down on us.” Laurence said, continuing towards the lift while he still could.   

Very soon, he noticed that Matthias hadn’t followed them and was instead looking back the way they came. “Maria…” he uttered in horror.

“We’re running out of time! Hurry!” Laurence called to him, drawing his attention back to them. After a moment of hesitation, he joined them on the lift, allowing them to descend upwards with the push of a button. One nerve-racking ride later, where they were likely to have been sent plummeting into the depths at any moment, they ran through the room in which the poisonous beast’s corpse still lay and into the following hallway…where they found the rest of the knights looking back with terrified expressions.

“What’re you doing? Go!” Laurence said to them, but it was no use. They remained frozen in place, their eyes wide in worry.

“Wait,” said Gehrman. “Wait, what’s happened to your captain?”

“She…she stayed behind.”, answered Robert.

“She did what?!” Before anyone could reply to Gehrman, the ground beneath them shook once again, somehow even more powerful than before. This could’ve meant one of two things; Lady Maria was still alive or the beast was now continuing its rampage. Neither possibility boded well.

“What do we do?” asked Leon. “She’ll die if we leave her.”

“She won’t.” Everyone’s attention suddenly turned to Matthias, who was looking down at the vial he had collected. Soon after, he raised his head and looked towards his comrades, tightly gripping the vial as he did.

“Because we won’t.”

Laurence immediately deduced what Matthias was planning. “Oh, no,” he said. “You heard what Lady Maria said. You…”

“I know…what she said!”, the knight snapped back.

“Then you know she wouldn’t want you to get yourselves killed. And if you go back now, that is exactly what will happen.”

Despite Laurence’s attempts to reason with him, Matthias’s determination didn’t seem to falter. With an almost disturbing calmness, the young knight walked over to him and took his hand before forcefully placing the vial of blood he had been carrying in his palm.

“Then so be it.”

Laurence looked on in stunned silence as Matthias let go of his hand and turned away from him, his eyes focused squarely on the path they had just taken. After a few seconds, he drew his blade and looked back at his comrades, a fierce determination dancing in his eyes.

“To the captain!”

The rest of the knights soon drew their blades. “TO THE CAPTAIN!” they all cried, charging down the corridor and back towards the lift. Laurence continued to stare in their direction far after they disappeared around the corner and when their battle cry became distant, after which he looked down at the vial that now rested in his hands.

The very thing that they had come here to retrieve and he had just given it away. Just like that.

“Fools.” Micolash said from behind him.

“Fools is correct,” Gehrman replied. “The foe they face is beyond any of them.”

Much to Laurence’s shock, he suddenly walked past him. “Gehrman?”, he said, but the older scholar didn’t stop, causing him to start following him. “Gehrman, where are you going?!”

“The same place as them, Master Laurence. And for the same reason.”, he finally replied. “Do not follow me.”

“Are you insane? You said it yourself; they have no hope of defeating that thing! What makes you…”

As Laurence spoke, Gehrman started to reach into the bag on his back. Then, in the blink of an eye, he pulled out an enormous curved blade, which he held off to the side as Laurence and Micolash looked on in shocked silence. A few seconds later, he turned his head back to look at them, his eyes hidden beneath the brims of his hat.

“Trust me. I won’t be long.”

....

Chapter Text

Back at the edge of the labyrinth, Maria remained locked in a vicious struggle with the beast, desperately trying to find an opening amidst its relentless pursuit. In its fury, it had revealed the true extent of its power; it was as if it was the embodiment of Loran’s harsh environment, bending its humid air and ever-present clouds to its whim. Every slash of its claws came with the force of hurricane, every strike to the ground caused the very Earth to tremble. And through it all, Maria’s blade left only minor scars, unable to pierce its thick hide.

Yet in spite of this, she fought on. By now, her men should’ve gotten themselves to safety, but the same could not be said for her. Regardless of if she fled now or not, this monster would run her down and when it did, there would be no hope of survival. But at the very least, she would know that Matthias and the others had made it out. And that even if their heroic deeds went unrecognized, they would live to fight another day.

She wasn’t losing anyone else.

As the beast slammed its fists onto the ground in front of it, causing a burst of lightning to erupt, Maria once again moved out of the way, but only barely. Upon clearing some distance, she struggled to stay upright, exhausted from her ordeal. As she attempted to catch her breath, she stared the beast down, who itself was surprisingly refraining from attacking her. Perhaps she had managed to wear it down as well.

Tightly gripping her blades, Maria mustered every last bit of strength she had left and charged forward with a cry, intending to end this battle once and for all. But by the time she noticed the almost sneer-like expression on the beast’s face, it was too late.

Thrusting both of its fists forward, the beast created a powerful torrent of wind, which sent Maria flying like a leaf in a storm. Her back violently collided with the wall, causing pain to shoot through her body as she collapsed to the ground, dropping her weapons in the process. She only just managed to stay conscious however, lifting her head up and spotting the beast through her blurred vision. It was approaching her slowly and methodically, almost as if it were savoring every moment.

As it drew near, Maria tried in vain to reach for her weapon, finding it difficult to even crawl. By the time her fingers touched the edge of the handle, the beast was towering over her, drool falling from its mouth as it raised its fist overhead.

“There!!”

The beast turned its head just in time to be met with a barrage of gunfire, forcing it back a few steps before it put up its arms to defend itself. Once the bullets stopped coming, it roared in anger at its new foes, who soon met it head on. And even through the pain that racked her body and senses, Maria knew right away who these new challengers were.

“No…”

With Matthias leading the charge, her men forced the beast back, forming a defensive wall in front of her. “You foul creature!”, Matthias cried. “We will rid the world of you here and now!”

Maria tried to force herself to stand, but all it did was further exacerbate her pain. “Listen to me! You need to stop! Please!!” Yet her cries seemed to fall on deaf ears, for none of her men even turned to look at her. Their eyes were focused squarely on the monster in front of them. The monster that she was meant to have protected them from.

“Charge!!” Matthias soon cried, rallying the rest of their company with a collective battle cry, leaving Maria to watch helplessly as they ran to meet the beast head on, who started to raise one of its paws.

“WAIT!!!” Maria desperately called out…just as the beast slammed its fist into the ground.

In an instant, a powerful whirlwind formed, catching her men just as the got close and sending them flying high up into the air. In time, they each came crashing down onto the ground, ending up disoriented at best and horrifically injured at worst. Harold got the worst of it, hitting the ground neck first and falling almost completely motionless, save for a few helpless whimpers as his limbs continued to twitch…which were soon silenced when the beast stomped on his head, crushing it beneath its foot.

The whirlwind had thrown the knights into disarray, leaving them with no time to regroup before the beast started to pick them off one by one.

Leon had fallen the closest to Harold and had twisted his ankle as a result. Upon witnessing what had happened to his comrade, he tried to crawl towards his weapon, only for the beast to grab him by the leg and drag him towards it. Afterwards, it lifted him screaming into the air before driving its fangs into his neck, silencing him.

Having somewhat recovered, Frederick and Robert rushed in order to help him, attacking the beast from the side and catching it by surprise. Violently throwing Leon’s mutilated body to the side, it turned to fend off its two attackers, who continued to desperately fight despite their noticeable fatigue. Seemingly out of frustration, the beast slammed its paws on the ground, unleashing a burst of lightning that travelled across the floor. Both knights ended up being caught in the storm, their bodies violently convulsing as the lightning coursed through their bodies before collapsing to the ground motionless moments later, smoke rising from their charred corpses.

And through it all, Maria could only look in horror. Her mind was screaming at her to rise – to aid her struggling company. But no matter how hard she tried, she was unable to do so, the pain and fatigue she had sustained proving too much even for her. And so, she could only watch as her men were mindlessly slaughtered, all in an effort to protect her.

After seemingly felling the last of the knights, the beast once again turned its attention to her. No longer willing to wait, it charged towards her at full speed, bloodlust dancing in its eyes. Nearby, Matthias began to stir, seemingly having been knocked unconscious for a few moments. And once he saw the beast running towards Maria, he ran to intercept it, not even bothering to retrieve his weapon.

“STAY AWAY FROM HER!!!!” he cried as he ran into its path…just as it swiped at Maria with its claws.

Without so much as a cry, Matthias was sent rolling across the floor, coming to rest just a few feet away from Maria herself. “Matthias!” she finally cried, trying and failing to make her way to him.

By some miracle, he had survived and managed to bring himself up on his elbow, even as blood dripped down onto the floor from the deep gashes the beast had left on his chest. With noticeable difficulty, he managed to lift his head and met her eyes, just before weakly smiling at her.

“Ma…Maria…” he uttered as she looked back at him in shock, the first tears starting to form in her eyes.

Suddenly, the beast seized Matthias by the head and hoisted him up into the air as he struggled to escape its grip. Bringing its back back behind it, the beast thrust its claws straight through his torso and with one more violent pull, ripped him in half at the waist.

Maria found herself paralyzed, staring at Matthias’s bifurcated body. As if taking notice of her anguish, the beast lifted his upper half over its head and opened its mouth, eagerly drinking the blood that leaked out of his now motionless corpse. It was almost as if it was…mocking her. Mocking them.

Slowly, her shock and grief turned into a burning fury. “No…” she murmured between forceful breaths. “NO!!!”

Finally managing to overcome the pain that plagued her body, Maria forced herself to her feet, blindly charging towards the beast with her weapon in hand. In that moment, she didn’t care what happened next. All she knew was that she wanted this loathsome creature’s head served to her on a platter. With a cry, she raised her sword, preparing to drive it into its heart…

Only for her to be swatted away with a mere swing of its fist.

Once again being sent flying through the air, Maria landed several feet away, disoriented and utterly defeated. Finally letting go of Matthias and letting his body fall limply to the floor, the creature once again bore down on her, preparing to strike her down just as he had her men.

Her men. They were all gone. All because of her. Her weakness.

It was this thought that ran through Maria’s mind even as their killer towered over her and even then, she offered no further resistance, closing her eyes as she awaited the inevitable. After all, it served no purpose. She had failed.

SLASH!

An agonizing cry of pain echoed through the room as blood splattered across the floor, prompting Maria to open her eyes. The beast had stumbled back several steps and perhaps more strikingly was now missing the hand that it had been ready to attack her with, something that it was just as shocked by as her. And standing between them was a tall, looming figure, wielding an enormous blade. At first, Maria was convinced that it was Death itself, but very soon, recognition dawned on her, followed closely by shock.

Standing before her was Gehrman, who now took on an entirely different presence from before. The sight of what had once been a strange, somewhat unimposing man now sent a shiver down her spine and even made the seemingly unyielding beast cower.

“Not so amusing now, is it?”, Gehrman said to the beast as he started to approach it, not showing an ounce of fear. Then, in the blink of an eye, he attached his blade to a crooked staff on his back, which combined to form an imposing scythe. “Don’t worry. It’ll all be over soon.”

Maria watched in stunned silence as the elder scholar dauntlessly walked towards the wounded creature, his enormous weapon shining amidst the ever-blowing sand. After finally regaining its bearings, the beast roared in defiance and once again went on the attack, charging forward and slashing at Gehrman with its remaining claw. Despite this, he continued his advance, seemingly making no effort to defend himself. That was until the beast finally reached him, only for its claw to suddenly pass through a cloud of smoke that appeared in his place.

As it looked around in confusion, Gehrman’s blade dug into its side, which caused it to lash out and attack in his direction, only for him to once again vanish from view. This process continued for some time, with each passing second gradually wearing the beast down as it tried and failed to pin him down.

All the while, Maria found herself dumbfounded by what she was witnessing. His speed, his tenacity, his sheer skill with his unorthodox weapon; it was unlike anything she’d ever seen before. Had he truly been this capable all along?

The battle continued for a while longer, with Gehrman proving far too fast for the beast. This clearly enraged the creature, as instead of trying to tag him, it resorted to violently slamming its fist into the ground, shaking the earth, forming whirlwinds and bringing down strikes of lightning in an attempt to finally be rid of him.

After one such slam, the beast ended up having to support itself on its remaining hand, breathing heavily. Its fur was soaked in blood and its flesh had been rended by Gehrman’s weapon, which had managed to do more damage to it than Maria’s entire company combined. The exhausted creature then raised its head to look at Gehrman, who was standing a few feet away. But unlike his adversary, he appeared none the worse for wear; in fact, throughout their entire battle, he didn’t appear to have exerted himself at all.

Despite its vulnerable state, Gehrman did not move in for the kill. Instead, he simply stood and waited for the beast to make a move. It was then that Maria remembered the ploy that the beast had used against her just minutes ago; feigning weakness in order to catch her off guard. Yet unlike her, Gehrman saw right through it. Almost as if he had dealt with similar tactics before.

Seeing that it wasn’t going to fool him, the beast rose back up to its full height and once again raised its paw overhead. Yet almost the moment the beast started the attack, Gehrman suddenly brandished a firearm with his left hand and pointed it directly at the creature’s head, firing a scattered shot from its muzzle.

Though the blast did not kill the beast, it did knock it off balance, causing it to clench its head in pain before it fell forward, stopping itself from fully collapsing by supporting itself on its elbow. Seizing the opportunity, Gehrman cleared the distance between them before Maria could even blink and drove his hand into the side of the beast’s head before just as quickly ripping it back out.

Blood sprayed through the air as the beast was knocked onto its back, the impact causing the earth to shake. For a few seconds, it tried to get back up, pitifully whimpering in pain as it raised its head to look at Gehrman, revealing the gaping hole he had left. For a few fleeting moments, it helplessly reached out at him and for just an instant, Maria saw something in its quickly fading eyes; fear, perhaps. But before she could be sure, the beast’s head fell back and finally, its body went limp.

Silence settled over the chamber as both Gehrman and Maria stared at the seemingly dead beast. After a few moments passed without movement, he swung his detached blade through the air, flicking the blood off it in the process before sheathing it on his side.

Even still, Maria couldn’t believe what she was seeing. “Wh-what? H-how did you…?” she uttered in pure bewilderment.

Gehrman then turned towards her, walking over before offering her his hand. “My lady, are you hurt?” he asked her in all to calm a tone.

As sense returned to her, Maria’s confusion quickly gave way to anger. “Don’t touch me!” she snapped, slapping his hand away in the process. Though clearly taken aback by this, Gehrman nonetheless retracted his hand, not saying another word.

Her gaze then settled past him to where Matthias’s body still lay. Once again forcing herself to her feet, Maria limped past Gehrman towards him, holding onto that desperate hope that he was somehow still alive. But even as she dropped to her knees beside him and took him in her arms he didn’t so much as stir, his eyes staring blankly at her.

Looking around, Maria was confronted with the sight of the rest of her company, who all lay lifeless around her. Yet even though their killer also lay dead, ensuring that it could never again harm anyone else, it brought her neither peace nor comfort. Instead, it only strengthened her grief and above all, her anger, which only grew stronger when she set her eyes on Gehrman. Her “savior”.

He had singlehandedly slain a creature that had wiped out an entire squadron of knights and yet, only she remained alive. He could’ve stepped in any time he wanted and yet, he chose to remain in the background. If he had, then her men would’ve still been alive.

But he hadn’t. And they were all gone now.

After looking back down at Matthias’s lifeless body, Maria hugged him close, cradling him in her arms as the tears began to flow.

….

“It’s gone quiet,” said Laurence. “Do you think it’s dead?”

“Either that or they are.” Micolash replied. “Either way, I’m not keen on making sure. We shouldn’t even be here.”

“Gehrman’s still down here. We can’t just leave him!” Laurence reminded him.

“And what are we supposed to do?” his colleague asked. “You heard what Gehrman said; we should’ve just waited for him to come back.”

“And if he doesn’t come back? What then?”

To this, Micolash had no answer, but despite this, Laurence felt like he knew what it would’ve been. And it wasn’t something that he could agree with. Turning away from Micolash, Laurence started making his way further down the stairwell leading back to the chamber.

“Laurence, wait!” Micolash called after him, no doubt in an attempt to stop him, but he nonetheless continued onward.

Upon nearing the gate, Laurence came to a stop and listened closely, trying his best to gauge what was happening inside. Other than the sound of blowing sand, he couldn’t hear anything or at least, nothing that indicated that the beast was still inside. Deciding to take a chance, he carefully peered inside, unsure of what to expect. Yet even so, he found himself shocked by what he saw.

The beast was lying on it back, seemingly dead. And a few steps away stood Gehrman, seemingly alone as he stared at something that Laurence could not quite see. Against his better judgement, Laurence made his way back inside the chamber, rushing over to him.

“Gehrman!”, he called, prompting him to turn his head to look at him. However, he didn’t seem all that surprised by his arrival.

“I told you not to follow me.” Gehrman reminded him.

“And let you go down here alone?! I did not think…” Laurence stopped mid-sentence, turning to look at the slain beast. For all his determination, Laurence had his doubts that Gehrman would’ve been able to overcome such a foe, especially if he was fighting alone. And yet, he had clearly been up to the task, something that should’ve been clear to him in hindsight. Master Willem wouldn’t have sent him with them if he weren’t.

But before he could dwell on this for too long, his mind turned to a more pressing concern. “The knights!” he said. “What happened to…”

Suddenly, he noticed something among the sand: a body. Then another, and another. And at the center of it all, he could see Lady Maria, kneeling and holding the bloody upper-half of one of her men, seemingly unaware of what was happening around her.

Seeing where Laurence was looking, Gehrman’s eyes likewise settled on the grieving captain. “I was too late.” He said, a clear sense of regret in his words.

As he lay witness to the carnage before him, Laurence too was overcome with a sense of regret. He knew all along that what Lady Maria did, she did for the sake of her men – so that they would not meet the very fate that had befallen them. As much as it pained him, he had tried to honor her wish and stop them from returning to aid her, but it was all for naught. Their loyalty had been unshakable.

Walking past Gehrman, Laurence made his way over to Lady Maria. As he got closer, he could see that the one she was cradling was Matthias, who had bravely led the charge to come to her rescue. And looking at his lifeless eyes, he was reminded of the final words the young knight had spoken to him before marching off to his certain doom. “So be it.”

Purging the haunting thought from his mind, Laurence turned his attention to the company’s sole survivor. “My lady,” he softly said, but if she had heard him, she chose to ignore him. Seconds passed with no response, after which Laurence placed a comforting hand on her shoulder. This finally made her look up at him, her cheeks wet with tears.

“My lady, we have to leave. There’s nothing more to be done.”

Rather surprisingly, she did not draw back from his touch nor did she offer any form of protest. Instead, she simply looked back down at Matthias before gently setting him down on the ground. “I’m sorry…” she whispered as she closed his eyes with her fingers.

She stayed like that for a little while longer before she finally rose to her feet, prompting Laurence to retract his hand. After taking one last look at her deceased company, Lady Maria lowered her head and turned to walk, or rather limp away. Seeing her injury, Laurence attempted to help her, only for her to put up a hand to stop him before he could even take a step forward.

“I don’t need your help.”, she sharply said, her voice coming close to breaking. Though taken aback, Laurence did not press her and simply let her continue on her way. From there, she did not say a word or stop to acknowledge anyone else, save for casting a glare in Gehrman’s direction as she walked past him. Despite this, his own expression did not change and he simply looked on in silence as she walked away.

“I hope you weren’t expecting gratitude.” Micolash said to Gehrman, having come to stand just beside him.

“Gratitude, no,” Gehrman replied. “But we will see what she does with the chance she’s been given.”

Together, the three of them watched as Lady Maria made her way out of the chamber, reluctantly leaving the bodies of her comrades, as well as the strange blood they had done so much to retrieve behind. However, Laurence soon noticed that the chalice that had held said blood was now nowhere to be seen. He hadn’t seen her stop to pick it up nor where there any shards on the floor to indicate it had been shattered, which left only one other explanation; someone had taken it.

Yet despite his suspicions, Laurence remained silent. Instead, his thoughts turned to what Gehrman had said. He had clearly chosen to save her for a reason, but what that reason was eluded him. But regardless of that, Lady Maria now had a choice to make, the results of which none of them could foresee.

Not even her.

....

Chapter Text

Upon returning to their makeshift camp, Laurence ignored the shocked looks and confused questions of his colleagues, instead instructing them to prepare for their imminent departure. From there, he aided his fellows in packing up their provisions, the busywork serving to distract them from the chaos of the last few hours.

But as much as he would’ve liked to drown it out, his thoughts and eyes always returned to the lone surviving knight, who had almost instantly returned to Emil’s lifeless body in order to kneel by his side. Lady Maria hadn’t said a word since they left the chamber nor had anyone dared to go up to her, more so out of fear than respect.

“She’s not going to forget this, you know.” Laurence turned his head to find Lobsang now standing next to him, himself now looking at the grieving captain. “What are we to do with her?”

Laurence looked back at Lady Maria as he pondered his friend’s question. “I do not know,” he admitted. “She will return to Cainhurst, that much is certain. And I doubt any of us could stop her from doing so even if we wanted to.”

“Not even Gehrman? It was he who defeated that beast, was it not?” Laurence turned back to his colleague for a moment, hesitating in answering for just a moment.

“Yes,” he eventually confirmed. “But I imagine he will not be keen on turning his blade on her.”

“No, I imagine not,” Lobsang agreed. “If his intention was to save her, he must’ve done so for a reason. Especially if he only chose to reveal his true nature now.”

 Interestingly, Lobsang had not sounded the slightest bit shocked in saying this. Of course, Gehrman had not tried to hide his involvement in the battle upon his return, leaving his bloodstained weapon out for all to see. And despite not having witnessed his struggle with the beast, Laurence had no doubt that he was a powerful warrior indeed, more than enough to handle Lady Maria and in fact, her entire company if he so wished. And something told him that Master Willem had not wanted this fact to become known.

“Can we trust her?” Lobsang soon asked, as if reading his thoughts.

“No,” said Laurence. “But we also cannot tell Queen Annalise that we lived when her knights did not. Protecting us was only ever secondary for them; nothing we can say is going to convince her that we survived without outside interference.”

“Perhaps,” his colleague acknowledged. “But how will she welcome a knight that has failed in her mission? And what would said knight do to ensure that her standing is upheld?”

To this, Laurence had no answer. Lobsang was right that for all intents and purposes, Lady Maria had failed in her mission: failed in protecting her men and failed in retrieving the strange substance that, unbeknownst to her, was now in his possession. Whatever it was, it must’ve been coveted by Queen Annalise, given what the knights had risked in order to acquire it. And yet…

“It’s done!”, Norbert suddenly proclaimed from the other side of the room. “We can leave now!”

“Go!” Laurence called back. “We’ll be right behind you!”

Afterwards, he silently nodded to Lobsang, who soon went off to join the others at the altar, which would finally take them back to the surface. But rather than following him, Laurence instead turned back in the direction of Lady Maria, who had seemingly not taken note of Norbert’s earlier announcement.

“My lady Maria!” he called out to her, seemingly getting her attention. “It’s time.”

He remained in his current spot until she finally rose to her feet – possibly when she herself realized that he wasn’t going to leave. After spending a few more moments looking down at Emil’s lifeless body, she turned to walk away, keeping her eyes fixed straight ahead up until the point she reached him. Stopping just beside him, she turned her head to look at him, her messy blonde bangs doing little to hide her puffy, grief-stricken eyes. But as she looked at him then, there wasn’t any anger or judgment in her eyes. But what he did see, he simply couldn’t describe.

Countless seconds went by without a word being spoken until Lady Maria finally continued on her way, leaving Laurence to watch her go. He knew it must’ve been difficult for her to leave her men behind like this, but they simply didn’t have the means to return their bodies to the surface, much less to offer them a proper burial service; it was a task that would need to be left to her. But beyond that, Laurence did not know what the future held in store for her. What would she do upon returning home? How would she frame the events of this expedition? And how would she be punished for her failure?

Placing a hand on his satchel, in which the vial that Matthias had given him still rested, Laurence took a deep breath and finally followed after her. He knew at once what he needed to do.

…

Maria’s thoughts faded away into the ether, being replaced with a feeling of empty serenity. However, this lasted for a precious few moments until she found herself back in the Tomb of Oedon, allowing the stark realization to dawn on her once again. Looking around, she could see the scholars of Byrgenwerth gathered at the center of the Tomb…with her men nowhere in sight. And it was then that the faint hope she was merely awakening from a nightmare slipped away.

As her senses fully returned to her, Maria began to hear bits of conversation amongst the scholars, which ceased when they noticed her arrival. “Out of the way!”, came an authoritative voice, prompting the others to part and reveal a tall, somewhat burly man, who she recognized as the one who promised to look after their horses. And upon seeing her, his brow furrowed in confusion and shock.

“You?”, he questioned before turning to Micolash, who came to stand just beside him. “What is the meaning of this? Where is Laurence?”

“Where, indeed?” said Micolash, looking rather suspiciously at her.

Before she had a chance to properly explain herself, a circle of white light appeared on the ground just beside her, from which Professor Laurence soon emerged. Once he was fully materialized, he cast a glance in her direction, as if to confirm she was actually there. Though he hadn’t said so outright, his actions had made it clear that he wasn’t leaving without her, which was why she found herself here before him.

“Laurence! Oh, thank goodness,” said the man. “But then, where are…” Stopping mid-sentence, he looked back to her, seemingly noticing both her injuries and the forlorn expression she wore. Despite Maria not saying a word, it appeared as though he was starting to understand the severity of what had transpired.

“What on Earth happened down there?”, he asked Professor Laurence, who himself seemed reluctant to answer.

“There will be time enough to explain later,” said the professor. “We must return to Byrgenwerth at once.”

Despite his enduring confusion, the man nodded his understanding. “Yes, yes, of course,” he replied before looking back towards Maria. “And what of her?”

Before the professor could speak, she finally decided to step forward. “Get me my horse. I will make for Cainhurst Castle at once.”

“No, you won’t.”

Maria turned to Laurence in disbelief. “What did you say?” she demanded as she took a firm step toward him, though this seemingly did little to intimidate him.

“You are in no shape to make such a journey. And I still have business with you,” said the professor. “So, until both matters are resolved, you are to remain with us.”

“I don’t take orders from you!” Maria snapped at him.

“I am merely offering you our help, Lady Maria. Despite what you may think, we aren’t enemies nor do I wish for that to be the case. So, please, come with us.”

Despite the professor’s words, Maria knew that she had little choice in the matter, which was made even clearer when Gehrman stepped forward to make his presence known. Though he didn’t say anything, he was clearly attempting to enforce her compliance with his master’s words; if she attempted to leave, then he would be her main obstacle. And it was an obstacle she simply couldn’t overcome. Not yet.

“Fine,” she eventually conceded. “But if I even think that you’re wasting my time…”

“I won’t. I assure you,” the professor replied.

As this happened, Micolash once again made his way to the forefront of the group. “And what of the chalice?”, he asked.

Sensing his true intentions right away, Maria prepared to rebuke him, only to once again be stopped before she could speak. “Leave it be. There is still a use for it,” said the lead professor, briefly glancing in her direction as he did, more than enough time to witness the shock that appeared on her face.

“And what would you have us do?,” Micolash demanded, clearly frustrated. “You think it wise to simply leave it unattended?”

Professor Laurence seemed to give this some thought, which made Maria fear that he was reconsidering his earlier demand. But instead, he turned to a different member of his company – the outsider.

“Lobsang!” The scholar promptly stepped forward. “Yes, Laurence?” “May I ask that you watch over the chalice until Lady Maria’s return? Make sure it is not removed until then.”

Though he didn’t respond to his leader’s request right away, Maria couldn’t say that he appeared particularly taken aback by it either. “Of course. Leave it to me,” he answered, a clear sense of understanding in his words.

“Thank you,” said the professor before turning to the rest of his followers. “The rest of you, come with me. We depart at once.”

With that, Professor Laurence started walking forward, with the rest of the scholars promptly following suit. Soon, the only ones who remained near the chalice were Maria, Lobsang and Gehrman, the latter of whom stood with his arms crossed as he cast a stern look in her direction. Although she held his eyes for a while, she eventually balked and instead turned to Lobsang, who gave her an understanding nod. Left with little other choice, Maria started to follow the rest of the scholars, with Gehrman waiting for her to pass before following suit.

As they made their way back to the Great Bridge, Maria found herself all the more baffled by the professor’s actions. Not only was he choosing to discard an artifact of incomprehensible value, but he was leaving it under the watchful eye of an outsider. It was clearly meant as a gesture of good-will, yet somehow, she still found herself suspicious of his true intentions.

Once they arrived at the bridge, Maria quickly scanned the surrounding area until she finally spotted Siegward dutifully standing near the front of the caravan. As she quickly made her way over, her horse turned his head in her direction and upon spotting her, nickered in greeting, moving his nose to nuzzle her as she got close.

“Oh, Siegward…” she whispered as she gently ran a hand along his neck, after which he rested his head on her shoulder. As Maria gently hugged his neck and patted his magnificent mane, her eyes soon settled on the group of horses behind them, all of whom were still awaiting the return of their masters. And not even the faint comfort of Siegward’s embrace could fill the sheer…emptiness that she now felt.

“Ludwig! I need a horse!” she suddenly heard Gehrman call.

“Why? Where are you going?” Ludwig replied not far from her.

“If all goes well, nowhere,” was his reply.

Despite this rather vague statement, there was no ambiguity in his words, at least not to Maria. And once Gehrman was granted his horse and the procession started moving, her suspicion was confirmed. They both silently rode along with the procession, with Maria leading the riderless horses along while Gehrman trailed behind her, just far enough for him to keep her in his line of sight and just close enough that he could catch up to her should she attempt to flee.

Every once in a while, she would glance back, tightly gripping Siegward’s reins only to see that he was still following after her each-time. Even from a distance, she could tell that he had something he wanted to say - perhaps some hollow words of condolence or simply reiterating his master’s promises, but whatever it was, he chose to keep it to himself. And that was for the best; as it was, Maria had nothing to say to him.

In time, the procession arrived back at Byrgenwerth’s main lecture building, coming to a stop just outside its doors. The streets were almost completely barren, with the moon shining brilliantly in the night sky above, yet Maria found herself unsure of just how long they’d been gone. Reasonably, it couldn’t have been more than a few days, yet it had felt like months had gone by. Some say that the labyrinths have come to exist outside time itself, something that she had trouble believing. But perhaps…

Her thoughts were interrupted when she started to make out pieces of what sounded like an argument coming from one of the carriages. Though Maria couldn’t quite discern what was being said, the tension that came as a result was palpable.

“…the results will be catastrophic.” “And the same can’t be said for this? Think of the risk involved, Laurence.” “I have and it is a risk worth taking. Say nothing to Master Willem.”

Before Maria could even ponder what it was she had heard, the door to the relevant carriage opened, out of which stepped Professor Laurence, followed closely by his two associates Micolash and Caryll, both of whom looked after their leader with some apprehension. From atop her horse, she watched as the rest of the scholar gathered together before him.

“You have all done well,” he opened by saying. “Your efforts have ensured a bright future for Byrgenwerth’s research, but make no mistake. There is still much work to be done.”

As he spoke, Gehrman suddenly appeared just beside her, himself still on horseback. “Come along, now, Lady Maria. Don’t make this any more difficult than it has to be.”

Despite the calmness of his voice, there was no denying the underlying threat behind his words. Left with little other choice, Maria dismounted Siegward and took hold of his reigns as Gehrman continued to watch her like a hawk. Thankfully, it wasn’t long until Professor Laurence concluded his brief address.

“You are all dismissed. Go and have yourselves a well-deserved rest knowing that a new dawn is upon us.”

Very soon, the crowd of scholars started to disperse, with most of them going off in separate directions. Soon, only Micolash and Caryll remained from the initial crowd, whose apprehension towards their colleague seemed to have grown stronger. However, from the looks of things, Laurence was set on whatever course he’d chosen, something that his fellow scholars must’ve realized, for they eventually departed without another word.

Once they were far enough away, the professor turned towards Ludwig, who dropped down from the lead carriage once it seemed everyone else was gone. “Are you sure about this, Laurence?”, he asked, no doubt having overheard his earlier debate with much greater clarity than she could.

“Yes,” the professor replied before turning in her direction. “Stay here and look after the horses. We won’t be long.”

Although he didn’t look as resolute, Ludwig eventually complied. “Very well,” he said.

After nodding his thanks, Laurence fully turned his attention to her. “My apologies for the delay,” he said before putting out his arm towards the hall. “Please, come inside.”

Soon after the professor said this, Gehrman finally dropped down from his horse, silently handing the reins over to Ludwig. Against her better judgment, Maria once again left Siegward under his watch and followed after the professor, with Gehrman once again following close behind.   

Swinging open the doors to the lecture hall, Professor Laurence led her inside the dimly lit building. Despite this, the impressive scale of the building was still apparent, with grand chandeliers hanging from the ceiling and countless shelves lining the walls, filled with various manuscripts and materials. During the day, it would have certainly been bustling with students, but now, it was completely empty, causing their footsteps to echo through the hall.

“This way,” he said as they continued onwards to the very end of the building, after which they ascended up a spiraling staircase leading to the second floor. Not long after, they came before a door on the right-hand side, which Laurence promptly unlocked with a set of keys.

“Here we are.” The professor said as he fully opened the door, allowing Maria to peer inside. From the looks of things, it was an office; an ornate desk stood at its center, with several bookshelves and cabinets surrounding it, all of which she assumed belonged to him.

“The two of you wait here for now,” Professor Laurence soon said. “I will return momentarily.”

Without elaborating further, he left Maria standing at the entrance of his office, going further down the hall before disappearing inside another room. Left with little else to do, she wandered inside his office in order to get a better look at its contents. It was a relatively confined room, with a few plain wooden chairs lined up on the right-hand side of the room and…was that a basket? What could that have been for?

Choosing not to dwell on this, she instead turned her attention to his desk, on which stood a typewriter, along with an assortment of manuscripts and papers, some more organized than others. Amidst this sizable collection, she managed to spot quite a number of sketches, depicting creatures beyond the realm of imagination. Or so it would seem to most.

These sketches were each accompanied with a name:

Shuma-Gorath

The Ogdru-Jahad

Amygdala

Formless Oedon

Mother Kos

“I wouldn’t get too nosy if I were you,” came Gehrman’s voice from behind her. “You may come to regret it.”

Despite staying quiet at first, Maria ended up turning her head back toward him. “And you would make sure of that?” she finally addressed him.

“I will do what has to be done,” he replied. “What that’ll be…well, that’s up to you.”

“How generous of you…” she uttered as she once again turned her gaze away from him, causing silence to settle over them again.

“Your men…Master Laurence tried to stop them, but they were not to be deterred.” Gehrman said to her, which only caused her to grip the edges of the professor’s desk.

“And because of that, they had to die?!” she snapped.

“That was never my desire!” “Then what was?!,” Maria demanded, fully turning towards him. “You had countless chances to save them, yet you stood by and did nothing!”

“I know,” said Gehrman. “And I’m sorry. But it was not my choice.”

“Then clearly whatever vows you make are worthless!”

“THAT’S ENOUGH!” Both Maria and Gehrman turned towards the door, where Professor Laurence now stood. “Gehrman, leave us,” he ordered, lowering his tone significantly.

“Are you sure, young master?” Gehrman asked, evidentially concerned.

“Of course,” the professor replied. “I will summon you if your presence is required, but I am sure that won’t be necessary.” As he said this, he turned his gaze towards her, as if in warning. At the same time, Gehrman also glanced back at her, seemingly conflicted, but eventually turned back towards his master.

“As you wish,” he said, and with that, stepped outside the office, closing the door behind him and leaving the two of them alone.

“My apologies for the delay,” the professor said after a brief silence, walking towards his desk and putting one of the spare chairs in front of it. “Please, have a seat.”

Though she would’ve told him that she preferred to stand, Maria had by now realized that when the professor insisted on something, he would be sure to see it through. As such, she sat down in the rather ill-fitting chair while Professor Laurence went to take his place behind his desk.

“You’ll have to excuse the clutter,” he said as he started to clean up some of the lose documents, primarily the sketches she had spotted earlier. “As it was, I did not expect to return here tonight, especially under such…unfortunate circumstances.”

“Save your pity,” said Maria. “Tell me what it is it you want and be quick about it.”

“I believe I already have,” he replied, setting his documents off to the side. “I said that I would help you and I mean to do just that.”

“And I said that I don’t need your help,” she said, not even trying to hide her frustration.

“I’m well aware,” the professor acknowledged. “But I must ask that you heed me.”

As he spoke, Professor Laurence reached into his satchel and took out a small vial, placing it on his desk. And the moment Maria realized what was inside, her eyes widened in shock. The Old Blood? But…how had he…?

“Before he went back to help you, Matthias passed this on to me. Perhaps for safe-keeping or perhaps for another purpose entirely,” he explained, as if reading her thoughts.

Yet even so, her sense of astonishment remained. In this small vial, Matthias had acquired the means to ensure his eternal favor with Queen Annalise and that his name would be revered by all of Cainhurst. And he had just given it up – they all had. For her.

Despite her sorrow returning in full force, Maria forced herself to remain focused on the matter on hand. “I suppose you have terms you wish to propose?”, she asked, seeing no other reason he’d reveal such a thing to her.

“No terms,” he replied. “Only an offering. One that I hope you’ll accept.”

As he said this, he slightly moved the vial towards her, retracting his hand and leaving it at the center of his desk. Maria could only look down at it in bewilderment until some semblance of sense returned to her, which was when she lifted her gaze back to the professor, who was himself observing her expectantly.

“You do know what you’re relinquishing here, don’t you?”

“I know that this is what you’ve been seeking and no doubt what Her Majesty covets,” the professor answered. “As for why that is, I haven’t the faintest idea.”

“And does that not intrigue you?” “Of course, it does. But that is not what’s important here. You and your company risked everything in order to unearth this; it would be a shame if your efforts were for naught.”

Maria could sense no ulterior message behind the professor’s words, but this only served to make her all the more suspicious. But beyond that, it reminded her of the previous choice he had offered her – to leave Loran behind and ensure the survival of her company. But in doing so, she would’ve also ensured that they would be labelled as cowards and failures, leaving their reputations forever tarnished…or at least, that’s what she thought at the time. Now, she would’ve given anything to change her decision.

“That hardly matters anymore,” she said, slumping back in to her seat and lowering her gaze. “They’re all gone now.”

“That may be so,” the professor replied. “But their sacrifice ensured that their captain – whose sworn duty it was to unearth this prized medium – would live. Tell me. Would they have wanted her to return home in disgrace?”

Maria raised her gaze to look at him, then once again lowered it to the vial before her. Whatever glory it could’ve offered clearly hadn’t mattered to her men if it came at the cost of her life, nor did it matter to her now. It had never mattered. But perhaps…

After a lengthy silence, she finally reached forward and took the vial, holding it in her hand as she looked at the meager offering inside. To think that they were sent on such a perilous mission, suffered such heavy sacrifice… all for a few drops of blood. But despite her own feelings on the matter, Maria knew of its true importance and why Queen Annalise so desired it. If she left it behind – especially in the hands of those whose ambitions with it could not be predicted – it was certain that she would be punished.

And that her men would die in obscurity.

Tightly gripping the vial, she once again looked up at Professor Laurence, who gave her a small, but encouraging nod. A part of her was still unsure of whether his intentions were as pure as they seemed, but at the same time, he had given her little reason to doubt him thus far. He held all of the leverage in this situation and could’ve tried to compel her to do any number of things; beyond that, if he had so wished, he could’ve simply let her return to Cainhurst empty-handed, allowing him to keep the Old Blood for himself.  And yet, he had done neither.

Perhaps she had misjudged him or perhaps that is exactly what he wanted her to think. But one thing was for certain; he did not wish for the two of them to become enemies. And neither did she.

“I..I must go,” she soon said. “Queen Annalise will be expecting me.”

“Then shall I see you off, my lady?”, he asked her, suggesting that whatever “business” he had with her had been resolved. And as strange as it was for her to admit it, she was almost…disappointed by the fact.

“I suppose so.”

...

Chapter Text

Not long after, Laurence stood outside the lecture hall with Gehrman by his side, watching as Lady Maria organized the herd of riderless horses, with some help from Ludwig. Working together, the two of them set about connecting them with rope which they tied around their necks, all leading back to the captain’s own steed.

“And you are certain you’ll be able to lead them back?”, the stablemaster asked as their work neared completion.

“Of course,” she replied. “Siegward is among the eldest of their herd; they are sure to follow him.”

“Then is all this really necessary?” In response to Ludwig’s question, Lady Maria briefly stopped what she was doing and looked over to him.

“Perhaps not, but…I wish to ensure they return safely. It’s the least I can do.”

Despite the silence that followed, an understanding seemed to pass between the two of them. “Yes, I see,” said Ludwig before turning his attention back to his work. “That is commendable.” And with that, Laurence had to agree. Her men may be gone, but that didn’t mean they had left nothing behind.

Once it seemed that they were finished, Laurence motioned for Gehrman to follow him and together, they made their way over to Lady Maria, who turned towards them as they approached. “Is there anything else we can do for you, my lady?”, he asked her.

“No,” she replied. “You’ve done more than enough.” Through her sorrow still seeped into her words, he could nonetheless sense the faintest hint of gratitude, just as he had hoped.

“Well, then, Lady Maria. I suppose this is goodbye. It’s been…edifying,” he said before bowing his head slightly.

Despite this gesture, the captain remained silent, appearing almost…hesitant. Just as it seemed she would depart without a word, she extended her hand to him; her palm wasn’t facing down, which seemed to indicate that she wanted him to shake it rather than kiss it, something that came as something of a surprise. After a few seconds, Laurence finally accepted her offered hand, during which the two of them shared a brief, but understanding look.

Soon after, Lady Maria let go of his hand and turned to mount her horse. Once she was safely in the saddle, she looked back down at him, which was when he saw the faintest hint of a smile appear on her face.

“Until we meet again, Professor Laurence,” she said. “I wish you the best of luck on your research.” Despite the general nature of this statement, he couldn’t help but detect a hint of subtext behind her words; something…ominous.

Not long after, Lady Maria turned away and mustered her steed, galloping away with her company’s horses in tow. Even after she disappeared from view, Laurence continued to look after her, his mind clouded by uncertainty. With the strange blood now in her possession, she would no doubt receive a rousing welcome once she returned to Cainhurst, in spite of the severe losses she suffered in the process of attaining it. And as for Matthias and the rest of her company, well…they would no doubt receive their fair share of honors as well, albeit posthumously.

Unfortunately, that was about as far as Laurence’s foresight extended; what she would do next, he truly did not know. But somehow, he knew that their paths would cross again some day. He could only hope that it would be under more…pleasant circumstances.

As these thoughts swirled in his head, Laurence suddenly felt a hand on his shoulder. “Come along then, Master Laurence,” he heard Gehrman say. “The hour is late and you ought to return home.”

“As should you,” Laurence replied before turning towards him. “And after what’s happened, I think I can manage finding my own way home.”

“Oh, I have no doubt,” Gehrman said with something of a smile. “But I think I’ll tag along anyway.”

Seeing that there would be no dissuading him, Laurence nodded in affirmation, but he by no means did so reluctantly. Even before learning the true extent of his abilities, he had found Gehrman’s presence rather reassuring; he constantly smiled in the face of danger, acting as if nothing could possibly hurt him, an attitude that he now saw as warranted. Besides, Yharnam had no shortage of…unsavory characters that appeared around this hour.

“I don’t suppose the two of you would like a lift?” Ludwig offered off from the side.

“Thank you, Ludwig, but that won’t be necessary,” said Laurence. “You and your men may retire for the night.”

“We will…” he said as he looked back towards the line of carriages that still took up most of the street. “At some point.”

To this, Laurence couldn’t help but chuckle. “With any luck, it’ll be soon,” he replied. “But to make your labor a little easier, I suggest you keep a carriage primed for tomorrow. Master Willem will wish to see us.”

“Indeed, he will,” said Ludwig. “Until tomorrow, then.”

“Yes. Until tomorrow.”

With that, Ludwig turned back towards the procession of carriages, starting to issue orders to his patiently awaiting followers. Despite having been on his feet for who knows how long, he hadn’t lost a single step, maintaining the same authoritative presence he always did. Yet through all the turmoil he’d been through, Laurence hadn’t forgotten the strange level of familiarity he seemed to have with Gehrman, something no one – save for Master Willem himself – had exhibited. Perhaps he, like his acquaintance, was not as he seemed.

A matter for another time, Laurence decided.

Turning back towards Gehrman, who had remained silent until that point, he motioned for him to follow. “Come,” he said.

“Lead the way, sir,” Gehrman prompted.

From there, the two of them set off, with Laurence retracing his usual route home with the older scholar following not far behind. Yharnam’s streets could be unnerving even on the best of days, but even so, Laurence had never found himself so alert while traversing them as he did now. His eyes were constantly moving, his ears somehow noticing even the slightest sounds; all in search of a threat a part of him was convinced lay just out of sight.

“You get used to it,” Gehrman broke the silence by saying. “The labyrinth tends to have that effect on people, even after they’ve left it. It’s helpful to be alert, but I wouldn’t let it get to your head too much.”

Even after getting over his initial surprise, Laurence was only able to muster a simple “Hmm,” in response, keeping his focus squarely on the road ahead. If he was being honest, he hadn’t been thinking of the advice itself, but more about how Gehrman had even known to give it. Was his unease truly that obvious or was he simply speaking from experience? Either way, it served to put Laurence’s mind at ease… at least, somewhat.

“That is what’s on your mind, no? Or do your concerns lie elsewhere?” Gehrman soon asked.

“Why would they be?” said Laurence.

“I can think of at least one reason,” he replied. “After all, that was quite the gamble you made.”

This made Laurence come to a stop, turning his head back towards his follower. Despite having not been present when Laurence had laid out his plan to his colleagues nor when he put it into action, he clearly knew what it was he had done. Yet at this point, nothing about Gehrman surprised him.

“One that will work in our favor,” said Laurence. “You’ll see.”

“With that amount of confidence, I cannot bring myself to disagree,” he replied, sounding rather amused.

“Well, surely, you must’ve thought something positive would come from this,” Laurence said as he turned around to face him. “Why else would you have saved her?”

Gehrman didn’t reply right away and instead simply shrugged his shoulders. “Maybe I didn’t think that far ahead.”

“Somehow, I doubt that’s true,” said Laurence. Yet again, silence settled over them, with Gehrman offering no attempt at a reply. Yet at the same time, he didn’t shrink away from him and even went so far as to smirk at him.

“And how about you, then? How far ahead does your ‘plan’ extend?”

Laurence was admittedly caught off guard by his question. It was by no means unwarranted nor did it seem mean-spirited in nature; in fact, the older scholar sounded genuinely curious. Yet in spite of that, it was his turn to fall silent, trying his hardest to think of an answer – not just for Gehrman, but for himself as well.

“Who can say?” was his eventual reply.

Despite the vagueness of his answer, it seemed to satisfy Gehrman, as his grin grew even longer. “Hmm, a scholar and a gentleman, are we?” he said while stroking his chin.

“I… don’t know what you mean,” Laurence replied in an attempt to maintain his established demeanor, all while hoping he wasn’t blushing.

“Oh, I think you do,” said Gehrman. “Perhaps a part of you feared that she would reveal the truth behind her survival and the consequences thereof, but there was no guarantee that Her Majesty would take action or even believe her at all. Now, if she knew you were in possession of what she sought, that would be a different story…but she didn’t. That is, until you revealed it to her.”

Yet again, Laurence found himself at a loss for what to say. The truth was, nothing Gehrman said had been inaccurate – it was all something he had considered when coming to a decision. He knew full well that simply letting her return to Cainhurst could’ve come as no consequence for them, but…well, he didn’t quite know what.

“Lady Maria…” he started to say before stopping to take a breath. “She has been through much. And I needed to be sure she wouldn’t do something she’ll regret.”

“Perhaps,” said Gehrman. “Or perhaps, you saw something more in her, as I did.”

This seemed to confirm what Laurence suspected all along. Gehrman had been under no obligation to protect Lady Maria nor her men, but he nonetheless had chosen to aid them or at least, had tried to. Whether this can be fully attributed to benevolence, he did not know for sure, but what was clear was that he saw in her something that was worth saving.  

Perhaps it was her skill in battle. Perhaps her unshakable determination and loyalty to her companions. Or perhaps, he saw that despite having the heart of a warrior, she had not allowed it to harden, as her actions clearly demonstrated.

“Yes, perhaps so,” said Laurence. “But I doubt certain others will see it the same way.”

To this, Gehrman offered but a simple reply. “They don’t need to.”

Even with how little was said, a sense of understanding passed between the two men, culminating in Laurence nodding his head and turning around to continue on his path. “My thoughts exactly,” he said as he walked away.

In almost no time at all, they found themselves approaching the steps to Laurence’s home, a sight that now seemed almost surreal to him. He had long known that it was built over the ruins of a once mighty civilization, but actually seeing it for himself left him viewing the city that he had come to know so well in an entirely new light. If Loran had fallen so suddenly and so totally, who was to say a day would come where the same would happen to Yharnam. It was a thought on which he did not wish to dwell.

So lost in thought was he that he came close to opening the door without saying goodbye to Gehrman, who he had almost forgotten was following him. Regardless, he found the older scholar standing dutifully just a few steps away, his hands behind his back.

“Thank you for your service, Gehrman,” said Laurence. “You are dismissed until tomorrow.”

In response, Gehrman slightly bowed to him, tipping his hat as he did. “Of course, young master. It’s been a pleasure.”

After sharing one last smile with the older scholar, Laurence finally opened the door to his home and stepped inside. Soon after closing the door, he peered outside his window to see Gehrman calmly making his way through Yharnam’s empty streets, hearing what sounded like a hum around the same time. Shaking his head in disbelief, Laurence turned away and made his way further inside.

After taking the time to light a candle on his table, Laurence took in the familiar sight before him, finding that everything was just where he’d left it. But why wouldn’t it have been? All things considered, he hadn’t been gone for very long, yet even so, the journey he’d undertaken made the feelings of comfort and safety he now felt seem almost unnatural. A part of him had feared that he wouldn’t return and yet, he had.

If only others had been so lucky.

As his thoughts returned to the unfortunate conclusion of their expedition, Laurence reached inside his satchel and took out a small vial he had brought home with him from the lecture hall, within which was a sample of the strange substance they had discovered in the labyrinth. He had been lucky that Lady Maria hadn’t questioned what he was doing in those moments he had left her alone with Gehrman; that her anger and grief left her none the wiser.

Or perhaps it hadn’t. Perhaps she knew full well that the sample he’d given her was not the same as the one Matthias had given him. But even if she somehow did, it didn’t seem to matter. She had gotten what she needed and that was enough.

The professor sighed as he wrapped his fingers around the glass vial. He hadn’t been lying when he said that the blood intrigued him, but his interest didn’t blind him to the potential consequences of keeping it to himself. But that is all they were – mere educated guesses. Either Lady Maria would irreversibly damage relations between their two factions or she would be disgraced, growing even more bitter as a result: a scenario that shouldn’t be left to chance. And with one simple action, Laurence believed that he had successfully averted both.

Yet this, too, was mere speculation. In the end, the outcome of this decision rested squarely on Lady Maria’s shoulders. But far from fostering greater uncertainty, Laurence believed – perhaps foolishly – that she would make the right choice or at the very least, that he had nudged her in the right direction. Though their partnership had been brief, he felt like he understood what it was that drove her – who she was behind the aloof, intimidating aura she projected. And from the looks of things, this belief was not entirely unwarranted.  

But what’s done is done. Loran, and the events that transpired within, were now behind them. And as it happened, its most prized secret now lay in the palm of his hand, just waiting to be unraveled.

And unravel it he shall.

Chapter Text

The air was frigid as Maria rode across the grand bridge to Cainhurst Castle. Snow pelted her face and her garb flowed in the stiff winds, yet she continued on unimpeded, intent on returning home as soon as she possibly could. Behind her, the horses of her fallen comrades were keeping pace, dutifully following her in spite of the perilous weather she was leading them into. Every time she looked back to check on them, a part of her foolishly hoped that she would see their masters riding atop them and a few times, she could’ve sworn she did, until they disappeared like specters in the wind. Eventually, she chose to keep her eyes focused straight ahead, knowing full well there would be no triumphant return for them.

Eventually, she found herself approaching the main gates. The journey across took mere minutes, but it never quite felt that way; traveling to Cainhurst felt much like crossing into a different world entirely, as if there were an unseen barrier hindering any aspiring visitors. But with the blessing of the Queen, anyone could find their way there. And no-one ever refused the Queen.

Even before she brought Siegward to a gallop, the gate started to open, with a volley of cries and orders passing across the wind. Very soon, a group of knights started to pour out of the castle, each of them dressed in the Castle’s decorative garb. It provided only minimal protection from the cold, but those born of Cainhurst had lived in this brutal climate for centuries, granting even the lowest-born servant a resistance far beyond that of an ordinary man. And it was because of this Maria was able to stay atop her horse without her cheeks so much as reddening, watching as the knights made their way down the grand staircase before her, with one of them hurrying ahead of the others.

“Maria?!” a familiar voice echoed amidst the bellowing gale. But even without this, she knew right away who was approaching her, prompting her to unsaddle herself and drop down onto the bridge, snow crunching beneath her feet. Soon after, Adrian became visible amidst the storm, as did his relief upon seeing her.

“Oh, thank the Gods, it’s you,” he said. “I trust your quest was a…?” As Adrian spoke, he quickly seemed to realize that something was amiss. Taking a few steps forward, he first looked over her, observing the blood that still coated her garb before finally noticing the herd of riderless horses behind her.

Shocked and confused, he turned back towards her. “Maria, what happened?” By now, the knights that had been following Adrian had gathered around them, all of them looking to her for answers. But alas, Maria had none to give. Not now.

“Where is Her Majesty?” she demanded. “I must speak to her at once.”

Her brother seemed to hesitate for a moment, but eventually relented. “In her throne room. She’s been expecting you.”

This came as no surprise to Maria, who looked towards the gate with a firm look of determination. But before she could leave, she handed Siegward’s reins over to Adrian, who was rather slow in accepting them.

“Wait for me here. Gather your men and prepare to depart as soon as I return. One last task awaits us in Loran,” Upon giving these instructions, Maria let go of the reins, only for Adrian to take hold of her hand to stop her from leaving.

“Are you certain, Maria?” he asked. “I can handle things from here.”   

Of this, she had no doubt, just as there was no doubt about her exhaustion. But regardless of how much her body was begging for her to rest, Maria took her hand away, still as determined as ever.

“I am. I owe it to them.” As she spoke, she spared one last glance at her men’s former horses, who stood ever dutifully in their absence. With a cheerless gaze, she turned back to her brother. “Make sure that they are treated well.”

A few moments after receiving these instructions, Adrian silently nodded his head in understanding, leaving Maria to return the gesture. Clenching her fists, she started making her way towards the gate, with the gathered knights parting for her along the way. Despite not looking back, Maria could feel their eyes boring into her as she ascended the staircase, until she heard Adrian issuing orders to his men, finally taking their attention off of her.

Making her way further into the castle, she passed by countless others, all of whom backed away in shock upon seeing her. Be it noble, knight or servant, none dared try to stop her as she marched through the halls, not slowing down for an instant.

As she approached the throne room, Maria quickly became aware of a figure standing at the entrance, obscured by the blowing snow. Hurrying forward, she found none other than Queen Annalise herself awaiting her, her hands folded behind her back and her silk-white hair flowing in the wind. She remained unmoving even as Maria stopped right in front of her.

“So, it is true. Thou hast returned.” Maria did not question how she knew of this. Her Majesty was always acutely aware of all that happened within her castle and perhaps, even further beyond.

Without so much as a nod, Queen Annalise turned away from her and started making her way back inside. “Come,” she beckoned, with Maria having no choice but to follow.

As she followed her up the stairs leading to her throne room, the Queen remained unusually quiet, no doubt on account of the guards that stood dutifully as they passed. But even as they entered her otherwise empty chamber, neither of them said anything, though Maria knew that she had no shortage of questions to ask her.

In time, Maria would stoop at the foot of Her Majesty’s throne, watching as she took her rightful seat and leaned against one of its arms, eyeing her expectantly. Without needing to be reminded, Maria bent the knee, lowering her head as she did.

“Now, then, captain. What tidings?”

Even still, Maria hesitated. She had long decided on what she would tell her, silently rehearsing every word on her journey here, but it didn’t make it any easier. But she knew there was no other way.

Taking a deep breath, Maria finally broke her silence. “My men…they’re gone. All of them.”

Despite the magnitude of what she’d just told her, the Queen’s only reaction was a raised brow, more resembling chagrin than any sort of shock. “Is that so? Well, that is a pity, indeed…” she eventually said, though her tone remained unchanged. Silence once again settled over the throne room as Queen Annalise observed her almost scrutinizingly, as if she were pondering over a most pressing question.

“How has this come to pass?”

Once again, Maria failed to answer. She knew there was no way she could tell her the truth – that they disobeyed her orders and abandoned their duty for her sake. But there was an aspect that she simply could not deny.

“They…they died protecting me,” she eventually answered. “Loran proved more perilous than any of us could’ve anticipated and we encountered no shortage of dangerous foes…but they did not falter. Even when I ordered them to retreat, they stood ready to fight, for they would not abandon me even as the tide turned against us.”

As she spoke, the Queen listened attentively, taking a few moments to process the information she’d given her. “Hmm…yes, We suspected as much. Thy grandfather inspired similar loyalty in his men, and he has taught thee well.”

In response, Maria silently bowed her head. Her grandfather had often spoken of the comrades he’d lost throughout his life and warned her to prepare for similar loss in her own service, but nothing he said could’ve prepared her for this harsh reality. 

Seemingly taking note of her despondence, the Queen leaned forward in her seat. “And they were dear to thee, as well, We see. Thou art like him in more ways than one…” she noted, though despite her words, the comparison did not feel entirely favorable. Afterwards, Queen Annalise leaned back on her throne, resuming her original position.

“But I must ask, captain. If the lands thou traversed were as treacherous as thou claimst, what compelled thee and thy men to continue forward? Are We to believe thou’ve returned to Us empty-handed?”

This wasn’t so much a question as it was a warning. After all, such heavy losses had to have been suffered for a reason. And, perhaps thankfully, they had.

Rather impudently rising to her feet, Maria looked the Queen in the eyes and reached inside her satchel, silently taking out the vial that Professor Laurence had given her and presented it to her. And upon seeing it, her eyes widened in shock, the mere sight of it being enough to make her almost spring up from her throne.

“Do Our eyes deceive Us?” she said, speaking so quietly that one would think she was conversing with herself.

“They do not, Your Majesty. And as you’ve no doubt guessed, it was not easily obtained,” said Maria, tightly gripping the vial before she continued on. “But it is with their sacrifice that I am able to present this to you.”

Queen Annalise’s eyes remained fixed on the vial, so much so that Maria wondered if she had even heard her. Eventually, her shock subsided, instead being replaced with a firm, greedy gaze.

“Give it to Us…” she demanded in a low, almost desperate voice, hardly befitting someone of her standing. Regardless of this, Maria tentatively started to approach her, only to have her impatiently rise out of her throne and close the distance between them, practically swiping the vial out of her hands.

Turning away from her, Queen Annalise carefully held – or more rather, clutched - the vial in her hands, holding it up high as she inspected the contents within. “Yes…this is it…” she muttered to herself as Maria looked on. “We can feel its power…a power beyond this world…”

The sense of triumph in the Queen’s words was evident, yet this feeling was lost on Maria. She knew of the Old Blood’s significance, both past and present, but after becoming the first to glimpse at it in what must’ve been centuries, it left much to be desired. Perhaps it was ignorance on her part to think so or perhaps the price paid to bring it to the surface simply hadn’t been worth it.

These feelings Maria chose to keep to herself, watching as the Queen continued to preciously hold the meager sample she’d retrieved, seemingly forgetting that she was even there. At some point, she eventually turned to look back at her, keeping the vial close to her chest.

“Thy men, captain…their sacrifice was to ensure its acquisition?” she asked.

“Yes…” Maria replied after yet another pause. “They fell in battle against its guardian, a battle in which I myself nearly lost my life. In the end, the beast was slain and only I was left to claim our prize…in spite of my best efforts to ensure I would not be.”

As she spoke, Maria ended up all but echoing Professor Laurence’s words, just as he no doubt wanted her too. She realized now that they hadn’t been a question or even an appeal, but rather a suggestion on how she should portray events to the Queen. They certainly presented a more favorable image of her company…

“We see. And what of the scholars?” Was Queen Annalise’s next question, once again putting Maria on the spot. Her answer to this question could very well alter her kingdom’s relations with Byrgenwerth, perhaps irreversibly.  

“They all survived.” Maria almost left it at that, but no matter how much she tried to convince herself otherwise, this account simply wasn’t sufficient. “And they showed great fortitude. At many points, they even offered us their help or as much as they could provide.”

“Did they, indeed?” said the Queen, appearing genuinely surprised. “And didst thou accept it?”

“Sometimes…sometimes not…” Maria bitterly replied.

To this, the Queen raised a curious brow. “Interesting. Very interesting…” she eventually said, looking once again to the vial she held in her hands.

So far, all that she had told the Queen wasn’t too far from the truth, but it was difficult to tell if she was convinced by her account. Had she so wished, she could’ve laid the truth bare and revealed the true reason behind her survival…but she chose not to. Despite her continued suspicions of him, she had no doubt that Professor Laurence’s desire for peace was genuine; were it not, this exchange would not have been possible. And as it was, her grievances did not lie with him…nor were they anyone’s business but her own.

And from the looks of things, Queen Annalise seemed to agree with her, for she did not press her further. “Ah, but no matter. It is good that thine cooperation seems to have gone smoothly. And if thine claims are true, then We owe this result in part to Professor Laurence’s leadership.”

These words felt carefully chosen, leading Maria to believe that the Queen might have greater insight than she initially believed…or perhaps not. Whatever the case may’ve been, her words rang true.

“Indeed.”

After a few more uncertain moments of silence, the corner of Queen Annalise’s lips curved into a smile, after which she started to approach her. “Make no mistake, Lady Maria. We do not seek to devalue thy accomplishment. With thy valor – with thy sacrifice, thou hast ushered in a new era for our people.” Maria remained perfectly still even as the Queen stopped just in front of her and presented the vial with both hands, as if offering proof of her success.

“And true to Our word, We will see that thy actions receive the distinction they so rightly deserve.”

 Maria looked down at the small vial in the Queen’s hands, which she handled with the same reverence and care as a newly born child. There was a certain allure to the contents inside, but even so, she refrained from taking it from her, not that she was meant to. Instead, she met her eyes and dutifully bowed to her.

“Thank you, Your Majesty,” she said.

She maintained this bow until Queen Annalise motioned for her to rise, after which she awaited further instruction. “Hmm, thou art impatient. Is thy task not complete?” she said more as an observation than a question. 

“No, it is not…” Maria replied.

After waiting a few seconds, the Queen drew an adverse sigh, seemingly understanding what it was she wanted of her. “Very well. Go if thou must…but We suspect you would’ve done so with or without Our approval.”

To this, Maria had nothing to offer in response. Instead, she merely accepted Queen Annalise’s offer and turned to leave the throne room, her mind now set on another, and much more pressing task.

“Captain!” The queen called after her, forcing her to stop and listen. “Forget not what thou art…for thine own sake.”

Yet again, Maria stayed silent and after a moment’s delay, continued on her way, leaving Queen Annalise alone in her throne room. And as she made her way back into the raging storm, she couldn’t help but ponder over the words the two of them had just exchanged…and how different it could’ve been had her original plan come to pass. How would Matthias have explained her demise? How would the Queen have reacted to such news? Would she have reacted at all?

These were questions that Maria simply could not answer. But what she did know was that no matter the accolades the Queen offered him and the others, they wouldn’t have been enough – not if she wasn’t there to share in them. It was why they had come back for her. And it was why she now went back for them.

…

Upon returning to the main gate, Maria found Adrian and his men awaiting her, having untied her company’s horses and taken their place in their saddles. Her own horse stood waiting at the front of the herd, standing just beside her brother, who cast her a silent, almost condolatory stare as she mounted Siegward once again. Neither sibling said a word as they looked at each-other, but there was nonetheless a clear sense of understanding between them. Both knew what must be done.

Turning her gaze forward, she roused Siegward with a gentle kick, sending him into a gallop. Behind her, Adrian and his men followed after her, riding with her across the bridge and back into Yharnam. It was a silent journey, with Maria not giving any sort of instruction or even an explanation as to where they were going and why. Not that she needed to, of course. Adrian had no doubt already done all the explaining for her and if he hadn’t, it wasn’t difficult to determine what they were to do.

Very soon, Maria once again found herself on the Great Bridge, which now lacked any traces of Byrgenwerth’s procession. Leaving the horses tied to the railings for some well-deserved rest, she began to lead her fellow knights down into the Tomb of Oedon, though unsurprisingly, her thoughts were entirely centered in the past. Morale had been high among her company as she led them through these very same passages, but even then, she remembered being gripped by a lingering feeling of uncertainty, one that grew stronger the closer they got to their destination. Now, she couldn’t help but wish she’d heeded it.

Once they reached the entrance to the Tomb, Maria stopped, looking over the all too familiar setting as her brother came to stand beside her. Not long after, his eyes settled on the monument at the center of the tomb or more accurately, the faint glow that could be seen at its base.

“The chalice?” he uttered seemingly to himself before turning to her in surprise. “You left it here?”

Despite the clear judgment in his voice, Maria offered no explanation for her actions. “Let us go,” she eventually said before starting to make her way inside. And after a few seconds of hesitation on their part, Adrian and his men followed.

As they made their way towards the monument, the outline of the chalice became clearer and clearer. A part of her had expected to find it missing upon her return and yet, here it was in the very same spot it had been placed. But aside from it, the Tomb was suspiciously empty. Where was…

“So… it is you.”

Maria’s head veered in the direction of the voice, as did Adrian’s. “Who goes there?!” he demanded as he reached for his weapon. But before he could draw it, Maria put up a hand to stop him, after which she walked towards where the voice had come from.

And soon, she found the scholar that Professor Laurence had left to watch over the chalice sitting on the steps on the right-hand side of the monument, showing no sign of unease even as the other knights continued to eye him in suspicion.

“You didn’t tell them I was here?” he observed as she approached.

“I did not know whether you would still be here,” Maria replied.

To this, the scholar merely smiled. “And where else should I be?” he asked her, seemingly taking no offense to her statement.

When Maria offered no answer, he stood up and slowly made his way down the steps. “Your skepticism is understandable, but misplaced. It is as my colleague said: we are not enemies.”

“So he is eager to prove,” said Maria, keeping her eyes fixed on him.

“That should tell you something, no?” “Yes. That you pity me.”

“Pity has nothing to do with it.” he replied before stopping just a few steps away. Upon doing so, he took on a more serious expression. “But for what it is worth, I am sorry about your men. From what I understand, their final act was a noble one.”

Maria soon dropped her gaze. “Noble. Valiant. Foolish.” She was speaking more to herself than to him at that moment, drawing a quiet, regretful sigh soon after she finished.

After a few moments, she looked back at Lobsang, who patiently stood among the gravestones. Much like Professor Laurence, his words had sounded genuine, but she had long grown weary of their condolences. Yet despite that, she could not bring herself to be angry with him. Really, it was difficult to say how she was feeling at that moment. But judging from his silence, he was expecting her to say something.

“I…thank you for standing guard in my absence,” she eventually said, turning away from him soon after. “I must go to them now.”

“And what then?” he asked, stopping her in her tracks and causing her to look back at him as she pondered her answer.

“They will be put to rest.” “Then you believe that this is the end for them?”

Caught off guard by his strange question, Maria turned to look back at him, unsure of how to respond. “They are dead. Nothing is going to change that,” she told him.

“That much is true,” said the scholar. “But the choices that they made in this life matter and will determine their fate in the hereafter… and even further beyond. Death is not the end, my lady, but this need not always be so.”

Despite all that Lobsang said to her, Maria found herself no less confused. The scholar’s words did not feel threatening in nature, but they also felt oddly personal, leaving her unable to tell whether they were meant as a form of consolation or as a warning – or perhaps a mixture of both. Did he know something that she did not?

“Who are you, scholar?” she asked him, even though she knew better than to expect a proper answer. Surely enough, Lobsang remained almost perfectly still, save for the small smile that appeared on his face.

“Now that is entirely up to you,” he replied and just for a moment, Maria thought she saw something briefly reveal itself in his eyes, something that she recognized all too clearly. Regret.

“Oh, enough of these vague platitudes! Answer the question.” Adrian suddenly interjected, once again coming to stand by her side.

“Ah, but I have,” Lobsang said to him. “These may seem like platitudes to you now, but one day, I promise that you will understand. Hopefully by then it won’t be too late.”

“You gain nothing by speaking in riddles!” Adrian firmly replied. “Tell me who you are and why I should let…”

“Enough! No more of this!” Maria stepped in before things could escalate further. In response, her brother reluctantly backed away, though he continued to glare at Lobsang, who conversely remained unmoved.

“Yes. I sense that I may have overstayed my welcome,” said the scholar, turning his gaze back to Maria. “I will keep you from your duty no longer. Do what you feel must be done and perhaps our paths will converge again one day. But until then…” he paused for a moment before turning his head away.

“Well, I’m sure I don’t need to repeat myself.”

With that ominous statement, Lobsang turned to leave the Tomb, calmly walking past the group of knights who had silently observed their exchange. And up until the moment he disappeared past the gate, Maria continued to look after him, pondering over what he had said to her. Of all the scholars, he was perhaps the most inscrutable and given the company he kept, that was saying something. Yet even so, it was clear that he did not merely speak in riddles.

“Aren’t you going to explain yourself?”

Finally looking away from the gate, Maria turned back to her brother, who was looking at her expectantly. “What is there to explain?”

“A fair bit, it would seem,” he said. “Namely, why you left a Holy Chalice under the watch of a scholar and an outsider, no less.”

“I had no choice,” was Maria’s prompt response.

“Did you?” Adrian was clearly not convinced. “And why would that be so? What are you not telling me?”

Against her better judgment, Maria chose to remain silent. It was no surprise to her that he felt – no, knew that something was amiss, as he so often did. But for once, she decided that it was best he remained ignorant of the truth. This was something that he needn’t concern himself with.

“We have delayed long enough,” she said, turning back towards the Chalice. “Choose which of your men will accompany us; the rest will stay behind to watch over the Chalice.”

As she walked away, she heard her brother sigh behind her. “Of course,” he agreed.

Though she did not hear him say anything afterwards, she did eventually hear a collection of footsteps behind her, indicating that he had done as she asked. With this in mind, Maria soon found herself once again standing before the Chalice, watching as an eerie white mist continued to flow from its skull-like visage in even greater volumes. And as she gazed down at its radiant light, she could swear she heard a mess of disembodied voices calling out to her, begging for her return.

And after taking a moment to collect herself, Maria knelt down and reached out to it, preparing to descend into Loran’s sandy depths once more.

...

….

Chapter Text

“And you truly believe that’s what will happen?!” As their carriage steadily clattered along the path, Laurence sat with his arms crossed, glaring at Micolash as a warning to keep his voice down.

“I have already said my piece,” he replied after a brief pause. “What’s done is done.”

“That does not make what you did any less reckless,” his colleague said. “Laurence, these nobles; they are not to be trusted.”

“I made no mention of trust,” said Laurence.

“Yet your actions tell a different story. You think this captain is different somehow – that she will somehow uphold her side of the bargain. What makes you so sure that she will?” Micolash asked, to which he didn’t have a good response.

“You presume too much,” he eventually replied.

“Do I? Or perhaps, you do not wish to admit you may’ve misconstrued her actions. You think you know her, Laurence, but I can assure you that you do not.”

Once again, he could only offer silence in response. Despite everything, a part of him felt that Micolash was right. After all, their alliance had been far too brief for him, or anyone else to claim they could remotely understand her.

“And do you?”

It was Micolash’s turn to fall silent. “I…base my conclusions on what I can observe.”

“As do I,” Laurence promptly replied. “And I’ve ‘observed’ things that you simply have not.”

He was clearly none too pleased with this accusation, regardless of its standing in fact. “And do you believe everything you see?” he asked.

“No,” Laurence admitted. “But when something happens often enough, it becomes hard to attribute it to mere chance. And the pattern I’ve observed has been fairly consistent.”

He didn’t feel the need to specify what this ‘pattern’ was and judging from the skeptical look on Micolash’s face, he didn’t need to. After all, he had observed it as well, albeit in a more limited sense.

“Maybe so,” he conceded. “But is it enough to form a proper conclusion?”

“You seem to have,” Laurence pointed out. “Or perhaps, you merely sought to confirm what you already thought to be true.”

“Hmph, I can say the same about you,” Micolash quickly retorted. But rather than causing any offence, this merely made Laurence smile.

“Then I suppose we’ll have to wait and see which one of us will be validated,” he said, prompting Micolash to smirk right back at him as he leaned back in his seat and crossed his arms.

“Yes, I suppose so,” he agreed.

From there, the ride passed in relative silence. Laurence could tell that he wasn’t going to make Micolash budge, but then again, his colleague was unlikely to do the same for him either. Still, he considered this discussion of theirs to have been a productive one; both of them had maintained a restrained, professional tone until the very end and hadn’t sought to escalate their argument more than was needed. But most importantly, Laurence could now guarantee that Micolash wouldn’t speak a word of what happened to Master Willem.

Because at the end of the day, he was a scholar and there was nothing a scholar desired more than the chance to be proven right.   

Soon after their carriage finally came to a stop, its door was opened by Dores, who looked between the two of them with some relief. “Ah, you are both in one piece. Master Willem will be most relieved.”

Laurence was just about to respond before being prematurely interrupted by another voice. “Come now, Dores. He never doubted that they would return. Did you?” Very soon, Gehrman wandered into view, having insisted on riding on horseback just in front of their carriage; to “keep an eye out”, as he’d said.

“Of course not. I always had faith,” Dores soon replied.

“Yes. We were quite fortunate, indeed…” Laurence remorsefully said before making his way out of the carriage, after which he turned to Dores. “Where is Master Willem? We must speak to him urgently.”

“Certainly, sir,” he said before motioning towards the estate. “He’s waiting for you out on the lookout. I trust that you can find your way there.”

“Of course,” Laurence replied. “Thank you, Dores.”

In response to this, the headmaster’s servant nodded dutifully before standing aside, allowing Laurence to proceed onward with Micolash and Gehrman in tow. From there, he led them inside the manor and up the stairs to the upper level, where they found the vast gates leading to the lookout wide open. Stepping out onto the walkway, Laurence was greeted with a familiar, but no less breathtaking sight; the almost legendary Moonside Lake, on whose coast the estate was built. But apart from its scenic beauty, the lake somehow felt…otherworldly, a feeling that became clear to all those who bore witness to it.

It was no wonder then that Master Willem was so fascinated by it, which led to him retreating to this lookout whenever he was able. And as it happened, he was in the midst of this very ritual when they discovered him, reclining in his rocking chair as he stared out at the water, seemingly unaware of his newly arrived visitors. But of course, Laurence knew better.

“You have returned,” said the headmaster without so much as a glance. “I trust that the rest of your fellows are well?”

“Yes, Master Willem. No casualties or injuries to report,” Laurence confirmed.

“Good. That is good.” Still, he did not turn toward them, though he did move one of his hands to rest on the handle of his rocking chair. Soon afterwards, Laurence heard a soft mewling sound, something that made his heart soar with excitement.

“Nora!” he called out before she had even peeked out from behind her caretaker’s rocking chair. As he rushes over, she drops down onto the walkway and excitedly goes over to greet him, wagging her tail as she rubs her head against his leg. With a wide smile on his face, Laurence crouched down to pick her up, giving her a hug soon after.

“It’s so good to see you…” he softly said to her, being further rewarded with the somewhat rough feeling of her tongue against his cheek. This was by no means the first time he had been separated from Nora, but he always had the comfort of knowing he’d see her again in good time. But of course, he simply didn’t have that sense of certainty this time, but at least he could be certain that she would still have a home.

“She’s been quite anxious lately. No doubt wondering when you’d come back to us,” he heard Master Willem say, drawing Laurence’s attention back to him. But beyond just this, it reminded him of a question he’d had ever since they returned to the surface.

“How long have we been gone?”

“Five days. Today would’ve been the sixth,” his headmaster answered.

“What?!” Laurence exclaimed in shock. “But…that’s impossible.”

 And in response to this, his master finally turned his head and posed him a simple question. “Is it?”

Naturally, Laurence stopped to think this over. From the moment he found himself there, he had felt like he had stepped in another world entirely and not just from a visual sense. Time seemed to move slower, if at all, which he had attributed to them not being able to easily gauge the time of day, as the sky was hidden from them. But beyond just this, one need only look at the reason they had ventured there to begin with to see why such a prospect wasn’t out of the realm of possibility.

Seeing that he had reached the conclusion he’d wanted, Master Willem turned his gaze back towards the lake. “Now, won’t you tell me what you did in that time?”

Laurence was experienced enough to know that this wasn’t a mere inquiry. But before he answered, the professor briefly looked back towards his two companions, but namely Gehrman, who gave him an affirming nod without Micolash being the wiser.

Before he spoke, he took a moment to put Nora back down, leaving her to circle around his legs. “We managed to recover several artifacts, as well as making quite a few fascinating discoveries. Caryll was particularly helpful in that regard,” he briefly recounted.

“I’m sure she was,” Master Willem commented, yet despite the rather general nature of Laurence’s statement, he didn’t inquire further.

Caryll’s behavior during the expedition baffled him even now, as did the strange voices that emerged when he glanced at her symbol. Yet her secrecy on the matter suggested that this wasn’t the first time this had happened and that she had chosen to keep it to herself. Or had she?

“Yes, we have plenty of opportunities for further study,” Laurence said, deciding that it was a matter for another time. As it was, they had more pressing matters to attend to.

“But there’s something else that you need to know. There’s been… a major development.”

This seemed to catch the headmaster’s attention, as he fully turned his head towards him. “And what would that be?” he asked.

For a moment, Laurence hesitated, knowing the potential repercussions what he was about to say could have. And so, he didn’t say anything at all. Instead, he turned back towards where Micolash and Gehrman were looking at him expectantly, motioning for the former to come to them. After a moment of visible surprise, his fellow professor complied, joining him by Master Willem’s side and reaching into his satchel. Yet before he could even reveal it, the headmaster leaned forward in his seat, gripping its handles as if in shock.

“Can it be…?” he uttered to himself.

In Micolash’s hands was the mysterious pot they had discovered in the depths of Loran. It was a miracle that it hadn’t shattered when its altar was destroyed and an even greater miracle that Lady Maria hadn’t noticed that it was missing or questioned what had happened to it. But though he hadn’t seen it happen, Laurence had known at once that it was Micolash who had taken it…and against his better judgement, had attempted to make sure this act was never discovered.

Despite the covering on his eyes, Master Willem stared at the object in abject shock. “By the heavens, it is…” he said before attempting to rise from his rocking chair.

However, he did so too swiftly, causing him to grab his staff with both hands as he attempted to balance himself. Seeing this, Laurence rushed to his side; there were no railings on the lookout and a fall from this height would mean certain death. But before he could help him, the headmaster raised a hand to indicate he was fine, prompting Laurence to stand aside as he slowly walked over to Micolash. Once he reached him, he reached out to the pot, as if holding back the urge to swipe it from him.

“A Holy Chalice. But…how is it you’ve come to possess this?”

“It is complicated, Master Willem,” said Micolash. “But I can assure you that our ‘benefactors’ are not aware that we do.”

This made their headmaster finally look up at him. “Then I assume you did not use this to access the labyrinths?”

“No, it is not,” he confirmed. “We discovered this chalice deep within the tomb. The one that we used to gain entry to Loran remains in Cainhurst’s hands. At least, I assume that this is the case.”

“You assume?” said Master Willem, clearly puzzled. “Why would they claim one Holy Chalice and not the other?”

“They were, shall we say, preoccupied.” Laurence couldn’t help but notice a sense of indifference in Micolash’s words, which compelled him to finally break his silence.

“What he means to say is that they…well, Lady Maria still required its use. Once her own duty is fulfilled, she means to return to Loran in order to recover the bodies of her company, for she is all that remains.”

This brief summary put Master Willem’s attention squarely on him. “So, the perils of Loran proved too much for them. Just as I thought…” he muttered as if to himself. But before Laurence could question him on what he meant, he was posed yet another question.

“Yet if that is so, how is it she was able to survive when her men did not?”

Despite this being something that Laurence knew he would need to explain eventually, he once again found himself hesitant to do so. In the brief silence that followed, he noticed Gehrman looking at him, as if sensing his reluctance. Realizing at once what he meant to do, Laurence prepared to stop him, but did so too late.

“She wouldn’t have. Not without outside intervention,” was Gehrman’s simple explanation. But rather than appearing shocked or even sparing him a glance, Master Willem quietly sighed to himself.

“Yours, I would imagine?” he asked or rather, stated. And to his credit, Gehrman did nothing to deny this, replying with a simple “Yes,” and nothing more.

For the next few moments, the only sound that could be heard was the soft movement of the water below, during which Master Willem finally decided to turn towards his old acquaintance. “This was not part of our agreement…” he sternly reminded him.

“I am aware, Master Willem. But you wanted me to look for a way to further expand our research and so I did. Lady Maria’s survival is of no consequence to us,” Gehrman calmly explained.

“But is it of service to us?” the headmaster then asked.

“Not yet,” was his somewhat cryptic answer. It was then Laurence remembered something Gehrman had said to him the day before or rather, didn’t tell him. He had no doubt that he was planning something or at the very least, that his actions that night weren’t decided on a whim. Whatever his gamble was, only time would tell whether it would pay off.

But whatever it was, it hadn’t been something Master Willem had accounted for. A rarity, indeed.

“Well, at the very least I understand how it is you are able to present this to me,” he said. “But there was a reason you were supposed to keep your ‘capabilities’ a secret. Regardless of your intentions, she now sees you as a threat. Do you think that Queen Annalise won’t as well?”

“She would…if she were to ever find out,” Laurence once again interjected. “And I can assure you that she won’t.”

“How can you be so sure?” asked Master Willem.

“Because Lady Maria is the only one who could divulge that information to her…and I gave her a reason not to,” he revealed, but did not do so proudly. Regardless of whether his master caught onto this or not, he appeared rather surprised to learn of this.

“A threat?” he calmly guessed.

“No, nothing of the kind. Like us, she and her men ventured into Loran for a reason, though she had her own goal beyond her mission. I realized what it was and gave her the means to ensure it was fulfilled…at least, to a degree. And in order to do this, she’ll need to present a very specific account of what happened, one not entirely rooted in truth.”

Laurence’s master took a moment to process all of this information. “Hmm…” he murmured as he looked at the other two present, as if seeking verification. Of course, both of them were able to give it with their expressions alone, which seemed to be enough for him.

“And you trust that she will do this?” he then asked Laurence, leaving him with no choice but to answer truthfully.

“I do.”

A part of him felt foolish even saying these words, but it was what he believed. He knew what he did was risky and even more so, ethically dubious; using someone’s grief in order to achieve a desirable outcome. But deep down, he knew he had no choice. He needed to ensure that their research could not only continue, but reach even greater heights.

However, he himself was omitting a major detail from his account, just as Lady Maria was. What’s more, the only other two people who knew the full extent of his plan chose not to reveal this information either, leaving Master Willem ignorant of the full truth. And if he suspected that something was amiss, he did not voice it.

“I see. A complex situation indeed…so it is good that you seem to have handled it with care,” he eventually said before placing a hand on his shoulder. “But I expect no less from you.”

As he stared at his master’s veiled eyes, Laurence nodded silently. He did not enjoy keeping secrets from him, but he realized that it was better this way. Regardless of whether he truly believed him or whether Lady Maria would succeed in convincing Queen Annalise, Master Willem was not prepared to take pre-emptive action against Cainhurst and right now, that was enough.

Besides, he had a reputation of his own to maintain.

After giving him the slightest hint of a smile, Master Willem let go of his shoulder and turned to look at the others, both of whom had remained silent: Gehrman observed them with a rigid, but proud look in his eyes; Micolash with an ever so subtle frown.

“But do not mistake me. This is a momentous day, one that marks a major turning point in our research. And you should all be proud of the part you’ve played in making it a reality.”   

Finally, Micolash stepped up, still holding the chalice. “With all due respect, Master Willem, I fear that this may not be as beneficial to us as you might think. The use of a holy chalice requires a specific sacrifice and alas, we weren’t able to retrieve any suitable materials. Any we did find were claimed by the Knights of Cainhurst…and were no doubt destroyed upon their deaths.”

Though what he said was of course true, Laurence couldn’t help but sense an almost accusatory tone to his words. Somehow, he doubted that Micolash hadn’t been aware of the chalice’s usefulness when he took it for his own or of how Master Willem would react to him doing so. And most importantly, of how Laurence had no choice but to allow the knights to strip them of whatever materials they found.

After casting him a brief sideward glance, Micolash continued. “In short, we have no way to use it.”

“That, Master Micolash, may not be entirely true,” Gehrman suddenly said, walking over to stand beside him. Upon reaching him, he held out his hands, as if prompting him to hand it to him. And after a moment of reluctance, Micolash did just that, allowing the older scholar to observe the chalice in greater detail.

“Yes, it’s as I thought,” he said. “This chalice is not linked to any one part of Pthumeru. Hypothetically, it can be used to access any part of the labyrinths, though we will not have any control on where we end up. And most importantly, we will have no need for any special materials.”

Despite lacking any real evidence for his claims, Gehrman spoke with utmost confidence, something that aroused Laurence’s curiosity. “How do you know this?” he asked him.

“I don’t. It’s only a hunch,” Gehrman once again surprised him by saying, just before smiling and turning to Master Willem. “But if you give me a few days, I should be able to figure out how it works.”

After thinking it over for a moment. Master Willem came to a decision. “Very well. Contact me when you have reached a conclusion. Let us hope it is a positive one.”

In response, Gehrman bowed his head. “Indeed, Master Willem,” he agreed. “I will do my best.”

Yet again, Laurence found himself feeling somewhat perplexed, as if he had missed something obvious. “And what are we to do, Master?” he asked in order to get his attention.

“Nothing yet,” he answered. “All I can ask of you is to await further instruction, but beyond that, you should take the time to rest.” After taking a brief pause, he unexpectedly chuckled. “Ah, but I forget who I’m talking to. You already have something to occupy yourself with…don’t you, Laurence?”

Naturally, he was taken aback by this question. Normally, he wouldn’t have thought much of it, but present circumstances urged him to chose his answer carefully

“I have a few ideas, yes,” he acknowledged, but said no more than that. Not that he needed to, of course.

“In that case, I will not keep you any longer. You are all free to go,” said Master Willem.

Yet despite this invitation, no one moved. As Laurence tried to make sense of this sudden shift in demeanor, he felt Nora slightly rub against his leg, looking down to see her pacing slowly around him, a sense of impatience in her eyes. After letting out a quiet sigh, he finally relented.

“Come along, now, Nora. Let’s go home,” he softly said, clicking his tongue to signal her to follow him back into the manor. Soon afterwards, Micolash and Gehrman also decided to follow after him, almost as if they were awaiting his response before acting themselves. As for Master Willem, he remained behind on the lookout, watching as they walked away.

“Oh, and Laurence!” he beckoned, prompting him to stop and look back at him. “Try not to get too preoccupied. For your own sake.”

Though this ‘warning’ sounded friendly in nature, Laurence couldn’t help but feel apprehensive. As he stood there, staring blankly back at his master, a part of him swore that his attention was not on him, but rather on his satchel, forcing him to fight back the instinctive urge to reach for it and hide it from view. Instead, he merely nodded his understanding and turned to continue on his way, leaving Master Willem alone to resume his meditation.

He tried to convince himself he was being paranoid. Master Willem tended to be enigmatic even when he didn’t mean to be, as someone as reserved as him often was. But he was also highly perceptive, almost to an inhuman degree. Was it possible that he…

No. No, that was ridiculous. Perhaps he might’ve deduced that there was something he wasn’t being told, but there was no conceivable way for him to know what that was. After all, Laurence hadn’t told him. None of them had told him. But judging from the looks on Micolash and Gehrman’s faces, it was obvious they held the same suspicion as him…and that they wished to discourage him from pursuing this ‘idea’ of his.

But Laurence paid them no heed. This was something he simply couldn’t ignore.

…

Upon returning home, Laurence almost immediately started making preparations to leave again. But before then, he would allow Nora some time to settle back in, preparing her a fresh meal and otherwise giving her the attention she desired. Thankfully, she didn’t hold his extended absence against him; from the way she acted, it was as if he had never left.

As much as he didn’t like leaving her, it was nonetheless something that happened often. His profession required a great deal of commitment, giving him very little time to himself, if any. That isn’t to say it wasn’t well-suited to him, of course. Laurence had never been one to stay put; he enjoyed having something that he could devote hours, days or even years of focus to.

But no matter how devoted he was to his research, he could never abandon Nora, leading him to take her along for many a late-night stay in his office. It must’ve been frustrating for her, no doubt, but she’d mostly gotten used to this rather erratic lifestyle and for that, he couldn’t be more grateful. For the longest time, she’d been the closest thing to family he had…well, aside from Master Willem, he supposed.

Yet there were some places where he simply couldn’t take her. And so, after Nora retired to her sleeping basket for some well-deserved rest, Laurence gave her one more warm glance before quietly closing the door behind him and venturing out into Yharnam’s streets once again.

It was a pleasant day outside, with the sun shining brightly overhead, with only a few clouds to occasionally obscure it. Even though the summer heat hadn’t subsided during his time away, it did not begin to compare to the sweltering humidity he had experienced in Loran. But even putting that aside, the feeling of the sun’s rays shining down on him came as a welcome relief from the near constant darkness of the underground, as well as giving him a sense of security that until then he’d taken for granted.

And as he passed by his fellow citizens in the street – some walking alone, some with their families - he couldn’t help but view them in a new light. They were ignorant to the civilization they treaded over day after day and to the unspeakable horror that still dwelled within it. How would they react when the world they thought they knew was suddenly uprooted? Could they ever truly feel safe again?

Unfortunately, these were questions that he knew very few of them had ever considered, but there came a time in every person’s life where they had to come to terms with their mortality. But beyond that, he knew that what everyone desired most was that sense of security and more subconsciously, something or someone that can give it to them.  

And it was for this reason the professor found himself constantly being stopped by his fellow citizens, who offered him warm greetings and, in some cases, prolonged declarations of gratitude. And though he engaged each one of them with a friendly disposition, Laurence was quick to excuse himself. As gratifying as their kind words were, he had somewhere he needed to be and thankfully, it didn’t take him long to get there.

Tucked away in a corner of Central Yharnam, in the shadow of the Great Bridge, there was a gate that led to a small, seemingly nondescript building. During the day, it was left wide open, allowing anyone to enter, something that he was happy to see hadn’t changed in his absence. After passing through the gate, he soon reached a set of ornate doors, which he managed to open without need of a key.

Upon stepping inside, he was greeted with the sound of creaking floorboards, shifting bottles and very soon, heavy coughing. The very air felt like it was foul with disease, but this was something that Laurence had come to accept, allowing him to continue inside without hesitation. And soon, he found himself inside a crowded clinic, where a handful of doctors worked tirelessly to treat the great number of patients, young and old, that were crowded within the room.

Among them was a young woman with auburn hair, clad in white medicinal robes, who stood speaking with two other doctors. As their conversation seemed to come to an end, she pointed towards a wheelchair bound patient in the corner of the room and then further into the clinic, which led to the two others rushing off in separate directions. Once this was done, however, she finally seemed to notice him out of the corner of her eye, leading to her turning towards him in complete shock.

“Master Laurence?!” The moment she said this, the clinic suddenly came to a standstill, with doctor and patient alike turning to look towards the doorway where he still stood. After getting over their surprise, the doctors dutifully stood at attention, but Laurence merely lifted his hand to put them at ease before he made his way further inside.

“Hello, Iosefka,” he greeted the woman. “I trust that all is well?”

Despite this question, the young doctor continued to stare at him in wide-eyed wonder before suddenly throwing her arms around him. “Oh, thank the Gods, it’s true! You’ve returned!”

With a small chuckle, Laurence embraced her as well. “Yes, I have returned,” he confirmed, more to reassure her than anything else. He couldn’t blame her for being worried, but from the looks of things, she hadn’t let this get in the way of her duties.

Eventually, Iosefka seemed to realize the attention she was drawing to them, causing her to release him just as suddenly as she’d embraced him. “My apologies, sir,” she said as she took a step back and lowered her head in embarrassment. “I just…didn’t expect to see you back so soon.”

“Not to worry,” he assured her. “How’ve things been?”

“About the same as they always are, I’m afraid,” Iosefka replied. “We’ve been trying to keep pace as best as we could, but as you can see, the sick are simply too many.”

“Yes, I expected as much…” Laurence solemnly said as he looked around the crowded clinic, where in the absence of traditional beds, several patients were laid on metal surgical tables, seemingly struggling to even stay conscious. And this space was meant to be reserved for less severe cases.

“How many dead?” he quietly asked.

“More than a dozen,” she replied. “We…didn’t have any room to store their bodies.”

To this, Laurence could only sigh. At the very least, this was less than he had expected, but failing to save even one patient left a permanent mark on a doctor, much less a dozen. But it was an inevitable reality of the profession, one that he taught each and every one of his students to accept, despite knowing full well that it didn’t make things any easier, as Iosefka so clearly demonstrated.

“Do not dwell on it. You did all you could,” he said to her.

“I know,” she acknowledged. “But that number will only grow higher before the day is done.”

“Be that as it may, your work in this clinic ensures that they have a higher chance of survival,” Laurence reminded her, placing a comforting hand on her shoulder. “So, it is good that you kept it open in my stead.”

“Someone has to.” Was Iosefka’s reply, with which he could not argue.

When Laurence first opened this clinic, it was the only major medical institution in Yharnam; almost a decade later and it still was. Despite this, their resources were limited only to what Byrgenwerth, as well as the general public, could provide them, which in most cases was sufficient, but made it all but certain they would be overwhelmed in the event of a major outbreak. He had done everything in his power to improve the conditions of the facility, but continued to fall short. Yet these constant setbacks did little to deter him, which is exactly why he found himself here today.

“Anyway, do forgive me for barging in so suddenly,” he said as he released Iosefka’s shoulder. “Is our laboratory available?”

“Yes, yes, of course. We have only been using it to store supplies,” she replied. “I assume that is why you are here?

“It is. I have something that requires my attention,” Laurence confirmed.

With an understanding nod, Iosefka motioned towards the staircase behind her. “Right this way,” she said, prompting him to follow her up the stairs and then, into a long hallway, where several more patients were being tended to. Of course, Laurence already knew the way to the laboratory, but he figured she would benefit from the momentary distraction.

“This matter that brings you here. Is it related to the labyrinths?” Iosefka asked him as they walked.

“Indeed,” Laurence replied without hesitation. “Whilst there, we discovered…well, I’m not too sure what. And now that Master Willem has placed something of a pause on our activities, now’s as good a time as any to deduce what it is.”

“I see,” said Iosefka, leading to a brief pause. “And Amelia, is she…?”

“Amelia is safe. I insisted that she and the others take some time to rest,” he briefly explained before looking over to her. “And after today, it is only right that you do the same.”

“And what about you, master? When do you intend to rest?” Despite the smile she wore as she asked this question, there was a clear sense of concern behind her words. The brief sleep Laurence had fallen into the night before had done little to relieve him of his fatigue, with the constant traveling he’d been subjected to today only worsening matters. Still, he had no intention of resting.

“When my work is complete,” he finally replied.

“I thought as much,” said Iosefka. “Then we’d best ensure that you are not delayed…or interrupted.”

Laurence couldn’t help but smile in response. “Most definitely,” he agreed.

Not long after, the two of them turned a corner close to the middle of the hallway, which led them into a room with a small winding staircase, beyond which the laboratory could be found. Stopping at the foot of the staircase, Laurence turned back towards Iosefka, who had stopped just a few steps behind him.

“Are you not coming?” he asked.

“I’m afraid I cannot. There is still much for me to do.”

This was by no means surprising. Laurence knew from experience that there was never a calm moment in the clinic, especially at this hour in the day. It was a responsibility very few could handle.

“Well, if all goes well, I will try to relieve some of your burden,” he offered her.

“Thank you, sir, but I cannot ask that of you,” she politely replied. “Do what you must and for as long as is needed. I will keep the place in order in the meantime.”

Realizing that he wasn’t going to change her mind, Laurence nodded his head. “I know you will,” he quietly said. “Go.”

After sharing a quick smile, Iosefka turned to return to the sickrooms, but not before taking the time to close the doors behind her to ensure no one would disturb him. Even after he could no longer see her through the glass portions of the door, Laurence continued to look after her. She’d always been a gifted student, and even more so, a dedicated one. So, when the time came to decide who would head the clinic during his time in Loran, he couldn’t have asked for a finer surrogate.

With yet another sigh, the professor finally turned to ascend the staircase, bringing himself up to the level of the chandelier that hung from the ceiling. From there, he passed through one more doorway, after which he found himself standing in a small medical room. Countless shelves filled to the brim with various containers and medical supplies lined the walls, through which Laurence rummaged to acquire the instruments he needed, which he brought over to a small workstation on the right-hand side of the room.

When all was said and done, Laurence had before him a small glass pipette, a microscope and an accompanying collection of sliders, as well as his notebook. After lighting a candle and pulling up a chair, Laurence finally took out the object of his curiosity; the vial of blood he’d received from Matthias. Despite its apparent mundanity, he recognized that there was something…special about it, something that became clear even before it was revealed that it was coveted by Cainhurst itself. And above all else, he hoped that he would soon discover why that was.

After placing a slider on the stage of the microscope, Laurence carefully removed the cork from the vial and tipped it over just enough to allow the edge of his pipette to reach its contents, extracting a small sample before setting it off to the side. After pushing out a small drop of the thick substance onto the slider, he stood up in order to look into the eyepiece, adjusting its focus so as to get a clear vision of the sample.

And once he did, he found himself at a loss as to what he was looking at. It was blood, that much was certain; he had observed enough of it over the years to realize that. But this was unlike anything he’d ever seen before. It looked…pure.

“Interesting…” he murmured to himself.

As he stood back up to his full height, Laurence found himself hearkening back to the moment he first laid eyes on this strange blood. How his mind had been overtaken by that incoherent voice, which only seemed to grow louder the closer he got to it. Beyond that, he also remembered something Caryll had said; how the chamber had been “blessed”, somehow.

With these facts in mind, Laurence carefully removed the present slider and put another one in its place. Afterwards, he noticed a scalpel lying on a shelf just next to him, which he soon took in his hand, bringing it, as well as his right index finger, over the slider. After a brief moment of hesitation, the professor used the instrument to create a small cut on the tip of his appendage, slightly wincing as he waited for a drop of his blood to fall onto the thin piece of glass below.

Once a sufficient amount had been accumulated, Laurence set the scalpel aside and looked into the eyepiece once again, not even bothering to clean his wound as he attempted to focus on his blood’s properties. After this was done and he felt like he had a good perspective of its make-up, he substituted it for the initial sample. Just as he thought, they were alike…and yet, not.

“Very interesting…”

…

Chapter Text

There was a patch of land in Hemwick Charnel Lane, close to the precipice of the bridge leading to Cainhurst Castle, whose grounds were littered with countless tombstones. It was here where most of Cainhurst’s dead were put to rest, as what little land the castle was built on was simply not suitable for burial. Those who were exalted in life received a grand ceremony honoring their accomplishments, before being entombed in one of many cathedrals on the castle grounds. But these ceremonies were far and few between, seeing as they were reserved for members of nobility and the most decorated of knights.

And it was because of this that Maria found herself standing alone on the hillside, her garb blowing in the bitter wind as she looked down at a collection of sparsely labeled tombstones, on which the names of her men were inscribed.

The process of burying them had been long and lacking in ceremony. Though their fellow knights had aided in retrieving their bodies and putting them to rest, they did not linger long and returned to the castle soon after their duty was complete. Adrian stayed with her the longest, standing on the foot of the hill on which they were buried and looking after her, as if to make sure that no-one disturbed her. But he must’ve realized that she had no intention of leaving them, as after a time, he silently mounted his horse and left her be, all while she didn’t so much as turn to look over her shoulder.

Maria didn’t know how long she’d been standing there; minutes or perhaps hours. But no matter how much time went by, the cloud of grief looming over her only grew. Any apologies or consolations she would have offered them would ring hollow, because nothing could change the fact that she had led them to their doom. They followed her unwaveringly, their hearts singing with loyalty…and what had it brought them?

After an untold amount of time had gone by, Maria chose to get down on one knee, lowering her head and clasping her hands together in front of it. “O fleeting will of the ancients,” she whispered. “Let these fallen souls rest. Let them find peace in death that they could not find in life. And let not their noble deeds – their sacrifice – be lost to time. So that they were not lost in vain.”

After concluding her prayer, she remained in that position for a few more fleeting moments, hoping that by some miracle it would be heard. Maria very rarely invoked the Great Ones and it was unlikely she would’ve done so then had it not been for Lobsang’s ominous words. She had never stopped to consider what came after death, but the thought of her men languishing in a state of limbo terrified her. Perhaps she shouldn’t have put this much confidence in his words, but she knew better than to dismiss them outright. She had bore witness to far less conceivable things.

After rising to her feet and solemnly glancing at their graves one last time, the captain finally turned to leave, finding Siegward grazing at the spot she had hitched him. After affectionately placing her hand on his neck, Maria freed him and once again hoisted herself up onto his saddle, guiding her steed into a slow trot as she led him back towards the bridge. Despite knowing she had no choice, it pained her to leave her men behind like this, but at the very least, she had made it so they were buried close to their home rather than under the bitter sands of Loran.

It was the only source of comfort she had now, aside from a single, nebulous promise.

…

Upon her return to Cainhurst Castle, Maria finally returned Siegward to the stables, allowing him to rejoin the rest of his herd. As the mutilated bodies of her men were laid out in preparation for burial, she had seen a few of their horses investigating the scene, even gently nudging their heads with their snouts, as if they were trying to rouse them awake. They would find new riders in time, but judging from their visibly despondent behavior, it would not be an easy process for them.

Maria spent a fair bit of time in the stables, offering receptive horses comforting touches before she finally decided to depart. She would happen upon several more of her fellow knights on her journey through the castle, who all seemed to know that something was wrong. Yet in spite of this, none of them tried to confront her about it, something that she suspected was more the result of a sweeping command rather than respect or pity, for out of every knight she encountered, Adrian was not one of them.

In time, she would find herself back in her quarters. But what should’ve been a relieving end to an arduous journey proved to be anything but.

After removing the sheathes for her weapons, she held them both out before her. She had neglected cleaning them after that fateful encounter in the chamber, allowing the dark, corrupted blood of her adversary to dry on her blades, leaving countless stains. Yet for all her efforts, she had found herself helpless, unable to do anything to stop the senseless slaughter that followed.

Maria’s hands tightened around the grips of her weapons, but ultimately, she merely reconnected them and placed the Rakuyo back on its display stand. After spending more time than was necessary simply looking back at her reflection in the blade, she finally turned away, but she did so not knowing what to do next.

Left with little other choice, she settled into a chair by her windowsill, watching as torrents of snow continued to swirl outside. At times, her window would rattle from the force of the winds, but Maria remained almost entirely motionless, resting her cheek on her palm as she rested her elbow on the wooden joist. And once again, the passage of time was completely lost on her, even as the skies outside grew darker before her eyes.

The sound of roaring winds would finally be interrupted by a knock on her door, but even this wasn’t enough to break her almost blank gaze away. After a couple more knocks, she heard a calm, but still clearly concerned voice. “Maria? Maria, are you there?”

With a quiet sigh, she finally chose to reply. “Yes, father.”

Soon after, the door to her quarters was opened, though Maria’s attention remained on her window. Only after she heard the door being closed did she turn to face her sudden, but not entirely unexpected visitor, who simply stood in place and furrowed his brow, as if he couldn’t decide on what to say.

“Maria…” he stopped for a moment, letting out a sigh before continuing. “Her Majesty informed me of what happened. I cannot express how relieved I am to see you safe.”

No matter how genuine his words sounded, they did not provide the assurance he might’ve wished they would. “A small comfort for the ones who died in my place,” she said as she turned to look back out the window.

“You mourn?” her father observed, but he by no means sounded surprised. Rather, he sounded disappointed.

“My men…they are the reason I find myself before you now,” she replied, once again looking towards him, but not quite meeting his eyes. “Surely, Her Majesty informed you of that as well.”

“She did,” her father acknowledged. “As well as your ground-breaking discovery. She wanted me to tell you that she’s already started making preparations for a ceremony dedicated to unveiling it, as well as honoring your acc…your company’s accomplishment.”

His blunder did not go unnoticed, assuming it was one at all. “Then she means to honor our agreement?” said Maria.

“The Queen always keeps her word, Maria. You should know that by now,” he replied.

“Indeed,” she replied. “So why tell me what I already know?”

This question seemed to catch him off guard, if just a little. He must’ve known that her and Queen Annalise had already discussed these matters at length, so she doubted that he was only here to inform her of this upcoming event, especially if he chose to do so in this setting. And from the looks of things, her suspicion was correct.

“My daughter, I understand why you chose to walk this path, but it was never meant for someone like you. What happened in Loran, it was…”

“It was what?!” Maria bitterly demanded, finally rising from her seat. “Expected? Acceptable? Necessary?”

“You knew how perilous your mission was,” was all he said in response.

“Of course, I did. All of us did. Yet clearly, that didn’t matter. After all, what did we really stand to lose?” She did not even attempt to conceal her frustration, firmly marching towards her father, who didn’t so much as budge.

“You, Maria. By your own account, you nearly lost your life,” he reminded him.

“And what of my men?!” she yelled. “Did their lives not matter? They served our kingdom with distinction and you sent them to their deaths!”

“That wasn’t my decision!” he reminded her, finally raising his voice.

“And who would Her Majesty listen to if not you?!” Maria demanded. “You’ve had her ear for decades, yet not once have I seen you challenge her! Not even to protect…”

Suddenly, her father’s hand shot up, pointing a finger directly in front of her face. “Do not…mention her…” His voice was quiet, but laced with an undeniable sense of anger, as well as grief. Though she hadn’t even blinked when he raised his hand on her, Maria heeded his warning, holding his eyes until he finally relented, solemnly lowering his head and clenching his fist as he brought it back down.

“Maria, who…what your mother was doesn’t matter. You are of royal blood; you and Adrian both. As a result, there are certain expectations you have to fulfill and if you do not, it will be used against you. Against those who matter most to you.”

Upon concluding this thinly-disguised warning, her father finally met her eyes again, putting his regret on full display. But that mattered little to Maria, for what she heard wasn’t wisdom or care, but cowardice.

“Then I should value my standing above the lives of others?” she asked, bringing what he had said to its logical conclusion. And as expected, he had no answer to give.

A few more tense moments ticked by before Maria’s father turned his back on her, leaving her to watch as he walked towards the door. But rather than slamming it shut behind him, he suddenly paused and looked back at her one more time.

“Consider your actions carefully, Maria. If you don’t, I fear there may be no coming back from them,” he said just before he calmly closed the door, leaving her alone with her thoughts once more.

Turning away from the door, she once again lowered her head in mourning, just as the tears she’d been suppressing that entire day finally started to flow. But of the mess of emotions that finally broke her down, regret for what she’d said to her father wasn’t one of them. Perhaps he’d realized he won’t be able to get through to her or perhaps he believed it was better to bide his time, thinking that she would be more receptive later. But whatever the case may be, Maria had no intention of ever forgiving him, not after what he did. He was her father in name only.

Yet above all else, she found herself consumed by anger and frustration. All of this could’ve been avoided if they had simply chosen to leave the Tombs of the Gods behind for good; allowing the past to remain buried. But history is only as effective a teacher as one lets it be and clearly, Queen Annalise, as well as her counterpart in Byrgenwerth believed that they had nothing left to learn.

Byrgenwerth…

Maria raised her chin, looking at her disgruntled reflection on her window as the storm continued to rage outside. Her men didn’t need to die. That she still lived was proof enough of that. Her “savior” wanted her to think he tried to save them as well and that he had simply arrived too late, but she knew better. With their deaths, she would be more malleable to his master’s suggestions, not just emotionally, but physically as well. They thought they could control her…tame her…

And she would soon show them what a mistake that is.

Chapter Text

The life of a Byrgenwerth scholar was a restless one. There was always some sort of inquiry happening behind the scenes, enough that every member of every faculty rarely found themselves bereft of work. But this was especially true in Laurence’s case; aside from his research, he was also expected to provide regular lectures to students, as well as tasking himself in overseeing his clinic. As a result, he was very rarely given time to himself, more so out of personal choice than anything else.

However, he also wasn’t very fond of distractions, though this didn’t seem to stop Caryll from summoning him one particularly busy day. Yet upon learning of this request, Laurence dropped what he was doing almost immediately, setting out to meet with his colleague soon after. After all, her doing so was by no means a common occurrence.

Caryll had always been somewhat of an oddity among Byrgenwerth’s faculty. She wasn’t a professor as he and Micolash were, and her research was something of a private affair, the details of which she did not tend to share. Despite this, she reported directly to Master Willem, who often oversaw her work and was just as secretive about its focus. So, for her to summon him now could only mean that they were dealing with a matter of utmost importance. And Laurence believed that he knew exactly what it was.

The professor soon found himself at the door to her office, located in one of Byrgenwerth’s many research centers. Despite being gripped with a sense of unease, Laurence eventually knocked on her door.

“Oh, Laurence, is that you? Please, do come in,” came her voice from behind the door. It sounded almost dazed, as if she’d only just been made aware of her surroundings…just as it had in the labyrinths.

Upon opening the door and letting himself in, he found Caryll frantically sorting a set of papers and journals into a drawer not far from her desk, which she practically slammed shut just as he stepped inside. Afterwards, she snapped towards him, meeting his eyes and putting on an uncharacteristically broad smile.

“Ah, you’ve arrived. Wonderful,” she greeted him before starting to make her way back to her desk. “My apologies for the sudden request. I need but a moment of your time.”

Though taken aback by her great insistence, Laurence soon complied. “Please, think nothing of it. I’ve been intending to check on you for some time,” he told her. “I hope that all is well?”

“Never better,” said Caryll. “Everything seems so much…clearer to me now.”

“Oh?” Laurence inquired, though she appeared somewhat hesitant to elaborate further.

“Worry not. I’m sure the same will be true for you soon…” she said before waving him in further. “Please, sit.”

With little more than a raised brow, Laurence made his way to a chair on the opposite side of Caryll’s desk and took a seat. Once he did, his host stood up from hers and without another word, pushed forward a single piece of paper, on which an incomprehensible – but not unfamiliar - symbol was drawn in red ink.

“I know what you saw, Laurence. And as I’m sure you’ve figured out, it was something you weren’t meant to see.” Upon hearing this, he finally tore his eyes away from the symbol, looking up to find that her expression was now deathly serious. “But seeing as you have, we might as well use it as a basis for further research. Now, tell me. Were there any, shall we say, developments after the fact?”

Unsurprisingly, all was as Laurence predicted. It was only a matter of time until she confronted him about this or he her. They both wanted answers and given what she said, there was no point in feigning ignorance.

“As a matter of fact, there was,” he replied. “Almost the moment I laid eyes on it, I felt a strange sensation within my mind; like a defective gear in a machine suddenly clicking back into place. And soon after, I began to hear a voice.”

“And could you understand what it was saying?” Caryll then asked.

“Not in the least. Its words were incomprehensible, not to mention distant. It became clearer in specific parts of the tombs, but that didn’t make it any easier to understand.”

“No, I would imagine not…” she said in a quiet voice. Soon after doing so, she picked up a quill, dipped its tip in some ink and started to write on a separate slip of paper. “Does it still persist? The voice?”

“I have not heard it since we returned to the surface…at least, I do not believe I have. Occasionally, I do hear what could be traces of it, but it is difficult to tell for certain,” he explained.

“That is not surprising,” Caryll said amidst her writing. “His presence is weak here in Yharnam or at least, weaker than it is in Pthumeru.”

“You refer to Oedon?”

Suddenly, her hand came to an abrupt stop, preventing her from streaking ink across the page. Caryll then raised her eyes up to briefly meet his, as if deliberating how she should respond. As the silence between them endured, Laurence put a finger on the symbol she’d placed in front of him.

“That is what this is meant to represent, is it not?” Laurence’s question was met with yet more silence, but her reluctance was enough to tell him he’d presumed correctly. And she must’ve realized this as well, for she returned to her writing with a conceding sigh.

“Yes…”

Despite the fact this merely confirmed what he already suspected, the professor still found himself in a state of disbelief. To think that she possessed such an extraordinary ability, all without him being the wiser. And there was little chance that their expedition had been the first time this “awareness” had manifested in her, which begged the question…

“How long, Caryll?”

At first, she tried to make it seem like she hadn’t heard him, but eventually, she set her quill aside. “Since I was but a girl,” she revealed. “It was faint at first – a distant whisper that only I could hear. But of course, the childish superstitions I attributed them to didn’t even come close to the truth.”

“The Great Ones,” said Laurence, looking back down at the symbol Caryll had drawn – one of many. “You can commune with them?”

“No. They do not address me and their words are impossible for me to replicate in speech…but I can comprehend their most basic meanings and attempt to transcribe them – quite crudely, as you can see.”

“Crudely?” Laurence exclaimed in disbelief. “Caryll, this is ground-breaking! If you can understand their words, even partially, then surely others can, too.”

“I assure you that the possibilities are not lost on me,” she said. “And that you are not the first to recognize them.”

Though she did not name them directly, he knew at once who it was Caryll was referring to. “Then I presume that Master Willem is aware of your ‘gift’?”

“Of course. After all, it is he who taught me to embrace it rather than fear it,” she revealed, which once again, did not surprise him in the least.

“Ah, yes, I see,” said Laurence. “You sought him out, didn’t you?”

“Actually…I didn’t. In fact, it was quite the opposite.” Despite the massive implications of this statement, Caryll did not sound proud of it. In fact, he couldn’t help but notice a sense of disquiet behind her words, which made this already unexpected answer even more puzzling, not to mention worrying.

“What happened?” he eventually decided to ask, but she remained silent, staring blankly down at the sheets that cluttered her desk. After a few seconds, Caryll turned away from him and walked further into her office, stopping only a few steps away.

“Most don’t understand the world like we do, Laurence. Perhaps that is for the better. The truth can be a truly frightening thing…especially when the veil is torn away without warning.”

She was right, of course. Laurence had come to learn of the Great One’s existence gradually and even then, he remembered being overcome with a feeling of utter despair. And how could he not? The very reality he’d come to know his whole life – the one thing he could truly feel confident in – had turned out to be a lie. Even today, these feelings of helplessness, of insignificance persisted; feelings that were the foundation of Master Willem’s research.

But Laurence had been lucky enough to reach maturity before being met with this startling revelation. Yet Caryll, by her own admission, had only been a child when it began to be revealed to her. How could she have possibly handled it? Judging solely from her hung head and despondent demeanor, not very well.

“Can you imagine what it must’ve been like? The voices…they plagued me every waking moment, invaded my every dream: for reasons I simply couldn’t understand. I was subjected to every possible treatment to rid me of them, but I realized that I could no sooner stop the sun’s rising or the passing of the seasons. It was…unbearable…”

Caryll paused then and Laurence could see that she’d started to tightly grip her left wrist, which had started to shake. Given her choice of wording, as well as the sense of anguish in her words, the implications were not pretty.

“Everyone thought me mad, of course,” she continued, releasing her wrist in the process. “Even my family turned their backs on me – had me ‘institutionalized’. They said it was for my own good, but even then, I knew that they thought I was a lost cause, a sentiment that my so-called caretakers seemed to share. And for the longest time, I was left to rot there in the dark, until the very thing that had put me there became my only source of solace.”

After another momentary pause, Caryll finally turned her head ever so slightly, revealing traces of a weak, almost vacant smile. “Pathetic, is it not?” she asked, ushering in a heavy silence and leaving Laurence to stare at her in complete and utter shock. 

He didn’t need to be told what happened next. Like most institutions in Yharnam, Byrgenwerth played a hand in the operation of its asylum, with its students often using its patients as subjects for research and under rare occasions, experimentation. That must’ve been how Master Willem caught wind of Caryll’s ‘condition’ and upon realizing its true nature, led to him orchestrating her release from the facility, no doubt taking her under his wing afterwards. One need only imagine what would’ve become of her had he not.

As she continued to stand motionless near the other side of the room, Laurence finally stood up to his seat and slowly went up to her; upon reaching her, he briefly reached for her shoulder, but when even this failed to elicit a reaction from her, he reluctantly lowered his hand. “Caryll…I’m…”

“Yes, I’m sure you are,” she said without even turning to him. “I know how you and others think of me; how much I’ve always befuddled you. I’m sure it’s…grating for someone like you.”

“That isn’t true,” he quickly insisted, but before he could say anything more, she finally turned to look him in the eyes.

“It’s alright, Laurence. I have kept much from you, perhaps unjustly so. But that was never my choice,” she said as if to assure him, displaying not an ounce of ill-will towards him.

And truth be told, Caryll’s secrecy had indeed proven frustrating time and time again, especially during their recent excursion.  He understood the cause behind her seemingly sudden delirium now, but at the time, it produced nothing but distress for him. After all, many before them have lost their minds journeying into Pthumeru’s depths.

Yet just as it seemed she had said her piece, Caryll once again turned away from him. “Oh, but what are we without our secrets?”

It took Laurence but a moment to deduce the motive behind this statement, as well as everything that had come before. But rather than invoking guilt as was no doubt intended, it only served to irritate him, though he didn’t let this show. “Must we really go through this again?”

“That would depend. Did you end up going through with your plan?” she asked.

“Indeed,” Laurence replied. “But regardless, I tire of having to explain myself. I did what had to be done. That is all.”

“If that is so, why are you so insistent on hiding the truth from Master Willem?” she asked him.

“I have told him enough,” he quickly replied, turning to walk a few steps away in frustration. “The rest need not concern him.”

“Does it not? You understand the significance of what we found, do you not? Of what you gave away?”

“I do. But not nearly as much as you, I’d reckon,” he said rather accusingly, which as expected, seemed to silence her.

“So…that is why you came, is it?” Caryll said as if to herself.

Rather than denying it or changing the subject, Laurence continued. “The blood - you said that the chamber we found it in was blessed. I know those were not your original words, so what did they mean?”

“I don’t know…” she unconvincingly replied, causing him to let out a quiet, somewhat frustrated sigh.

“Tell me, Caryll…” “I swear, I don’t know!” she exclaimed. “I can only guess its true nature, same as you.”

“Then what is your working theory?” Laurence asked calmly, finally turning to face his colleague, who still showed signs of reluctance. Whether she realized there was nothing she could do to dissuade him or simply that he’d succeeded in wearing her down, she finally gave her answer.

“That it is not of this world.”

To this, Laurence merely nodded his head. This had been his exact conclusion based on his observation of the blood’s make-up, which led him to scour Byrgenwerth’s archives in order to find any sort of reference to something matching its description. As expected, he’d found nothing, but despite the brevity of Caryll’s answer, it offered more substance than days of lucrative research could’ve provided.

“Oedon…his voice was especially clear in that chamber. It was like it was drawing me to the chalice. It has to be connected to him in some way, but how?”

“That is difficult even for me to say,” said Caryll. “That information is most likely concentrated in Cainhurst’s hands, but as we know, they are unlikely to share it. Especially now that they themselves are in possession of it.”

“Yes…” Laurence agreed, stroking his chin as he paced away from Caryll. It was obvious that the lack of information regarding the blood – and the labyrinths as a whole - was due to Cainhurst’s censorship. There were secrets they no doubt wanted to remain buried there…some clearly more than others.

“Have you ever considered why Cainhurst was so eager to claim this blood you now pursue?” Caryll suddenly asked, as if reading his thoughts.

“Of course, but without knowing its purpose, speculation is all but pointless,” he replied. Soon after, he could hear the sound of approaching footsteps, followed by the faint sound of a book being removed from its place on the shelf. He turned just in time to see Caryll approaching him with her notebook in hand, quickly flipping through the pages until she seemed to find what she was looking for.

“Then perhaps this may interest you.”

Stopping just beside him, she held the notebook open for him to see, revealing yet another one of her symbols; he could best describe it as a chain of lozenges connected by sharply-pointed arches, both of which gradually became smaller and smaller the further down it went. Yet unlike the last one he glimpsed, it seemed to have no effect on him. No voices, no sudden twinge: nothing.

“I first became aware of this message during our visit to Cainhurst, when I was asked to dance by that knight. But as you’d expect, I did not have the means to transcribe it then,” she revealed. “However, I became aware of it again in Loran…through Lady Maria.”

On the mention of her name, Laurence looked up at her, his curiosity piqued. “What does it mean?” he cautiously asked.

“It was difficult to discern, but roughly, it signifies ‘corruption’.”

“Corruption…?” Laurence repeated, uncertain - or perhaps, hopeful that he hadn’t heard her correctly.

“Yes,” she confirmed. “Although…it’s strange.”

“What is?” “With such a label, one would expect it to be attributed with malice, but that is not at all what I sensed, especially in the labyrinths. Rather, it sounded…welcoming. Desirous, even.”

This explanation did little to quell the confusion that now raged within Laurence’s mind. But amidst the deluge of questions this new information created, one stood above the rest.

“Why show me this?”

In response, Caryll merely looked up at him, closing her notebook soon after. “Just so you know what you’re dealing with,” she replied rather cryptically, turning to make her way back to the bookshelf immediately after. However, it didn’t take long for Laurence to pick up on the subtext of her words, with which he was none too pleased.

“I reject your implication,” he told her as she climbed on a stool, allowing herself to place her notebook back in its proper place.

“Whatever do you mean?” she asked in a disingenuous manner.

“You think my actions were driven by pity or perhaps that I’ve been beguiled somehow; both sentiments that I will not entertain for even an instant,” said Laurence. “What I did, I did for Byrgenwerth.”

“Maybe so,” Caryll acknowledged as she brought herself back down to the floor. “But you also played right into Cainhurst’s hands – gave them exactly what they wanted. And for what?”

Laurence narrowed his eyes, his patience hanging by a thread. “You dare accuse me of betrayal?”

“No, my dear friend. I only wish to remind you of the nature of things. There is a reason that Cainhurst are merely our benefactors, not our friends. Currying more favor than is necessary will get you nowhere.”

“Neither will purposefully alienating them. Or openly violating the tenets of our agreement with no plan to deal with the consequences,” he retorted while doing nothing to hide his frustration – not just with her, but Micolash as well.

“Oh, but you haven’t been entirely transparent either, have you?” she pointed out. “Tell me. Does she know what you possess?”

He hesitated in answering, slightly lowering his gaze in the process. He hadn’t admitted to it, but Lady Maria had proven rather perceptive. “Potentially…” he acknowledged.

Silence once again settled over them, with Caryll merely shaking her head and sighing to herself before turning back to the bookshelf, sorting through it without any indication that she even knew what she was looking for. “Then I sincerely hope your intuition is correct,” she told him.

“As do I, Caryll,” he commented before turning to leave. “As do I.”

Before he could put much distance between them, his colleague called after him. “Do not mistake me, Laurence. I understand the reasoning behind your course of action - up to a point, that is. Master Willem placed a great deal of faith in you to navigate situations such as this, but you weren’t given carte blanche. And besides, this blood…I fear it is more trouble than it is worth and not just in the context we find ourselves now.”

This was very clearly meant as a warning and given who it was coming from, it did give Laurence some pause. It was not lost on him that he only found himself in this position because Master Willem willed it so or that he was tampering with powers he did not fully understand. But then again, weren’t they all?

“A pleasure as always, Caryll,” he said without so much as a glance, finally opening the door to her office and leaving her to her work, whatever it may be.

He really should’ve seen this coming. After all, Caryll had been present when he detailed his plan; she hadn’t spoken up then, but it was clear that she shared in the more vocal Micolash’s misgivings, though perhaps not for the same reasons. Yet much like with him, Laurence walked away from this meeting certain that she wouldn’t reveal the truth to Master Willem, regardless of the loyalty she must’ve felt she owed him. Because, like him, she knew that their mutual mentor would find out about it one way or another.

He always did.

But rather than spending yet more time dwelling on this dilemma, Laurence instead turned his thoughts to the little that Caryll had divulged to him. If Lady Maria was indeed corrupted as she claimed, then in what way? Though at once, the answer to this question seemed obvious. The blood that he had acquired was nothing short of pristine, something that she – and no doubt, the rest of her bloodline - must’ve been more than aware of. And yet, if Caryll’s second observation was also correct, this very same imperfection was considered desirable by the Great Ones themselves. 

It just didn’t make any sense…unless…

...

Chapter Text

There was much ado in Cainhurst Castle. By order of Queen Annalise, almost the entirety of its population now focused on a single task: preparing for something she labeled the “purification” ceremony. Its chefs worked tirelessly to prepare the celebratory banquet. Its chaplains collaborated with the rest of the court to prepare the necessary services. And most of all, its servants were tasked with ensuring that the royal hall was nothing short of spotless; wiping the floors and windows, preparing the seating and various other menial tasks, which they conducted with the utmost urgency. Their orders had been given without any prior notice and with a very limited time frame, foregoing the usual protocol for royal ceremonies.

But given the context behind this specific gathering, it was no surprise that Her Majesty wished for it to take place as soon as possible. And that time came a mere three days after Maria's return, when she and almost the entirety of Cainhurst's subjects were summoned to the throne room.

That evening, Maria once again donned her knightly garb, which had been thoroughly cleaned and re-tailored for the occasion. But even though the tears and bloodstains were gone, Maria felt little pride as she observed herself in the mirror, the sight only serving to remind her of the morning of her departure. She'd been hopeful then - something that she'd thought foolish even at the time. And as she left for the throne room and walked through the seemingly abandoned castle, she could feel only a sense of lingering dread. As if she was nearing the point of no return.

As expected, the throne room had been lavishly decorated for the occasion. The banner of Cainhurst was draped across almost every window and had been rolled out across the floor, which Maria walked over as she made her way to her seat. The room gradually fell silent as her presence became known, with every head turning towards her with a sense of awe and in some cases, uncertainty. The captain paid no mind to the states or the faint whispers, keeping her gaze fixed straight ahead, as did those that awaited her at the front of the room.

The King and Queen sat side by side on their thrones, with the latter impatiently tapping her fingers on its arm-rests as she watched her approach. However, they had but one guard; Adrian, who stood dutifully by the King's side and similarly eyed her. Maria gave him only a brief glance, during which she noticed him holding what looked to be a sheathed sword, one that didn't resemble his own. 

Choosing not to concern herself with this just yet, Maria came to a stop at the step to the thrones and dutifully bowed to their occupants.

"A most warm welcome to thee, dearest Maria. With thine arrival, the ceremony can finally begin." Upon saying this, Queen Annalise raised her hand, motioning just beside her. "Come," she beckoned.

Remaining as stern as ever, Maria took her place by Her Majesty's side, standing tall and putting her hands behind her back as she looked out at the crowd. She was quick to spot her father near the very front of the gathering, to whom she hadn't spoken since his visit to her chambers. And as she ever so briefly met his eyes, she could see…well, she wasn't quite sure. Definitely not pride. Regret, perhaps?

Before she could dwell on this too long, Queen Annalise raised her hand, silencing the lingering chatter almost immediately.

"Welcome," she began. "It pleases Us to see you all here on this truly momentous occasion. As thous't art no doubt aware, our people left much behind in our excursion from our homeland, much of which was rightfully ours. We were forced to start anew and in time, our new home of Cainhurst would rise phoenix-like from the ashes of Pthumeru, with our glorious city of Yharnam not far behind. And if she were here with us today, We are certain our beloved ancestor would be proud of what we've built. We, the true successors to her throne and dynasty. We, who as we speak, have her blood coursing through our veins.''

After letting her words settle for a few moments, the Queen slowly rose from her throne and took a few authoritative steps forward. "And after tonight, not even the heretical traitors - who still dwell mindlessly in the ruins of our once-great civilization - can deny that."

As if on cue, the King similarly rose from his throne, taking with him a single golden chalice, which he carefully carried on a platter. In short order, he would stop just beside his Queen, bowing his head and presenting her with the chalice, which she took and raised it up high for all to see. Although all they can see were the thin vapors rising above its brims, all those present seemed to realize what it contained, for a chorus of shocked gasps and murmurs soon filled the throne room.

"Yes, our most loyal subjects. The Old Blood. The holy medium by which the Pthumerian line roe and fell." After another pause, Queen Annalise lowered the chalice, delicately running her fingers along its edge as she greedily, and hungrily, stared down at its contents.

"And now… reborn!"

With this triumphant remark, she put the tip of the chalice to her lips and began to drink. The throne room fell silent safe for the faint sound of the Queen swallowing mouthful after mouthful, no differently than if it were wine or water. She must’ve consumed every last drop before she finally lowered the chalice, heavy breaths escaping her blood-soaked mouth as she gazed at her reflection in the chalice, appearing almost transfixed. That was, until it suddenly tumbled from her hands, causing what little remained inside to drip out onto the floor.

Clutching her chest, Queen Annalise stumbled back onto her throne, moaning in pain. As the rest of the room – including Maria herself – froze in shock, her consort immediately rushed to her side, taking hold of her free hand. “My love?!” he exclaimed. As she continued to writhe, the King looked up at Maria in a panic. “What have you done?”

“Nothing, I swear! It’s the blood – it must be…” Before she could say much more, the Queen’s moans were replaced with a quiet, almost ominous chuckle.

Looking back down at the hand the King was holding, both he and Maria were shocked to find that its previously wrinkled skin had turned silky smooth, which was also true of the rest of her arm. In a few moments, Queen Annalise raised her head to reveal a face almost as youthful as Maria’s own. Every pore, every grey hair; they had all simply vanished.

The two of them backed away in surprise and in the process, parted just enough so that Her Majesty would once again become visible to her gathered subjects, all of whom had been watching events unfold in nervous silence. And said silence somehow grew even more pronounced as Queen Annalise once again rose from her throne and walked fully into view, taking a moment to inspect the restored skin on her arm while smiling in satisfaction.

Her gaze soon fell down to the discarded chalice, which she took the time to pick up before finally resuming her address. "The Old Blood has changed Us. Or more rather, completed Us - undoing centuries worth of dilution and malaise in a single stroke. And today, we mark perhaps the most momentous day in our proud history, since our people first ventured above ground and began our glorious rise. The true heir to the Pthumerian line is lost to us forever, but now, we have the means to repeat the miracle with which Queen Yharnam was blessed. To produce a new Child of Blood!"

The throne room erupted in a series of triumphant hollers and cheers, a chaotic scene that most would think unbecoming of nobility. These cheers soon gave way for an equally loud, repeating chant. "PRAISE THE OLD BLOOD! PRAISE THE OLD BLOOD!"

As she looked on what should've been a source of pride, Maria instead found herself disturbed. The Queen commanded the unyielding loyalty and adoration of her subjects; this had been true of their society since its very inception. But this…this was different. It went far beyond simple adoration. This was worship. And Queen Annalise was relishing it.

However, she would eventually silence the crowd with a simple raise of her hand, not finished with her words just yet. “Of course, We would be remiss if we failed to acknowledge why all this became possible. For all their foolishness, the heretics remained aware of the Old Blood’s importance and kept it closely guarded even as they succumbed to their innate savagery. As such, its retrieval was no easy task and alas, ended in tragedy, as all but one of the valiant knights We tasked with retrieving it lost their lives amidst Loran’s bitter sands. And that sole survivor is here with Us today.”

Pausing for a moment, the Queen turned so that Maria once again became visible to the crowd, looking at her with a smile. “Come forth, brave captain."

All eyes once again fell on Maria as she wordlessly complied with Her Majesty's request, joining her and allowing her to present her for all to see.

"Many of those gathered here will remember a banquet some nights ago, where We gave Our blessings for the distinguished Lady Maria to lead an expedition into Loran. And her men followed her into its darkest depths, where in an act of selfless bravery, they laid down their very lives to ensure her survival and the success of their mission. The significance of their service, and their sacrifice, cannot be understated. And because of this, We shall dedicate a monument to their memory, which shall be erected in their final resting place. There, it shall serve as an eternal reminder of not just their worthy sacrifice, but all those who lost their lives in pursuit of this one, single goal."

As expected, this announcement received little fanfare, with the only sign that anyone even heard it being a few scattered whispers among the crowd. That was, until a single person began to clap - her father. One by one, the rest of those gathered followed his example, until the throne room was filled with an almost deafening chorus of applause.

Yet in spite of this grand gesture, Maria found herself feeling…nothing. The authenticity of her fellow citizens' support did not matter; she didn't need or want their approval. The truth was that no matter what Queen Annalise did to appease her - which she knew for certain this was - it would've been a hollow victory. Matthias, Emil and the rest of her company: they should've been here now, if not with her, then in place of her. No matter how grand it would be, this would not be a monument to their valor, but a monument to her failure.

As the applause died down, Queen Annalise turned her attention to her, paying little mind to her lack of reaction. "As for thee, captain, We intend to reward thy service in full. And for thine outstanding accomplishments, only the highest honor We can bestow is appropriate."

Maria did not need to be told what this entailed. With but a small nod of Her Majesty's head, she got down on one knee in front of her and lowered her head; as she did this, Adrian made his way over and presented the blade he was holding to the Queen, who held out her hand and took it from him without even sparing him a glance.

"Captain Maria of Cainhurst. Dost thou solemnly swear to serve as a shining example for thy fellow knights."

"I swear." 

"Dost thou solemnly swear to uphold Cainhurst's laws and customs in every capacity?"

"I swear."

"And dost thou solemnly swear to guard thy kingdom, and thy Queen, with thy life?" 

This time, Maria hesitated for a few moments, but eventually gave her answer. "I swear."

"Very well." Soon after, she heard the sound of Queen Annalise's sword slowly being removed from its sheath, the top of which was then placed on her shoulder. As this happened, Maria couldn't help but turn her eyes towards it and in the brief moment she was able to see the blade, she immediately noticed something. 

Ceremonies of this sort were always conducted with the Rakuyo - the most prestigious weapon in all of Cainhurst. But the blade she glimpsed seemed to be of a different make: darker, larger and most strikingly of all, pulsing with a faint, but undeniable aura.

All this she registered in but a second before the tip of the sword disappeared from view, as Queen Annalise slowly moved it to her opposite shoulder. "Then with the power vested in Us, We hereby recognize thee as our liege…and hereby grant thee the title of Royal Guard."

With this final proclamation, Queen Annalise gently rested the blade on the top of Maria's head, finalizing her ascension to the highest echelon of Cainhurst knighthood. Or so she thought.

“Of course, We art no longer the same Queen thou pledged thy fealty to all those years ago…and the honor we now grant thee is woefully inadequate.” As she spoke, she brought the blade down below Maria’s chin and ever so gently used it to raise her head, leaving her to look up at Her Majesty in startled confusion. “As a result, there is one final request we must make of thee. Open thy mouth.”

Unsurprisingly, Maria was taken aback by this bizarre request. But she also realized it was unwise to question the Queen, especially at a time like this. And so, she did as she was asked and with her head held high, opened her mouth, like a young bird eagerly awaiting their mother’s feeding. Seemingly satisfied, Queen Annalise raised her sword, which she could now see for certain was no Rakuyo. But whatever it was, Her Majesty slowly ran her hand up along its glistening blade, stopping at its very edge.

“And now, I prithee…” she said as she brought her hand, as well as her blade, over Maria’s head. “…partake of our blood.”

To the shock of their onlookers, she tightly clutched the blade and sharply pulled it downwards, wincing in pain just before blood started to pour from her still clenched fist. Maria didn’t even have time to gasp before she could taste the first drops on her tongue, but rather than making her mouth snap shut in disgust, it compelled her to keep it open, allowing the crimson stream to fill it close to the brim. Yet in spite of this, she would not dare swallow.

“Drink deep,” she heard Queen Annalise whisper. “Feel the spreading corruption burn.”

Finally overcoming her shock, Maria forced herself to gulp down every last drop of blood she’d been given, feeling the burning sensation in her throat as it passed down. And after that, nothing…that was, until she felt that same sensation spreading like wildfire throughout her entire body. Overwhelmed, she keeled forward, using her hands to stop herself from falling over. One hand then gripped the carpet while the other one clutched her aching stomach, her eyes clamping shut as she writhed and wailed.

“Maria!” she faintly heard Adrian cry, no doubt before attempting to rush to her side. However, Queen Annalise must’ve silently motioned for him to stay put, for this did not come to pass.

“Good,” she praised her. “Feel Our blood coursing through thy veins. Embrace thy true heritage and become something even greater.”

Not long after Queen Annalise spoke these words, Maria felt the sensation begin to subside. As her breathing steadied, her pain was replaced with a sense of euphoria. But beyond that, she felt…changed. She did not feel corrupted as Her Majesty had claimed, but rather complete. Yet somehow, this feeling proved even more distressing.

Lifting her head, she looked up at her Queen, who still wore that same, satisfied smile. “What did you do to me?” she demanded.

“Simply put, We have perfected you.”

Her Majesty then offered – or perhaps more aptly, presented – the hand that she’d cut just moments ago. Yet, there wasn’t so much as a scar on her palm, with the only signs of her injury being the red stains around Maria’s lips and on the tip of the blade she’d used to spill her blood.

“By indulging in Our blood, thou hast been gifted a portion of Our essence – forever binding you to Us in body and spirit,” she briefly explained. “But that is not all.”

Before continuing, Queen Annalise presented Maria with the blade. She found that it closely resembled the saber portion of her Rakuyo, albeit sporting a different handle - one more akin to that of a longsword - and a different set of engravings, which spanned the entirety of the blade. Yet most striking of all, she now saw that the few droplets of blood that still clung to the blade hadn’t dried, but rather…hardened, as if they had somehow merged with the metal itself.

“Accept this final gift, Our stalwart knight,” said Queen Annalise. “And all will become clear.”

Maria felt a sense of foreboding as she looked at the offered weapon, but at the same time, she felt herself somewhat drawn to it – as if it were beckoning her to pick it up. And eventually, she did, taking the surprisingly lightweight blade in her hands and finally standing back up, holding it out in front of her. In doing so, she felt very little difference in weight or handling from her Rakuyo, even though they were very clearly not the same.

“This is the Chikage, forged by the same smiths who created the blade that has come to be prized by our most elite warriors.” The manner in which Queen Annalise spoke indicated she was addressing the crowd rather than her. “We commissioned its design long, long ago, but it was only delivered to us the night before Lady Maria’s departure, when We still had no use for it. But We knew this would not be the case for long; that her success would finally usher it in as the primary weapon of Our Guard. As we speak, dozens more are already being delivered to us, with many more following soon after. All shall know of its might – the might of Cainhurst Castle!”

Despite Her Majesty’s majestic description, Maria failed to see anything immediately noteworthy about this new weapon to warrant it. It was surely a fine blade, but not more so than her existing Rakuyo, at least not in its current state. But at once, she recognized that this was no ordinary blade.

“It is time,” Queen Annalise suddenly proclaimed, causing Maria to finally break her gaze away from the blade and turn towards her. “Closest of kin, bearer of our blood…thou knowst what must be done.”

At first, the newly christened Guard found herself confused, but as she looked back towards the weapon in her hands, everything suddenly became clear, just as Her Majesty promised. The strange, crystalized blood on the tip of its blade; Queen Annalise’s miraculous restoration of the flesh it wounded; and above all, its alluring aura. The blade called to her…and it promised her atonement.

Without even realizing what she was doing, Maria repositioned the sword around so that its blade was facing the floor, tightly gripping its handle with both hands. Then, she slowly began to raise it higher and higher in front of her, until the tip of its blade was pointed towards her torso.

“Maria?” She once again heard Adrian’s worried voice, but it did nothing to stop her. “MARIA, DON’T!!!”

With a guttural yell, Maria plunged the sword deep into her stomach, digging it even further within until she felt it protrude from her back. Her body was racked with agonizing pain as her vision began to dim, her heart began to beat in her ears and her grip on the handle began to fail.

Yet just as her fingers started to slip, she experienced a sudden rush of strength, allowing her to once again grab the handle and almost instinctively pull the blade out of her body with one, forceful movement, unleashing another deafening cry that echoed throughout the throne room. In the process, she unleashed a powerful burst of blood, not just from her wound, but all around her, painting the surrounding floor and windows a crimson red.

The crowd looked on in horrified silence as Maria stood hunched over in front of them, breathing heavily and struggling to stand as she held her blood-soaked blade. Shutting her eyes, she tried to fight back the pain that still plagued her body, stemming from the gaping wound that remained in her stomach…until it began to mend itself, stitching her flesh back together in just a few seconds. As for her lost blood, most of it now coated her sword like a sheath, further extending its already impressive length.

And Maria herself? She could feel every drop of blood in her veins pulsing with power, creating a feeling unlike any other. It was rapturous. It was…incredible.

“Behold!” Queen Annalise proclaimed from behind her. “The future of Cainhurst!”

Standing to her full imposing height, Maria held out her blood-imbrued blade for all to see, keeping her eyes closed as she reveled in her newfound strength. Then, her eyes suddenly opened, revealing glowing red irises surrounded by an otherwise dark void. As she looked out at the shocked, terrified crowd before her, Maria smirked to herself.

Her path was finally clear to her.

Chapter Text

“Evolution. That is the guiding principle behind the discipline of medicine. As human civilization grows and changes, so too do the methods that its doctors use to ensure the well-being of their fellow man. Ideas and practices that were once considered common knowledge fall out of favor and new forms of treatment arise to take their place, bringing with them newfound prosperity for mankind.”

A crowded class of students, each with a notebook in front of them and a metal pen in each of their hands, listened attentively as their professor paced at the front of the lecture hall. For them, this was a weekly occurrence, where they learned about the basic history and proponents of medicine. But for the instructor, this was but one of several lectures he would be giving just this week, each of varying academic intensity. Years he had spent there, imparting his wisdom on countless aspiring doctors and physicians, many of whom would inevitably find themselves overwhelmed with the demands of the profession.

But some, like their esteemed professor, would choose to dedicate their lives to the preservation of others and work tirelessly to find new ways of limiting the scope of human suffering. And as the head of the faculty itself, Laurence was at the head of these pursuits.

"And those who pioneer these methods will forever be immortalized in history," he addressed to the students. "For an example, look no further than Hippocrates, whose oath each and every one of you will be expected to swear and uphold centuries after his passing. His understanding of medicine may seem primitive to us now, especially with the plethora of knowledge available to us, but does not make his teachings any less valuable."

The professor continued. "At this point in time, I am sure most of you will be familiar with the concept of "humors". Countless medical minds have contributed theories regarding them, but the most relevant one - the Hippocratic interpretation - is as follows. Within the human body are found four essential substances: phlegm, yellow and black bile, and perhaps most important of all, blood. To ensure health, these four substances must be kept in a state of balance; having too much or too little of a given humor is what leads to the development of certain diseases and can even affect one's temperament and personality."

Around this point, the professor turned towards the black board, picking up a piece of chalk and briefly listing the relevant substances. "In the case of blood, it is the source of energy of the human body and soul. As a result, those with an excess amount are believed to be especially enthusiastic, social and charismatic - a temperament that scholars have dubbed the sanguine personality type. However, they are also at a higher risk of developing fevers, excess sweating and other such ailments, which is why historically, a patient would have their blood drained to combat their effects."

As he finished jotting down this simple example, Laurence turned back towards his students to ensure he still had their attention. As he did so, he noticed an…unexpected figure near the front of the crowd - Ludwig. As opposed to the rest of his onlookers, who proudly wore the uniform distinguishing them as students of Byrgenwerth, he wore only simple street clothes, making little effort to blend in with the crowd. Not that it would've done him much good, seeing as he was considerably older than the young scholars surrounding him, not to mention taller and bulkier. All this made it certain that Laurence would notice him and once he did, Ludwig silently mouthed "carry on", which seemed to imply the reason he was here wasn't quite urgent.

Taking this into account, the professor decided to continue with his lecture. “Regardless of your individual views on its validity, this system has been at the root of our field for centuries, with its prominence only starting to be challenged fairly recently. In particular, it has been proposed that diseases are spread through the transmission of invisible, infectious "seeds", but I must stress, these are still only theories. Only with time, and intense academic scrutiny, can we determine their validity. And as aspiring doctors, it is incumbent upon you to not become set in your ways. We live to serve our patients, not our pride. And if a development in our field proves to increase our effectiveness, we are obligated to embrace it, regardless of how far it strays from what we've come to know."

After taking a moment to scan the room and gauge his audience's reaction, Laurence finally saw it fit to conclude his address. "It is my hope that each of you approach your studies with this maxim in mind. Now, let me keep you from them no longer."

With that, the students began preparing to leave, putting away their notebooks and utensils as their professor looked on. "With any luck, we will convene again next week," he announced to the class. "Regardless of whatever other responsibilities are placed on me, I am always willing to offer counsel if you believe you require it."

It wasn't long before the lecture hall was all but empty, save for the professor, a handful of students who stayed behind to ask him some brief questions and the unexpected visitor, who had yet to move from his seat. He continued to wait patiently until the last of the lingering students had left, which was when Laurence finally decided to approach him.

“You’ll forgive my lack of applause.”

“None needed,” he replied. “Though I must say, it surprises me to see you here.”

Ludwig shrugged his shoulders. “Nothing wrong with broadening your horizons, and broadened they have been.” He leaned back in his seat then, crossing his arms across his chest. “How high is your blood count meant to be, again?”

“Very amusing,” Laurence replied, not quite sure if this was meant as a jest or a compliment. At the very least, he could be certain that he managed to retain his attention. “But if I may ask, what compelled you to seek me out in particular? There is no shortage of quality lectures in this building alone.”

“Simple. It was the only place I was sure to find you - before you can make yourself too unavailable, anyway.”

Despite raising an inquisitive brow, Laurence couldn’t say he was surprised. There was little chance that Ludwig would come looking for him without a reason, especially at a time like this. “Do you require me for something?” Laurence asked.

“I don’t, but Gehrman does,” he revealed. “He asked me to find you.”

“Gehrman asked you?” Laurence repeated after him, genuinely surprised.  

“Indeed,” Ludwig confirmed. “I haven’t caught you at a bad time, have I?”

“No, not at all. But…why did he send you?” 

“I suppose it’s more accurate to say that he and Master Willem did,” he clarified. “Gehrman believes he’s made a breakthrough and wishes to share his findings with you. He would’ve come for you himself, but there are a few things he needed to prepare for your arrival.”

Laurence didn’t need to be told what this potential breakthrough was related to. It had been several days since Gehrman had tasked himself with unlocking the secrets of the chalice they’d discovered in the labyrinths, which had been the last time he had heard from him. If he chose to summon him now…

“Where do I find him?” he asked, knowing that doing so was essential. As if recognizing his haste, Ludwig smiled to himself.

“Come with me and I’ll take you to him.” Upon saying this, he stood up from his seat, in which he almost barely fit to begin with. After the briefest moment of hesitation, Laurence nodded his approval and followed after the stable master as they made their way outside.

Those who didn’t know Ludwig would’ve no doubt found him quite imposing, what with his towering height and muscular frame, something that his profession helped maintain. But one need only glimpse the warmth with which he treated his equestrian wards to understand his true character, which Laurence was able to do when they discovered his personal steed, Baltric, outside.

“Sorry to have kept you waiting, old friend,” he softly said to the horse as he went up to pat his mane, laughing as Baltric brought his nose up and released a breath from his nostrils, supposedly in greeting. After a few seconds of tending to his animal companion, Ludwig turned back towards Laurence, who until then had decided to keep his distance. “Well? Come over and say hello.”

Slowly, and quite nervously, Laurence approached Ludwig's steed. As he did, both of them kept their eyes trained on him. "Be gentle now," said Ludwig, though he didn't make it clear whether he was speaking to him or Baltric. Regardless, the professor maintained his careful pace as he got closer to the horse.

"Hello there, Baltric," he eventually greeted him, doing his best to replicate Ludwig's soft tone of voice. "You remember me, I hope?"

"I'm sure he does. Come just a little closer so he can make sure."

At first, Laurence wanted to question why such a thing was necessary, but ultimately, he saw no harm in humoring the stable master, who kept a watchful eye as he resumed his approach. "Now hold out your hand," he instructed once it seemed Laurence was close enough.

Upon making sure that Baltric was calm, the professor extended his hand palm side up, keeping as still as he could while the horse curiously sniffed it. When it seemed he was satisfied and turned his head away, Laurence silently looked to his master, who with a smile motioned back towards the animal with his head. Deciding to risk it, he further extended his hand and gently placed it on the horse's neck; when he didn't recoil, he ran it along his thick, but surprisingly smooth skin.

"Majestic creature, isn't he?" Ludwig asked him as he stroked the horse's neck.

"Yes," the professor agreed. Baltric was a large and proud steed; he had to have been to carry his master for so many years. Yet despite his no doubt long service, his pure black coat still glistened in the sunlight. "Just how long have you had him?" Laurence then inquired.

"Oh, I've been with Baltric since he was but a fawn. It was I who nurtured him into the steed he is today. And since then, he has been with me through thick and thin. A true friend…"

Laurence couldn't help but notice a sense of melancholy in Ludwig's words, coupled with a look of gratitude in his eyes as he tended to Baltric's reigns. He had never spoken of his life before his service to Byrgenwerth, nor had Laurence ever seen it as necessary - or appropriate - to ask about it. But that did not mean he had never been curious, a curiosity that was further peaked by recent events.

Before he could inquire further, however, Ludwig finished fastening the reins. "Ah, but enough about that. What matters is that he is still as capable as ever." As he said this, he climbed up onto Baltric's saddle, leaving Laurence to watch in confusion. Once he was mounted, he looked down at him expectantly. "Won't you join me?"

More than a little confused, the professor briefly looked from side to side to see if he was missing something. "Pardon me?" he soon asked.

"What's not to understand?" Ludwig said with a chuckle before reaching down to offer him his hand. "Come on, climb up."

For the next few seconds, Laurence could only look at his offered hand in surprise before finally looking up at him again. "Is this really necessary?" 

"Maybe not," he acknowledged. "But our destination is a fair distance away and Batric'll get us there much faster…unless you'd rather walk, of course."

The subtext behind his words was not lost on Laurence - a suggestion that he didn't take kindly to. Driven more by spite than reason, he took Ludwig's hand and clumsily joined him atop Baltric. As he did so, he briefly felt as if he'd been tilted off balance, causing him to grab onto Ludwig's shoulders in a bid to balance himself. This in turn caused his friend to turn his head back to look at him, more out of amusement than surprise.

"First time on horseback, I take it?" Ludwig more stated than asked.

"Potentially…" he acknowledged, doing his utmost to not let his embarrassment show.

"Then 'potentially', it won't be the last." With that, the stable master turned his focus in front of him, and prepared. "Ah, but I'm getting ahead of myself. For now, just hold on and enjoy the ride."

With a shake of his reins, Baltric set forth, the sudden movement causing Laurence to instinctively tighten his grip on Ludwig's shoulders. However, the horse did not go above a trot, no doubt a conscious decision on its master's part to ease him into the experience.

"So then, is this to your liking?" he asked just over a minute later, leaving the ball in Laurence's court. And after giving it some thought, he gave him his answer.

"I think we can do with a little more speed."

"As you wish," said Ludwig. And just as Laurence predicted, his voice suggested that this was the answer he'd been hoping for.

Steadily, Baltric's pace picked up to a steady canter while Ludwig expertly steered him through Yharnam's twisting streets. Going any faster would've been ill-advised, not just because they had to share the roads with other pedestrians and riders, but also because doing so would all but assure Laurence would lose his grip and tumble down onto the stone below. Despite the very real risk of injury or even death, the professor felt little in the way of worry; not only because of the skill of Ludwig's guiding hands, but also as a result of…recent events. He had always been content with admiring horses from afar, but compared to the monstrosities he had encountered in Loran, their massive weight and clattering hooves seemed paltry in comparison. Most things did.

"He does not tire," he observed of Baltric some way into their ride. "A mighty steed, indeed."

"There are none better," Ludwig said in praise, taking a moment to give his horse an affectionate pat on the neck. "He has carried many burdens, but comparatively few riders."

"Like Gehrman."

The stable master came close to taking his eyes off the road to look back at him, but even so, his silence betrayed his surprise. "Yes, he is one. And the only other to have held his reins."

"A high honor," said Laurence. "Tell me. What has he done to earn it?"

Once again, Ludwig went quiet, leaving the sound of clattering hooves and the blowing wind to fill the void. Laurence did not understand the reason for his friend's hesitance, but if he did not wish to speak more of this, he would not press him further. But just as he was about to apologize, Ludwig broke his silence.

"Well…he is a dear friend," he said. "One to whom I owe everything."

"How so?" Laurence inquired, understandably intrigued.

"Well, for one, he is the reason I even have this job. It's not glamorous by any means, but compared to the state I was in when we first met…well, let's just say it's a vast improvement."

"And how did you meet?" was the professor's next question.

"In a tavern, near the outskirts of town," he revealed. "I don't remember exactly what brought me through this way, but I decided to stop here in Yharnam for a little while. But as I sat there waiting for what was to be my first proper meal in days to arrive, a perfect stranger comes up to me and asks if he could join me. Now, the place was hardly crowded that day and any other person would've told him off even if it wasn't…but for whatever reason, I didn't."

Laurence let him continue. "Then came the questions. ‘What's your name?’; 'What brings you here?'; the standard fare. And I more or less answered all of them. Not under duress, of course. Looking back, I may have just been happy that someone was finally giving me the time of day…or maybe I just found him charming."

To this, the professor smiled. Even with the short time he'd known Gehrman, Laurence had to admit that he had a certain charm around him. Perhaps it was his gentlemanly sense of politeness, the air of mystery he maintained or how regardless of his circumstances, he remained aloof - acting as if nothing there could hurt him. A sentiment not without merit, as Laurence discovered.

"In any case, he kept asking me his questions, until only two remained. The first was 'Is that lovely horse outside yours?'." As he spoke, Ludwig playfully tried to mimic Gehrman's voice, once again patting Baltric's neck as he did.

"And the second?" "Would you be up for a race?", he answered. "Yes, I was taken aback as well, even more so when he proposed a wager on top of it. Not a hefty sum, but it was enough to incentivize me to accept the challenge. I won, of course."

"And were humble in your victory, I'm sure," Laurence jested, earning a chuckle from the stable master.

"More or less. But vanity aside, I did seem to impress him enough for him to ask me one more question."

The professor didn't need to be told what this question was. "And I take it your answer was yes?"

"What's the saying - beggars can't be choosers?" was Ludwig's eventual reply. "Besides, he told me he could put in a good word with Master Willem and as I saw it at the time, I had nothing to lose."

The two of them rode in silence for the next few moments as Laurence let this new information settle. A part of him had long suspected that Ludwig was an outsider to Yharnam, much like Lobsang was, but had never attained concrete proof to confirm this suspicion. Yet despite his sudden honesty, the professor noted that he'd failed to mention the prelude leading up to the events he described. But whatever that may've been, it had left him desperate. In spite of his enduring curiosity, Laurence thought it best not to trouble him with further questions, save for one.

"Why do you think he made you that offer?"

"To tell you the truth, I don't know," Ludwig admitted. "For years, I thought our meeting that day to have been a mere coincidence… but now, I'm not so sure. I know Gehrman and everything he does, he does for a reason."

"So it would seem…" Though it wasn't his intention, his words reminded Laurence of Gehrman's most recent decision, the reasons for which eluded him even now. Perhaps it was done out of the goodness of his heart…or perhaps not.

It was around this time that the professor realized that they were riding in the direction of the Grand Cathedral, passing through the entirety of Central Yharnam along the way. “Where exactly are you taking us?” he soon asked.

“To the hunter’s den, good professor,” Ludwig cryptically replied. “You will see for yourself soon enough.”

Most of the following journey passed by in silence. Getting into the Cathedral Ward was easy enough; the tunnel leading into the district from the Great Bridge was open to all, allowing them to come and go as they pleased. But upon emerging on the other side, Ludwig took them east, away from the few living settlements present in the Ward and towards the very edge of the city - quite literally, at that.

Much of Yharnam was built on - and in some cases, into - a collection of steep hills, making it just as necessary for the city to expand upward as outward. The Cathedral Ward stood on the highest possible peak and thus, overlooked a vast, seemingly bottomless chasm. As a result, its major buildings were kept a fair distance away from the cliff’s edge, but that did not mean that it was impossible for man to dwell there, as a series of winding natural pathways led down along the cliff into parts unknown. And as it turns out, it was these very pathways that they sought.

As they neared the cliff's edge, Ludwig brought Baltric to a stop. "It's best we go on foot from here. It's risky enough going down there on horseback with even one rider." Soon after saying this, he disembarked, leaving Laurence alone on the saddle unsure of what to do next. "Put your left foot in a stirrup and then pivot your other leg over. Hold on to his mane if you want to steady yourself, but do it gently. I'll make sure he doesn't bolt."

As Ludwig took hold of Baltric's reins, the professor took stock of his advice, gently taking a fistful of the horse's hair and ever so carefully bringing his free leg over his rear. Though he was far from flexible, Laurence eventually brought his entire body onto Baltric's left side, which was when he realized just how enormous his mount really was - so big that there was no way he'd be able to bring his free foot to the ground.

"Need some help?" He turned his head to see Ludwig smiling in amusement.

"Maybe," Laurence replied, averting his gaze and keeping his expression as neutral as possible. But his embarrassment was obvious to Ludwig, who continued smiling even as he let go of Baltric and reached up to pick up the professor underneath his shoulders, bringing him down to earth as easily as he would've a child.

"Please don't ever do that again," he said almost the moment he released him.

With a chuckle, Ludwig lightly clapped him on the shoulder. "Odds are, I won't have to," he said before once again taking Baltric by the reins and leading him closer to the cliff's edge. "Now then, follow me. We're almost there."

Putting aside his misgivings, Laurence followed, allowing Ludwig to carefully lead him down the sloping, yet still mostly manageable path. The terrain was flat enough that both them and Baltric were able to keep their footing, but they still moved slowly: all the while, the perilous drop remained visible out of the corner of his eye. Just as he was about to question his guide as to where he was leading them, the professor noticed something not far ahead - a cave of sorts. And just as he expected, it was here that Ludwig took them off the cliffside path.

"This way," he said, leading a somewhat anxious Laurence into the cave. As he descended down into the narrow passage, he couldn't help but be reminded of the twisting labyrinths of Loran, not only because of its damp darkness and constricting atmosphere, but because it too did not seem like a natural formation. 

He was thus relieved when he soon saw light on the other side, resisting the urge to run ahead of Ludwig and finally be free of this cave. And once he was, the light seemed almost blinding despite his relatively short time inside, causing him to shield his eyes with his hand. Upon bringing it down and blinking the discomfort out of his eyes, he was met with a truly unexpected sight.

Before him was a perfectly paved path, surrounded by lush gardens of flowers and shrubberies, leading up along a hill. And atop this hill, underneath a canopy of trees, stood a small house, the mountain behind it hiding it from view. At first, he thought it abandoned, but the smoke rising from its chimney showed that it was anything but.

Laurence’s eyes finally broke away from the structure when he heard whistling just down the path, drawing him and Ludwig towards it. Turning around the corner, they found Gehrman standing with his back turned to them, his scythe-like weapon in hand…which he seemed to be using to trim a patch of grass along the walkway. It wasn’t a particularly tall patch, but despite that and the comparatively enormous size of his tool, each swing sent small green clusters flowing away in the wind. 

Only after he seemed satisfied with his work did he take notice of them, turning his head towards them and offering them a friendly smile.

“Ah, Master Laurence. Welcome!” he said in greeting, turning fully towards him and putting out his arms. "I trust your journey here was a smooth one?"

"For the most part," Laurence replied, pausing for a moment as he remembered the reason he had undertaken it to begin with. "Ludwig said you wanted to see me?"

"Indeed, I do." Gehramn then turned his attention to his associate. "Thanks again for taking the time to deliver him to me."

"Please, it was my pleasure," the stable master replied. "Though I think Baltric here could use a breather."

"Oh, he can have that and more," Gehrman said before ushering them towards the lonely structure behind him. "As for the two of you, come in. Make yourselves at home."

While Ludwig took the time to hitch his horse on a nearby gate, Laurence followed Gehrman up along the path and closer to the house, whose door had been left ajar. Stopping about halfway up and looking around, he could see two pathways leading to an entrance, one of which circled around almost the entirety of the building, with what looked like a bird bath located in the crevice between the two.

"Right this way, sir," Gehrman prompted after a few moments. "I understand you're quite the busy fellow, so I shan't keep you any longer than needed."

"As it happens, my schedule is…mostly clear for the rest of the day." Laurence told him.

"All the better, I say." He once again motioned to follow him. "Come on, now, come in."

Smiling at his enthusiasm, Laurence finally followed him inside the house and once again found himself taken aback by the sight before him. Shelves stocked full of books lined the walls, with even more being stacked on top of each-other in the corner. A chest stood just beside him by the doorway, with several more bottles and vials full of unknown substances shelved above it. And most striking of all, a small workbench stood at the right-hand corner, above which hung countless weapons and firearms, in front of which Gehrman now stood.

"You'll forgive me if the place is a little cluttered," he said as he hung his scythe on a free space on his wall. "It's not often I host guests, especially here."

"And where is 'here', exactly?" Laurence asked. "Your home?"

"In the same way your clinic might be yours," was his reply.

It wasn't lost on Laurence that he'd never told him about his clinic, but he wasn't going to question how he knew. Of course, he did. 

"So, a place of work, then?" he asked instead, which Gehrman affirmed with a nod.

"Aye. My pride and joy." Both could be seen in his eyes as he looked around the small building. "Built it myself, brick by brick…bricks Master Willem provided me with, of course, but regardless. I needed a place to hone my craft away from prying eyes and this spot allowed me to do exactly that. It's a regular home away from home."

"I see," said Laurence. Given what he knew about Gehrman, it made sense that he chose such a remote - not to mention dangerous - location. It was truly a shame that such a beautiful location was so hidden and an even greater shame that he didn't have his notebook with him.

In the brief silence that followed, the professor spotted something just behind Gehrman: a stone altar and standing on top of it, the holy chalice that he had been tasked with examining. Following Laurence's gaze, he turned towards it.

"Ah, yes," he said while clapping his hands together. "With all this excitement, I almost forgot. I have wonderful news."

"You've confirmed your theory?" Laurence guessed, recalling what he said just before they last parted ways at Master Willem's estate.

"We have," he replied. "And that's not all."

Around this time, Ludwig finally joined them inside, entering through the doorway on the opposite side of the structure. Laurence spent the next few seconds looking between the two men, as well as the chalice, waiting for them to give him an explanation.

"Sit down, young master," Gehrman invited, motioning to a small table opposite the fireplace. "We have much to discuss."

…

It wasn't long before the three of them were seated around Gehrman's table, with the chalice standing at the center. Around it was a collection of ornate teacups, which their host insisted on filling with some freshly brewed chamomile. Once he was finished, he set his pot off to the side and took his spot at the head of the table.

"That's much better," he said with a relaxed sigh. "Now then, the news. Just as I hypothesized, this chalice is not linked to any one labyrinth or any one civilization therein. However, I was wrong about one thing. You can control where you end up, assuming you've been there before…or know the glyphs required to access it. What's more, no sacrificial materials are required."

This was indeed ground-breaking news, though the extent to which depended on Gehrman's answers to his next two questions. "And how many have you visited?"

"Countless," was his reply. "From the lowest parts of Pthumeru to the Hintertombs and of course, to Loran. And I have kept note of them all."

"Impressive, and very convenient," said Laurence. "But it still begs the question. How do we get there?"

"The same way I reached them originally. With this." Suddenly, Gehrman reached into his pocket and took out a small, rusty bell, which he placed on the table. Upon recognizing just what he was looking at, the professor's eyes widened in surprise.

"Is that…one of the Pthumerian bells?"

"Yes, and in a workable state, as you can see." There was a sense of teasing in his voice, which confused Laurence until he remembered the ruined bell he had attempted to pocket - that was, until Lady Maria had confiscated it. He wasn't quite sure what he'd been thinking then, but her taking it from him even in its ruined state made the comparatively pristine bell before him even more shocking.

"I don't understand. How came you by this?" 

"I found it," was all Gehrman said.

"You…found it?" He nodded his head. "Yes. Many years ago, during an expedition into the Hintertombs."

"And they did not attempt to take it from you?" Laurence asked.

"I'm sure they would've…if they knew I had it." Gehrman paused for just a moment, smiling as if recalling a fond memory. "Well, I suspected that one of them knew, but even if he did, he didn't say anything. Lovely chap, he was."

He of course didn't specify who this "chap" was, not that it mattered; Laurence had almost certainly never met him. But putting that aside, the professor suddenly came to a realization.

"Hold on. Whatever spell is placed on this bell, it summons other souls to you. This doesn't help us or at least, it shouldn't."

"You're quite correct, Laurence" Ludwig chimed in, turning his attention to him. "But that's what this is for."

Upon saying this, he took out another bell, almost identical to the first and similarly placed it on the table. "These two bells are intrinsically linked," he started to explain. "The chime of mine resonates with that of Gehrman's, allowing me to answer his call for aid and cross over to join him, wherever he or I may be."

Laurence knew at once that there was a reason it was Ludwig who was explaining this to him. "You went into the labyrinths?"

"Only a few times," he confirmed. "And all in the course of the last few days. And upon returning to the surface, I found I could access similar parts of the labyrinths entirely on my own. We've been attempting to accomplish this for several years, but have lacked the proper means to do so…until now."

Yet again, Laurence was left to look between the two men in shocked silence. But rather than waiting for them to explain it to him, he took what he'd been told and soon deduced a reason for their lack of progress.

"I see. One of you first needed to reach the labyrinths by your own means, while the other stayed above ground waiting to be summoned. But the only way for one of you to get there was by being summoned yourself."

"How very perceptive," Gehrman complimented, seemingly confirming his theory.

"There is just one thing I don't understand. Who is it that brought you down there?" he asked Gehrman.

"There's always a bell ringing somewhere in the labyrinths. In my case, it was all a matter of luck."

This simple answer revealed volumes. The combat prowess Gehrman displayed could not have been acquired overnight and it was impossible for him to get true experience here on the surface. But in the labyrinths, he could hone his skills against increasingly dangerous opponents, something he must've been doing for years, if not decades. And yet, Laurence couldn't grasp one thing.

Why?

What had compelled him to pursue such a dangerous practice for seemingly little reward? If everything Gehrman did truly have a reason behind it, then in this case, it was simply lost on him. But whatever it was, it had led to something truly extraordinary.

"Master Willem must be thrilled," Laurence said, breaking the silence.

"I'm sure he will be," Gehrman replied, taking him somewhat by surprise.

"You mean to say you haven't informed him?"

"Not yet," was his answer. "I would've liked to show him first-hand, but given his age, it's perhaps inconsiderate to ask him to come out here."

While this made sense to a degree, it didn't change the fact that Gehrman had consulted him before Master Willem. It was possible that he was simply overthinking things, but he couldn't help but wonder if convenience was really the only factor at play here.

"Well, in any case, we have a lot of work ahead of us," said the professor.

"Indeed. But I must warn you, it will take some time before we are able to organize a proper expedition. And once we can, I do not think it will be possible to do so in the same numbers we could in the past or at least, not right away."

"We'll cross that bridge when we get there," Laurence decided. "But I fear that once my colleagues get word of this development, they will grow restless. And I'm sure even you have your limits."

Gehrman seemed to consider this for a moment. "Yes, I see what you mean. I don't imagine I'll have much trouble guiding you in these early stages, but as we expand…"

"I can help you with that, Gehrman," Ludwig suddenly interjected, surprising them both.

"Ludwig, I can't ask that of…" "You don't have to. Laurence is right; we won't be able to rely on you forever. And when such a day comes, we'll need a back-up plan."

Still, Gehrman seemed hesitant and understandably so. After all, Ludwig was no warrior. Was he? 

Whatever the case may've been, he soon came to a decision. "Agreed," said Gehrman. "But you, too, are but one man. We may need to think bigger."

Though he had stayed quiet until that point, the gears in Laurence's head. He agreed fully with them both; Gehrman would not always be there to protect them, but at the same time, no one else could. They could no longer rely on the Knights of Cainhurst, not without revealing their deceit; and barring that, even their warriors had been claimed by the Tombs. They needed to start from scratch.

And as the professor gazed around the small room he found himself in, he found the answer hidden in plain sight. On the wall opposite him - on which Gehrman's scythe was displayed - were countless other weapons of all shapes and sizes, all no doubt haven been crafted by him, but still lacking a proper wielder.

"I think I have an idea."

Chapter Text

"And Master Willem believed it was worth pursuing."

Laurence stood in his office within his clinic, his hands folded behind his back as he stared out of the window. Behind him stood his two finest students: Iosefka and Amelia, the latter of whom he was seeing for the first time since they returned from their expedition. Taking that into account, he had seen it fit to inform them of all that had transpired over the last several days.

"Interesting," said Amelia. "And Gehrman, he has agreed to your proposition?"

"It took some convincing, but yes." Was the professor's reply, which he shortly amended. "Or at least, he has agreed to humor me for the time being."

A brief silence then settled over the room, which Iosefka would soon break. "Well, this ‘Gehrman’ sounds like quite the character. But I suppose that leads us to the more pressing question. Will anyone humor him ?"

The truth was, this was not a question Laurence could answer, at least not with certainty. "We will see soon enough," he eventually said, taking another brief pause before turning towards his students. "But whatever the case may end up being, we have much work ahead of us."

"Yes, indeed," Iosefka agreed. "If it is Byrgenwerth's intent to venture into the tombs, then it is surely yours to ensure the clinic is open to them."

"If it were to become necessary," he replied.

In response to this, Laurence's two students shared an uncertain glance, with Iosefka letting out a resigned sign before resuming speaking. "We will do all we can to treat our fellows here on the surface, but I cannot guarantee that our workers will be willing to venture into the ruins below. And I imagine that's where our service would be most essential."

"That much is true. But I cannot force any of you to follow me into Pthumeru's depths, nor do I intend to."

Not long after he said this, Amelia stepped forward. "Let that be so," she said. " But I can promise that I will follow you, Master Laurence," she said to him.

The professor would've been lying if he said he wasn't a little surprised by this. "Are you certain, Amelia?"

"Yes," she said with a nod. "I am not afraid."

In spite of himself, Laurence smiled. He hadn't forgotten the vow she had made in Loran, but that had been then. If she had chosen to abstain from future expeditions, he wouldn't have faulted her. But knowing her, that was a slim possibility. Though Iosefka was undoubtedly the more talented doctor, she was far more daring, accepting any opportunity to prove herself, no matter the risk. And needless to say, she was grateful to him for offering them to her when no-one else had.

"And I am grateful for your loyalty," he said with the utmost sincerity, which she acknowledged with a warm smile, which Laurence mirrored in return. He’d always been fond of her, not just for her courage and her eagerness to learn, but also because he recognized she was capable of so much more. In time, he hoped he could get her to realize that.

"But we are all getting ahead of ourselves. Master Willem is set to announce Byrgenwerth's new "initiative" in a few days time. And though you are not officially part of our faculty, the two of you are more than welcome to attend."

To this, Amelia's expression lit up, while Iosefka's exhibited the most subtle traces of dread. "Well, I can't say the prospect of an academic sermon appeals to me…" she said as she took off her spectacles. "...but I wouldn't miss this for the world.”

…

Three days later…

The faculty of Byrgenwerth held regular meetings throughout the year. Said meetings were traditionally focused on the course of the college and on the progress of its research, with plans being formed based on the reports given by the department heads. And each time, they would gather in a special office within the main lecture building, keeping their sensitive discussions on "the nature of things" behind closed doors.

But naturally, the meeting Laurence was to attend today was unlike the rest. Though Master Willem reserved the right to call meetings of the faculty whenever he saw fit, he did not typically do so on such short notice as today. But regardless of their level of awareness of the situation, everyone summoned knew that this gathering was especially significant.

By the time Laurence and his two students arrived, they found that most everyone else had already arrived. Micolash was of course present, as was his prize pupil Damian, who ever so briefly glared in Amelia's direction before focusing back on his master. Assistants such as them were not usually welcome at these meetings, but their presence in Loran and knowledge of the events that occured therein permitted them to at least sit-in just this once. And much the same can be said of the one sitting near the very front of the table, who was in the process of pouring over a collection of paper cards, appearing increasingly frustrated in the process.

"Oh, this is ridiculous…" he muttered to himself as he dismissively tossed one of the cards back onto the table.

Ludwig - another person who was not typically present - stood with his arms crossed behind him. "Gehrman, we've been over this. Just read out what's on the cards and everything will be fine." 

"And then what?" he asked. "You expect me to give marching orders for the rest of my days?"

"Well, I certainly can't be the one to do it," Ludwig replied, leaving Gehrman to let out a dissatisfied sigh as he rested his eyes on his fingers and the stable master to smile in amusement. "Don't worry. I'm sure you'll grow into it."

"Assuming anyone is mad enough to follow me, that is."

"Madness is of no factor here," Laurence interjected as he walked over to join them. "This research is the lifeline of Byrgenwerth and there are those that will do anything to ensure it continues."

"Maybe so," said Gehrman. "But not all see knowledge as its own reward."

"Fret not. Master Willem will see that all those involved will be compensated for their trouble. As for your…" As he spoke, Laurence spotted Lobsang sitting by himself at the opposite end of the table. The moment their eyes met, the professor understood that he needed to speak to him at once.

"Amelia."

"Yes, Master Laurence?" she asked.

"Would you kindly introduce Iosefka to our mutual friend here? And if you can, do also explain her role in our new 'initiative'."

Though clearly surprised by his request, it took her but a moment to respond. "I will…do my best, sir," she said as she looked between him and her fellow doctor.

"Wonderful." With that, Laurence turned back to Gehrman and Ludwig, who appeared just as confused as his students were. "Excuse me," he politely said before beginning to make his way over to Lobsang, who was still patiently waiting for him.

"You made it," the professor said as he approached. "Good. I trust that all is well?"

"As well as could be," Lobsang replied as calmly as ever. 

Laurence had of course not forgotten the task he had given him and that he had selflessly agreed to undertake. Before saying anything more, he briefly glanced behind him to see Gehrman quite happily shaking Iosefka's hand, who did not seem quite as pleased with the situation. Afterwards, he turned back to Lobsang, put his hand against the table and leaned in just a little closer.

"Did anyone see you?" he asked in a quiet voice.

“No, I do not believe so,” Lobsang assured him. “And they had plenty of time to come for me if they did.”

“Hmm…” the professor murmured, relieved that at least his colleague was safe. “What news, then?”

"I can confirm that Lady Maria has retrieved the bodies of her company. They were buried on a patch of land that connects Yharnam to Cainhurst Castle."

As Lobsang finished speaking, the professor nodded solemnly. He had of course known that the captain would return for her fallen men and had hoped - perhaps foolishly - that putting them to rest would give her a sense of closure, if not peace. But even if it didn’t, it would’ve been cruel to allow Loran to claim them, especially when he owed Matthias a debt.

“Anything else?” he eventually asked.

“Not very much, I’m afraid,” Lobsang replied. “Since their burial, I have not seen anyone leaving or entering the castle, at least not from land. But what I did see were ships.”

“Ships? What do you mean?”

“Merchant vessels, bearing the banner of Cainhurst,” his colleague clarified. “I thought them apparitions at first, but eventually, I saw them docking at the base of the castle. Unfortunately, I can only speculate as to what they were doing there and what cargo - if any - they were carrying.”

At first, Laurence wondered why Lobsang felt the need to mention this at all. But after giving it some thought, he understood why.

"They avoided the city's Western port," he stated rather than asked. "And did so knowing that the waters around Cainhurst Castle are treacherous year-round. Whatever their reasons, they wanted to keep their arrival a secret."

"It certainly seems that way," Lobsang agreed.

This of course begged the question. Just what were they trying to keep secret?

Before he could think of a satisfactory answer, he heard two quick thuds against the floorboards, turning his and everyone else's attention to the front of the room. There stood the newly arrived Master Willem, who smiled once all the rabble had died down.

"I am pleased to see you all here," he said. "Without any further ado, let us begin."

At once, those gathered started to make their way to their designated seats. Just as Laurence was about to do the same, Lobsang posed him one more question. "Shall I return to my perch after we're finished here?"

"No," the professor soon answered. "You've already done more than I could ask of you. Well done, Lobsang."

His colleague then nodded his understanding and thanks, which Laurence acknowledged with one of his own before rushing over to his seat, which was located just on the left of Master Willem.

Micolash had already taken his spot opposite him, which signified his position as the head of the theology department. Norbert - head of the archeology department - was also present, as were his counterparts in the fields of history, astrology and various others. And despite her unique position in the college, Caryll also maintained a permanent seat among the faculty, located just next to Micolash. As Laurence sat down, both of them silently glanced at him as if in judgment; choosing to ignore them for the time being, the professor settled in and instead focused on the headmaster, who soon began his address.

“Firstly, please join me in welcoming back our Loran expedition team. The perils of the Pthumerian labyrinths cannot be understated and so, it comes as a great relief to me and the rest of Byrgenwerth to see that you have all returned to us safely. Your courage serves as an example for us all."

Taking a pause, Master Willem initiated a brief round of applause, which was soon echoed by those who had not taken part in the expedition. Laurence and his fellow travelers were left to smile awkwardly until the clapping finally died down and the headmaster continued his address.

"But that is not the main reason I have called you all here today. Our scholars' venture into Loran, and all other ventures that preceded it, were undertaken for the cause of discovery. Just as Magellan braved the endless expanse of the world’s oceans, so we are tasked with braving the winding labyrinths of our city's forebears and piece by piece, rediscovering the lost truth they realized all those centuries ago."

He continued. "But for years, our progress has been slow. By the whims of our benefactors, we were only able to go as far as they permitted us to; stray even a step from their established path and it would be lost to us forever. But no more, my friends."

Upon saying this, Master Willem motioned for Gehrman with his hand, prompting him to stand up from his chair in the corner of the room and make his way over; once near the table, he carefully reached into his satchel and took out the round chalice they’d retrieved from Loran before setting it down in front of the headmaster. The gathered scholars then erupted in a collection of gasps and murmurs, all except for Micolash, Laurence and his two students, who looked at the object in pride…and uncertainty. 

In short time, Master Willem would again raise his hand, restoring the room to silence and allowing him to resume his address. "Yes, the Loran odyssey has yielded tremendous results - exceeding even my wildest hopes. With this, we now have the means to explore the ruins of Pthumeru to our heart's content, free from 'Her Majesty's' interference…at least in theory."

Laurence noticed Gehrman slightly shifting on his feet as the headmaster transitioned onto the next topic. "As you all no doubt understand, we have remained dependent on the Knights of Cainhurst to protect us during our expeditions - a dependence that allowed them to dictate where we can go and what we can claim. But this, too, is changing. We can't very well ask for their protection without bringing us right back to where we started… but at once, I'm certain you'll agree that it would be most irresponsible of me to allow you to venture into the labyrinths unprotected. And luckily for all of us, we have just the solution to this dilemma."

A somewhat awkward silence then settled over the meeting room, during which the more uninformed scholars looked around in confusion. As for those in the know, their attention turned to Gehrman, who continued to stand as still as a statue.

"Now, Gehrman!" Laurence whispered to him.

"Oh, right, right…" He then took the cards he'd been studying earlier and cleared his throat in order to get the rest of the room's attention. After a brief delay, he looked down at the cards and began to read.

"Greetings, accomplished scholars of Byrgenwerth," he opened. "My name is, erm…Gehrman and for decades, I have devoted myself to exploring the Pthumerian labyrinths and studying those that still dwell there. Madmen, parasites and most of all, beasts unlike any the world has ever seen. Throughout this endeavor, I…"

He trailed off for a moment until he realized he needed to move on to the next card, swapping out his current one and sending it to the back of the deck.

"...I have learned their strengths and their weaknesses, knowledge I soon began to apply in a more practical manner. Instead of simply observing them, I began to stalk them and in time, began to challenge their claim over the ruins…through combat."

He moved onto the next card. "But this was by no means an easy process. As your headmaster has stated, the danger these creatures pose cannot be understated. But with careful planning, and no small amount of luck, they can be overcome. That I stand here before you today is testament to that."

Another card. "And so, I hereby invite you to join me in this endeavor. Under my tutelage, you will be molded from simple scholars into a force that even the darkest apex of nature will fear. 'Hunters', you shall be called - the finest to ever walk the Earth."

Finally, he proceeded onto the final card. "Of course, this is a decision I do not expect you to make lightly. If any of you doubt my claims - and I imagine that is a good number of you - I nonetheless invite you to come to my Workshop, where I will gladly put those doubts to rest. Yet whatever your choice, remember: the future of Byrgenwerth now rests in your hands."

With that, he lowered the cards and looked up at his audience, who looked on with a mixture of intrigue, confusion and some disquiet. With a somewhat embarrassed smile, Gehrman then offered them a slight bow. “Thank you,” he uttered as if to indicate he was finished.

Yet even still, no one so much as stirred. It was by no means a bad speech - Laurence had made sure of that when he drafted it for him - but it was clear that public speaking was not Gehrman’s forte. His reluctance at the very idea had told him as such. But as far as first impressions went, things certainly could’ve gone worse.

Deciding to break the silence that had settled over the room, Laurence began to clap, which soon prompted Amelia and Iosefka to do the same. One by one, the rest of the gathered scholars joined in the applause, even if most of it was half-hearted. Yet this gesture seemed to embarrass Gehrman even more, who continued to stand and look around uncomfortably as he waited for it to die down, after which he practically scurried off back to his seat.

“And thank you for taking the time to be here, old friend,” Master Willem said as the attention shifted back to him. If he was embarrassed by his performance, he did not show it and simply chose to carry on. 

"I assure you all that Gehrman was being modest in describing his capabilities. In these early stages of exploration, he will serve as your main line of defense, but as we continue to expand and organize expeditions more regularly, it would be…impractical of us to expect him to oversee them all . And so, I urge you to spread the word on our new 'initiative'. Inform your staff, your students; anyone you believe would be interested in helping further our research. And give them my word that their efforts will be well-rewarded.”

Just as it seemed he was finished, the headmaster began to rise from his seat, using his staff to support his weight. “But you must do so carefully,” he said in warning. “Knowledge of these ‘Hunters’ and their purpose must not leave Byrgenwerth. If such a thing were to happen, it is only a matter of time before our benefactors become aware of our efforts. And while we may no longer require their manpower, we do still require their patronage. As such, it falls to you to ensure that this veil of secrecy is maintained.”

The headmaster's warning was stern, not to mention ominous. Laurence saw the prudence in Master Willem's words, of course; Gehrman alone offset the balance of power between Byrgenwerth and Cainhurst, a balance the latter would wish to see maintained. But the secretive nature of this policy brought Lobsang's earlier revelation back to the forefront of his mind.

There was one within Cainhurst who knew of Gehrman's true nature, her continued silence being the only thing standing in the way of a potential crisis. But what if she were to break said silence? What if she had broken her silence?

Just what had he set in motion?

...

Chapter Text

The Grand Archives of Cainhurst Castle were home to an untold number of books, documents and manuscripts, containing knowledge both common and elusive. Secretive even on the most trivial aspects of their history, the aristocracy was especially protective of its contents; only those of Cainhurst could step forth in this grand, sprawling library and even fewer among them had the privilege of learning its secrets. As such, it was rarely crowded, making it a suitable retreat to those seeking respite from the constant monotony of court life and for those who preferred to lose themselves in the pursuit of knowledge.

It was no surprise then that Lady Maria could regularly be found here, pouring over countless documents for seemingly zero purpose. Today, however, was different. She knew exactly what she was looking for when coming here and under the dim light of her candle, she carefully analyzed every word on the pages in front of her, ensuring that she didn't miss a single detail.

With a frustrated sigh, Maria closed yet another unhelpful journal and tossed it into the ever growing pile of documents beside her; she must have gone through dozens of them just today, on top of the dozens more she'd studied and cast aside in the last several days. And as difficult as it was to admit, the lack of progress was starting to weigh on her.

As she rested her head on her hand and pondered what to do next, she heard the sound of approaching footsteps. Looking over, she saw a young, female servant rushing over to her with a thick book in hand.

"Here you are, Lady Maria. As requested," the servant said as she set the book down in front of her.

Hiding her frustration behind a pleasant smile, Maria turned towards the servant. "Thank you," she softly said before opening up the book. But even as she started to turn the pages, she continued to hover over her.

"Is there anything else I can do for you?" she dutifully asked.

"Oh, no, no. You are dismissed," Maria replied, which almost seemed to disappoint her.

"Very well. Best of luck with your studies, my lady." 

The servant then turned away from her and started to make her way back towards a set of stairs leading higher up the library. Maria watched her until she disappeared from her view, after which she turned back to the book she'd brought her. This particular one was located on the very top floor of the library, as well as situated on a rather high shelf. She would've gone and gotten it herself, but…

In spite of herself, the brave Lady Maria found herself clenching her fist and squeezing her eyes shut as she imagined herself making that journey. Just the very thought was enough to petrify her, leaving her to fight back the feeling of nausea forming in her stomach. After drawing a series of deep breaths, she returned to some semblance of calm, after which she dared not look up from the table in front of her.

She found herself thankful that no one was around to see her like this. Maria's…"bias" against heights wasn't something she was proud of and not something she would admit freely. She tried to hide it, of course, but sometimes, that simply wasn't an option…and during those times, she found that having someone nearby helped alleviate her fears. Someone she trusted. 

Someone like Matthias…

Taking another deep breath, Maria began to flip through the pages in a futile attempt to turn her thoughts elsewhere. Days have turned to weeks and yet, her grief remained as fresh as the day she laid her men to rest. Had she been more like her fellow nobles, she would have spared herself this pain…but alas, there was no room for cruelty in her heart.

Maria remembered when Matthias was first placed under her tutelage. He had been unrefined, yes, but she had felt more at ease with him and the rest of his fellows than she ever had with her exuberant peers, save for her brother. She realized even then that a captain showing such weakness to her subordinate was ill-advised, yet she did so regardless. After all, what truly made them different from her?

Just as she was about to resume her studies, she heard more footsteps coming from the stairwell - though they were in sync with each other, she could tell that there was more than one person approaching.

"Make way!" came a voice. "Make way for the king!"

The moment she heard this, and realized the footsteps seemed to be headed in her direction, Maria rose from her seat and turned toward the stairwell. Sure enough, she soon saw the looming figure of her king descending down the stairs, followed by a pair of royal guards behind him. As he approached, she offered him a dutiful bow, holding this position until he came to a stop in front of her.

“At ease, Lady Maria,” he said to her, allowing her to stand up straight and at least attempt to look him in the eye. The average resident of Cainhurst towered over regular men and they in turn lived under the shadow of His Majesty, who stood a full head taller than even Maria. But where others would cower in his presence, she and her fellow knights stood before him with reverence, for he more than anyone assured Cainhurst’s safety and sovereignty. 

With a warm smile, the king turned his attention to her desk and the myriad of documents she had accumulated. “Have We arrived at an inconvenient time?”

“No, not at all, Your Majesty,” Maria assured him. “How may I be of service?”

“Oh, thou art already,” he replied. “We are aware of thine inquiries into…the gift that Her Majesty has granted thee. It is no surprise that thou wishes to cultivate thine strength.”

After briefly glancing in the direction of her study, she turned back to him. “That is my purpose.”

“And Ours, as well,” said the king. “Both of us live to protect our kingdom - and our Queen - with all our might, so it is only prudent that We aid thee in thine efforts.”

This offer came as some surprise to Maria. “How very kind of you, Your Majesty. But I cannot ask that you trouble yourself with such frivolous research.”

“Good. Because We come to thee with a different offer,” he unexpectedly said. "Her Majesty wishes to gauge your progress, and as do We. As such, the two of us decided it would be prudent to give thee the chance to…demonstrate thy new abilities."

She realized at once what he was offering her, a realization that brought forth a mix of shock, eagerness and a good bit of nervousness. “It would be an honor, my king,” said Maria.

"Splendid," he said with a nod of his head. "Then gather thy equipment and meet Us in the arena. Preparations are already underway." Somewhat taken aback by this revelation, Maria prepared to speak, only for His Majesty to interrupt her before the words even left her lips. “Oh, and do not fret over the mess. Thy fellow guards can deal with it. Can they not?”

“Of course, Your Majesty,” one of them soon agreed. Though their helmets hid their expressions, she could still detect some reluctance in his voice.

“Our thanks. And in return, we shall treat ye with a proper spectacle. Of that, We are certain.” The two guards dutifully nodded their heads, allowing the king to turn his attention back towards her.

“Now then, Lady Maria. Shall we?”

…

Upon her dismissal, Maria quickly made her way back to her quarters. His Majesty had not hastened her, but if what he said was true and that Queen Annalise would indeed be in attendance, then she knew better than to keep her waiting. Thankfully, she didn’t have to travel far from the archives.

Once her door was closed behind her, she folded back her room divider and revealed her equipment space, as well as the new contents within. On the right-hand side was the silver armor bestowed to her upon her ascension to the royal guard, which was displayed on a dedicated stand on the side of the room. For centuries, it had been the most coveted mark of status among Cainhurt’s warriors, but as she looked at it now, Maria felt…nothing. No pride, no reverence; nothing.

Once upon a time, she aspired to be a royal guard just as any other knight. But she soon realized that an additional title to her name was the last thing she needed or wanted. Regardless of that, Maria knew that Queen Annalise always intended to mold her into her personal servant - it was only a matter of time before she offered her a place at her side. She just wished it hadn’t come at such a heavy cost.

Taking a deep breath, Maria set about donning her armor. Despite its material, it was almost paper thin and just as light, allowing her to move almost as freely as she would in her regular garb. The last item to be put on was a richly ornate burgonet helmet, to which was attached a short wig of silver hair. She kept the helmet’s buffe - which obscured and protected her entire head - up for the time being, as it was rather difficult to see through it; this did not usually pose a problem to the royal guard as they rarely saw combat, with the faceplate serving a more decorative than practical purpose. 

Once Maria was suited, she began to arm herself. First, she retrieved her trusty Evelyn pistol, attaching its holster to her belt as she had so many times before. After that, all she needed was her main weapon - for which two options lay before her. Her beloved Rakuyo, which remained on its display stand; or the recently introduced Chikage, which rested on her workbench. 

Oh, but there wasn’t really a choice, was there?

Walking to her workbench, Maria looked down at the seemingly inconspicuous sword - the sword that had consumed her every waking hour for the last several weeks. For weeks, the blade that Queen Annalise gave her had been the only one of its kind in Cainhurst, but as she had promised, recent shipments have provided them with dozens more. But before it can be universally adopted, its full capabilities first had to be presented - a task that once again fell to her. 

And Maria had fully dedicated herself to this task. She resolved to uncover its secrets and in the process, unlock its true potential. Her true potential. Yet the more she learned, the more the mere act of picking it up terrified her. 

Nevertheless, it soon found itself in her hands. It always did, in the end. 

As she studied the blade’s intricate engravings for the umpteenth time, her gaze turned to her Rakuyo. Walking over to it, she gently ran her finger along its blade, peeling away a thin layer of dust in the process. For the first time since she could remember, Maria would be going into battle without it. Whether it would be the last depended on her performance tonight…and Her Majesty did not like to be disappointed.

Some time later, Lady Maria finally attached Chikage’s scabbard to her waist and turned to leave, hurrying along to where Their Majesties were waiting for her. Along the way, she passed by several of her fellow citizens, all of whom seemed to be heading in the same direction as her - noble and servant alike. And despite her helmet obscuring her visage, each of them somehow recognized her and stepped aside if she passed; whether this was done out of respect or fear, she did not know nor did she particularly care. 

Despite these minor distractions, Maria finally reached the castle’s indoor battle arena. While her soon-to-be spectators poured into the main entrances, she slipped inside through a secret tunnel, allowing her to go straight to the gate leading to the arena proper. There, she found several other knights gathered around it, chatting amongst themselves until they noticed her approach. Once they did, they parted for her…all except one, who stood completely still even as she came to stand right in front of him.

"You made it," said Adrian, recognizing her identity immediately. Maria could've maintained deniability and simply said nothing, but she realized she wasn't going to fool him.

"You expected otherwise?" she asked, her voice somewhat muffled by her helmet.

"No." Maria soon noticed him looking down to the sword on her hip, which he did with a hint of disgust. “But perhaps I hoped otherwise.”

"I do not need your concern, brother," she firmly replied. "I control this weapon; it does not control me.”

“I said nothing of control.”

At once, Maria realized her gaffe, but chose not to acknowledge it, even if her silence on the matter was far more damning. “Their Majesties wish for me to demonstrate my newfound capabilities. I have no choice in the matter,” was what she eventually said.

“Do you not?” Adrian asked as he took a step towards her. “Six weeks, Maria. I haven’t heard from you for six weeks! You lock yourself in your study, toiling over this cursed blade. And for what?”

“What does it matter?” “Because you are not yourself!” her brother firmly stated. “You haven’t been ever since your return. I can see it; everyone can see it. What happened to your men was a tragedy, but how long do you intend to let it consume you?”

“For as long as I need to!” It took every ounce of Maria’s willpower to refrain from yelling, yet she was unable to fully drain the venom from her words. Adrian slightly recoiled, but did not back down, continuing to stare at her in a mixture of surprise and unease. Regret soon set in, but just as she was about to try offering an apology, they heard the arena erupt in cheers and just as quickly, fall completely silent.

“Good evening, friends!” came the voice of Queen Annalise, which echoed throughout the building. “We share in thine excitement, so We shall keep this brief. A spectacle unlike any other awaits us - a display of our kingdom’s unparalleled might. And with our last major gathering still fresh in thy minds, our first contestant surely needs no introduction!”

Recognizing her cue, Maria looked back at Adrian, who continued to stand in her way. He continued to do so up until the moment the wooden gate began to rise behind him, which was when he finally stepped aside, even if he did so reluctantly. After sparing one last glance at her brother, she stepped forward and emerged into the arena to the cheers of the crowd.

She found herself  a large circular area resembling a coliseum, with a domed ceiling shielding them from the persistent cold. It had been built to accommodate almost the entire population of the castle; just over 400 people, who would be seated on several dedicated floors. The lowest tier was reserved to nobility, with knights being reserved to the middle and regular servants to the very top. There were also two dedicated seats for the King and Queen on the northernmost end of the arena, only one of which was presently occupied.

“And the same can surely be said of her opponent,” said Queen Annalise, with just this vague mention being enough to drive the crowd into a frenzy. “But nevertheless, please join Us in welcoming thy stalwart defender, and Our beloved husband - King Logarius!”

Before Maria’s eyes, a gate at the opposite end of the arena opened. And out of it stepped His Majesty, the King, who was welcomed by a roaring applause. As the crowd chanted his name, he warmly smiled and waved to his subjects, acknowledging the devotion and praise they were lavishing upon him. And though she herself remained stoically silent, she could not deny that it was well deserved.

“We thank you!” With a hearty chuckle, he turned towards where Queen Annalise was seated and bowed to her like a showman taking the stage. “And We thank our Queen for her most flattering introduction.” In response, Her Majesty drew a rare genuine smile, which remained even after her husbands turned away from her and towards Maria. “And as for thee, most noble Lady Maria, may ours be a battle for the ages!”

Once again, the crowd cheered, but to this Maria paid only passing attention. Her mind was squarely focused on her opponent, of whose technique and ability she knew little. Yet she - like all those in Cainhurst - had heard tales of his prowess, tales that she did not doubt. And so, she first acknowledged his challenge with a respectful bow, which he himself recognized with a nod of his head.

“Now…bring Us Our weapons!”

As the crowd roared, several members of the royal guard made their way to their king, approaching him from both sides of the arena. On the right, a single guard carried a long, almost wavy sword; on the left, two others carried an enormous, crooked staff, with a jagged scythe-like blade attached to the top. Upon reaching His Majesty, the guards held out the weapons to him, both of which he accepted without even turning his gaze from her. As his fingers curled around the hilt of his sword and the wood of his staff, King Logarius sighed in contentment.

“It has been far too long…” he said as if to himself before pointing the tip of his sword at her. “Go on, then. Show Us what the ‘future of Cainhurst’ holds!”

Taking a deep breath, Maria drew Chikage from its scabbard, tightly gripping its hilt in one hand as she stared down her opponent, while Queen Annalise looked down on them from above.

“Begin!”

Immediately, Maria sprung into action and rushed towards her king, who in contrast to her approached with a slow and composed walk. Once the distance between them was cleared, it was she who swung first, an attack that he easily managed to deflect with his own sword. This itself was not surprising, but rather the force with which he did it; just the collision of their blades alone came close to knocking her off balance. 

Thankfully, she was able to maintain her balance and assail her opponent with a flurry of slashes with her sword. During her training, she found that this new weapon of hers handled quite similarly to her Rakuyo, allowing her to adapt to it rather quickly. However, this didn’t do her much good, as His Majesty was able to deflect each and every one of her attacks, all while continuing his steady advance. 

“Impressive technique.” With this comment, he finally swung his sword and properly parried her latest attack. The sheer force of the impact caused Maria to stumble backward, almost making her drop the Chikage in the process. By some miracle, she was able to recover just in time to block His Majesty’s attempt at a riposte…and by another miracle, her sword didn’t end up shattering in the process.

“But We have seen much greater skill than thine. What truly separates thee from the rest?” he asked as she struggled to hold him back, requiring the strength of both arms just to hold back his one. And it was this discrepancy that finally allowed His Majesty to break their stalemate, as with a single slam of his staff, he unleashed a shockwave that sent Maria flying like a ragdoll and tumbling along the ground. However, it wasn’t long until she managed to catch herself and get back on her feet, ignoring the aching pain in her arms as she stared her opponent down, whose staff now glowed with a ghastly red hue.

“SHOW US!!” 

With a sudden burst of speed, King Logarius charged at her, leaving her with no choice but to weave between the lightning quick swings he unleashed upon her. In an attempt to slow him down, Maria drew and fired her pistol, only for him to effortlessly avoid her bullets by quickly drifting to the side; for a moment, it almost seemed like he was levitating through the air. Regardless of his means, it allowed His Majesty to once again put Maria on the backfoot. Even putting aside the pace of his attacks, his vastly superior strength and larger weapon made any attempt at parrying ill-advised - unless she wished to see the bones in her arms shattered. But she needed a way to put him back on the defensive and fast.

Said opportunity finally presented itself when she saw her opponent preparing for a horizontal swing. Having acquired some awareness of his timing, Maria dashed forward rather than back, elegantly dodging under his blade while readying her own. But in the split second that followed, she spotted something out of the corner of her eye; a strange, orange glow. And almost the moment she became aware of this, an explosion rang out behind her, propelling her further than she intended and causing her to completely miss her mark.

Landing on her hands and knees some distance away, Maria turned her head just in time to see His Majesty's scythe swinging towards her. Letting her instincts take over for just a moment, she rolled to the side, allowing the weapon to just barely miss her. Before she’d even finished her maneuver, the king attacked again, this time swinging his scythe down at an angle. Seeing, Maria raised her sword in order to defend herself and although she buckled under the sheer force of his swing, she managed to stop the jagged pick from driving straight into her skull. Yet as she struggled against it, she heard… no, felt something from within the weapon’s edge – something that made her blood run cold.

Whispers. 

Curses. 

And screams. Screams of pure anguish.

“By the Great Ones…” she uttered in horror. 

The armies of Europe often spoke of a legendary warrior king, one capable of decimating entire legions single-handed; one who ensured that those who threatened his realm, or his Queen, suffered…and would continue to suffer far after he cut them down. And so, no one dared threaten his realm, lest they earn his wrath - this reaper from the snow.

The Cainhurst Executioner. 

“To protect one’s kingdom, one must often take…drastic measures,” she heard His Majesty say, but what she didn’t hear was pride. “And as Our royal aegis, it is thy duty to protect it, by any means necessary!”

With a mighty roar, Maria pushed with all her might, shifting her weight to the side and throwing King Logarius off balance. Then, before he could recover, she gripped the hilt of her sword and thrust forward, its tip aimed at his stomach. But it wasn’t long until the tables were once again turned on her.

Back-stepping out of range, His Majesty was carried into the air like a leaf in the wind, leaving Maria – and the observing crowd – to watch in awe as he levitated above the arena. Even Queen Annalise leaned forward in her seat - not so much out of shock or worry, but intrigue. And all eyes remained on her husband as he raised his staff high into the air, releasing a swarm of crimson skulls that swirled around the nexus of their prison.

“HESITATION WILL PROVE RUINOUS!”

With a single swing of his staff, he sent the unholy mass spiraling towards her. A cacophony of screaming souls could be heard as they descended on her like a meteor - too large and too swift for her to evade in time. And so instead, she stood firm, closed her eyes and sheathed her blade, listening as the souls of the damned approached to claim her. Then, just as she was about to be consumed, she let loose a bellowing cry, drowning out the wailing of the spirits…until both were silenced by an ear-shattering eruption.

Gasps filled the room as the onlookers observed the aftermath. A streak of blood surrounded the ground on which Lady Maria stood, ghastly sparks still falling around her. Yet she herself was unharmed. 

In between heavy breaths, Maria brought her blood-soaked blade before her face, once again closing her eyes as she felt its strength seep into her – restoring her vigor and spurring her spirit. It had freed those vengeful spirits from their bondage…but it wasn’t satisfied yet. It wouldn’t be until their captor was defeated.

“Excellent.” Opening her eyes, she witnessed her king slowly descend down to the ground, safely touching down a fair distance away from her. “Now…HOLD NOTHING BACK!”

And Maria was all too happy to oblige.

Their restraints now cast off, the two warriors charged at each-other, a scarlet haze following in their wake. What followed next was a titanic struggle. Her strength now amplified ten-fold, Maria was able to match his majesty step-for-step, forcing them both to abandon any form of defense and focus on ensuring the other received no reprieve. And amidst this clash of splattering blood and vengeful souls, Queen Annalise watched on in satisfaction, clapping her hands and filling the room with her delighted laughter.

But entertaining her Queen was not Maria’s goal. Victory was.

Wielding her blood-imbued weapon with both hands, she swung it from side in quick succession, its transformed state allowing her to reach further and hit harder. However, His Majesty remained a nimble adversary; even after minutes of combat, the most she was able to accomplish was staining his robes with stray droplets of blood. With each miss, Maria’s frustration grew, her attacks becoming more and more erratic as she chased him down. 

And after one such careless swing, her opponent glided backwards, swinging his scythe as he went. But it didn't even come close to grazing her. Instead, an enormous ghoulish face appeared in the spot he'd just stood, its harrowing cries echoing through the arena as she rushed headlong into its maw. But rather than swallowing her whole, the apparition instead exploded outwards, blasting her off her feet and sending her painfully skidding across the ground.

"Such recklessness. How very unlike thee…" she heard His Majesty say, as if he were speaking his thoughts out loud. But this only strengthened Maria's frustration, compelling her to spring to her feet and prepare to resume their battle, stumbling ever so slightly as she stared him down.

"We…are not…finished…" she said between heaving breaths.

"As much as We would like to agree, thou art clearly spent," said King Logarius. "'Twas a fine bout, but thou must stand down. For thine own sake."

Maria's exhaustion was not lost on her, but every word that left his lips stoked her already burning anger. Their battle was meant to push them to their very limit and she had yet to exceed her. And even if she had, she did not want his pity or his mercy. How dare he insult her like this?!

"How…how DARE you?!!" 

Tightly gripping her blade, she charged once more, while her target stood still as a statue as he watched her approach. "What is the meaning of this? Yield at once!" Maria answered this command with a wild swing of her sword, which he only narrowly avoided. "Lady Maria! This battle is over! Stand down!!!"

"I SAY WHEN IT'S OVER!" she screamed at the top of her lungs as she continued her onslaught. "FACE ME, YOU COWARD! FIGHT!" Even with her challenge, he refused to retaliate, which only spurred her to intensify her efforts. If he wished to die, then so be it.

"ENOUGH!!"

His powerful voice echoed through the room as he finally swung his sword at her, forcing her to dash backward as the blade cut horizontally through the air. Much to her shock, said swing left an orange streak along its path, momentarily making it seem that he had cut through reality itself. But as soon as this tear appeared, it exploded outward and although Maria was unharmed by the resulting blast, its sheer force propelled her back further than she intended, forcing her to dig her heels into the ground in order to bring herself to a stop. Looking again at her opponent, she witnessed him raising his sword over his head, imbuing it with a similar magic as his staff.

"We are thy king, and We will make thee SUBMIT!"

With this final word, he slammed the tip of his blade into the ground, releasing a small crimson shockwave on the process. Just as she was about to attack, Maria looked up to see an assortment of daggers form in the air above the king, their jagged edges pointing straight at her. Before she could even blink, at least half a dozen of them shot towards her, with several more following suit.

Refusing to back down, Maria focused up and with a few precise swings, managed to knock the first two waves out of the air, save for one that she caught by the handle before it could hit her. Throwing it aside, she took off running towards her opponent, weaving from side to side as dagger after dagger embedded itself in the ground around her. But her advance was swiftly halted when a sharp pain shot through her left leg.

As she cried out in anguish, a dagger drove into her right shoulder, then another in her left arm and another in her stomach. The overwhelming pain soon forced Maria to her knees as more and more daggers pierced her armor and flesh. The moment one of them hit their mark, they disappeared, allowing another to take its place. Her vision blurred. Her heartbeat raged in her ears. Blood seeped from every orifice.

And then, something extraordinary happened.

Mere seconds after the dagger in her leg disappeared, she felt the wound it left begin to mend itself and just as quickly, disappear completely. One by one, each individual source of pain simply faded away, as the blood that coated Chikage seeped back into her body. By “bonding” with the sword, its magic granted her considerable control over her bloodstream; apart from strengthening the sword, she could also decide how it flowed throughout her body. And right now, Maria willed it to travel to her wounds and hastened the natural healing process, sealing them in seconds.

This provided only temporary relief, however, seeing as the daggers continued to rain down from above, overwhelming her again and again. But this pain she could endure, provided that she stayed focused.

Rising to her feet amidst the jagged deluge, Maria focused on its source – the sword that still stood planted in the ground. Realizing that she had to destroy it, she trudged forward, focusing all of her energy into her sword. What blood had managed to escape her wounds flowed across the floor and into its pommel as she gritted her teeth, pulled her weapon back and thrust it forward with a mighty yell.

A torrent of blood shot out from Chikage’s tip, traveling forward at a blinding speed. And that wasn’t all. Much to her shock and awe, her blood burst into a spiraling flame, shooting across the arena and shattering the embedded sword into pieces. A dreadful silence fell over the arena as the remaining daggers clattered to the ground around the king, who for the first time since their battle began was utterly aghast.

“How can this be?” he uttered to himself, so quietly that Maria almost didn’t hear him. But she did…and it made her break out in a dark chuckle.

“Do you see, now?” she asked as she pointed her bloodied sword at him, embers still dancing around it. “What I’m truly capable of?

“We see that thou hast taken leave of thy senses. Cease this posturing at once!” As he issued this command, he slammed the bottom of his scythe into the ground.

His scythe…

Its blade glistened brightly as memories of that fateful day flashed before her eyes – visions of her so-called “savior” as he cut down the monster that had torn her men apart. And as these images flooded her mind, so too did the feelings they had spurred. Confusion. Despair.

Hatred.

"Posturing…?" she repeated in a low, threatening tone. "POSTURING?!?"

In a fit of fury, Maria raised her weapon overhead and slammed it into the ground, sending forth an eruption of blood and fire that enveloped almost the entire arena around her. As the inferno approached him, her opponent again retreated into the air and readied his scythe, as if finally realizing that words were of no further use. 

Good.

As her opponent reached the apex of his ascent, Maria suddenly gave chase and leapt high up into the air – even higher than him, in fact. The height to which she traveled surprised even her, but this only barely registered as she set her sights on her opponent, readied her sword and swooped down on him like a hawk. The shock on his face was evident as he held up both of his weapons to defend himself, unable to stop her from crashing into him at full velocity. But even though he managed to stop her blade, their collision sent both of them barreling toward the ground.

The scythe-wielder’s back hit the stone floor with a mighty crash, but even so, he continued to struggle against Maria, who had successfully pinned him down. Gritting her teeth, she pushed down with all her might, but failed to overcome his strength. So instead, she curled one of her gauntlets and began to viciously pummel him, drawing blood with every stroke. Seeing that he was disoriented, she threw her weapon aside and grabbed his, attempting to pry it from his hands. Yet he continued to resist - that was until she pulled him towards her and smashed her helmet into his face, loosening his grip just enough to allow her to disarm him.

Ignoring the ringing in her head, Maria threw his accursed weapon away and wrapped her gauntlets around his neck, squeezing as tightly as they possibly could. He struggled in vain to escape her grasp, clawing and pulling against her hands, but still she would not let go. If she only wanted him dead, she would’ve simply driven her blade into his heart and ended it there. No, she wanted him to suffer - as her men suffered. 

“Yield, Lady Maria! We command you to yield!!” Came the voice of Queen Annalise, though it fell on deaf ears. “Guards! Seize her!!!” 

She only faintly heard the sound of metallic footsteps surrounding her on all sides and even more faintly, a desperate plea for them to stop. Suddenly, she felt someone’s arm wrap around her neck and attempt to pull her off her struggling victim. “Maria, stop! Don’t you see what you’re…!!”

“GET OFF ME!” she yelled as she attempted to push them off. “Get…off…”

Suddenly, the fatigue that racked her body became too much to bear. Her vision began to blur. Her heartbeat raged in her ears. And in spite of her efforts, her grip loosened, allowing whoever was trying to restrain her to pull her back. Maria tried to struggle, but even moving her arms proved too tasking, leaving her to be practically dragged along the ground until she was gently set down. 

“Maria?!” came a muffled, but clearly panicking voice. Soon afterwards, she felt her helmet being pulled off her head, after which she was able to make out Adrian’s face. “Oh, heavens…look at me! Breathe, Maria! Breathe!” 

The removal of her helmet provided only a minor relief; her breathing remained rapid but shallow, becoming more and more desperate with each passing second. A harrowing chill spread throughout her body, one that quickly overwhelmed each of her senses. The taste of blood on her tongue, the sound of her rapidly beating heart, the horrified visage of her brother as he struggled to keep her conscious; they all faded away.

Then, there was only darkness.

...

Chapter Text

Maria felt weightless. Like she was sinking into increasingly murky water. She couldn’t see anything. Feel anything: no pain, no anger; nothing. But occasionally, she could hear voices. There was no telling what they were saying and with every passing moment, they grew more and more distant. But no matter how deep she sank, she remained aware of one voice in particular. It sounded…anxious. Sometimes even like it was grieving. 

Then suddenly, she felt herself being carried towards the surface. It was an agonizingly slow process, but in time, Maria broke above the waves. Breath returned to her lungs, the open air grazed her frigid skin and with what little strength her body could muster, she willed her eyes to finally open.

Through her blurry vision, she could just barely make out an unfamiliar ceiling above her. It was still much too painful to move her head, but at the very least, she could sense that she was no longer lying on the arena’s stone floor, but rather on something much more comfortable - a bed, she imagined. And almost the moment she felt her senses return to her, she could hear that voice again. She still couldn’t quite make out what it was saying, but there was no mistaking it now. It was the same voice she had heard just before the darkness had claimed her.

“A-Adrian?” she weakly muttered. 

Her brother’s face soon entered her field of vision; even in her dazed state, his relief was obvious. “Yes, I’m here,” he softly said to her. “I knew you’d come back to me, Maria. I never lost hope.” 

As consciousness returned to her piece by piece, she could feel Adrian clutching her hand, as if desperately trying to keep her bound to the mortal plane. But beyond just that, Maria also felt…lighter. Like a part of her very essence had been taken away. Corrupted. 

Before she could dwell too long on this, her brother let go of her hand and disappeared from view. Soon after, she could hear the sound of pouring liquid, making her acutely aware of her parching thirst far before he returned with a clear glass of water. “Here. Drink this,” he said as he brought the glass up to her. And as much as Maria wanted to protest, she allowed him to carefully tip it forward, letting the nourishing liquid flow to her lips. Yet even after several eager gulps, her thirst proved overwhelming, leading to her attempting to grab hold of the glass with both hands…and sending a surge of pain through her body in the process.

The water she’d been drinking spilled out of Maria’s mouth and onto the white gown she was wearing. Through her fatigue, she hadn’t even realized she was no longer wearing her armor. But then…

“Easy,” Adrian firmly commanded, easing her back against her pillow. “You may be awake, but you still need time to heal. And that’s not just the doctor’s order.”

“ Doctor? ” she thought to herself. And that’s when everything finally clicked into place. The soft bed, the velvet gown; she was in the infirmary. The last thing she remembered was a sense of almost primal rage and then, a numbness - numbness to the world around her. All that had mattered to her was to see the target of her fury tremble before her. To see the light drain from his eyes.

And then, nothing. 

“What…what happened to me?”

“You lost control,” Adrian answered. “And in doing so, attempted to kill King Logarius.”

Upon hearing those words, Maria was overcome with horror. “What? No, no, that can’t be….I would never….”

“But you did,” her brother interrupted. “And the crowd called for your head, even as your life was slipping away before us. I pleaded that you receive medical attention…and by the grace of His Majesty, you find yourself here.”

This additional information only barely registered in Maria’s mind. She remembered everything now. Her public duel with King Logarius - a battle that had pushed her to her very limits and beyond. But past a point, her king completely disappeared from her memory. Because in her mind, she hadn’t been facing him, but someone else entirely. 

Gehrman. 

But then, it was over. She remembered Adrian holding her in her final moments of consciousness, completely and utterly horrified. And looking at him now, her brother looked completely exhausted. Traces of a beard were visible along his jaw; dark circles had appeared under his eyes, which were themselves swollen and bloodshot. This was concerning enough on its own, but she distinctly remembered him being clean-shaven when she encountered him before her duel.

“How long was I…” “Two weeks,” he swiftly answered. “But with how much blood you lost, you’re lucky it was only that long. By the time we brought you here, every wound you suffered had already been sealed and there were no signs of internal bleeding…yet you remained at death’s door. That accursed sword had drained you.”

Adrian’s voice faltered as he recounted these events. To Maria, it felt as if no time at all had passed, but if what he said was true - and he had no reason to lie - death had come close to claiming her. As she struggled to come to terms with this fact, one question remained in her mind. How had she survived?

“There was only one thing to do. We needed to replenish your blood supply, but…” he trailed off then, averting his gaze for the first time since she awakened.

“But what? What happened?” Maria demanded.

“Her Majesty’s blood changed you - made finding a suitable donor all but impossible. And so, I went to her, ready to beg for her help, but even our doctors agreed that it was no use. Even with the “gift” she bestowed upon you, your relation is far too distant for a transfusion to be effective.”

Despite finishing there, it was clear that there was more to Adrian’s story. Something that he didn’t want to admit to her. The fact she could still draw breath revealed as much. And it wasn’t long until she realized what that was.

Looking down at her right arm, she noticed that the area between her wrist and elbow was wrapped in bloody bandages. It couldn’t have been for one of the many stab wounds she’d sustained in her battle with King Logarius; Adrian had said that they had all been sealed. That could only mean that the wound they protected had occurred while she was unconscious and unable to heal herself.  

This could only mean one thing. They had found a suitable blood donor. But if not Queen Annalise, then…

“No…Adrian, you didn’t…”

Without saying a word, he turned back towards her and lowered his right sleeve, revealing a fading circular wound on his wrist. No more words were needed, as the disgust in his eyes spoke for itself - disgust not for her, but for himself.

Maria could only stare at her brother in shock. As she suspected, it had been his blood that had saved her life. And although she had next to no knowledge about medicine, his decision seemed logical; after all, they shared the same blood . But that did not matter when her own had been tainted beyond recognition…unless, of course, his had been as well.

“Why, brother? There must’ve been…” “There was no other way, Maria,” he interrupted her, rolling his sleeve back up in the process. “And to save you, it was a small price to pay.”

“A small price to pay?” she repeated, her voice growing quieter and more distant with every word. “Look at me! Is this what you want for yourself?!”

“NO!” Maria was taken aback by the intensity of his reply, causing them both to fall back into silence as a result. That was, until Adrian concluded his statement.

“But I would rather live as a monster than see you die as one.”

A tense silence settled over the infirmary as the two siblings stared at each other, neither of them seeming sure on what to say next. But what was there to say? As frustrating as her brother’s decision was, Maria knew that if their situations were reversed, she would have done the exact same thing without hesitation. Because he wasn’t just her brother. He was her oldest and closest companion; the only person in this entire castle that she could still trust with her very life. And for better or worse, her faith in him had not been misplaced. 

Yet it was not Adrian’s unwavering devotion or her debilitated state that occupied her thoughts. It was the word he’d used to refer to himself. To both of them.

“Monster.” 

Before she could dwell too long on this, she heard footsteps coming down the hallway outside. Adrian must have as well, for he immediately sprang from his seat and turned towards the door, clenching his fists as if preparing himself for the worst. However, his stance softened significantly when they heard an all too familiar warning echoing through the hall.

“Make way for the king!”

Brother and sister alike looked on in bewilderment as none other than King Logarius himself entered the infirmary. It took him but a moment to locate Maria’s bed, but once he did, she could see the faint traces of a smile from beneath his beard. “So, it is true,” he said before beginning to make his way over.

“Your Majesty!” Adrian exclaimed. Yet rather than standing aside, he prostrated himself at his feet. “Please, I beg of you, have mercy! My sister, she didn’t…!”

“Calm thyself, young Adrian,” King Logarius said in a surprisingly gentle tone. “We are not here to cast judgment, nor do We intend to. We merely wish to congratulate thy sister on her miraculous recovery…and if possible, to speak with her privately.” 

Maria’s surprise could not have possibly exceeded that of her brother, who looked up at the king like a confused dog. As if sensing his uncertainty, His Majesty placed a comforting hand on his shoulder. “Fear not. No harm will come to her; We promise thee.”

Even with this assurance, Adrian was slow to react. A few moments later, he rose to his feet and dutifully bowed his head. “Thank you,” was all he said to King Logarius before walking past him. Just before he walked out the door, he took one last look at Maria, who herself had to give him an affirming nod before he finally left the infirmary. Before he did, the two of them came to a silent agreement that their discussion was far from over.

But that would have to wait. Once her brother was out of the room, Maria’s attention turned to her unexpected visitor, whose friendly demeanor didn’t change in the slightest even once they were left alone. “He has hardly left thy side,” he said in reference to Adrian. “Never in all Our years have We seen such a loyal caretaker…or guardian.”

She understood at once why King Logarius would choose such a descriptor. Adrian mentioned the crowd calling for her head and given that almost the entire population of Cainhurst had laid witness to her transgression, there were bound to be those who would seek to enact justice upon her, especially when they knew she was helpless to stop them. And her brother knew this, too, as well as the powerful enemies he stood to make by protecting her.

Yet it seemed he was not quite alone in this endeavor. 

“Your Majesty, I am truly sorry,” Maria said while hanging her head in shame. “You must trust that I would never knowingly bring harm to you.”

“And We do.” Upon hearing this, she quickly raised her head to find him moving closer to her bedside, pulling up the chair that Adrian had been using and calmly taking a seat. "But putting that aside for a moment, We are truly impressed with thy newfound tenacity. Thou art every bit as mighty as Our Queen said thee would be and more. We congratulate thee on thy victory."

What surprised Maria wasn’t so much what His Majesty had said, but rather the almost casual way in which he said it. She had blatantly disregarded his orders, humiliated him in front of his subjects and came close to choking the very life out of him; yet despite all of that, there hadn’t been a hint of hesitation in his voice when he said he believed her or in his belated concession. Few in Cainhurst’s history have ever matched the mighty King Logarius in combat…and as far as she knew, none have ever bested him.

“My King, I…” Before she could say anymore, he raised his hand, silencing her in an instant.

“There is no need for explanations,” he said calmly. “Thy service is a testament to thy character, Lady Maria. We do not believe that such an honorable warrior would resort to such senseless savagery…without cause, that is.” 

Much like that, His Majesty belied the real reason he was here. “You have done nothing to draw my ire,” Maria soon said.

“Then are We to believe that the anger thou displayed in our battle was not thy own?”

If Maria had any doubts as to the purpose of His Majesty’s visit, they were instantly put to rest. What was still uncertain was whether he was merely seeking answers or seeking to confirm existing ones. But whatever the case may have been, she knew that she could not hide the truth from him - at least, not entirely.

“I wish I could say it was not.”

His Majesty’s reaction was a middling one. After stroking his beard, he stood up from his seat and walked towards her bedside window. “Yes. We feared as much,” he said as he gazed out across his kingdom. 

“And what could possibly frighten His Majesty?” she tentatively inquired, being careful to avoid coming across as derisive. And just as it seemed her question would go unanswered, he turned his head to look at her…yet she found that the nature of his gaze was different, somehow. Not disgusted, but rather regretful.

"Allow Us to answer thy question with another question," he said as he turned towards her. "Why dost thou serve Us?

Understandably, Maria was taken aback by this sudden and seemingly unrelated question. "I…do not understand."

"Ah, but thou does," His Majesty insisted. "Thee, and thy fellow subjects, all chose to submit thyselves to Us; in return, We serve and protect thee, and the lands we inhabit, from those who might bring us harm. Now, the existence of those enemies tells us that not all recognize Our authority, but they too have lords that they serve and lands that they wish to protect. It is the way of the world. But what makes it so? Loyalty. Rationality. And above all else, a desire for a better life.”

He continued. “Humanity is defined by those qualities, and this kingdom - our kingdom is the culmination of humanity. Yet, what would happen if its residents were to…regress? To accept the lot that nature has granted them and nothing more? To answer that, we need only look to our ancestors. Chaos. Savagery. A life devoid of any meaning or purpose, driven only by the most primal of instincts. That is Our fear."

King Logarius’ words were passionate and forceful, as well as reminiscent of the address his wife had given Maria before her departure. The people of Pthumeru had submitted themselves to the Great Ones, forces of nature that none of them could ever hope to control; a realization that in time would drive them all to madness. And now that she had seen what little remained of her ancestors for herself - the withered, mindless drones that roamed the ruins of the once-mighty civilization they had built - she understood His Majesty’s fear. The harrowing prospect that Cainhurst, perhaps even all of Yharnam, could suffer the same fate. 

However, history was unlikely to repeat itself verbatim . Both King Logarius and Queen Annalise understood the danger of worshiping the Great Ones…but that was not the only path to insanity, as Maria had so clearly demonstrated. She had not been guiding Chikage in her battle with His Majesty; it had been guiding her, stoking the fires of hate that burned within her until they had consumed everything. So while she pursued her vengeance beyond all reason, the blade continued to eat away at her drop by drop, with her being none the wiser. She no longer answered to anyone. Rationality had gone out the window. And she had but one desire left; the destruction of her prey. 

"You knew this would happen," she said, not quite knowing if it was a question or a statement. And judging how King Logarius fell silent, he himself wasn’t certain of what his response should be.

"We had concerns over Her Majesty's proposal from the outset, but they were rooted in mere hypotheticals. Neither of us truly knew what results this, shall we say, initiative would yield."

As expected, his words were ambiguous and inconclusive, but not to the point where Maria could not piece together the implication behind his answer. It wasn’t too much of an assumption to say both he and Her Majesty knew far more about the Old Blood than most - enough to know about its potential side effects. In addition, she vaguely remembered him saying that both Queen Annalise and himself wished to gauge her progress with Chikage, so needless to say, the two of them must have agreed that this process - no, experiment was necessary. 

“And know you do. So I ask; what is your conclusion?” Maria knew that this was a rather bold demand, but she found it difficult to care. As she saw it, she deserved to know - both as their subject and the focus of their little experiment.

“Her Majesty still believes it is possible to control the power thou possesses, as well as those who wield it,” he said as he turned back towards the window. “She is of the mind that since We are now aware of its ‘imperfections’ it is possible to avoid its worst effects.”

This idea seemed completely laughable at first glance, but this was only because Maria had experienced the effects of these “imperfections” first hand. And besides, there was no point of comparison; what happened to her might very well have been entirely due to circumstance. “Yes, I suppose it is… possible,” she acknowledged.

“But not certain,” said King Logarius. “And like most things, little good comes from soldiers one cannot control.”

Despite herself, Maria’s eyes widened in shock. Thoughts of her fallen compatriots filled her mind or more specifically, the order she had given them…and the one they disobeyed. 

And while she herself was stuck in the past, her sudden silence did not escape His Majesty's notice. "Ahh. Then that is the source of thy rage," he said, drawing her gaze towards him. It still wasn't clear how much he knew about her ill-fated expedition, but Maria could not bring herself to question him or to deny his hypothesis. Her forlorn expression provided all the answers he needed.

"Yes, the loss of thy company still weighs heavily upon thee," he stated, but without the subtle disappointment even Queen Annalise's guile couldn't conceal. "Forgive Us. It was not Our intent to reopen old wounds."

Still, she remained silent, ruminating on her failure. Yes…the failure was hers, was it not? They had been her men. Her responsibility.

"Your Majesty," she suddenly said. "You were a leader of men once. Does it ever go away?" Though Maria did not specify what she meant, she knew she did not need to.

"No," King Logarius soon replied, turning away from her. "The burden of leadership is holding the fates of others in thy hands…and ensuring that those lost were not lost in vain. A burden that will be bared until the time finally comes to join thy fallen comrades."

Just as she expected, Maria received no comfort from his answer. She was not foolish enough to believe her mission - any mission could be accomplished without sacrifice. But she did believe she could bear the burden of responsibility. Perhaps that was the most foolish belief of all.

"Twas the same struggle that so defined thy grandfather."

On the mention of his name, King Logarius quickly regained her attention, something that His Majesty acknowledged with a soft smile. "Yes, We had the honor of serving with him in many a battle. He was an extraordinary warrior, but We remember him as friend, as did all who fought with or for him. His loss was one felt by all of Cainhurst…so it pleases Us that his influence can still be felt in Our court.”

These are all words Maria has heard countless times before. On the eve of her grandfather’s funeral, His Majesty himself had come to her to offer his condolences, praising him in similar glowing terms. But it was not her grandfather he was praising now.

As she quietly looked up at him, King Logarius suddenly turned to leave. "It is best that We give thee a chance to heal. Rest assured that We will have further words with Our Queen…but rest thee must," he said as he approached the door of the infirmary, turning back towards her just as he opened it. "And do remember this, noble Lady Maria. Once thy strength returns, an important choice lies before thee. Until then, and after, We will pray for thy continued well-being."

With that final warning, His Majesty exited the infirmary and carefully closed the door behind her, leaving Maria alone in her bed, which felt more and more restrictive as the moments ticked by. That she had been on death’s door for days, if not weeks hardly mattered; there was still much for her to do.

“ And then what? ” she thought to herself. That was all she could really do now. Think. About her brother’s selfless sacrifice; about the nature of her newfound power; about what she stood to lose by enhancing it. Maria did not fear death, but death of self? The loss of everything that made her…her? It was a possibility that she never imagined, but that now seemed almost inevitable.

And as she lay in her hospital bed, staring blankly up at the ceiling, that single pressing question swirled in Maria’s mind. Her reputation was built on a foundation of lies - a reputation that she never truly desired to begin with. Yet she accepted it regardless. She needed to, in order to have the means to satisfy the one calling she still had. But would it bring her peace? Was peace even what she sought?

She didn't know. For despite being wide awake, she could feel herself sinking deeper and deeper into the abyss, which beckoned with a single, harrowing word.

“Monster…”

...

Chapter Text

It hadn't taken Laurence long to grow fond of Gehrman's little workshop. Owing to its remote location, it was quiet and peaceful, a welcome change of pace from the usual hustle-and-bustle of the inner city. The interior, he found, was exceptionally cozy; with a freshly brewed cup of tea beside him, the professor was able to engross himself in one of the many books in the workshops collection, with the only sound coming from the calm crackling of the fireplace…and the not so calm mutterings of his host.

"Ah, blast it all, where are they?" Laurence heard Gehrman mutter under his breath, prompting him to look up from his novel to find his host impatiently pacing back and forth, just as he'd been doing for at least the past half hour.

"Patience, Gehrman," he said calmly. "They will come."

"How very reassuring." The sarcasm in his voice was palpable, which once again drew Laurence's attention away from what he was reading.

"Is it not?" He asked, closing the book and making a mental note for where he left off. "It's what you agreed to, after all."

It was then that Gehrman ceased his incessant pacing, facing away from the professor. With a quiet sigh, he turned around to face him, his arms crossed. "You know my thoughts on the matter, young master."

"I do," Laurence acknowledged. "And I believe you're overreacting."

“Overea-?!” It sounded as if Gehrman was about to snap at him, only stopping himself at the last moment. After taking a deep breath to calm himself, he relaxed his posture and began speaking in an almost hushed tone. “I’m going to be completely square with you, Master Laurence. I haven’t the faintest idea what I’m going to do.”

The professor couldn’t help but be surprised by the sincerity in his words and more so, the embarrassment. It made finding words of reassurance especially difficult. “Surely, that can’t be true,” he eventually said. “Think. How did your master teach you?”

“What master?”

Much like that, everything Laurence had been planning on saying became moot. Somehow, it had never occurred to him that Gehrman was entirely self-taught. He was sure there had been a relative or colleague or…anyone who initially set him down this road; or perhaps, that had just been his way of trying to make sense of his host’s unique proclivities. It couldn’t all be for sport, could it?

“Alright then,” the professor said as he stood from his seat. “Allow me to amend my question. How did you learn to do…what you do?”

Gehrman seemed unsure of how to answer at first, taking a few moments to formulate a response. “By doing, I suppose,” he said with a shrug.

“Elaborate.”

“Well, as you probably understand, records of the creatures that dwell below are hard to come by and even putting that aside, no game that nature has gifted us can compare to them. And so, the only option left was simple trial and error.” 

“And am I correct in assuming you chronicled your query as well?” Laurence then asked.

“As a matter of fact, I did.” Upon saying this, Gehrman made his way over to one of his many bookshelves and briefly looked through it before finding what he was looking for. “A-ha!” he exclaimed as he pulled out a surprisingly compact journal, which he brought over to Laurence and handed it to him. “Here we are. It’s by no means complete, but I try to be as thorough as I possibly can.” 

“So I see,” the professor replied as he took the journal in his hands. Upon opening it, he flipped through the pages to find countless entries dedicated to different creatures: each one featuring a general description, a short list of capabilities, a threat level and a strategy for approach; all in perfect hand-writing. In particular, one entry caught his eye – the most recent one.

Abhorrent Beast

A large, hunchbacked beast with long dark-gray fur and crooked red spikes in its back, which courses with electricity. Found in the depths of Loran and is likely among the most well-suited to survive in its humid, mysteriously stormy environment; it is likely that its present abilities are the result of several decades of evolution.

Capabilities: Aside from its enormous size and razor-sharp claws, the Abhorrent Beast has displayed the extraordinary ability to manipulate its surrounding elements, channeling lightning to enhance its attacks and  creating miniature blasts of air with its fists. Other notable attributes include being able to extend its limbs to a certain degree and a thick layer of protective fur, rendering it resistant, if not outright immune to most conventional weaponry. It also appears to be quite intelligent, displaying a tendency to mock its victims and luring them to it. The effects of its beastly transformation? Or a remnant of its past life?

Threat Level: Very High. Even when weakened, it remains among the most dangerous creatures to be encountered in the labyrinths. Do not engage unless absolutely necessary.

Weaknesses: In spite of its notable intelligence and  power, its aggressive nature prevents it from making full use of them. Its primary method of attack consists mainly of rushing its prey and overpowering it with sheer force, making it easy to predict and avoid; Whether a war of attrition is a viable strategy remains to be seen. In terms of weak points, the fur on its head is not as thick as it is on the rest of its body, making it much easier to damage.

...

From the first few sentences alone, Laurence recognized the creature in question. The one that they had encountered at the close of their venture into Loran - the one that had so brutally slaughtered Lady Maria's company. Yet even within that association, its horrifying visage and blood red eyes were forever burned into his memory. To think that such a thing was once a man…

"Is something wrong?"

The professor finally looked up from the journal to find Gehrman staring at him, appearing more than a little concerned. "No, not at all…" he insisted. "It is, as you said, very much in depth."

Of course, Laurence recognized his question did not concern the quality of his writing, but it was better for them to focus on the task at hand. That being said, the professor's praise was genuine. He had only skimmed through the pages up until that specific entry, but each one contained a similar amount of detail. Some polish would be necessary of course, but it would surely make for a valuable resource. 

"There is just one thing I noticed. There are no illustrations."

"Illustrations?" Gehrman repeated in confusion before seemingly coming to the necessary realization himself. "Ahhhh, yes. See…I never considered them to be necessary. It was only ever meant for me, and my query are quite distinctive, after all."

This explanation made some sense, even if it was obviously spontaneous. Be that as it may, not everyone shared Gehrman's supposedly strong memory and especially not his experience. "But you can provide them if needed, correct?"

To this, his host provided no answer other than an awkward smile. "Well…" he began to say before coming to a sudden stop, not that it stopped Laurence from recognizing the reason for his reluctance.

"You…don't know how to draw, do you?"

"It's not that I don't know how to. It's just not my strong suit is all."

Laurence had done his best not to seem judgmental or frustrated, even if this revelation was…inconvenient. His inner professor wanted to tell Gehrman that he wouldn't get better unless he tried, but as it was, they were working under a very tight schedule. 

"I'll see what I can do," he said with a sigh, which briefly seemed to confuse him.

"You mean to say that…?" "I will illustrate your beasts for you, yes." Laurence swiftly confirmed.

"I see," Gehrman said. "I didn't know you were an artist."

"I am competent enough. Besides, I cannot expect you to do everything yourself, especially not when I was the one who put you up to this."

Standing before him with his arms crossed, Gehrman uttered a soft "hmm," and nodded his head. Laurence half expected him to insist it wasn't necessary, but even though he was clearly torn on the idea, he did no such thing.

"Very well," he replied. "But I assume you don’t want to work off just my descriptions?”

“As interesting a challenge as that sounds, yes. A visual reference would be most helpful.” Laurence didn't need to be reminded what this would entail or that it was a completely ludicrous idea. And so, Gehrman did neither. Instead, he started chuckling.

"You, Master Laurence, are quite mad," he humorously said. But far from being offended, the professor mirrored his smile.

"Then I am in good company." Laurence retorted, tucking the book beneath his arm. "Now, is there anything else I can do for you?"

"Other than continuing to hold me to account? No," was Gehrman's reply. "Although, and I don't want to speak too soon, your proposed efforts might end up being for naught."

Mere moments after he said this, the two of them heard the distant sound of footsteps along the cobbled path - several of them. "Just this way. Our host will be along soon," came Ludwig's voice, something that brought a bemused frown to Gehrman's face and an amused smile to Laurence's.

"Or perhaps not."

He appeared none too pleased with his joking tone, but ultimately chose to say nothing. After letting out a resigned sigh, Gehrman turned around and made his way over to his workstation, retrieving his scythe-like weapon and its wooden attachment before sheathing both on his back. But that wasn’t all. Before he moved away from the workstation, he also grabbed a scabbarded sword - a rather simplistic weapon compared to the curved and jagged designs that hung on his walls. Before Laurence could question what he needed it for, Gehrman slowly started making his way towards the door, leaving the professor with no choice but to follow.

Stepping outside of the workshop, the two of them quickly spotted a group of about a dozen or so people walking up the path, with Ludwig leading them along. Given the nature of what brought them here, Laurence would've been foolish to expect any more to have come…but seeing as he'd been expecting less, this came as a pleasant surprise. The same however could not be said for Gehrman, who eyed the approaching crowd with thinly-veiled dread.

As they drew closer and he continued to do nothing, Laurence placed a gentle hand on his shoulder. "Go on, Gehrman. You have my full confidence," he assured.

Even with this, it took a few moments for Gehrman to take the initiative and make his way down the steps, which happened just as the crowd came to a stop at the edge of the hill.

"Welcome! Welcome all!" he exclaimed, opening his arms for good measure. "I am pleased that you were able to make it here safely, and I thank my friend for ensuring that you did."

Upon his mention, Ludwig offered Gehrman a small bow. Once he was finished and their host continued his welcoming address, the stablemaster briefly met Laurence's eyes, allowing the professor to give him a nod of thanks. He'd been instrumental in convincing Gehrman to agree to this arrangement; indeed, he'd been even more insistent about it than Laurence was and had been just as quick to offer him his help. How he would be of use, he did not yet know, but he had a feeling he would find out soon enough.

Apart from Ludwig, the crowd was composed of mostly young, uncertain faces. A few of them he recognized as workers from the stables and the rest he guessed were students. Apart from them, Laurence didn’t spot any of his fellow scholars in the crowd…all except one.

Much to his shock, Lobsang was among the faces in the crowd, standing just behind Ludwig. He had given no indication that he would be attending today or really, that he had any interest in this initiative at all. Yet here he was, listening attentively as Gehrman continued his address.

"I will be light on the introductions, as I'm sure all of you are already well aware of who I am and what I do. And given that you are, the fact you find yourselves here tells me that you are a brave and curious bunch. Excellent qualities - essential qualities for the task that your college has offered you. And under my tutelage, we will see it accomplished."

The gathered crowd looked on in an almost confused silence, not so much at their host's words, but rather at who was delivering them. And Laurence couldn't blame them - he certainly hadn't pegged Gehrman for a warrior upon first meeting him. But it was clear these men required further convincing. After all, they were being asked to place their lives in his hands - this seemingly feeble stranger.

"Ah, but we're getting ahead of ourselves," Gehrman soon said, as if acknowledging their doubt. "I promised a demonstration of my abilities and so I shall provide. Follow me."

From there, he descended down the steps and turned left, leading them through his well-maintained garden and towards a rusty, overgrown gate. Stopping in front of it, Gehrman pulled out a set of keys and swiftly unlocked them, after which it took a good bit of effort on his part to push the decayed gates open.

“Phew,” he uttered once they were open, turning back towards them soon after. “Come in. Oh, and do mind the slope.”

Laurence and the others promptly followed Gehrman through the gate and soon found themselves awestruck by what lay beyond. Before them was a vast courtyard, containing a hill leading up to the enormous tree that loomed over the workshop. And all around was a field of beautiful white flowers, which seemed to glisten under the light of the moon overhead.

While leading them further in-field, Gehrman took a deep breath with his nose and produced a satisfied exhale. “Lovely, isn’t it?” he asked no-one in particular. The flowers did indeed have a pleasant scent to him, that Laurence had occasionally caught as it was carried by the breeze. Having such a lush spot as a private retreat would have been a dream come true to many - keyword being private.

“As much of a shame as it is to trample the flowers, this shall serve as your main training ground, just as it served as mine,” Gehrman said just as they reached the center of the field, after which he stopped and turned around to face the visiting crowd. “But of course, my training wasn’t entirely a lone endeavor.” 

Upon saying this, he brought out the sword he’d taken with it and carefully held it out with both hands. “Ludwig, if you would.”

The entire crowd turned towards the stablemaster in shock as he stepped forward, accepting the offered blade from Gehrman without question. The two men shared a quick nod before both of them walked further away from Laurence and the rest of the visitors, coming to stand opposite each-other several feet apart. The field fell silent, save for the sound of the flowers rustling in the wind. Then, before any of those gathered could blink, they drew their weapons; with Ludwig pulling his sword from its scabbard and Gehrman taking his detached blade off his back in one fluid motion. 

Laurence’s breath went as still as the two opponents, who didn’t so much as move a muscle as they stared each-other down. And then, they both smiled.

“Ready, old man?” Ludwig finally asked.

“Always,” Gehrman replied. “Now, let’s go!”

Suddenly, the two of them rushed at each-other, readying their respective weapons as the distance between them was closed. Gehrman ended up being the faster of the two, managing to reach Ludwig first and swinging his detached blade at an almost blinding speed. However, the stablemaster was miraculously able to deflect this attack, as well as the following flurry that his opponent unleashed upon him. Eventually, he managed to catch the curved blade at just the right angle and shifted his weight to briefly throw Gehrman off balance, allowing him to raise his sword for a counter attack.

With a heavy battle cry, Ludwig's heavy blade smashed into the Earth, sending a cluster of white flower petals up around him. Moving as swiftly as the wind that carried these petals away, Gehrman vanished in a cloud of smoke and reappeared by his opponent's side. As if predicting this, Ludwig quickly swung his sword in his direction; even though he would miss once again, he managed to predict Gehrman's trajectory with pinpoint accuracy, preventing him from finding an opening. When it became clear closing the distance wasn't an option, Gehrman quickly attached his blade to its wooden handle, allowing him to match his opponent's range without needing to sacrifice speed. 

As their battle intensified, those gathered watched on in awe, Laurence included. Despite all the vouching he'd done for him, this was the first time he was seeing Gehrman in action…and what a sight it was. It was difficult to keep track of him, but each move he made was calculated and precise; with such speed and skill, it was no wonder that he had conquered the labyrinths singlehandedly.

Yet his was not the only impressive showing. Though his movements were much more sluggish and unrefined, Ludwig continued to hold his own, the sheer force behind his swings leaving Gehrman with no choice but to skirt around them, lest he be cleaved in two. But of course, there was little chance of that. Neither of them were going for the kill and even as their duel raged on, and the torrent of petals they raised threatened to obstruct them from view, the faintest trace of a smile could be seen on both their faces. 

"It would seem everyone has their secrets." 

Laurence finally looked away from the battle unfolding before him to find Lobsang standing beside him, eyeing both combatants with a keen interest. The professor had been so captivated that he'd all but forgotten his colleague's presence, but with this reminder, his thoughts returned to him. Lobsang had given him no indication he was coming nor had he expressed any interest in this so-called "Hunter Initiative". Yet, here he was. The only question was why?

"Indeed," Laurence eventually said, turning his attention back to the still raging duel. It would be a question for another day.

He turned his attention back just in time to see Gehrman forced back by a wide-arching slice from Ludwig, putting a few feet between them as he used his weapon's handle to support himself. Seemingly sensing an opportunity, the swordsman charged, moving faster than his hefty weapon should've reasonably allowed. But just as he drew near and readied himself for a shoulder charge, Gehrman lept high into the air, leaving Ludwig to stumble forward as he forced himself to a sudden stop. And above him, Gehrman reached the apex of his ascent and readied his scythe, whose tip glistened in the moonlight before he cut sharply through the air. 

The trajectory of the wind itself seemed to change as a sharp gust of air blew towards his foe - powerful enough to almost knock the distant Laurence off his feet, who only managed to stay upright with Lobsang's help. Ludwig, on the other hand, was not so lucky and was swept away as easily as the petals that surrounded. As he tumbled down the hill, his lost sword clattered uselessness just a few steps away. Regaining his composure impressively quickly, the stablemaster scrambled to retrieve his blade. Yet just as he reached for its handle, Gehrman's crooked blade snaked around his throat, causing him to go still as a statue.

"Yield, old friend," he warned as he loomed over him. If Ludwig so much as leaned his head forward, the flesh of his neck would graze the scythe's edge and a single tug on Gehrman's part would take his head clean off. Clearly realizing his precarious position, the stablemaster sighed and retracted his hand.

"You got me," he conceded. And upon hearing this, Gehrman's smile returned. 

Removing the blade from beneath Ludwig's chin, he slung his weapon over his shoulder and offered his defeated foe a helping hand, which he readily accepted. Once he was back on his feet, Ludwig gripped the back of his neck, stretching it out with an uncomfortable crack.

"One of these days, old man." He said to Gehrman, who simply chuckled and reached down to retrieve his friend's lost sword for him.

"One day soon, no doubt." With this somewhat teasing reply, the victorious Gehrman stepped forward, leaving Ludwig to sheathe his sword on his back before coming to stand just behind him.

"Now, I hope we were able to entertain you?" Gehrman asked. Looking around, Laurence saw that the rest of the audience was still looking up at their host in almost slack-jawed silence…except for Lobsang, whose state of mind was as indescribable as ever. 

"I'll take that as a yes," said Gehrman. "But I must preface that what you saw is the result of over a decade's worth of training - by both me and my worthy second." He motioned towards Ludwig when he said this, something that he acknowledged with a friendly nod. But to Laurence, this came as something of a surprise. He knew that Ludwig was going to play some part in this initiative, but him aiding Gehrman in his training was never part of their discussions.

In any case, Gehrman continued. "This path before you requires a great deal of dedication and no small amount of luck. And should you choose to walk it, I promise that I will do everything in my power to guide you along it and ensure that you're ready to face its many, many challenges."

There was some subdued chatter among the crowd while he took a brief pause. "Or you can leave now." Just like that, the chatter subsided. "Worry not. There is no shame in doing so. I acknowledge that this is a lot to take on faith alone and that the danger you'll face is very much real. Master Willem has made it clear that I mustn't force your will and I do not intend to do so. The choice is yours alone."

An uneasy silence settled over the field, during which nobody moved an inch. Looking around, Laurence saw a sea of uncertainty as Gehrman's prospective pupils weighed the risks. He'd been right that the college was asking a lot of them; putting so many lives at risk was something that the professor was still grappling with. But the way he saw it, these men were indispensable to Byrgenwerth's research and should be treated as such…provided they agreed to their terms.

Yet even as more and more time ticked, nobody turned away. Seeing this, Gehrman slightly nodded his head in resignation.

"Then in that case, let us begin."

...

Chapter Text

For all its luster and grandeur, it was difficult to find solitude in Cainhurst Castle. Each of its residents had a duty to perform and Her Majesty was keen on knowing that they were doing just that, ensuring that her subjects were easy to locate. So while the rest of the castle went about their duties, a lone figure stood still as a statue atop a rooftop overlooking the entrance to the throne room, the surrounding spires and the oncoming late-evening darkness hiding them from view. 

Very few dared to venture up here, as the constant snow and lack of protective railings made traversing them perilous, with a single misstep being enough to send one plummeting to the rocks below. But this threat also guaranteed solitude, which is exactly what Maria sought – a desire that far outweighed the fear her current position fostered.

With the calm, chilly breeze brushing against her face, she looked out across the shifting waters. It had been weeks since she'd been released from the infirmary, but not long enough for her to come and go as she pleased. She was supposed to be back at her chambers, resting and recovering her strength. But as it was, she had little desire to remain there, her only company being the blade that had almost cost her her life. 

That blade. Even now, Maria could hear it calling to her - beckoning her to pick it up again. And in spite of her newfound knowledge of its nature, it had taken every ounce of her willpower to leave it behind. The power it offered was intoxicating and without it, she felt…hollow. Or perhaps, because of it.

Maria’s solitude would be broken when she heard the sound of crunching snow behind her. Even as it got closer and closer, she did not turn back, knowing full well who she was being joined by.

“I had a feeling I’d find you up here,” came Adrian’s voice.

“And I had a feeling you’d come by,” she replied. “Sooner or later.”

There was a brief pause where neither sibling so much as stirred, with the bitter wind blowing pieces of snow off of the rooftop and into the chasm below. “You know, it’s unbecoming of nobles to be lurking around like this.”

“Is that not why we used to come up here?” Maria asked him, turning her head just enough to see her brother out of the corner of her eye and the small smile that formed on his face.

“Yes, I suppose it was."

For the first time in many weeks, Maria smiled, even if slightly. It had been her who’d first proposed the idea one particularly dull night; they’d long been warned against straying off the main castle paths, but she’d always wanted to see the view from way up high and perhaps even catch a glimpse of Her Majesty herself. Adrian tried to talk her out of it at first, not wishing to incur their family’s wrath, but ultimately relented and to this day, has yet to reveal their transgression to anyone.

Yet this was the first time in decades the two of them found themselves up here together, in part due to their increasingly demanding duties, but mostly due to Maria finally realizing its inherent dangers. Truth be told, she did not know why she felt compelled to come up here. Though the spot on which they stood was relatively safe, she nonetheless kept a sizable distance between her and the edge of the rooftop, not daring to look down. Had Adrian not found her, she would’ve likely stayed there, frozen and unwilling to move.

Though, she supposed there was a fleeting comfort to be found here. A reminder of simpler times. Before they both changed.

"How are you feeling?" As she spoke, Maria once again turned her face away. 

"I should be asking you that. Aren't you supposed to be resting?" A perfectly valid question, and one that let him go without addressing hers.

"I've been resting," Maria said in reply.

"Then am I to understand you've regained your full strength?" Adrian followed up, leaving her unsure of how to answer. Her body had surely recovered, but she could not say the same for her spirit.

"Thanks to you, brother." 

He fell silent then, as if realizing he could not avoid addressing the matter any longer. “What was I to do, Maria?” Adrian spoke so quietly that his words were almost lost in the wind, but there was no mistaking his resolve. He had no regrets - a sentiment she wished she shared.

“I understand the choice you made,” said Maria. “But I am sorry you had to make it.”

“There was no choice to make! You were going to die - I couldn’t…” “I was not meant to live!” 

As the words escaped her lips, she turned sharply towards her brother, who backed away in shock. Seeing the hurt and confusion on his face, Maria immediately regretted her outburst. But as much as she wanted to apologize, she simply couldn’t find the proper words, leaving it to Adrian to break the silence. 

“So that’s it, then? This is how you wish to honor their memory?”

“No, you don’t understand, I…!”

“You’re right, I don’t!” he exclaimed. “I want to understand, but how could I?! You’ve made it all but impossible!”

Adrian’s words were visceral; his distress and frustration palpable. A part of her wanted him to understand, too, but another feared that it would only widen the gulf between them. “I told you. I do not need your concern,” was what she eventually said, though it would’ve been wiser to stay silent.

“Concern?” he repeated, as if in disbelief. “No, Maria. I fear for you. I cannot stand idly by and watch you destroy yourself, because you will destroy yourself. And you know it, too!”

A bitter wind blew through, battering Maria’s motionless, despondent face. She wanted to say something; to assure him that his fears were unfounded, but she couldn’t. Her mind was in turmoil: grief, anger and doubt all coming together in a perfect, crippling storm. She didn’t know what to do. Not anymore.

Lowering her gaze and tightly pressing her arms to her chest, Maria turned back towards the sea, doing all she could to hold back the tears that threatened to form. For a moment, she lost herself in her thoughts, trying in vain to get them in order. Twice she’d put her life on the line and twice it had been saved, but not without sacrifice. A sacrifice that never should’ve been made - not for her.

She almost didn’t notice her brother coming to stand beside her and when she did become aware, she kept her gaze fixed straight ahead. Regardless of the tense words they'd exchanged, his presence offered some semblance of comfort. At the very least, he was not yet lost to her. 

“What happened?”

Despite Adrian’s question, her silence endured. And even though she needed no clarification, he provided it nonetheless. "I know you, Maria. You would never abandon your men or endanger their lives for your own gain. And the same could be said for them. So I ask again. What happened?"

At long last, her version of events was being put under scrutiny, just as she knew it would eventually be. She had prepared an answer for the event he, or anyone else, decided to pursue it, reaffirming that what she told the Queen was the truth and nothing but the truth. But in spite of this, she remained silent. Most would simply accept her words and not question her further…but not Adrian. He saw right through her.

"They disobeyed me," she answered truthfully. "The guardian we faced was too powerful for us to defeat, even together. And so, I ordered them to take the blood and run while I covered their escape…but they came back for me. And abandoned our prize to do so."

Perhaps unexpectedly, there wasn't a hint of shock on Adrian's face. "Of course, they did," he said. "There is but one thing I don't understand. If Matthias and the others abandoned the Old Blood to save you, how did you reclaim it? How did you live to reclaim it?"

This question was one Maria did not dare to answer. There were so many ways for her to do so, many of which were fairly convincing, but all were too far from the truth. Yet somehow, her brother seemed to draw an answer from her silence, drawing a disappointed sigh in the process.

"Maria…" "It is much like you said. I had no choice," she interrupted before he could continue.

"You had a choice in how to present events to Her Majesty, did you not? And I'm certain that you did not tell her this. Assuming the decision to do so was even your own."

Choosing to ignore the accusatory tone to his words, Maria finally met his eyes and firmly at that. "You will say nothing to Queen Annalise. She must never know."

"But…" "You will say nothing, Adrian!" Yet again, she snapped at him without meaning to, though she quickly forced her anger down. Unfolding her arms and meeting his eyes, she changed her order into a request. “Please. Promise me that you will not."

"Very well," her brother said reluctantly. "But whose honor am I meant to be preserving by doing so? Yours, that of your men or of the professor with whom you formed this little accord?"

Maria had of course made no mention of Professor Laurence, or any professor at that. However, being reminded of him brought forth yet more conflicting feelings. It had been months since they had parted ways, yet every day she was reminded of the offer he’d made her and the consequences thereof. But even so, she could not bring herself to be angry with him, no matter his role in shaping her present circumstances; they were impossible for him to foresee.

These thoughts she kept to herself. Regardless of how much or how little Adrian understood about their arrangement, she did not need him getting involved in it. "That doesn't matter," she said. "But understand that right now, keeping this secret is the best thing you can do. I will handle the rest."

"Will you?" Adrian asked, clearly skeptical. "Clearly, you know better than to take these scholars at their word, so you must realize that they have their own agenda…and that they must realize the same about you. And if I understand correctly, there is one among them that surpasses even you. What will you…"

As he spoke, Maria firmly grasped both of her brother's shoulders, causing him to fall silent. "I have a plan," she assured him. "Trust me."

Her brother's response came silently. Though Maria could still see hints of doubt in his eyes, it didn't stop him from taking hold of one of her arms and giving her an understanding nod. No, not understanding  - trusting. A trust that she'd been taking for granted and one that she'd failed to uphold. And yet, here he was, as he always was. He was always there for her. 

She could always count on him.

Suddenly, Maria pulled him into a hug, surprising him for just a moment before he, too, embraced her. Adrian practically clung to her, as if fearing what would happen if he let her go. She remembered the sheer terror he showed before the darkness claimed her; a mere fraction of what he must've felt as he scrambled to save her. What would've become of him if he failed? Why should he suffer for her failures?

Thoughts such as this continued to fester in Maria’s mind, even in the midst of what should’ve been a moment of comfort. To say she had a plan was far too generous; at best, she had a few loosely-connected ideas. The emotions the Chikage had stirred - her anger and hatred were very much real. They could not be denied…much like the fear that she would lose herself to them. And if she did…

" No. " Maria dismissed the thought almost immediately. It would not come to that. She wouldn’t let it.

As for Byrgenwerth, she cared little about whatever agenda they were pursuing. As Queen Annalise herself said, their success would be of no consequence. What mattered to her was the means by which they would attain that goal, to which she was not blind. They needed protection and seeking out the Knights of Cainhurst was no longer an option, lest they expose their deception. Luckily for them, they had an alternative - Gehrman. And without him, their research would come to a total halt. Two birds, one stone.

It wasn’t that simple, of course. Maria would not be satisfied with a covert assassination. No, if she were to repay her savior, it would be with a duel to the death. But would she find peace in victory? In defeat? She did not know, and that lack of certainty made coming to a decision all but impossible.

Amidst this turmoil, her thoughts once again turned to Professor Laurence. He’d insisted that they were not enemies and had taken every effort to ensure they did not become so. It was clear to her now that he’d recognized her anger and the path it could lead her down, which is why he’d gone to such great lengths to direct her elsewhere. But what guided his heart, she wondered. Was it concern for her soul, concern for his friend or concern for his research?

Whatever his reasons, perhaps it was time that his conviction was tested.

...

Chapter Text

"I hope you know what you're doing," Micolash said to Laurence as they walked down the halls of one of Byrgenwerth's many facilities.

"As I said, Gehrman's efforts are beginning to bear fruit," Laurence told his colleague. "And I believe it is past time we put the rest of our plan into action."

"I agree," said Micolash. "And if you don't mind me saying, I am quite interested in seeing the results of your research."

Naturally, Laurence hadn't told him about any research he planned to conduct, but he knew that there was no point in denying it. "Do you have any insight to share?" he asked.

"Only theories, I'm afraid. escapes me.As I’m sure you’re aware, there are no records of the Pthumerians worshiping any kind of blood, but I am certain that they did. And if it was truly a blessing as Caryll said, then that leaves only one explanation as to its origin…and I believe it was far, far more than a simple idol.”

“But what else can it be, then?” Laurence questioned, no doubt failing to hide his ever-increasing confusion and frustration. “A ritual material or something more?”

“You are in a much better position to answer that question than me.”

The suggestion behind Micolash’s words was not lost on him. Seeing as traditional research had produced no results, the next natural course of action was alternative forms of experimentation in order to determine what unique properties the blood possessed. Perhaps…

“No. Not yet,” Laurence eventually said. “If whatever theory I test turns out to be wrong, I will have wasted my only sample; if it is correct, then I will find myself at a dead end. I will need to find more before I consider such a thing.”

“And you cannot do so without these ‘Hunters’ of yours,” Micolash rightly commented, and if Laurence would add, rather offhandedly.

“ Our research indeed depends on their success,” he told him. “Your skepticism is understandable, but I can assure you it is unfounded.”

“We shall see,” was his colleague’s curt reply.

The two professors walked the rest of the way in silence, allowing Laurence to prepare himself for the upcoming meeting. A summons from Master Willem could only mean that they were dealing with a matter of utmost importance and in this case, it was clear what he wished to discuss with them. The headmaster was a patient man, but he also expected results and it was up to them to provide them.

While his direct involvement in the daily operations of Byrgenwerth have been reduced in recent times, Master Willem maintained a personal office in its main lecture hall, which was where the two professors were heading now. However, upon arriving, they found the door to his office closed, but could also hear voices coming from inside; that of their master and another that he hadn't expected to hear - Caryll's.

"No, Master Willem. I have kept it secret, just as you asked," they heard her say.

"Very good. Now that we have suitable subjects, you may proceed with the next phase of your research."

"But, sir. You know the risks involved. What if…?" "There can be no progress without risk," the headmaster cut her off. "And if what you tell me is true, we are on the cusp of something truly extraordinary. I trust that you will see it through."

There was a brief pause before Caryll spoke again. “Thank you, Master Willem.”

Both Laurence and Micolash stayed silent as they listened in to this short conversation, sharing a brief glance that silently conveyed their shared confusion. Of course, Laurence felt that he had a better idea as to what they were discussing than his colleague did, remembering his brief meeting with Caryll from some time ago. Not wishing to waste time speculating, he finally knocked on the door to Master Willem’s office, believing that they’d get their answers in time.

“Do come in,” he invited.

With that, Laurence opened the door, allowing himself and Micolash to step inside. The headmaster’s office was dimly lit, illuminated only by a few lanterns hanging on the walls. When they came in, they found Master Willem seated in an armchair behind his desk at the opposite end of the room, with Caryll standing dutifully at his side. He noted that she was holding a small leather case, which she clutched close to her chest. “Laurence, Micolash - how delightful to see you! I hope this isn’t terribly inconvenient.”

“Not at all,” Micolash was quick to say. “How may we be of service?”

“For now, by lending me your ears,” said the headmaster. “But before that, may I ask where Gehrman is? As I recall, I asked him to come alongside you.”

“He is away,” Laurence answered. “The last I heard from him, he was preparing to take one of his students into the labyrinths for… ‘on the field training’. I can only imagine he’s lost track of time.” There was an alternative explanation for his absence, but he doubted it to be true. It was unlikely that he had encountered something he couldn’t handle and he’d promised that his students were taking a more observatory role in these outings, at least for now. He would be back soon enough.

“That certainly wouldn’t surprise me,” Master Willem said with a chuckle. “Still, it is important that he becomes aware of what I mean to discuss with you.”

“I will inform him of what concerns him,” he assured, echoing the request Gehrman had made of him almost word for word.

“Very well, then,” said Master Willem. “Firstly, I believe it is time we expanded the scope of his responsibilities.”

“To what extent?” Micolash questioned. “Certainly not a full-scale expedition.”

“No. Going forward, we need to be discrete. In these early stages, I intend to send no more than half a dozen of our scholars below the surface at a time; only after our recruits have acquired sufficient enough experience will I allow smaller parties of two or three. Until then, Gehrman is required to accompany whatever groups we send.”

“A sound strategy,” Laurence complimented. “Have you decided on who will participate?”

“The three of you, as well as whoever you chose to accompany you,” was his answer. “I will leave it up to Gehrman to decide the makeup of his company.”

This was about what Laurence expected to hear and he couldn’t say he had any complaints. That said, there was one concern that Gehrman had asked him to voice on his behalf. “On that note, Master Willem, I fear that we are losing the means to recruit additional hunters. If we wish to expand further, they will need additional tools and resources, and the time to produce them. Much of what they require cannot be acquired by traditional means, after all.”

“They will get everything they need and more,” said Master Willem. “As it happens, we’ve been looking into ways to assist with their efforts.” As he spoke, he motioned to Caryll, who until then had been making herself scarce. As the two professors looked on, and remembered the bits of conversation they’d overheard, she took a deep breath and presented the case she was holding, opening it to reveal something resembling a branding iron.

“What is this?” Micolash inquired.

“Think of it as a key,” Caryll cryptically replied. “To unlocking man’s latent potential.”

It didn’t take long for Laurence to realize the implications behind her words and despite his lack of prior knowledge, for Micolash to do the same. “You don’t mean…”

“Yes,” she confirmed. “Since our time in Loran, I’ve developed something of a hypothesis - that the wondrous strength of the Great Ones lies dormant in all men. And that to awaken it, one needs only to realize it and more importantly, understand it.”

“But how?” Micolash asked, clearly fascinated and excited at the prospect. 

“The answer lies within the mind. The Great Ones exist on a higher plane of existence; their thoughts are incomprehensible to us…or so one would think. I have managed to transcribe portions of their language and by extension, the meanings they give to concepts we believe we understand.”

“And if we were to see the world as they do, we will be blessed with their wisdom,” Micolash concluded for her, taking a few steps closer to better inspect the tool she was presenting. Almost instinctively, she shut the case and held it against her chest.

“A small portion of it, yes,” Caryll said as she glared at him. “And more importantly in this case, a portion of their power. I do not think I need to explain how that may be useful.” 

As she said, Laurence understood her immediately. “Then that is your plan. This ‘key’ of yours is meant for the Hunters,” he concluded.

“If Gehrman accepts my offering, which I have no doubt he will,” she confirmed, paying no mind to his slightly accusatory tone. “Unfortunately, at this point, I have very little insight to offer them, but that will no doubt change as we expand our efforts. My research depends on their effectiveness as guardians; it is only logical that I facilitate their growth.”

A noble gesture, to be sure…were it not for the unignorable risks it presented. The knowledge that the Great Ones possess is beyond mortal comprehension and mortal minds remain fragile. Exposing yourself to even a small portion of this knowledge risked losing yourself to madness or perhaps, this was simply a perception bred from ignorance. Laurence wanted to believe that even the weakest of mortal minds could one day elevate their minds and being to those of a Great One.

He wanted to believe.

“Patience, my disciples,” Master Willem stressed. “The answers we seek have never been closer, but there is still much that needs to be done. Caryll’s work is but one piece of the puzzle; all of you are expected to play a part.”

This short address gave way to silence, which seemed to indicate that everything that needed to be said had been. “Will that be all, Master Willem?” Laurence questioned when no one else would.

“For now,” he answered. “But if I may, I would like to have a word with you.”

This came as a surprise not just to Laurence, but to his two colleagues as well, who quickly turned their gaze towards him. He kept himself from doing the same, knowing that he was likely to implicate them as well or alternatively, bely his suspicions. But he was assuming the worst. His master’s voice was calm and not at all accusatory, but he’d never been one to raise his voice.

“It would be my pleasure,” said Laurence.

“Wonderful.” Upon saying this, Master Willem began to slowly rise from his rocking chair, using his staff to steady himself. Caryll appeared ready to help him should the need arise, but it never did, leaving her and Micolash to look to him in uncertainty. “The two of you are dismissed. I will keep you informed of any future developments.”

Even with this dismissal, it took them some time to depart. When they finally did, Caryll kept her gaze fixed on him even as she passed by, prompting him to look behind him and see that Micolash was similarly staring back, though he turned his face away the moment he became aware of this. Laurence would continue to look on even as his two colleagues shut the door behind them, until he heard the sound of Master Willem’s staff tapping against the floorboards.

“I would’ve thought you’d have more to say,” he commented as he approached. “Is something the matter?”

“Not at all, headmaster,” Laurence answered; whether he did so convincingly was another question. “What did you wish to discuss?”

Rather unexpectedly, Master Willem started to chuckle. “Oh, calm yourself, my boy,” he said, reaching up to place his free hand on his shoulder. “This is no reprimand; rather, I wish to commend your efforts. We owe our current trajectory in large part to your careful decision making… so it is only natural that you head our first independent venture as well.” 

Somehow, this was the last thing Laurence had expected to hear today. His praise did not come easy. “I am humbled, Master Willem,” he replied, bowing his head as he did. 

“Yes, I’m sure you are.” After patting him on the shoulder, the provost moved on past him towards a nearby table, which was strewn with various documents, vials and canisters, including several filled with eyes. Many more cluttered spaces like this could be found throughout the room - signs that Master Willem was still very much as busy as his younger scholars, if not more so. “But do tell me, how have you been managing?”

“I beg your pardon?” Laurence asked as his suspicions came roaring back.

“You are a man of many commitments, Laurence and one that seems to be a stranger to leisure. I am beginning to fear I have burdened you with one too many tasks.”

“Ah,” the professor uttered, stopping short of breathing a sigh of relief. “No, I would not say so. And you know how I hate the word ‘burden’.”

“Yes, you see only undertakings.” Were it not for his coverings, Laurence was certain he was rolling his eyes in amusement. “Shall we start with your most recent one, then?”

“My involvement in the Hunters’ training has been minimal, but I will say it has been…fascinating to observe,” the professor expressed as he came to stand beside him. “I am pleased to inform you that Gehrman appears to have grown into his new role.”

“Has he, now?” “ Appears to have,” he repeated with added emphasis, sharing a small chuckle with his master. 

“Well, that is good news in any case,” said Master Willem. “And even better that the two of you seem to be getting along so well.”

“It helps that Gehrman is such a…agreeable fellow.” Laurence wasn’t quite sure if this was the correct word to describe him, but it was the first one that came to mind. He was certainly odd, but in a strangely endearing way.

“That he is,” the headmaster concurred. “Though I admit to thinking him a fool once upon a time.”

“Have you known him for long?” “Since I found myself in desperate need of a gamekeeper.”

Somehow, this came as a surprise to Laurence, who turned to Master Willem just to be sure he wasn’t having a laugh with him. “I was young once, too,” was all he added on the matter. And as much as he attempted to maintain his jovial demeanor, his words sounded much like a lament. 

“I must also admit to being somewhat envious,” he said. “Decades I have spent fascinated with the Pthumerians, with their connection to the Great Ones - yet always, the scope of my research was limited. And now that potentially limitless access to the Tombs of the Gods lies at our fingertips, I am left to rely on the courage of others.”   

“I am sure we can arrange something for you,” Laurence offered.

“No need. I will only be a burden,” said the headmaster. “And as cowardly as it may sound, I think I would like to live to see my vision realized.” 

His choice of words was not accidental. Master Willem was almost dogmatic in his beliefs, remaining convinced that the truth he sought was still within reach even with all the setbacks and disappointments he’d faced in his lifetime. That sort of conviction served him well, allowing him to keep Byrgenwerth’s research afloat and his followers determined, persevering in the face of a seemingly impossible task.

And this vigor, Laurence knew, came as a result of his age rather than in spite of it. He more than anyone was aware of his mortality.

"We are running out of time," he regretfully pointed out.

" I am running out of time, yes," Master Willem responded. "But there is no need to despair. The answers we seek will reveal themselves soon enough." 

“And what if the answers you seek cannot be found in the Tombs? At least, not in the way you envisioned them. What then?”

“Then we will need to look elsewhere,” he replied without so much as a pause. “The answers are out there, Laurence. The Great Ones…they have earned their place in the cosmos, but they did not arise from it, just as maggots do not arise from dead flesh. They were here once, before they realized the truth that we now desperately search for, one that allowed them to surpass the primitive limitations of mind and body. Evolution born from courage - that is the key.”

All of this Laurence had heard many times before and still, his master's logic remained sound. Boundless wisdom, unimaginable power, eternal life: it all couldn't simply be the result of some cruel cosmic coincidence. But that was not his rationality speaking. The possibility that they were wrong, that the power of the Great Ones would forever be beyond their reach was something he had to consider every day. It was a reality that Laurence didn't want to accept. It was a reality that Laurence couldn't accept.

“There may yet be another way."

“Oh?” Master Willem vocalized, turning towards him. “And what do you propose that to be?”

Strangely, he sounded neither shocked nor offended by such a suggestion. But rather than putting Laurence at ease, it simply made him more hesitant to share the basis for his descent. “I have been meaning to tell you,” he eventually managed to say. “We…found something in the heart of Loran. I did not think much of it at the time, but now, I have reason to believe it may be the missing piece of this vast puzzle.”

“What? What did you find?” Master Willem’s voice was firmer now, a sign of his growing curiosity. Any chance Laurence may’ve had to maintain his secrecy were now gone, leaving him with no choice but to reach into his satchel and at long last present him with his findings. 

"This," he said as he took out the blood vial that had occupied his thoughts and focus for countless nights. “My initial observations of this blood found that its makeup was vastly different from that of a regular human…pure, untainted, yet still distinctly human. This, along with where it was found, makes me suspect that it may be divine in origin.”

It was difficult to gauge Master Willem's reaction. He made no sudden movements nor did his expression shift; for a moment, Laurence wasn't even sure whether he could see or even sense what he was showing him. "Do you have proof?" he asked after a substantial pause.

"No, sir," Laurence answered truthfully. "But it was my hope you could shed some more light on it."

Another lengthy pause followed before Master Willem finally held out his hand, prompting Laurence to cautiously hand the vial to him. "Hmm…” he muttered as he held it up. "I recall coming across a fair share of blood in my ventures, all stored away in hidden locations. And I will say I think there is some merit to your hypothesis. I can sense that this blood is special. Very special."

“But you also do not know for certain?”

“Unfortunately not. Our Cainhurst overseers were quick to confiscate any of it we found…” Master Willem paused then, turning his attention back to him. “...so I can only assume that this was also smuggled out of Loran.”

“Yes, sir,” he confirmed. Of course, there was a key detail that he was leaving out and one that his master did not seem to have pieced together yet. However, Laurence did not think him a fool. He was sure he understood how it was the blood and the holy chalice came into their possession.

“You are a bold one, Laurence,” he said, giving credence to his presumption. “And that boldness serves you well. For now, at least.”

With that, he handed the vial back to him, leaving him to take it back. Unlike his previous compliments, this one felt almost begrudging, leaving Laurence uncertain of his standing. “What would you have me do, Master Willem?”

“I believe that this blood of yours warrants further study, but I will leave it up to you to decide how that shall be conducted. I trust that you will keep me well informed of your findings?”

The twinge of guilt Laurence experienced prevented him from answering, which was no doubt the intent. “Of course,” he pledged.

"Excellent. But if I may give you one piece of guidance, do not lose sight of what truly matters. With such a lofty goal in mind, it is all too easy to grow fixated on it. And ours is to not be a pyrrhic victory." This would've been a sufficient enough warning, but Master Willem didn't stop there. Firmly grasping his arm, he spoke once more. 

"We are born of the blood. Made men by the blood. Undone by the blood. Our eyes are yet to open. Fear the Old Blood!"

Laurence stared at his master in unnerved silence, not daring to utter a word. Yet he did not release him, looking to him as if awaiting some sort of acknowledgement. And so, with the vial of the "Old Blood" firmly in hand, the professor lightly nodded his head. Seemingly satisfied, Master Willem similarly nodded to him before finally letting go of his arm and stepping aside, indicating his dismissal. 

Despite all the questions that remained unanswered, Laurence proceeded forward, passing by his master and leaving his office, all without looking back and without saying a word. For what was left to say? 

In his newfound solitude, he was left to ruminate on Master Willem's ominous words. Something told him that he knew more than he was letting on… or perhaps, he thought he knew more. He doubted he would've been allowed to dwell further if it would lead him only to ruin. But what sort of ruin could it be, if any? Surely not that which befell Loran?

The blood seemed to grow heavier and heavier with each passing step, yet Laurence continued on, more determined than ever to unravel its mysteries. 

Come what may.

…

Soon after.

Laurence’s journey home was a relatively calm one. Dusk had long passed - the moon shined in the clear sky above, illuminating the almost deserted streets. Yet he was not free from apprehension.

Suddenly, he heard the subtlest of rustles behind him, causing him to stop in his tracks and whirl around in order to ascertain the source. But there was nothing there - not even a rat. Even when it was clear he was safe, Laurence did not move, carefully observing his surroundings to absolutely make sure he was alone before finally moving on.

Again and again, he found himself looking over his shoulder, staring down the deserted alleyways in search of something . For weeks, he had been plagued by this sense of hyper vigilance. Perhaps it was a lasting effect of his time in Loran, perhaps it was paranoia setting in.

Or perhaps, as Laurence suspected, he was being watched.

Doing what he could to dismiss these foolish thoughts, the professor approached his home at a steady pace. But as he took out his keys to unlock the door, his ears caught onto something peculiar - a noise coming from inside. He could hear Nora loudly mewling, her claws scraping against the floorboards as she paced back and forth. And once he finally opened the door to let himself in, she came rushing over to him, as if darting to escape.

"Nora!" he exclaimed, swiftly closing the door to prevent her from rushing out into the night. "What's gotten into you? Did something…?" It was then he became aware of the cool air blowing through his home, whistling through his opened windows. He never left his windows open when he was gone. What sane man would?

Looking up, he noticed something even more peculiar and much more worrying. Around the corner, he could see traces of candlelight, but strangely, no shadow. Even so, it was clear that they weren’t alone.

Carefully standing up, Laurence reached into his satchel and took out the dagger Gehrman had gifted him, which he’d taken a habit to carrying with him. As he slowly and carefully approached the entrance to his living room, he unsheathed the blade, preparing himself for the worst. “Who’s there?” he demanded, only to receive no answer. In fact, it was so quiet that he briefly thought that whoever had broken in was long gone, but somehow, he knew that wasn’t the case.

Stopping just at the turn of the corner, the professor breathed in and tightly clutched his dagger’s handle, trying all he could to keep his hand from shaking. Then, with all the courage he could muster, he rounded the corner…only to find himself frozen in shock at what - or rather who he found before him. 

“Welcome home, professor.”

...

Chapter Text

The dagger in Laurence's hands threatened to slip from his grip as he stared at the all too familiar intruder. Sitting cross legged in his armchair was Lady Maria, staring back at him with an icy glare. Several tense seconds ticked by only for her to do nothing, allowing the professor to finally come to his senses.

"What is the meaning of this?!" he angrily demanded, raising his dagger back into view. To this, his unwanted guest simply raised her hand, without producing a weapon of her own.

"Calm, please," she said in a low voice. "I mean you no harm."

"Then why enter my home uninvited?!" 

Lady Maria offered no answer. Instead, she merely looked him over, seeming more amused at his show of defiance than anything else. "So, you haven't forgotten our little lesson," she noted. Laurence had taken up something of a stance, the very same one she'd shown him in Loran. "What else do you recall?"

Laurence maintained his stance, even as she remained seated. Clearly, it wasn't her intention to put what little techniques she'd imparted on him to the test, not that they would've done him much good. Besides, if her intentions were abduction or assassination, then he wouldn't have gotten the chance to contemplate the possibility to begin with. It was better to avoid direct conflict - she'd said as much.

With much caution, the professor lowered his dagger and relaxed his posture, deciding to take her at her word…not that he had much of a choice. 

"That's better," said Lady Maria, still unnervingly calm. "Now, I believe it's past time we talked."

"Am I to believe you were merely seeking my company?" he rather brazenly asked. 

"Do you?" she demanded in response, not rising to the provocation. 

"Not in the slightest," was what he eventually said.

"Then you have no illusions of holding sway over me." As she spoke, Lady Maria finally stood up from her seat, rising to her full imposing height. Laurence came close to backing away a step, but managed to stand his ground, somehow managing to keep doing so even as she inched closer and closer to him. "Which makes your actions - both before and since we parted ways - all the more perplexing."

The professor stood firm even as she came to stand in front of him, not shrinking under her intimidating glare and the weight of the implications her words carried. "Whatever do you mean, my lady?" 

"Spare me the formalities," she firmly said. "I know what you and your fellows have been planning. With a Holy Chalice in your possession, it’s only natural that you would attempt to return to the Tombs… and that you would attempt to mobilize as a result.” 

At once, Laurence deduced how she'd become aware of this. The same way she must've discovered where he lived. "You've been watching us…" 

"Yes," she confirmed. "And I must say, you've been quite busy as of late. I'm sure Queen Annalise would be very interested to learn what you've been up to behind her back."

"You're bluffing," Laurence stated without hesitation. 

"Indeed," she practically hissed. "If I were to reveal your deception, I would be revealing mine as well. What reason would Her Majesty have to believe me? To honor the promises she made me?"

The more Lady Maria spoke, the more her calm façade began to crack. She’d seen right through him; whether or not she did from the start did not matter, for it was clear that she’d done everything that he’d predicted and hoped for. That she’d fulfilled every suggestion he’d planted in her head.

As much as Laurence tried to maintain his composure, he was soon forced to avert her gaze. "I…I didn't…"

Before he got the chance to finish, Lady Maria violently grabbed him by the collar and pulled him towards her. "Do not lie to me!" she snapped at him. "The honor of my men was not yours to bargain away!"

Not even a breath escaped Laurence's lips as he cowered beneath Lady Maria's intimidating glare. Her eyes burned with anger, with hatred… yet strangely, none of it seemed concentrated at him. Instead, he found himself staring into a raging inferno, all-consuming and impossible to contain. Then suddenly, she pushed him away with surprising strength, causing him to trip and fall on his back. The carpet beneath his feet somewhat cushioned his fall, but the impact still caused him some pain, making him struggle to get back up.

"I’m sure you will say you had no choice…but we both know better, don't we?" Lady Maria sounded somewhat more collected now, yet no less furious. "After all, why should you care about my standing? About my fate?  Me, my company - we were only ever a means to an end."

The dazed professor slowly brought himself up to a sitting position. He could've risen or fled if he so chose, but instead he simply stayed there, unable to even meet her eyes. Not out of fear, but out of shame.

"You’re right."

For a while, there was no response. "What did you say?!" Lady Maria demanded.

"I didn't care what would happen to you once we parted ways. All that truly mattered to me was that you'd stay quiet…!" Laurence paused then and finally forced himself to look at her. "…but what I did to ensure your silence was wrong."

Lady Maria's fury quickly gave way to shock. The fire in her eyes dimmed and her expression softened ever so slightly as she looked down at him, seemingly too stunned to even speak. But the words she had spoken to him still reverberated in his head, urging him not to leave things there.

"I know that you're angry, and believe me, you have every right to be. You were grieving and I used that to my advantage, something that I've regretted every day since. So for what little it's worth, I am… truly sorry, Lady Maria. I don’t know how I could ever make amends."

She continued to stand there, perplexed by this unexpected, but genuine apology. Or at least, Laurence hoped that he seemed genuine. He'd never been able to come to terms with what he'd done and it was unlikely that he ever would. 

"If I wanted you to beg for forgiveness…!" "I will not beg for something I do not deserve," he interrupted her, finally rising to his feet. "All I ask is that you tell me what you want. I want to help you.”

“I don’t need your help!” “Then why come to me?”

As expected, this gave Lady Maria pause. After a while, she looked away from him, as if unsure of how she should answer, assuming she even could. "Perhaps I shouldn't have," was all she said.

This vague answer managed to give Laurence a clearer picture of her motivations or rather, her lack thereof. She had little reason to care about what Byrgenwerth's scholars did behind the scenes, so long as Queen Annalise remained unaware of it. But while this should've been relieving for him, something had to have compelled her to investigate their whereabouts and the only alternative he could think of was somehow even more concerning.

"What happened in Loran wasn't your fault," he said in order to break the silence. "Nobody could've stopped your men from making the choice they did. Not you, not I and especially not Gehrman."

"Do not speak his name!" Lady Maria’s rage came roaring back, a reaction that Laurence managed to anticipate.

"He does not deserve your anger. He saved your life!"

"And I'm supposed to be thankful for that?! He left my men - my friends to die!" 

"You know that isn't true!" "It doesn’t matter!!"

She fell silent after that, as if realizing her slip-up. But it was too late. Laurence now understood what her purpose was…and the thought alone horrified him. 

"You seek his death." Again, she did not speak, but her silence nonetheless confirmed his suspicion. "And what then?"

"What does it matter to you…?" she uttered.

"Because I know that you will find no peace this way…and I’m sure that you must realize that as well. Why else would you reveal your intentions in so brazen a manner?"

He was assuming, of course, but given how tight-lipped she’d been until then, assumptions were about all he had to work with. But they certainly weren’t baseless. If she was truly committed to this misguided quest of retribution, then this encounter would never have taken place. How long had she spent watching them from the shadows? How many opportunities to assassinate Gehrman had she missed? Something must be holding her back.

"Much has changed since we parted ways," said Lady Maria, with the professor noting what seemed like regret in her voice. "I am no longer the captain you thought you knew, and when the time of my vengeance comes, I fear I won't be able to guarantee your safety - you or any of your fellows."

Her voice was quiet now, as if she was ashamed to be admitting this, especially to him. But even without this admission, Laurence could somehow tell that something had changed about her. She was more volatile, more aggressive…and confused. A dangerous combination.

"Which is why I'm giving you a choice," she eventually stated, taking a single step toward him before forcing herself to stop. "Abandon whatever plans you have for the Tombs and you will see no more of me. If not…then whatever happens will be on your hands."

Laurence could do nothing but stand and stare at her, unable to comprehend this ultimatum she'd given him. He desperately wanted to say something - to try and convince her that there was another way, but he knew it was no use. On this one thing, her mind was set - she would not be able to stop herself. 

The professor’s attention was ever so briefly taken away from Lady Maria when he heard the sound of Nora mewling behind him, causing him to turn around and see her cowering on the other side of the room. During this momentary distraction, the candle was blown out, casting the room into darkness. In a panic, his head snapped back towards Lady Maria’s position… but even under the dim light of the moon, he could see there was nothing there. She was gone. 

Even though any potential danger had passed, Laurence remained frozen in place, his hands shaking as he looked toward the open window. Because as Lady Maria had made quite clear, this wasn't the last he'd seen of her - unless he made the right choice. 

Until then, she would always be watching, waiting to see how her fate would be decided. 

...

Chapter Text

There was little sleep to be had that night or most nights that followed. Laurence's first instinct was to find Gehrman and warn him of the lingering threat he'd uncovered, but with him away with no indication of when he'll return, he had no choice but to wait. After informing Ludwig of the situation, he had him discreetly pass on a message to one of their more obscure initiates so he could deliver it to the Workshop; while it was likely Lady Maria already knew of its location, it wasn't something Laurence was willing to risk.

Days went by until he finally got confirmation that Gehrman had returned safe and sound, allowing them to organize a meeting at his clinic. As he waited for him to arrive, Laurence nervously paced back and forth, unable to sit still. There were no windows in his office, no ways for anyone to peer in, but that didn't stop his paranoia from running rampant. She knew where he worked, where he lived. And the worst part was he had no way of knowing when she was watching him and when she wasn't.

That was no doubt what she wanted. She wanted him scared - to influence his decisions without ever being present herself. There was no conceivable way for her to always be aware of what he was doing, but the possibility was always there.

Laurence's aimless pacing was finally interrupted when someone knocked on his door, after which Iosefka let herself inside. "They're here, Master Laurence," she informed him. "Amelia is taking them around the back."

Without even a word of acknowledgement, Laurence hurried out of his office and down the stairs into the hallway outside. Then, after making sure no one besides himself and his student were present, he opened one of the windows, which led out to the rooftops outside. Before exiting, he turned back to Iosefka for a moment. "Make sure nobody comes this way," he instructed.

"Yes, sir."

With that confirmation, Laurence carefully climbed out the window and dropped down onto the slightly sloped rooftop. After getting his footing, he started slowly making his way across, minding his balance all the while. It was still midday and he could clearly see where he was going, but that didn't mean he couldn't trip on a loose bit of paneling. Needless to say, he wouldn't come out here unless it was absolutely necessary.

As he neared the end of the rooftop, he heard voices from the streets below. Carefully peering over the edge, he saw Amelia leading Gehrman, Ludwig and unexpectedly, Lobsang out from the alleyway and into a small square, which is when they noticed him.

"Oh, is that you, young master?" Gehrman quite loudly asked as he looked up.

"Keep your voice down!" he warned. Afterwards, he made his way over to a drop down ladder on the right hand side of the roof's edge and lowered it for them. "Now climb up! Hurry!"

Laurence impatiently waited as the three of them made their way up the ladder one after the other, after which he quickly brought the ladder back up so nobody else could use it to access the clinic. Amelia hurried back the way she came in order to secure the passage at the corner of the clinic, which only a select few had access to. It's not that they couldn't have entered the clinic through the main entrance, but with how many patients they were treating, Laurence deemed it too risky. Regardless of what they now knew, it was best that Gehrman remained as obscure as possible.

"Were you followed?" Laurence demanded as he finished with the ladder.

"Not that we could see," Gehrman replied. "But if what you said is true, we're far past the point where that's our biggest concern."

"Unfortunately, it is." Quickly standing up, Laurence walked past his three visitors back towards the clinic. "Follow me. There is much we need to discuss."

…

Once they were all inside, the professor recounted the details of Lady Maria's visit; everything she'd said or even implied. By the end, his companions all appeared troubled and understandably so.

"Surely you misunderstood, Laurence," said Ludwig.

"There is no denying it," he said in reply, turning to Gehrman. "She wants you dead."

Strangely, he hardly seemed phased by this news. At most, he appeared…disappointed. "I see," he said. "What shall we do, young master?"

"I do not know. As I said, if your death was all she wanted, we likely wouldn't be here. Perhaps if we scale back our initiative, delay our planned exhibitions…"

"It will not avail us."

It was Lobsang that interrupted him then, speaking for the first time since they gathered. Naturally, they all turned towards him, finding him sitting on a nearby chair with his head slightly lowered.

"How can you be so certain?" Laurence asked.

"You understand what drives her, do you not? In her eyes, her company died needless deaths - deaths that could've been prevented. How rooted that belief is in reality is irrelevant. What she seeks is atonement, and she sees but one way to achieve it."

He expressed nothing that Laurence didn't already know. He'd told her that her guilt and anger was misplaced, and despite her rebuke, he was certain a part of her could still acknowledge that. "She gave me her word," he told Lobsang. "I don't believe that she'd go back on it."

"I do. Guilt like hers supersedes all things, even honor." Lobsang paused for a moment before adding, "And in the unlikely event that she is true to her word, it will only allow her anger to fester unabated."

There wasn't a hint of doubt in his words, but even so, Laurence couldn't accept what he was suggesting. However, he couldn't think of any rational reason as to why. He simply didn't want to believe it, though he recognized that Lobsang was likely right.

What he saw in her eyes that night, more than guilt or malice, was confusion. The path that she'd walked for an untold number of years ended up leading nowhere, bringing no satisfaction or closure. Furthering Queen Annalise's interests was never her goal; at most, it would only ever have been a byproduct of her efforts. No, what she wanted more than anything was to help those less fortunate than her…and in her mind, she'd failed. What was she to do now?

It was a question he hoped he would never have to ask himself, but…

"Laurence?"

Ludwig's inquiring voice finally broke him out of his thoughts. The look that he and the others were giving him showed that they were still awaiting his decision, as if he'd managed to come to one. "Master Willem must be informed of this," he stated. "Lady Maria has indicated that she doesn't intend to inform Queen Annalise of our transgressions. But even so, the risks of going forward with our plan are far too great."

"How so?" Ludwig suddenly inquired, clearly skeptical of him.

"Excuse me?" said Laurence.

"If I recall your story correctly, Gehrman slew a beast that wiped out her entire company single handedly. And from what you just told us, she seemingly lacks the will to pursue him on her own accord. What reason do any of us have to fear her?"

"But you must consider…!" "I have," the stablemaster interrupted. "And it won't come to that. Won't it, old friend?"

All eyes turned then to Gehrman, who'd remained uncharacteristically silent for the past several minutes. Much like Laurence, he appeared to be lost in thought, pondering over the same possibilities that he was.

"No, it won't," he eventually answered. "I have no wish to slay her."

"I fear you won't have much choice," Laurence pointed out. While she'd been fairly cryptic, Lady Maria now seemed to fear herself - that she'd inadvertently end up causing harm to people besides her intended target. What could possibly cause this, he didn't know, but it was a terrifying thought.

"Well, Gehrman? What do you think?"

"That Lobsang is right," was his eventual reply. "She will come for me one way or another. The most we can do is mitigate the damage she causes."

"Then do we call off the expedition?"

"No," said Gehrman. "Doing so would leave far too much to chance. We won't know when or even if she'll strike, whereas we can be certain that she'll follow us into the tombs. And frankly, I don't think Master Willem needs to be concerned about this."

Laurence pondered over what he was saying, weighing the risks. Most of his logic seemed sound, but one major concern remained. "And how does this all end?"

"With her realizing the folly of her actions."

Gehrman's reply told him that even he wasn't certain what would come of it. Either he'd somehow be able to bring Lady Maria to her senses or he'd need to put her down like a rabid animal. And that was assuming he'd be capable of doing either.

"What you propose is dangerous."

"I know, Master Laurence," said Gehrman. "But it is I who started this fire and so, it falls to me to contain it. If you trust me to do so, that is."

Understandably, Laurence hesitated. Despite what Gehrman indicated earlier, the only way he saw this ending was with one of their deaths - a finality that Lady Maria no doubt longed for. He did not wish to leave such a thing in the balance. He did not wish to see either of them meet their end.

But there was a chance, no matter how slim, that such a thing would not come to pass. Lady Maria was not yet lost to him; that he was undergoing this dilemma at all was proof of that. And for all the complications brought about by Gehrman's decision, he still believed that saving her had been the right thing to do. To see such a brave, benevolent soul fall as low as this and perhaps even perish as a result…he could not bear the thought.

After what felt like an eternity of deliberation, he finally looked back to Gehrman, hearkening back to their discussion after they'd returned from Loran all those months ago. At the time, they had an understanding, but no concrete plan - and since then, nothing had really changed. But he also believed that there was more to his friend's decision than he let on…and that, too, hadn't changed.

"Very well," said Laurence. "Do what you must."

In response, Gehrman nodded his head. "Thank you, young master."

...

Chapter Text

An armor-clad Maria marched through the halls of Cainhurst Castle, her Chikage hanging at her side. The blade seemed to grow heavier with each passing day, but regardless of whatever misgivings she might have, she still had duties to fulfill and appearances to keep up. She was still a member of the Royal Guard and today, she was not to leave the Queen's side. 

However, she’d been all but relieved from duty ever since her battle with King Logarius so as to give her a chance to recover and to allow memory of the event among her fellow subjects to subside. But in recent weeks, she was slowly granted more and more tasks, though her contact with Queen Annalise remained limited. Nonetheless, it was expected that she would soon return to Her Majesty’s court and with any luck, to her good graces.

More than anything, Queen Annalise wished to show that she had full authority over her subjects, especially those as mighty as Maria. Nonetheless, she had suspicions that there was more to these assignments than a show of control - suspicions that were given weight when she approached the Queen's chamber.

As she approached, she could hear several voices coming from inside: those of Their Majesties and to her surprise, that of her father.

“Your Majesty, I ask that you reconsider,” her father pleaded. “We tamper with forces we cannot begin to comprehend.”

“We ‘comprehend’ enough,” the Queen replied. “That, of course, includes the source of thy misgivings.”

Maria’s knuckles stopped just short of knocking on the door as she heard this statement. Rather than making her presence known, she chose to wait and see how her father would respond.

“My children…they pledged themselves to your service. All in my family have, for generations.”

“We do not question thine loyalty,” she assured. “Distant though our relation may be, thou'rt Our kin. We will see no harm come to thy children.”

“I’m afraid that is something even you cannot control, Your Majesty,” her father said.

“We must agree with dear Sigmund,” King Logarius finally spoke up. “It is as We said, my queen. During our battle, Lady Maria was not herself. We fear the power she now wields cannot be controlled or tempered.”

“Perhaps,” Queen Annalise acknowledged. “Or perhaps, We simply have yet to find the means to do so.”

“Annalise…” “Our people’s heritage has been lost to time,” the queen interrupted her husband. “For our dynasty to thrive - for it to survive, we must continue to unearth it, piece by piece. And to do that, We must find a way to control this power.” 

Maria continued to stand outside, deliberating whether now was the time to make her presence known. Deciding that she’d already wasted enough time listening in, and to put the implications of what she’d overheard aside for now, she finally knocked on the door.

“Your Majesty, I wish to enter,” she announced.

“Ah, Lady Maria. Please, do come in.”

With Queen Annalise’s invitation, she entered her chambers. The decor was exceptional, even compared to the rest of the castle; a gilded chandelier hanged overhead, its. As for the Queen herself, she was found sitting on a small sofa near her bed, with King Logarius standing by her side. As for Maria's father, he was now standing dutifully to the side, briefly meeting her eyes before she turned her gaze back to their sovereigns.

“It pleases Us to see thee well, o’ valiant Maria,” said King Logarius. 

“Indeed,” Queen Annalise concurred. “And We must also commend thine brother's loyalty. Without him, it is…doubtful thou could have been saved.”

The mention of Adrian, and of the lengths he went to in order to save her life, momentarily stayed her tongue. Nonetheless, she managed to acknowledge their words with a respectful bow. “Thank you, Your Majesty,” she said. “I…cannot begin to express my regret for my actions.”

“Fret not,” said the queen. “We harbor no ill-will. Our King is alive and well, and We now understand thine actions were not thy own. Do We understand correctly?” 

Her Majesty slightly leaned forward in her seat as she posed this question and for a moment, Maria was uncertain of what her answer should be. Briefly looking to King Logarius, she saw him slightly nod his head, as if urging her to offer the first answer that came to her.

“Yes,” she said. “The thought of harming His Majesty never crossed my mind - not before that day. The rage that consumed me, it…I did not think myself capable of it.”

This was only partially true, of course. Maria understood full well where her anger stemmed from, but the extent to which it had consumed her still terrified her. She wanted to believe that her weapon was the sole cause behind what happened that day, but somehow she knew that wasn’t the case.

“Hmm…” The Queen mused. “Well, it matters not. What’s done cannot be undone.” She finally rose from her seat, briefly turning her gaze to her advisor. “Finalize the details with Our King. We fear our friends’ patience will soon wear thin.”

After but a moment’s hesitation, Maria’s father nodded his head. “Yes, Your Majesty.”  

“Very good.” With that, her attention turned back to Maria. “Attend me, good captain,” she requested as she started walking towards the door, her hands behind her back. “Let us walk.”

Maria dutifully stood aside to allow Queen Annalise passage, during which she spared one final glance back at her father. It seemed like he wanted to say something, but before he even got the chance, she sharply turned away from him and followed after their sovereign, a sharp tinge of resentment in her gut. She caught but one more view of him conversing with King Logarius as she closed the door to the royal chamber, who she noted appeared similarly troubled before they disappeared from her view.

“Art thou troubled?” she heard the queen inquire, perhaps having noted how sharply she’d closed the door.

“Not at all, Your Majesty,” Maria replied, turning towards her and standing at attention. “Where do you wish to go?”

“Nowhere in particular.” she answered, turning and continuing on her way. “Come along, now.”

With this command, Maria was left to follow a few steps behind her sovereign as they steadily made their way through the castle. It was still early in the day and the sun shone through the castle’s many decorative windows, granting some relief from the frigid air. Apart from the two of them, the halls were empty, as most of the castle’s residents had not yet awakened. If nothing else, the sense of quiet gave Maria a chance to think. Despite being her escort, she was not concerned for the queen’s safety - as of now, her reign was unquestioned and none dared oppose her.

“Was there something you wanted from me, Your Majesty?” Maria inquired after a lengthy silence, only to receive a soft chuckle in return.

“Is thy watchful presence not enough?” she said in jest. “Or have We reason to be concerned?”

“Of course not,” Maria quickly assured her. “If it is your wish to leave that day in the past, then I am in agreement. Only…I know you had high hopes for me.” 

“We did,” said Queen Annalise. “And still very much do, surprising though that may be.”

She was quite right in her assessment. Maria was naturally unsure of what she had in mind for her going forward or how this “initiative”, as King Logarius called it, would progress, assuming it did at all. But it would seem that Her Majesty had no intention of giving up, which made Maria understand what she’d overheard just a little more clearly.

“That being said, thine father expressed some concern,” Queen Annalise stated as they walked. “For thy wellbeing, and that of thine brother.”

“Did he indeed?” Maria was not shocked by this supposed revelation, nor did it alleviate her resentment as Her Majesty no doubt hoped it would. Not once had he bothered to visit her since her hospitalization and as far as she knew, he had done nothing to sway Adrian from the drastic measures he ended up taking. This wasn’t anything new. He would always insist that she and her brother still mattered to him, yet would always keep them at arm’s length. 

He was ashamed of them. He would never say it outright, but Maria knew it to be true. Their very existence was a stain on his otherwise spotless record; the product of an affair he would much sooner be forgotten.

“We share dear Sigmund’s fears,” Her Majesty eventually stated, seemingly contradicting what Maria had overheard from their discussion. “Our blood has changed you. Thou art stronger, as We intended all along, but as thou hast demonstrated, that strength seems to come at a cost.”

Maria walked along in silence. She had said nothing she didn’t already know, but that didn’t mean she had anything to say in return, reassuring or otherwise. “I was inexperienced. Reckless. If nothing else, I understand now that I must use my…gifts in moderation.”

“And to what end?” 

This simple inquiry came close to stopping Maria in her tracks. “I…don’t understand, Your Majesty.”

“Thou hast been working tirelessly to master thy newfound gifts, yet for what purpose, We do not know.” She paused for a moment then, taking a moment to look behind her and slightly smile at her, taking note of her confusion - perhaps, even her apprehension. “We understand, dear Maria. Thine service stems not from any inherent loyalty to Our station, but nonetheless, thou hast served Us well. Whatever it is thou now seekest, We wish only to aid thee.”

Her words did little to quell the alarm and uncertainty Maria now felt. Was it possible she was aware she’d been misled? Was it possible that Adrian had broken his promise to her?

No. Maria dismissed that idea right away. 

“I am your sword, Majesty,” she eventually said. “It is my sworn duty to serve and protect Cainhurst, with all of my might.”

To this, Queen Annalise simply chuckled. “Such grandiose declarations do not suit thee, dear.” The two of them were now passing through a covered bridge linking two parts of the castle and as she spoke, the queen made her way towards a nearby opening, stopping in front of it as she gazed out across her kingdom.

“We have always admired thee, Lady Maria. Thy resolve and thy strength of will. How heartbreaking it is then that thou’st been reduced to this state - so mournful…and so vengeful.” 

This second descriptor again ignited Maria’s suspicions. But before she could even attempt to question her or to explain herself, Her Majesty continued.

“Be frank with Us. Is thine present anger truly without cause?”

Despite her best efforts to maintain it Maria’s resolved facade slightly faltered and her gaze drifted to the floor.  “No,” she answered.

“And is it thy believe that it is possible to overcome?”

Another difficult question, another lengthy pause…and finally, another simple, yet difficult answer.

“No.”

Her mind again turned to Professor Laurence, and to the choice she’d offered him what seemed like months ago. Since that day, she’d continued to watch him from afar, attempting to gauge what decision he’d come to. And from what she saw, he and the rest of Byrgenwerth were staying the course. Either he’d written off her warning or he believed that not heeding it would somehow work in his favor; she did not know which…nor did she particularly care.

The truth was, Maria was relieved. The last several weeks had been agonizing; she’d done everything she could to re-establish herself, performing her duties as she’d otherwise would and trying to take her mind off Gehrman, only to end up failing miserably. Something stirred deep within her being - a hunger that yearned to be sated. 

It all felt so…pointless. Like her men had truly died for nothing.

As she lost herself in these wretched thoughts, Queen Annalise finally turned towards her. But even then, Maria couldn’t bring herself to meet her eyes, continuing to stare blankly at the floor until the queen put her fingers beneath her chin and gently raised her head so that she was looking at her.

“What is it thou seekest?” she repeated and this time, Maria could not stay silent.

“Retribution.”

“Then We shall deliver thee,” she said, lowering her hand from her chin. “If thine anger runs as deep as thou claim'st, We would have thee embrace it. To attain that which thou desirest.”

Before today, such a suggestion would have appalled Maria. But as she stood there, weighing her potential options against each-other, she saw nothing but uncertainty ahead - except for one possible outcome. And so, without saying another word, she took her Chikage off its strap and knelt in front of Queen Annalise, holding the blade up to her with both hands. She, the only one who could deliver her

Taking the blade, Her Majesty slowly and carefully unsheathed it as Maria remained on her knees, preparing herself for what was to come. As she did in the ceremony that granted her this twisted gift, Annalise used the edge of the blade to slit open her palm and held it up as her tainted blood dripped from her clenched fist. 

“Come. Indulge thyself.”

And so Maria did. She drank deeply, each drop of Her Majesty’s blood invigorating her, granting her power beyond measure. Unlike the burning pain she’d felt when she’d first imbibed it, she now felt an insatiable craving. She needed more. She needed every bit of strength it could grant her. She needed it for what was to come.

What she needed above all else was closure and for that to be achieved, Gehrman needed to die. And if she somehow failed, if she was to fall in battle and be liberated from this pitiful existence…

So be it.

...

Chapter Text

The Workshop was bustling with activity, as Gehrman’s students prepared themselves for the journey ahead. Standing on the small cliff just outside the Workshop, Laurence observed the recruits as they mingled amongst themselves, noting an air of uncertainty among them. This was hardly surprising - as students of Byrgenwerth, they’d all heard stories of the Tombs and the dangers that lie therein, which they have now observed first-hand through their training with Gehrman. 

From what he could see, the hunters possessed a wide variety of weapons; axes, cleavers, pistols and curved blades not dissimilar from Gehrman’s own. And as for Gehrman, he had crafted all of them - many of them he created many years ago before settling for his present weapon, producing new copies for his students at a surprisingly rapid pace.  

Laurence was pleased that Gehrman had grown into his role as a mentor, even if it took him some time. It was clear that he had a great passion for his craft, unorthodox as it was. What was also clear is that this focus had resulted in a mostly solitary life, something that this initiative had disrupted. Thankfully, Gehrman didn’t seem to mind this too much or at least, he hadn’t complained yet. 

These were only passing thoughts, however. As he looked over the courtyard, the professor’s eyes occasionally shifted off towards the surrounding hillside; naturally, he didn’t see anything, but that did little to calm his nerves. As isolated as the Workshop was, it still felt like he was being watched. Like she was waiting in the distance, ready to strike at any moment.

As he pondered, Laurence heard some subdued chatter from within the Workshop. “Is there really nothing we can do?” 

“Your eagerness is commendable, Lobsang,” said Gehrman. “But, and I mean no offense, none of you can hope to stand up to her. I will not have you putting yourself at risk unnecessarily”

“Following you is inherently risky.” This comment elicited a laugh from the elder hunter, lightening what could have been a tense atmosphere. Thankfully, Lobsang wasn’t the argumentative sort and was clearly speaking in jest.

“I know, I know. But this is not what I’ve been preparing you all for, and I cannot say I was fully prepared for it either.”

“That is rather worrying,” said Lobsang, giving voice to Laurence’s own concerns in the process.

“You needn’t worry. I’ll be fine, I’m sure.”

To his credit, there was no sign of nervousness or uncertainty in his voice, and after everything he must’ve seen over the years, it wasn’t surprising that Gehrman carried himself in such a carefree manner. For what could truly harm him?

Yet as much as Laurence wanted to take Gehrman’s words to heart, the uncertainty of what was to come continued to gnaw at him. He’d witnessed Lady Maria’s prowess first-hand and he could only assume that her power had grown exponentially since then. How? He did not know, and that was the crux of the problem. 

But the way he saw it, the time for such concerns had long passed. Gehrman made his choice, and now Laurence had no choice but to trust him. 

Finally deciding to rejoin his fellows, he entered the Workshop and made his way closer to Gherman's workbench, which he and Lobsang were gathered around. “Are the two of you ready? We must depart soon.”

“Just a moment, Master Laurence,” German assured, sounding quite weary. “It needs a few finishing touches.”

Curious as to what they were doing, Laurence came closer to the workbench and peered over Lobsang’s shoulder. Gehrman was turning the crank on a rather crude contraption, which was presently grinding against a bladed weapon resembling a shortsword; surrounding the weapon were several vials of blood. After a few more turns, Gehrman wiped some sweat off his brow and set the tool aside. At first, the professor wasn’t sure what the purpose of this process was - that was, until he saw the strange red marking he saw on the blade’s material, which seemed to be slowly seeping into the metal.

“Best to leave it be for a while,” Gehrman said to Lobsang, seemingly paying Laurence no mind. “There’s a chance the old thing won’t take to it.”

“Take to what, exactly?” the professor inquired.

“Who can say?” was Gherman's non-answer. “It is something I observed forming in the blood of the beasts I slew. They're not worth much on their own, but I found when they're applied to weaponry, they vastly improve their efficacy.”

To further illustrate his point, Gherman took one of the vials and held it up for Laurence to see. Surely enough, he could see something within the thick red essence - something vaguely resembling a gem, with several jagged spikes growing from a small central point. 

“Fascinating…” said Laurence. Needless to say, this was not a common phenomena. He could only assume the blood had hardened in some way, be it naturally or through some arcane source. “You wouldn't happen to know how this occurs, would you?”

As expected, Gehrman’s immediate response was a casual shrug. “I haven't had much reason to consider it,” he rationalized. “But I do keep track of where they are found, or more accurately, within which beasts they form. My findings have been…inconsistent, to say the least.”

“Meaning?” “There's little consistency when it comes to them; finding them mostly comes down to luck. As such, my collection is rather sparse.”

This was about what Laurence had expected. Nonetheless, he wished to learn more about these strange “gems” and the reasons for their existence. “ How sparse?” he asked Gherman, who immediately seemed to understand why.

“Looking for new research material, are we?” he correctly guessed.

“Only if you can spare it,” he replied. “I am curious whether they can be used for more than simply…fortification.”

“What more could you want?” Gehrman jested. “I say, you scholars are all alike. When your mind is brimming with so many possibilities, you fail to consider the simplest solution - the one staring you right in the face.”

The light mockery in his words wasn't lost on Laurence, but he couldn't bring himself to be offended. Because he was right - to an extent, anyway. If he had been the one to stumble upon these strange objects, he never would've thought to apply them in the manner Gherman had. Whether that said more about him or Gherman was for anyone to decide, but what really mattered was that the latter’s intuition had paid off. But then again, sometimes there was more than one solution to a problem.

“Is that a no?” 

“Not necessarily. They’re hard to come by, as I’ve said and the ones I do have are going to see a lot more use than before. But if I happen to find a lesser one, I’ll be sure to lend it to you.”

“Always so generous,” said Laurence. 

“Quite. Blood can be a precious thing indeed, young master. And powerful, too.”

“I’ll be sure to keep that in mind.” He didn't need to, of course. He’d seen firsthand just how precious the blood of the labyrinths truly was, if the lengths Queen Annalise had been willing to go to in order to obtain but a small sample of it. The existence of these gems only further proved that great power was to be found in blood - high-quality blood, from those who’ve transcended their human limitations. 

But if he understood Gehrman correctly, these gems came from the blood of beasts - men who have given in to their most primal urges and become something more. Was there more to these perverse creatures that he simply hadn't seen yet?

Suddenly, the sound of someone clearing their throat drew their attention to the rightward entrance to the Workshop. There stood Caryll, holding a familiar box; behind her was Ludwig, who had escorted her here. “Gentlemen,” she greeted as she stepped inside. “I hope I’m not intruding.”

“Ah, Ms. Caryll. Welcome,” said Gehrman. “I must thank you for making the journey here, and on such short notice.”

“It’s now my duty to prepare you and your students for the trials ahead. I would be remiss if I hadn’t.” 

As she made her way inside, Caryll briefly met Laurence’s eyes. As ever, she’d been rather secretive about her affairs, but it was clear that she’d been consulting with Gehrman as she’d promised. And if he were to guess, she was here to finally put this “key” of hers to use.

“How may I be of service?” she said to Gehrman, confirming his intuition. 

“I wish to further…sample your work,” he replied. “Given that it’s their first official hunt, my students will need every possible advantage. Just as I do.”

It was clear Caryll was unaware of the looming threat he was preparing for, which he supposed was for the best. “Then shall we begin?” she asked. “I imagine it'll take some time to get through them all.”

“Right away,” said Gehrman, which is when he finally saw it fit to tell them just what they had in mind. “I recently sampled some of Caryll’s work - it's far from a pleasant process, but there's no denying the benefits that come with it.”

“Which would be?” Laurence inquired.

“Well, I don’t quite know how, but I don’t tire out as easily anymore. Needless to say, this line of work takes its toll on you, and the difference in performance afterwards was very noticeable.”

This was interesting for quite a few reasons. For one, it reminded Laurence of the questioning Caryll put him through; about the changes his glimpsing of her runes had brought about. He didn’t quite understand it at the time, but if what Gehrman said was true, it seemed that Caryll’s hypothesis was correct. Comprehending these runes unlocked hidden power - a small portion of the power of the Great Ones.

Yet this was proven by a test they’d conducted in secret. He wouldn’t have thought much of this, if it weren’t for the circumstances they now found themselves in.

“And just how do you intend to unlock this power?” This question was more so directed at Caryll, who was quick to answer.

“Simple, really. In order for these ‘benefits’ to take effect, you first need to comprehend the rune’s meaning and commit it to memory, but it is only when you focus on it when its full effects can be felt. However, given their nature, this process can take some time and can prove quite tedious, which is why I’ve been working on a way to…accelerate it, shall we say.”

Stepping forward, she stepped forward and opened up the case she’d been carrying, revealing that strange branding tool she presented to him and Micolash some time ago. “With this, you can extract the very essence of my runes, provided that it has been visualized clearly. Once this is done, it's only a matter of passing on this knowledge - etching it into the subject's mind…figuratively, that is.”

“That hardly looks like a figurative tool,” Lobsang rightfully pointed out. “So I say Laurence’s question still stands.”

“Well, it…” “What’s important is that it works,” Gehrman cut in before Caryll could embark on another long-winded explanation. “And since your training was done somewhat hastily, you could certainly use the added strength.”

Lobsang appeared somewhat hesitant, looking between his teacher and Caryll as he considered the option and its implications. It was a short cut, to be sure and for as long as Laurence had known him, he had never been one to take short cuts. But here, it was very much a matter of life and death - against the ferocity of the beasts, speed and finesse could only get you so far.

With a sigh, Lobsang’s gaze finally settled on Carryl. “What must I do?”

“Simply find a seat,” she instructed. “I will handle the rest.”

Pulling up a nearby chair, they sat Lobsang down before the altar, with Gehrman and Ludwig standing on either side of him. As for Caryll, she set the box down on the altar, opened it and took out the strange object she had presented to them in Master Willem’s office. Then, with her back still turned to them, she simply looked down at it for a few moments, her audible breathing indicating that she was preparing herself for something. 

Then, without warning, she held the item in front of her face, the tip lining up perfectly with her right eye.

“Caryll, stop!” Panic gripped Laurence and he prepared to rush to her side, only for her to put up her free hand in order to stop him.

“Stay back!” she instructed, her back still turned to him. “This requires… utmost concentration…”

Against his better judgment, Laurence stepped back into his spot and watched as Caryll brought the iron closer and closer to her eye, tightly gripping its tilt with both hands as her body started shaking. Moans and whimpers filled the workshop as she held the brand in front of her, an eerie yellow mist forming around it and rising into the air. This harrowing sight continued until Caryll finally pulled the iron away from her face with a scream, coming close to falling forward before she caught herself on the altar, leaning against it as she caught her breath.

This time, Laurence rushed to her side, helping support her as she tried standing up straight. As she did so, the professor noticed that there was no mark on her eye, as if the brand hadn’t touched her at all. “What did you do?” 

“Ex…extracted…the rune’s essence. From my very mind.”

As Caryll spoke, she held up the mysterious tool, which was still emanating the yellow mist he’d seen earlier. And as he could now see, the tip of the iron appeared to have melded and morphed into the shape of a rune; a strange, twisted upside down arrow. 

“You're sure you're alright, Ms. Caryll?” Gehrman said from behind them. 

“As well as can be,” was her reply, after which she finally turned towards him. As she approached Lobsang, she silently motioned for Gehrman and Lobsang to return to their spots, which they did without question. “Now then, my friend. Ready yourself.”

For once, Lobsang appeared somewhat nervous, taking a deep breath and slightly clenching the armrest before finally nodding his head. “Go ahead.”

Laurence watched uneasily as Caryll lined the glowing iron up with Lobsang's right eye, slowly bringing it closer and closer to his face. The hunter’s eyes remained wide open the entire time, focusing on the marking in front of him, but as it approached, he started to grit his teeth, letting out subdued sounds of anguish as the iron came just an inch away from his eye.

“Hold him,” Caryll instructed, prompting Gehrman and Lobsang to grab onto Lobsang's shoulders in order to keep him from thrashing. 

“Concentrate, Lobsang” Gehrman instructed. “That’s all you need to do. Just concentrate.”

His only reply was more heavy breathing, but he somehow managed to continue focusing his attention on the symbol, regardless of the pain it was clearly inflicting on him. As he watched, Laurence noticed that the yellow smoke was slowly dissipating; what exactly that signified, he could only guess. 

Suddenly, Lobsang let out a wretched scream; he would’ve collapsed from the chair if it weren’t for his two companions holding him steady, allowing Caryll to safely retract the iron and avoid unintentionally gouging out his eye. “It’s done,” she said, motioning for Gehrman and Ludwig to release him. 

Upon being let go, Lobsang violently lurched forward in his seat, clenching his eyes and breathing heavily. After giving him a moment to recuperate, Caryll knelt down in front of him. “Lobsang, tell me what you see.”

“That symbol…” he said in a hushed voice. “Nothing…but that accursed symbol…”

“What does it mean?” 

There was a lengthy pause, during which Laurence started to fear that he was lost to them. But eventually, Lobsang brought his hands down, staring at his trembling palms as if he saw something that wasn’t there before. As if he was seeing himself in a completely different way.

“H-hunter.” 

Seemingly satisfied with this answer, Caryll reached into her satchel and took out a small piece of cloth. “Take this,” she told Lobsang as she offered it to him. “So long as you focus on that rune, you will be able to manifest its power. But if it ever happens to slip your mind, this will help you visualize it once more.”

Laurence could now see that the strange upside down rune was etched into the cloth - the symbol of a hunter. As for Lobsang, he simply stared at the rune, as if he were memorizing each minor detail until he finally accepted Caryll's offering. 

With this, she rose to her feet and looked to Gehrman, who had been observing in quiet contemplation. “He's ready.”

Upon giving her a grateful nod, Gehrman made his way to Lobsang’s side and placed a gentle hand on his shoulder. “Are you well enough to stand?”

“Yes,” said Lobsang, prompting his master to help him up. While he did clutch his head upon standing up, no doubt due to a lingering sense of vertigo, he soon managed to compose himself. 

“Attaboy,” German commended him, patting him on the shoulder. “I never doubted you for a second.”

“Was there a reason to?”

Though it was subtle, Laurence noticed Gehrman steal a brief glance in Caryll's direction; if she noticed, she didn't say anything. “No,” he eventually said. “Not at all.”

This was a lie, of course. There was a reason Caryll transcribed the words of the Great Ones in such a limited fashion; not only was it all she could comprehend, but it was likely the only way a mere human could glimpse their knowledge without losing themselves to madness. Even then, glimpsing just this one rune had clearly been an ordeal for him. That he still retained his sanity was a testament not only to Caryll's brilliance, but to Lobsang's mental fortitude as well. 

Now they had to hope the rest of Gehrman's students shared this quality. 

“Ah, but never mind that,” the elder hunter said. “Why don’t we check on the old thing, eh?” 

Laurence and the others watched silently as Gehrman guided his apprentice back to the workbench, where his weapon still awaited him. By now, all traces of the gem had disappeared, yet he appeared hesitant to claim it. Seeing this, Gehrman picked it up instead and gave it a small inspection.

“Well, would you look at that? Good as new,” he observed, turning it over in his hands before holding it out to Lobsang. “May it serve you well.”

Lobsang continued to silently stare at the dagger-like weapon before finally looking up at Gehrman, who nodded in encouragement. Finally, he claimed the weapon and delicately held it in his hands; then, with a deep breath, he took hold of the hilt with both hands and with one swift motion, pulled it apart into two warped blades, both of which glistened in the firelight. 

Looking at his old friend then, Laurence could hardly recognize him. Instead of his usual robes, he now wore a multi-layered black jacket and rather ragged brown trousers, the closest thing to a uniform their “hunters” had. Gehrman emphasized speed above all else, so he recommended his pupils wear multiple layers of everyday clothing; just light enough that their attire doesn’t slow them down, but just thick enough that their beastly quarry couldn’t simply shred through it.

And while it surely wasn’t intended, seeing Lobsang in full garb was a rather intimidating sight. He looked like a natural warrior - a reaper, much like his newfound mentor. As for him, Gehrman observed him with pride, stepping forward and placing a comforting hand on his shoulder. “Yes. You’re ready.”

Lobsang did not appear as certain of this, but nonetheless, he nodded to his master. His anointment was finally complete, and a baptism of fire was soon to follow.

…

Several hours later.

“Attention! Your attention, please!”

In the woods outside Yharnam, a small group of scholars gathered before Professor Laurence, who stood in front of an ancient monument. By his side was Gehrman, his scythe-like blade sheathed on his belt and its wooden attachment on his back.

“Today marks a great moment in Byrgenwerth’s history - our first independent expedition into the Tombs of the Gods. While no one scholar can be thanked for this occasion, we are nonetheless indebted to the efforts of Gehrman, the head of our hunter initiative. Without him, this venture would not have been possible.”

He paused for a moment to allow the observers - which included the likes of Caryll, Micolash, Amelia, Damian and Norbert - to briefly applaud Gehrman, who acknowledged the gesture with a slight bow. The professor continued, “He and his apprentices will serve as our main line of defense against the dangers of the labyrinths. I know that you are all eager to uncover their secrets, but I urge you to exercise patience; allow our guardians to take the lead. The results of this expedition will shape the trajectory of our future research, so it’s best that we avoid any unnecessary risks. Master Willem expects great things from us, and even if this outing won’t yield the answers we seek, we are closer to the truth than ever before.”

Choosing to cut things short, Laurence turned to Gehrman. “Now, would you do the honors?”

With a dutiful nod, he turned towards the altar and knelt down on one knee, reaching into his satchel in order to retrieve the rounded chalice and setting it down in front of him. The next thing he retrieved was a few vials of blood, which he emptied into the chalice without much ceremony; once this was finished, he stood back up and placed the empty vials back in his satchel, replacing them with one of his Pthumerian bells. 

There were a few whispers and murmurs amidst the crowd upon spotting the artifact - one thought to only be possessed by the mad bell maidens of Pthumeru. Sensing their surprise, Gehrman turned around slightly and put a hand up in order to get them to settle down. Once they were somewhat quiet, he held the bell directly over the chalice and rang it two times, with each chime emitting a mystical blue light that rippled around it. 

At first, nothing happened, until another distant chime could suddenly be heard. Gehrman hadn't moved at all when this second chime rang out, indicating that somewhere another bell had resonated with his, calling for him to cross the gap. Soon after contact was established, a burst of light erupted within the chalice, causing the offered blood to vanish instantly; the error white mist they’d observed from their previous exhibition started to seep out soon after.

The seal had been broken.

“Splendid,” Gehrman quietly said as he put away the bell. “Now we see where it takes us.”

Laurence recalled him saying that they’d have no control over where the chalice will send them, something that could prove inconvenient and potentially quite dangerous, depending on how deep it took them.  A gamble though it may be, he knew that everyone gathered there would agree it was worth the risk. 

“My students and I will go first to ensure that it's safe for the rest of you to follow. Give us about five minutes.”

After giving them his blessing, Gehrman called over a handful of his students before kneeling down in front of the chalice and holding his hand out towards it; upon closing his eyes, he was soon surrounded by an ethereal white light, fading away soon after. His summoned students soon followed suit and after waiting the recommended five minutes, the rest of the scholars began the process as well, with Laurence deciding to allow his fellows to go ahead of him.

As he watched scholars and hunters alike fade away at the foot of the altar, Laurence couldn't help but notice Ludwig standing a fair distance away from the rest of the crowd, looking off into the woods. He had brought his sword along, which made the professor think that he’d be descending with them, but right now, its tip was resting against the ground as its wielder stood like a watchful sentinel.

And it was then Laurence understood exactly what he intended to do.

“Keep them moving,” he whispered to Lobsang before making his way to where Ludwig was standing.

“Have you forgotten something?” The stable master asked as he approached, not taking his eyes off the surrounding trees.

“What do you think you’re doing?!” Laurence demanded, keeping just quiet enough as to not make a scene in front of the remaining scholars.

“You remember where we are, don’t you? Someone needs to watch over the horses and supplies.”

“From the wildlife? Or something else entirely?”

For a moment, Ludwig stayed quiet, before finally breaking his watchful guard in order to glance at him. “A few beasts, Gehrman can handle on his own. And I cannot say I am fond of the idea of freely inviting further danger.”

“That is exactly what you are doing!” Laurence pointed out. “It is only Gehrman she seeks; our aim is to ensure no one else is threatened by…”

“As I’ve surmised,” he suddenly interrupted him, turning back towards the trees. “I do not know this Maria, but from what I’ve gleaned from you, she is not without honor. That no harm befell you proves that. I see no reason for me to fear her.”

Laurence took a moment to collect himself, stepping in front of Ludwig to ensure he could see him. “Be that as it may, nothing is gained from barring her path.”

“You’re certain she’ll come?”

“Yes…” he answered, albeit reluctantly. He wanted to believe there was a chance she’d reconsider and simply leave them be, but that possibility seemed slimmer with every passing moment.

“Then we can be certain that Gehrman’s life is in danger,” said Ludwig. “I don’t doubt his ability, but the old man has done more for me than you could ever know. I would see no harm come to him, if possible.”

This was not exactly a revelation to Laurence. He knew the foundation of Ludwig’s friendship with Gehrman, which left no question as to its strength. But that did not take away from the valor he displayed with this simple gesture - even if he didn't expect to lay down his life then, there was no doubt he would've. So regardless of the professor's own misgivings, he understood that there was nothing he could do to change his mind.

“And what am I supposed to tell Gehrman?”

“Exactly what I told you. He’ll understand.” Ludwig shifted on his feet then, softly smiling as he resumed his vigil. “And in the event you don't see her, you’ll know why that is.”

Laurence couldn't help but scoff at this. They both knew there was little chance that Ludwig could bring Lady Maria to heel, but that didn't seem to affect his bravado in the slightest. And as strange as it was, there was a slight air of excitement around him. Perhaps he was even looking forward to the battle ahead?

“Come along now, Laurence!” Lobsang called out to him. Looking over to the altar, the professor found that he was the last one remaining; the rest of their company was no doubt awaiting them below ground. 

“Safe travels, my friend,” said Ludwig. “Keep your eyes open.”

Sensing that there was nothing more he could do to change his mind, Laurence reluctantly nodded his head and passed by him, patting him on the shoulder along the way. He had enough faith that they’d see each other again in due course, but that lingering sense of uncertainty was proving impossible to shake. 

He wished there was more he could do. Lady Maria had effectively put her fate in his hands, but the way he saw it, he’d be condemning her to misery either way…or perhaps worse. Instead, he could only place his faith in Gehrman and hope his planned resolution comes to pass, whatever that may be. 

Until then, all he could do was remain vigilant.

...

Chapter Text

When he finally awakened below ground, Laurence was met with that familiar sense of disorientation, keeping him from standing up right away. As he tried to get his bearings, someone approached him from off to the side. “There you are,” came a familiar voice. “I was starting to worry.”

The professor looked up to see Gehrman’s welcoming face, putting him at ease despite the less than ideal circumstances. Accepting his guardian’s helping hand up, Laurence checked to see if all others in their company had made the journey; his personal headcount suggested that they did. And as he could see, they were more or less ready to depart.

“Are your pupils ready?” he asked Gehrman.

“As ready as they’ll ever be,” was his reply. “The path ahead seems clear, at least initially, but danger is bound to arise sooner rather than later. It’s best I take the lead for now.”

“I think that would be wise,” said Laurence. “But we’ll need all eyes open to account for…other troubles.”

Gehrman nodded his head in understanding. “Agreed.”

Almost as soon as this exchange concluded, they heard that mysterious droning sound again, turning to find that Lobsang had finally been transported into the tomb. He stood up as the two of them approached, appearing perfectly calm despite the pressing task ahead. “All are accounted for?” he asked them.

“All except for Ludwig,” said Gehrman. “Assuming he intends to follow us, of course.”

Laurence hadn’t yet informed him of Ludwig’s choice, but given what Gehrman just said, he already had some notion of it. “He intends to keep watch above ground,” the professor explained. “And for the exact reason you suspect.”

“Mmm…” Gehrman didn’t seem the least bit shocked by this news, but it still seemed to slightly trouble him. “Was there no swaying him?”

“No,” said Laurence.

“Of course not.” Despite his misgivings, the hunter had a fond smile on his face. “Very well. He is perfectly capable - I doubt any major harm will befall him.”

“But you don’t anticipate that he’ll succeed?” Lobsang chimed in.

“Unfortunately not,” Gehrman replied with a sigh. 

“And what about you?”

Lobsang’s question went unanswered for quite some time, until Gehrman finally turned around and started making his way back to the rest of the group. “I would hope so,” they heard him say as he walked away.

Laurence shared a concerned look with his colleague before the two of them resolved to follow after him. They had known that they were taking a gamble proceeding under these circumstances, but somehow, the thought of Gehrman failing had seemed inconceivable to them. It was clear he saw a great deal of potential in here - whether or not said potential was worth the risk they were taking was another question entirely.

Upon rejoining the rest of their expedition team, the professor went slightly ahead of Gehrman in order to properly address them. “It seems that everyone is accounted for,” he said before turning back towards their new head guardian. “Gehrman, if you may.”

With only a slight nod, he made his way to the head of the company, drawing his curved blade from its sheath on his hip as he walked. “Come along then, gentlemen. Let the hunt begin.”

Lobsang and his other apprentices, about eight of them in total, followed closely after him, each readying their own peculiar weapons. Though organized, their inexperience was evident just from the slight delay in their step; they feared what lay in the labyrinth’s depths, and rightly so. 

Laurence soon noticed Micolash’s presence at his side. “Is he here to protect us, or merely for sport?” His colleague’s skepticism was plain to see and he could not say it was entirely unfounded. 

“In any case, we need to trust him,” he said. “Let us go.”

With that, the professor followed Gehrman and his “hunters”, with the rest of his fellows soon falling in line with him. Above all else, this was a journey of discovery and so long as it could be undertaken, it did not matter who or what facilitated it. Master Willem expected results from them all and so, they shall deliver them. No matter what got in the way.

…

Aided only by the dim candlelight, Lady Maria was hard at work sharpening her blade, using a special whetstone located at the work station within her quarters. The process wasn’t terribly different from how she once maintained the Rakuyo, but unlike her previous weapon, the Chikage’s edge was not what made it an effective weapon. That was not to say maintaining it was pointless, but despite appearances, it was a weapon focused on raw power - power that very few could wield effectively. Power that could never fully be controlled.

Maria’s movements were slow and deliberate as she glided her blade along the whetstone, slower than they would usually be. She knew she had little time to waste. No doubt, the scholars of Byrgenwerth had already embarked on their first independent expedition; from her scouting, she knew they would access the Tombs of the Gods through one of many ancient monuments in the woods surrounding Yharnam, erected to honor one of the Old Ones, whose name has been lost to time. There was no telling where the chalice in their possession would take them, but her assumption was that it would be one of the Hintertombs, which according to legend were still being expanded to this day. 

But even if they entered the labyrinths today, or even tomorrow, there was little need for her to rush. The passage of time within them was distorted, with mere minutes amounting to hours above ground. The exact reason for this was beyond her understanding, but what she did know was that it should be impossible for the labyrinth’s denizens to survive even in the modern day. Did that mean that they were frozen in time? Or perhaps that the chalice rituals somehow allowed one to travel to the past? For her purposes, the details hardly mattered.

Once she was satisfied with her work, Maria used a cloth to carefully wipe down her weapon. Then suddenly, her hand froze and for a few agonizing moments, all she could do was stare at the Chikage’s long, jagged blade. The blade she’d been honing for oh so long, in preparation for this very day. And now that it had finally come, she found herself…fearful of what was to come.

She was a Knight of Cainhurst. She was not meant to shy away from bloodshed, nor was she meant to fear death. Neither of these were true of her, so why then did her resolve falter?  

Clenching her fist around the grip to stop her hand from shaking, Maria finished cleaning the blade and sealed it within its scabbard. Though she was loath to admit it, the Chikage was to be her trump card. She doubted that Gehrman had ever faced anything like it before and if it could get the better of even King Logarius, with all his power and experience, then his fate was sealed.

But what would a victory like that truly prove? That she could never match him in a proper duel? In the past, considering such underhanded tactics would have been unthinkable. She had been reared into a warrior, but that did not mean she was conditioned into mercilessness. Her grandfather had warned against that very thing.

What would he think of her if he saw her now, she wondered. She wasn’t sure she wanted to know the answer.

Taking a deep breath, Maria attacked the Chikage’s scabbard to her belt and prepared to leave. However, she only made it a few steps away from her workbench before she froze again. She knew that this was the only way forward, the only way she’d ever find some semblance of peace, but nonetheless, some invisible force pulled her back. Because deep within her clouded mind, she acknowledged that she may very well not be returning home. 

It was that thought that led her to the Rakuyo’s display. For months and months, it had fallen into disuse, yet she could still see hints of its past shine. Perhaps her sentimentality took hold of her or a desire to cling to some vestige of honor, but Maria reached out and once more donned her cherished heirloom. And she was struck by how…natural it felt to have it in her grasp. How comforting.

Though a part of her urged her to put it back, to ensure it played no part in this bloody mission, Maria did not. Instead, she took some time restoring some of the Rakuyo’s former shine, then attached its dagger to the other side of her opposite hip and strapped her saber on her back. Both weapons were light enough that she did not have to worry about overburdening herself, though it would have still been wiser to simply take one over the other.

But she could not waste anymore time mulling over this choice. She sought victory and to achieve it, she would need every tool at her disposal. And besides, for all the anger she carried towards him, Gehrman was no beast. Theirs was to be a duel between warriors.

After quietly slipping out of her quarters, Maria carefully made her way through Cainhurst’s winding halls towards the stables. It was late into the night and the vast majority of its residents had long ago retired to their own quarters, save for a handful of guards who stood watch more for appearance’s sake than for any practical purpose. A vast body of water separates the castle from the mainland, making an invasion or infiltration a fool’s errand. One could only enter Cainhurst upon invitation, and could only leave if they were permitted to leave. 

Needless to say, Maria did not have the means to come and go as she wished, at least not officially. But she’d found her means. 

She arrived at the stables to find them all but deserted, save of course for the horses they housed. As she approached Siegward’s designated stable near the center of the facility, her steed promptly focused on her, softly neighing and nuzzling her as she got close. Given that she’d foregone the faceless armor of the Royal Guard in favor of her knight’s attire, he had no trouble recognizing her.

“Yes, yes, I know,” she quietly said to him while patting his neck and the side of his face. “I need your help just one more time, old friend.” 

Once she was sure that Siegward was calm and ready to depart, Maria prepared to release him. But before she could so much as open the fence keeping him within his stall, she became aware that the two of them weren’t alone. Though she briefly paused her work, she soon continued on, even as the sound of hay crunching under heavy boots drew closer and closer.

“Shouldn’t you be manning the gate?” Maria asked her visitor without even glancing their way. She knew it could only be one person.

“I have been,” said Adrian. “I would have thought you’d be gone by now.”

“I was delayed,” was all she said.

“So, I see.” Her brother drew even closer, which finally caused her to pause her preparations and turn to look at him. He looked about the same as he ever did or at least, he would have, were it not for the sword he now carried at his waist. A dreary reminder of the sacrifice he’d made for her. 

“You’re armed,” he noted. “Just what do you intend to do?”

“As I told you. To purge the rabble.” 

“I didn't think you’d need to resort to such drastic measures to do so. I understand that they did not heed your warning, but…”

“There is no other way, Adrian. Not anymore.”

Her brother surprised her by taking a firm hold of her shoulder, forcing her attention back to him. “Yes, there is! You need not involve yourself in Byrgenwerth’s affairs any longer. Let it be.”

His voice was forceful and commanding, but also desperate. Though he had agreed to help her in this undertaking, she knew he had his reservations. He never cared about punishing Byrgenwerth for their “theft”; all that ever mattered to him was preserving her honor and status in the eyes of the Royal Court, and in his mind, the best way to do that was for her to do exactly as he said. To simply continue as she is.

“I cannot,” was all she said. “Their success stems from my failure. I cannot abide that any longer.”

“What effect does that…” “Annalise knows.”

Adrian instantly fell silent, seemingly too shocked to speak. “That… cannot be.”

“I am certain she does,” Maria reaffirmed. “Some time ago, she inquired about the source of my anger, and encouraged me to embrace it. In order to attain that which I desire.”

Adrian was clearly troubled by this news, which confirmed what Maria already knew - that he was not the reason that the Queen had grown suspicious of her. After all, one did not amass power like hers without possessing a great deal of guile. 

This had likely been her plan all along, to get her to such a point where she would gladly eliminate those in Byrgenwerth who sought to subvert her authority over them. That she would be acting alone made it all the easier to claim the Crown had no involvement - that she had lost herself to madness, deserted her post and attacked them in a frenzy. That was not too far from the truth, after all. 

“She is playing with your mind,” he eventually concluded. “Those words could mean anything.”

“They could,” she acknowledged with a sigh. “If I hadn’t told her precisely what that is.”

Any hope that Adrian might have been clinging on to instantly vanished from his eyes. Any hope that this could all be swept under the rug, and any hope that he could convince her to stay. “I’m coming with you.”

“You will do no such thing! This has nothing to do with you!”

“Then you’re not going anywhere.” 

For once in her life, Maria found herself at a loss for words. Her shock at her brother’s ultimatum quickly boiled over into anger. “What did you say?”

“I won’t let you leave.” He remained stern in the face of her frustration, but his own was already becoming apparent. “I’ve tolerated your recklessness for far too long.”

“What gives you the right?!”

“Because I have given everything for you!” Adrian all but snapped at her. “You survived because of me! You maintain your standing because of me! You were able to embark on this pointless crusade because of me! And clearly, none of that is of any value to you! You stand ready to throw it all away, and for what?!”

Maria narrowed her eyes as she glared at her brother, but otherwise didn’t say a word. What was there for her to say to him? He truly had given everything for her, even his very humanity. And what had she given him in return? What could she give him in return, apart from honoring this one simple request?  

“Nothing,” she said so quietly that even she was shocked when she heard it. “There is nothing left for me here, Adrian. This is something I must do.”

Her brother remained firm, but the silence that followed was enough to tell her that he’d been wounded by her words. “And you truly believe that?” he said in a resigned voice. He already knew the answer; he just didn’t want to hear it.

“Yes,” Maria said. “I’m sorry.”

As silence again settled between them, she watched as Adrian’s expression shifted from one of bitterness to one of disappointment. “No, you’re not…” With that, he turned her back on her and started walking away, keeping one fist clenched over the hilt of his sword. “The gate will be opened for you when you are ready. It will be the last time you can expect my aid.”

Maria could only watch as her brother got further and further away, eventually exiting the stables and leaving her entirely alone. Perhaps she should have called for him, to try and reason with him further…but she knew such a thing would be futile. He had already made his wishes very clear, and she had already made it clear she could not fulfill them, as much as she wished that were not so. 

But her decision had been made. She could not afford to falter now.

Upon mounting Siegward and stepping out into the frigid winter air, the front gate indeed opened for her, allowing her to ride out across the vast bridge connecting Cainhurst to the mainland. And even as Siegward’s hooves touched down on Hemwick soil, Maria never once looked back. 

...

Chapter Text

Ancient stone and dust fell to the ground as Gehrman lifted one of the many gates that sealed off parts of the labyrinth - no doubt the one thing that was keeping its rabid inhabitants contained. Disregarding whatever dangers that might lie ahead, Laurence and his fellows followed after their guardians as they made their way through a damp, overgrown corridor. The sweltering heat and raging sandstorms of Loran were not present here; indeed, this portion of the labyrinths lacked any striking traits, save for its almost suffocating darkness.

One of Gehrman’s students held a torch aloft to give them a faint source of light, illuminating the decrepit, overgrown walls surrounding them. The crackle of the flames and their slow, steady footsteps were the only sounds that could be heard, something that put Laurence on edge.

This place felt so…dead. Could they really be all alone down here?

“Remember, keep your eye out for any traps, and listen for even the slightest disturbance. Even if your surroundings seem completely desolate, never rush straight ahead. Always assume that the tombs have something in store for you.”

Gehrman spoke just loudly enough for all those following to hear him, his words delivered calmly, clearly and most importantly, cautiously. As skilled as he was, he nonetheless respected the labyrinth, recognized that it was impossible to know exactly what lay within it without first taking a potentially deadly plunge. The lesson for them to heed was simple - always be prepared for the worst. 

Whatever comfort they might have still had vanished the moment they heard deathly voices in the distance. The company collectively froze even before Gehrman raised his hand to signal them to do exactly that, after which he motioned for a few of his students to stay behind and for a few of them to follow him. 

“Put the torch out,” he ordered, prompting his student to do exactly that. “Hunters, wait for my signal. The rest of you, hide.”

With the almost total darkness surrounding them, such a command felt unnecessary, but nonetheless, Laurence guided his followers as best he could. A few wooden coffins and other miscellaneous debris lay against the wall: in addition, a few roots had grown to such a degree that a few scholars were able to lie down and obscure themselves from view.

Soon, Laurence was looking out from behind one of the coffins, with Amelia right behind him. By now, he couldn’t see Gehrman and his students, but he could see a light in the distance, and could hear an incomprehensible language being spoken. Something was coming. 

“That tongue…” he heard Micolash whisper from the other side of the hall. “Could it be?”

“Quiet!” Laurence ordered, which seemed to be enough to silence his colleague. Like him, he recognized the significance of this language they now heard, but right now, it was merely a sign of impending danger.

As the eerie voices grew louder and the light drew closer, he was able to make out vague silhouettes of their assailants; a group of deathly thin humanoids, carrying crude weapons like knives and burning spears. There must have been at least a half dozen of them, with more surely dwelling deeper in the labyrinth. 

The closer the figures came, the clearer Laurence could see where Gerhman and his students were hidden, or rather, weren’t hidden. He could see that they were continuing their cautious advance, and it seemed like the plan was to face the impending threat head on. That was, until Gehrman drew a small knife and threw it down the hallway, which sailed cleanly through the air towards one of the approaching figures.

But instead of the sound of rending flesh and screams of agony, the sound that echoed through the hall was the knife hitting the left side wall and clattering uselessly to the floor. He missed?! How could he miss?!

Laurence braced himself for the worst, closing his eyes and looking away as the dwellers erupted in a horrifying chorus of screams and incomprehensible chatter. But what he didn’t hear were the sounds of battle, which compelled him to spare another glance down the hallway…and it was then that Gehrman’s plan became clear to him.

Drawn by the noise made by the knife, the party of dwellers had turned their back to him and his hunters, who by now were essentially right behind them. Gehrman and two of his students, both of them wielding curved blades closely resembling his own, approached three of the dwellers, still completely clueless of their presence. As it happened, one of them was holding the lantern that served as their sole source of light.

From the moment that Gehrman cut him down with a single swing of his blade, the lantern fell and the hall was plunged into darkness. Not even shadows could be seen as the hunters got to work, but despite that, Laurence couldn’t look away, for he could clearly hear every instance where one of their weapons cleaved through the dwellers’ flesh, every dying gurgle as they were slain quickly and efficiently. He could only picture what was really happening, if he even dared to.

It was over in a matter of seconds, after which silence once again settled over the hallway. Laurence and his fellows all held their breath, waiting to see what would happen next. And then it happened. A light appeared where the hunters had attacked and there they stood, looking none the worse for wear. The professor could make out Gehrman in the crowd, who looked in their direction and simply gestured with his hand for them to come over, no doubt to avoid risking alerting any potential threats further down the hall.

“Looks like it’s safe,” Laurence said. “Follow me.”

Emerging from their hiding spots, the scholars made their way to their guardians. And as the torchlight illuminated the passageway around them, they could now clearly see the hunters’ handiwork. The blood splattered across the floor and walls was the least of it, with many of the dwellers lying dead with deep lacerations across their back and chests, and other lying in states of dismemberment; one of the hunters only managed to remove their blade from his target’s skull as the scholars arrived, allowing them to see how it had been cleaved open. 

Due to the nature of his practice, Laurence was no stranger to grisly sights, but this…this was different from say, a surgery. It was an utter bloodbath, yet somehow one conducted with a similar level of precision and care. There was something harrowing about that fact - how such a barbaric act could be so…refined.

While he was contemplating the scene before him, Gehrman calmly retrieved the throwing knife that had brought it all about. Sparing Laurence only a passing glance, he turned his attention to his students, some of whom seemed just as shaken as the scholars. “Tricks like this can only get you so far,” he said while presenting the knife for all to see. “Their usefulness is entirely dependent on the situation at hand. Even if you think you can get away with it, you should always weigh the risks; miscalculate your throw even slightly and you risk revealing yourself. Your goal should always be to avoid direct combat whenever possible - we do not and should not hunt for sport. Understood?”

In response, Gehrman received little more than scattered murmurs and a few affirming nods, but this seemed sufficient enough for him. 

“Excellent,” he said before slipping his knife back inside his satchel. “Now, as for our purposes here, we will partially disregard what I said. I’d like our ‘patrons’ to see what you are all capable of.”

This comment drew some additional stirrings among the scholars, something that Laurence chose to ignore. His focus remained squarely on Gehrman, who looked in his direction upon finishing his address, no doubt looking for some sort of confirmation. With next to no hesitation, the professor gave him a nod, which the hunter acknowledged with one of his own.

“Let’s not disappoint them, yes?” Gehrman said to his students before setting off down the hall. “With me.”

The hunters immediately converged behind their master, with the scholars following closely after them. There was a general feeling of unease amongst the party, except, of course, for Gehrman; while still cautious, he led them onward with purpose, perhaps even eagerness. Naturally, his students did not seem eager to stray too far from him - his presence here was their only real guarantee of safety.

Out of everyone present, it was Lobsang who remained the closest to Gehrman, although he had a much greater sense of calm about him compared to his fellow students. However, even in the dim torchlight, Laurence couldn’t help but notice that his blade was one of the few still not coated in blood.

The professor did not dare point this out to anybody. In fact, nobody dared to utter a word as they neared the end of the ancient corridor, and the beginning of the first layer of this tomb. They still had a long journey ahead of them.

And as for Laurence, all he could do was prepare himself for what he knew was coming.

…

Leaves and branches rustled in the wind as Maria’s steed slowly trotted along the woodland path before them, which seemed to stretch out into infinity. A lantern hanging from her belt provided them with some much needed light, just bright enough that she could see the trail in front of her, but just dim enough that they were unlikely to attract the attention of any creatures that dwelt amongst the trees. Yet even without the threat of predators, the forest seemed to unnerve Siegward; his already slow trot went down to a crawl and his frightened neighs almost felt like a warning for her to go no further.

“Stow your fear,” she whispered in a soothing voice while patting her horse’s neck. “You’ve always been brave, Siegward. Be brave for me, one last time.”

Slowly but surely, Siegward’s courage returned to him and he cautiously continued onwards. As much as it delayed her, Maria did not push him to quicken his pace, and not only because doing so would only agitate him further. Amidst a culture of intrigue, Siegward’s loyalty to her had been unwavering, and remained so even now. He had always been one of the few she knew she could always rely on…and now, he was likely the only one.

Try as she might to cast her brother from her mind, she could not. How could she? After what he said to her…after what she said to him…

Maria did not weep. Instead, she kept on looking forward, for that was all she could really do now. She had told Adrian that there was nothing left for her in Cainhurst and that now seemed more true than ever. Her people looked at her in fear, and her own flesh and blood looked at her in scorn. No, disappointment. 

Then again, was she deserving of anything more? The answer to that question seemed clear enough to her.

Onward and onward Siegward marched, following the trail of hoof prints and carriage tracks that Byrgenwerth’s expedition had left behind. They had made no effort to cover up their passage; after all, who would be foolish enough to follow them this deep into the woods? Even so, it all felt oddly deliberate, and more likely than not, it was. They must have known she was coming. They may even hope that she was.

As she got further up the trail, Maria saw a light in the distance. There wasn’t any doubt in her mind that that was where she would find them, or at the very least where they left their horses and carriages behind. But a light as bright as this one could only come from a fire, which naturally needed to be lit and maintained. Someone was still there, waiting for her. 

Bringing Siegward to a stop, Maria dismounted, thinking it better to continue the approach on foot. After taking hold of her horse’s reins and dimming her lantern, she slowly made her way towards the light, going off the trail and slipping between the trees. The near total darkness forced her to move slowly and carefully, being cautious of the leaves and branches beneath her feet so as to not alert whoever still remained in the forest. 

Once she determined she was close enough, Maria stopped her advance and turned back towards her horse, who had remained as quiet as he could be given the circumstances. That said, it was clear he was still agitated; his claustrophobic surroundings didn’t help matters either. Gently scratching his neck to calm him down, she brought herself as close as she could to him and put her forehead against his. Her steed did not protest the embrace and attempted to nuzzle her, bringing the slightest hint of a smile to her face.

“Thank you, my friend,” she whispered. When she finally brought herself to release him, she set about removing his reins, followed by his saddle. It was a long process, and a difficult one, even though it shouldn’t have been either. When she was finally finished, Maria ran her hand along her steed’s snout one last time before she turned his head away from her.  “Now go. Find your way home.”

With her guidance, Siegward turned around and slowly started walking back the way they came, navigating through the trees and foliage. She watched until he was nothing more than a white dot amidst the darkness of the forest, until even that disappeared from view. Maria knew that this was the right thing to do. Regardless of whether she hitched him or left him to his own devices, she could not guarantee that she would return to him - it would be cruel to leave him at the mercy of the woods.

And so, she was left alone, the crushing solitude of her surroundings finally setting in. But she hadn’t forgotten why she was here. 

As she got closer and closer to the light, Maria could see that a makeshift camp had been set up; a few carriages were lined up in an orderly fashion in front of a small clearing, giving them just enough space to turn around when the time came. Apart from the horses, there was just one other living thing present; a man sitting by the fire that had guided her there, who appeared to be in the midst of his supper, if the small pot hanging over the flames was any indication. At this point, it wasn’t clear if he was aware of her presence, but his purpose for being here was. The silver sword leaning against a log just beside him was evidence enough.

Not far from where he was sitting, she spotted her true target - an enormous gravestone hidden among the trees, and at its base, a glowing chalice. The very same chalice in which the Old Blood was discovered.

Maria’s anger swelled at the sight of it. They had stolen it, just as she thought. In the chaos of her battle with that abhorrent beast, she had lost sight of it and in the aftermath, its preservation simply hadn’t mattered to her. She should have known that at least one of the scholars would seize the opportunity and take it for themselves while she was distracted, but until then, she hadn’t considered who that scholar had been.

There were only three people present when she finally left that dreaded chamber; of them, she was certain that it wasn’t Gehrman or Professor Laurence who had taken it, seeing as they were more preoccupied with “comforting” her. That left only one candidate - Micolash. That sniveling coward…the contempt she felt for him at that moment eclipsed any other. 

But she was not here for him. At this juncture, she could not afford to lose sight of that. 

Glancing back towards the camp’s warden, who still seemed to be preoccupied with his brewing, Maria stepped out from behind the trees. Given that his back was to her, she had no trouble sneaking behind one of the carriages and using it as cover as she moved towards the chalice. With every step she took, she couldn’t help but feel like something was amiss. Why would they leave just one man behind, especially if they knew for a fact that she would be pursuing them?

“I know you’re there.”

Maria froze, pressing her back against the carriage and keeping her breath still. Seconds ticked by and the fire continued to crackle, but try as she might, she could hear no traces of movement from the sentinel. However, she was certain that he had been addressing her.

“Don’t worry, Professor Laurence filled me in on the…situation, as it were,” he called out, further confirming her suspicion. “Won’t you join me?”

Still, he made no effort to locate her. For the briefest of moments, Maria contemplated rushing towards the chalice and foregoing this encounter altogether; even with the distortion of time between the surface and the labyrinths, every second that passed meant her target got further and further away. But no. Even now, some things were simply beneath her.

Not yet drawing her weapons, Maria stepped out from behind the carriage. She did not speak to make her presence known, but nonetheless, the man turned his head to look in her direction, smirking to himself upon seeing her. 

“Good. For a moment, I thought the woods were starting to get to me.” Upon saying this, he turned back towards the fire to finish the last few spoonfuls of his stew. “You took much longer than I expected. All too easy to get lost in the dark, I suppose.”

Maria said nothing in reply. Instead, she simply stood there and watched him finish his meal, more than a little bemused at his insolence. She recognized him now - it was the man who helped her organize her mens’ horses after that fateful expedition to Loran. Needless to say, he was perhaps the last person she expected to find here, especially all alone.

“What is your purpose here?”

After eating one last spoonful, the man set his bowl down beside him and stood up, finally fully turning to face her. “Standing watch. I am sure you understand what for.”

Her brow furrowed, but still Maria didn’t reach for her weapons. “Has Gehrman resorted to hiding behind his pupils? I did not think him so cowardly.”

“He is no teacher of mine,” the man surprised him by saying. “But he is the furthest thing from a coward. He did not ask for me to be here.” 

He spoke calmly in spite of her insult, and likewise, he did not attempt to pick up his sword, which Maria carefully eyed. It was an awfully simple weapon, quite unlike Gehrman’s or even her own, but that was no reason to dismiss it. 

“I see,” said Maria. “You intend to keep me from him?”

“That depends. Do you still intend to kill him?”

Maria’s silence was an answer unto itself. They both knew full well why she was here; there was no need to dwell on it. 

“Very well then.” The man reached down for his sword, effortlessly picking it up despite its notable size. “I suppose now we will see whether you are fit for that task.”

She scoffed at his bravado, but even then, she drew no weapon of her own. “I have no quarrel with you.”

“You may not, but I certainly have one with you.” Raising his sword and taking it in both hands, he held it out in front of him in a battle-ready stance. 

Seeing that their conflict could not be averted, Maria sighed in resignation and finally drew both halves of her Rakuyo, leaving her Chikage sheathed on her back. At first, the two of them slowly circled each other, waiting to see whether the other would make the first move. As they did so, she observed her to-be opponent’s stance and composure. She could not sense an ounce of fear from him, and his gaze - it was focused and disciplined, but also…eager? 

“Defend yourself!” 

He made the first move, closing the distance between them in the blink of an eye. Maria was just barely able to avoid his impending strike, having no time to retaliate before she was forced to do so again with his follow-up strike. The moment she saw an opening to counterattack, she took it, turning on her heel and swinging her sabre down on his shoulder. Much to her shock, her opponent quickly recovered from his latest attack, raising his sword in order to deflect her attack. Then, upon briefly staggering her, he attacked again, and this time, she had no choice but to put her weapons out in front of her in order to defend herself.

When his weapon made contact with hers, the force of the impact knocked her back. Although she was slightly disoriented, Maria rolled to the side immediately upon hitting the ground, avoiding yet another attack from her opponent, a downward strike that could very well have cleaved her in two. Getting back on her feet, she combined her two weapons together and thrust it forward, aiming for his side, only for her blade to cut through nothing but air. Or rather, mist.

The man was now several steps away from her, seemingly having transformed into a cloud of mist in order to avoid getting skewered. With his sword slung over his shoulder, he paced from side to side, not taking his eyes off her for a moment. “Is that it?” he all but taunted her. “I thought you would be more driven.”

Maria’s brow furrowed, but otherwise, she did not rise to his provocation. As she now plainly saw, this battle would prove problematic to say the least. Clearly, Gehrman had taught him the movement technique she had observed in Loran - that speed was a problem in itself, but combined with his strength, it made every attack a potential death sentence. 

Without saying a word, Maria quickly drew her pistol and fired a shot at her opponent. As she expected, he once again transformed into mist and moved to the side in order to avoid the bullet, and so, almost the moment the bullet left the chamber, she was on the move as well. Rushing to where the mist seemed to be moving, she split her weapon back into two and attacked just as he started to reform, leaving him with no time to retaliate or attempt another escape. 

Her greatest advantage was that her lighter weapons allowed for faster, more oppressive strikes, and Maria exploited that to the fullest, swinging her sabre and dagger at varying angles as he struggled to defend himself. He was only able to deflect her first strike before he was forced to fall back on evading them, leading to him attempting to roll to her left in order to give himself an opening. Unfortunately for him, Maria swung down with both of her weapons before he could recover, forcing him to raise his word in order to defend himself. 

Pushing down on him with all her might, Maria found herself struggling against his at least comparable strength. While the Queen’s blood did amplify her natural strength, it still had its limits, and were this solely a contest of strength, she was certain this man would have been able to overpower her. But this was no contest of strength, nor was it an honorable duel between equals. This was a distraction. He was wasting her time.

Maria’s knee made contact with her opponent’s stomach, pushing him back and coming close to knocking him over. Wasting no time, she thrust her saber and dagger forward one after the other, advancing forward with each thrust. However, she wasn’t fast enough and he once again used the mist technique to slip through her grasp.

When he reformed a few feet in front of her, he drew his own pistol and pointed it at her. Her decision to try and rush towards him turned out to be the wrong one, as it soon became clear that he was not wielding a pistol, but a blunderbuss.

Once it was fired, Maria could not avoid its wide spread. Several pellets pierced her chest and stomach, yet by some miracle, she remained on her feet, the shot having only succeeded in staggering her. However, this was all her opponent needed to regain the offensive, allowing him to rush forward and attempt to slice at her abdomen.

Despite the pain raging through her body, she forced herself to move, backstepping to evade his newest attack, then moving to the side to avoid his follow-up thrust. After holstering his blunderbuss, her opponent gripped his sword’s handle with both hands and charged at her, yelling as he prepared to swing at her yet again.

Sensing that he would be putting all of his strength into it, Maria did not attempt to deflect it and instead moved towards him. Waiting until his sword was slicing through the air, she dashed forward, leaving the blade to pass just over her head, failing to even graze her hat. As she passed by, her dagger sliced into his side, or so it would have. Multiple layers of clothing protected him, making it so her blade merely grazed his skin.

Soon, his sword was coming back towards her again. This swing was closer to the ground, ensuring she could not repeat the same tactic again. Instead, Maria leapt high up into the air, high enough that her opponent could do nothing but look up in pure shock before she descended upon him, her blade aiming downwards.

He moved out of the way just in time, leaving her to drive her saber into the ground. Behind her, her opponent used his momentum to swerve around and swung his blade down on where Maria landed. It was only when it hit solid earth did he realize she was no longer in the same spot and as he tried to pull his weapon back, she stomped on it, keeping it pinned to the ground just long enough for her to use the pommel of her dagger to hit him on the side of the head.

Crying out from the impact, her opponent lost his grip on his sword and stumbled backward, which was when Maria pressed the advantage and closed in on him, her saber’s edge aimed directly at his throat.

For a few moments, the forest was deathly silent. The only sound Maria could hear was her own breathing, her body as still as a statue, which could also be said of the man standing opposite her. His eyes were trained on her saber, which had stopped just short of his neck; one small movement from either of them and it would have drawn blood, which was to say nothing of what would happen should she decide to bring things to a conclusive end.

“Do you yield?” Maria calmly asked. Although the answer should have been clear, she received no response, verbal or otherwise. At best, he simply raised his eyes so that they met hers, glaring back at her in defiance. “Or do you intend to waste even more of my time?”

“As much of it as I am able to,” he finally said. Even now, he had no intention of surrendering. 

“What is it you hope to accomplish here?”

“I would ask the same of you. Why does a self-proclaimed knight concern herself with such trivial matters? What honour is there in…”

Maria’s blade moved ever so slightly closer to his throat, silencing him if only for the moment. “None,” she said. “And I need no reminder of that. Now, please, stand down.”

The look in his eyes shifted from one of quiet contempt to something else - something that frankly angered her even more. A look of pity. 

“And if I do not?”

He must have been certain he would not receive an answer. Why else would he ask such a question? And in the end, Maria proved him right. She did not speak, nor did her blade move an inch, even though she understood now what she would need to do if she wished to move forward. And she had to move forward - that, they both understood.

Maria must have faltered, because in the blink of an eye, he disappeared - his body dissolving into a cloud of mist. She only faintly saw the direction of his escape and as she turned to the side in the hopes of catching him, she was met with a swift and sudden pain across her jaw. 

Disoriented, her head snapped to where the blow originated and the moment she thought she saw her target, she swung. It was an amateurish move, one that all but guaranteed that another blow would land, this time to her stomach as her saber failed to make contact, followed closely after by another one to the opposite side of her jaw.

Despite the severity of these blows, Maria was able to regain her senses, allowing her to see her opponent standing before her in a pugilistic stance. He made no effort to try and retrieve his sword, which by now was much closer to him than it was to her. But it was still close enough that she could easily take his hand if he attempted to reach for it, and so, he chose to continue their battle barehanded. 

In spite of his disadvantage, her opponent made the first move, moving towards her and preparing another punch with his right fist. In response, Maria moved to his left in order to avoid, readying her dagger so she could slash at his stomach. However, none of this transpired, and she was instead struck in the nose with his left fist, then across the cheek with his right.

Rather than waiting and trying to bait her into another attack, he went on the offensive, using her momentary disorientation to move in and attempt to strike her again. Thinking quickly, Maria combined her weapons into one and used her free arm to intercept his punch, after which she rammed into him with her shoulder in order to push him back. However, when she attacked with her Rakuyo’s combined form, her opponent managed to dodge or duck under each of her swings; his lack of a weapon made maneuvering much easier, but made any attempt at retaliation extremely risky.

Yet retaliate he did. When one of Maria’s horizontal swings passed harmlessly over his head, he quickly pivoted to her blind spot on her right and drove two punches into her side. The force of the blows almost made her knees buckle, but she managed to retain her footing and once again attempted to attack him. She didn’t even have the time to complete her maneuver before she felt the same impact twice on her back, then her opposite side and finally, three times in her stomach. This relentless barrage was concluded when his fist connected with her chin, hitting with enough force that she was finally knocked off her feet.

In a daze, Maria lay in the dirt and leaves, staining her pristine garb as she willed herself to stand back up. For a moment, she thought she tasted blood, but this was simply a trick of the mind. Her opponent’s strikes were precise and powerful, but bare fists alone would not be enough to meaningfully harm her, especially not those of a mortal man.

“My apologies, my lady. A crude form of combat like this doesn’t suit you,” she heard him say as she got back up. By the time she sat up, she could see him calmly walking over to his lost sword, bending down in order to retrieve it before finally turning back around to face her. “Now, shall we continue?”

He waited until she was back on her feet, her sabre and dagger in either hand. Her frustration swelled and her breathing deepened as she stared down her opponent, who was still waiting to continue their duel. Yet even so, she managed to realize something about him - he was telling the truth when he said that Gehrman was not his master. Apart from that single movement technique, their combat styles could not be any more different. Besides, prowess like his could not be cultivated in the span of a few months; only over years and years of battle.

Such a realization would usually draw more questions, namely who he really was and where he came from. But in the present moment, such details were irrelevant. He stood between her and her prey - that was all that mattered.

Had that not been the case, perhaps she would have called him a worthy opponent. 

“As you wish.”

And so, their duel began anew. Again and again, their blades clashed, neither of them gaining any ground over the other. But Maria could see this stalemate was only temporary. She could see that her opponent was starting to falter. His movement grew more sluggish and unlike the beginning of their battle, he now focused more on defence than on offence. 

But he wasn’t going to surrender. That much was now clear.

His tenacity and perseverance were impressive, but they also proved incredibly frustrating. He must have known he had no hope of victory, and was instead doing all he could to delay her entry into the Tombs, sapping away at her energy so that she would not be able to face Gehrman with her full strength. Realizing this, Maria looked for any possible opportunity to finish the fight, and eventually, it looked like she’d found it. 

As her opponent attempted another attack, Maria ducked underneath it and slashed across his chest with her dagger. This time, she succeeded in cutting through his thick garb and scarring his flesh, but not deep enough for it to amount to anything more than a slight hindrance. After briefly wincing in pain, he was ready to attack again, but he never got the chance, as Maria kicked him in the chest with all her might, sending him flying backwards several metres.

He crashed into a nearby wagon, shaking and even splintering its wooden foundation. The impact frightened the horses still fastened to it, and the sound of neighs and stomping hoofs echoed through the trees as their handler struggled to remain on his feet. 

Knowing better than to give him a chance to recover, Maria rushed towards the wagon, throwing her dagger directly at her target’s head. He ended up moving out of the way just in time, with the dagger impaling itself deep into the carriage’s wooden door. But this was exactly what she’d been hoping for.

Once she reached him, he could do nothing but hold his sword out in front of him to protect himself from her sabre swings, his weapon proving too cumbersome to use in extremely close quarters. When her blade failed to make contact with him even after a few swings, Maria’s free hand shot forward and grabbed him by the throat; she had to slam his head against the carriage several times until his sword finally fell to the ground, which was when she finally aimed the edge of her blade towards his stomach.

A blood-curdling scream echoed through the ancient forest - Maria’s scream. A twisting pain shot through her right hip, almost causing her sabre to slip from her fingers. As her vision blurred, she could see that her dagger was no longer impaled in the carriage’s door - almost as soon as this fact registered, her pain increased tenfold as her weapon was driven into her stomach.

As the blade dug deeper into her flesh, her hold on his neck started to weaken. Taking advantage of this, her opponent grabbed her wrist with his free hand, commencing a struggle as he tried to free himself from her grasp. It took much effort, but he won out ever so slightly - the split second after her fingers slipped away, he hit her with a brutal headbutt, sending her stumbling backwards. As for him, he was left coughing and gasping for air as he slouched back against the carriage.

It was a miracle that Maria managed to remain standing. Though her whole body was in anguish, her attention was for whatever reason drawn to her nose - a cautionary wipe revealed blood on her gloved hand, which somehow shocked her more than the dagger currently impaled in her gut. Somehow, she had let an ordinary man get the better of her. He’d caught her in another moment of hesitation, using her own weapon against her in a desperate bid to escape. 

And now, she was paying the price. The pain from her stab wound was spreading, her vision starting to dim. And then she felt it…that all too familiar feeling…

Agony gave way to vigor, and Maria’s hands were drawn to the hilt of her dagger. Firmly grasping it, she yanked the blade out in one swift motion, unleashing all of her anguish in an ear-splitting scream. Once it was over, all she could hear was her own heavy breathing, her heart beating in her ears, and drops of blood splashing against the earth. 

When she finally dared to glance at her dagger, it was unrecognizable. Now more than double its initial length, her tainted blood had congealed and hardened around it - just as it did with the Chikage.

Such a thing should not have been possible. The Chikage was designed for this very purpose, forming a twisted, symbiotic bond with her blood, but the Rakuyo - it predated it by decades, if not centuries. It should not rely on blood in any measure, and yet…

Maria couldn’t bear to look at it. This…aberration. And when she finally looked up and saw the man that had spurred this discovery, she could finally see fear in his eyes.

“What…are you?”

She could only stare at him blankly. She should have been furious, driven to finally put an end to their drawn-out confrontation. To put an end to him. So where was her bloodlust then? Why did she feel so hollow?

“I wish I knew,” Maria said, her voice devoid of all emotion. 

With her sabre in one hand and her blood-soaked dagger in the other, Maria stalked towards her adversary. It was only when she started moving that he scrambled to defend himself, reaching down for his lost weapon. But his fingers never even grazed its handle.

She was upon him in an instant, her bloody dagger piercing his right shoulder, as well as the wood behind him, with a single thrust. He cried out as the hardened blood tore through his flesh, but it wasn’t long before he was helplessly struggling against her, gripping her shoulder with his non-injured arm and gritting his teeth as he tried and failed to push her back. 

It was like Maria was frozen. Not from horror, but rather the same thing that had gotten them to this point to begin with - her own indecisiveness. He was completely at her mercy now; all she had to do was move her sabre forward and that would be it. But instead, it remained by her side as her eyes burrowed into his, layer by layer.

And it wasn’t just fear she saw. Above all else, she saw shame. Shame at his failure to stop her, and perhaps much, much more. But one thing she did not see was hatred...and she found she felt none for him.

The blood around her dagger started to melt away, returning it to its normal length and allowing the man to fall to his knees in front of her. Immediately, he reached for his wounded shoulder in an attempt to stop the bleeding. She had intentionally targeted his dominant sword arm, and though it was far from a mangled mess, it was doubtful he could fight in his current state. Their battle was over.

“I am sorry it has come to this, but I can’t afford any more distractions,” she said to him, putting both halves of her weapon back in their sheathe. “Tend to your wounds. Do not follow me.” 

Finally, she turned to walk away, moving as fast as she could towards the chalice. By now, the wounds in her stomach and hip had stitched themselves shut, but she still found herself moving with a slight limp, the pain having not yet fully subsided. By the time she reached her ultimate goal, this would no longer be an issue, assuming she could avoid any further combat. 

To her surprise, her adversary remained silent. She’d expected him to yell at her, either out of pure anger or in a final attempt to sway her. But the only sound she could hear from him was his laboured breathing, which oddly seemed to be getting closer and closer.

Maria ducked just before a sword cut through the air her neck had been just a second before. Twirling around, she saw him standing before her yet again, his right arm hanging uselessly at his side. In spite of that, he was wielding his sword with just his left hand, even as he struggled to even lift it. 

Her weapons went undrawn as she watched the last of his strength seep out of his body. Yet again, his sword slipped from his grasp and clattered down on the floor, leaving him to sway and stumble weakly before his legs finally gave way, leaving him to fall forward. 

Before he could hit the ground, Maria moved forward and caught him. His body was limp when she guided him gently to the ground, but a cautionary check to his pulse confirmed that he was still alive. But that wouldn’t remain the case for long if he was left like this. His garb was already drenched in his blood, not just around his shoulder, but around the areas she managed to cut as well. And beyond that, they were not alone in these woods; all it would take was a single creature wandering into his camp, while he was completely unable to defend himself. 

It took very little time for Maria to decide her next course of action. Carefully lifting him off the ground, she carried him over to one of the carriages, setting him back down only so she could open it before picking him back up and carrying him inside. After placing him in a sitting position on one of the cushioned seats, she went scrounging around the camp for some medical supplies; this search proved rather lengthy and tiresome, and just as she was about to call it off, she managed to find some bandages, as well as some water. 

Returning to her fallen adversary, she set to work, removing his coat and then peeling away the many bloodied layers of his uniform until she finally reached his wound. It was as if the entire right half was now red, not just from the bleeding, but from swelling as well. Thankfully, it did not look like Maria had punctured any major arteries, but it was imperative that she stop the bleeding as soon as possible. Her medical knowledge was limited, knowing only enough to treat herself or her fellow knights in the event of injury. Thankfully, this wasn’t anything she was unfamiliar with. 

Ripping off a piece of the bandage, she gently pressed it against the wound; once it looked like the bleeding had subsided, she repeated the process on the opening on his back. Once she was finished, she poured a bit of water on both the entrance and exit wounds, then cleaned them both down with a cloth. She doubted she could do much to prevent infection, given the nature of the weapon he was stabbed with, but it was better than leaving traces of her blood to propagate. 

The man winced multiple times as Maria worked, but never regained consciousness. For all her efforts, she couldn’t say she was certain he would survive if she left him here. The only way she could be certain was if she took him back to the city and got him to a doctor, but…

No, he made his choice. He knew this had been a possibility. And he had already taken up too much of her time.

Once she was finished wrapping his wounds in bandages, she scrounged up some food and water from his supplies, enough to last him a few days with careful rationing. Then, once she was satisfied, she shut the carriage doors, providing at least some protection from the elements and the forest’s residents. She briefly considered barricading him inside, mulling the possibility of him waking up and following her into the tombs regardless of his injuries, but she knew that wouldn’t have deterred him for long. Perhaps he would be wise enough to return to Yharnam and seek treatment for his injuries, or perhaps not. By the time he would be able to make that choice, it wouldn’t matter.

At long last, Maria found herself standing before the chalice. Sure enough, it was the same one that they discovered in the depths of Loran, where they had discovered the Old Blood. The reason that her men were now dead.

She stood there for what felt like hours, staring down at this accursed object. No matter how long she spent looking at the concoction fermenting inside, she saw nothing reflecting back. But what she did see was the events of that faithful day playing out in front of her, down to the last sorry detail, over and over again. And each time, the last thing she saw was him.

Her anger carried her forward as she finally knelt down in front of the chalice, closed her eyes and held out her hand, letting its magic whisk her away to the tombs of her forebears.

There was no turning back now.

...